Home

Mazda MAZDA6 Owner's Manual

1. Interior Features Bluetooth V Communication Settings Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen Select Settings to change the setting Item Setting Function a Bluetooth _ Go to Bluetooth setting menu Refer to Bluetooth Preparation Type B on page 5 86 Incoming Call On Off Notifies when an incoming call is received Notifications Auto Download Text Downloads SMS automatically when the Bluetooth unit is connected On Off i Message to the device Text Notifications On Off Notifies when a new SMS is received Auto Download x Downloads E mail automatically when the Bluetooth unit is L1 On Off Email connected to the device Email Notifications On Off Notifies when a new Email is received Auto Download Call Downloads Call History automatically when the Bluetooth unit is On Off History connected to the device Auto Download Downloads the phonebook automatically when the Bluetooth unit is I On Off A Contacts connected to the device Ringtone Car Phone Off Changes the ringtone setting Phone Volume Adjusts using Adjusts the conversation volume the slider Adjusts using VR and Ringtone the slider Adjusts the voice guidance and ringtone volume First Name Last Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the first name Contacts Display Name Order i East Satie Fam Displays t
2. 6 67 F Flasher Hazard warming s s s 4 70 Headlights 00 cceeseseeseeseeees 4 58 Plats Tare oes tscthssetissaen a 7 3 Mounting the Spare Tire 7 10 Removing a Flat Tire 7 7 Floor Mateota a ease 3 44 Fluid Brake Clutch cccccccseeseeeeees 6 31 Washer cecina ia 6 31 Fluids Classification c cccccccccceseeseeeees 9 4 Fog Lights contacts 4 63 Foot Brake sic cisicisscerscsveecuiieerivasd 4 74 Forward Sensing Camera FSC 4 135 Front Seat 2 22058 ae 2 5 10 4 F Fuel Filler lid and capo cece 3 27 GaSe EE 4 13 Requirements cceseseeees 3 24 Tank capacity ce eeeeeseeseeteeeeees 9 5 Fuel Consumption Display 4 88 Fuel Economy Monitor 006 4 87 Control Status Display 4 88 Ending Screen Display 4 89 Fuel Consumption Display 4 88 G Ga Bes n eE deka 4 10 Glove Compartment ee 5 134 H Hazard Warning Flasher 04 4 70 Hazardous Driving eceeeeeeees 3 44 Head Restraint cceceseeceeseeeeeees 2 12 Headlights Coming Home Light System 4 61 Control cniicn th ee eee 4 58 Flashing 0 ccccecceeseeseeeeeteeneee 4 61 High low beam eceeeeees 4 61 Leaving Home Light System 4 62 Deve ling cess cdscanti eens sccesceiutenevelent 4 62 High Beam Control System HBC 4 95 Hill Launch Assist HLA 06 4 78 HomeLink Wire
3. Say a voice tag for the name registered 7 Prompt Adding XXXXX Ex Mary s phone Registered voice tag Is this correct 8 Say Beep Yes 9 Prompt Home Work Mobile or Other 10 Say Beep Mobile Say Home Work Mobile or Other for the desired location to be registered 11 Prompt Mobile Location to be registered Is this correct 12 Say Beep Yes 13 Prompt Number please 14 Say Beep XXXXXXXXXXX Say the phone number to be registered 15 Prompt XXXXXXXXXXX Phone number registration After the beep continue to add numbers or say Go Back to re enter the last entered numbers or press the Pick Up button to save the number 5 91 Interior Features Bluetooth 16 Registration Press the pick up button or say Enter then go to Step 17 Adding inputting telephone number Say XXXX desired telephone number then go to Step 15 Telephone number correction Say Go Back The prompt replies Go Back The last entered numbers have been removed Then go back to Step 13 17 Prompt Number saved Would you like to add another number for this entry 18 Say Beep Yes or No 19 If Yes an additional phone number registration can be made for the same entry If No the system returns to standby status Import contact
4. mpg will be displayed for about minute before the fuel economy is recalculated and displayed Current fuel economy mode This mode displays the current fuel economy by calculating the amount of fuel consumption and the distance traveled 4 17 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Current fuel economy will be calculated and displayed every 2 seconds Current MPG 22 4 mg Type B CURRENT at te_empg When you ve slowed to about 5 km h 3 mph L 100 km mpg will be displayed Average vehicle speed mode This mode displays the average vehicle speed by calculating the distance and the time traveled since connecting the battery or resetting the data 4 18 Some models Average vehicle speed will be calculated and displayed every 10 seconds Type A Average Speed 25 mph Type B AVG mph ba ba l To clear the data being displayed press the INFO button for more than 1 5 seconds After pressing the INFO button km h mph will be displayed for about 1 minute before the vehicle speed is recalculated and displayed Lane Departure Warning System LDWS display Type A instrument cluster Information regarding the Lane Departure Warning System LDWS is displayed Refer to Lane Departure Warning System LDWS on page 4 98 J Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC display Type A instrument cluster Information regarding the Mazda Radar Crui
5. 4 Say Beep XXXXXXXXXXX Telephone number 5 Prompt XXXXXXXXXXX Telephone number After the beep continue to add numbers or say Go Back to re enter the last entered numbers or press the Pick Up button to execute dialing Interior Features Bluetooth 6 Dialing Press the pick up button or say Dial then go to Step 7 Adding inputting telephone number Say XXXX desired telephone number then go to Step 5 Telephone number correction Say Go Back The prompt replies Go Back The last entered numbers have been removed Then go back to Step 3 7 Prompt Dialing NOTE The Dial command and a telephone number can be combined Ex In Step 2 say Dial 123 4567 then Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped Emergency calls A call can be made to the emergency phone number 911 U S A Canada 066 Mexico using the voice input command It may not function properly in some areas in Mexico 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Emergency 3 U S A Canada vehicles Prompt Dialing 911 is this correct Mexico vehicles Prompt Dialing 066 is this correct 4 Say Beep Yes 5 Prompt Dialing 5 95 Interior Features Bluetooth V Receiving an Incoming Call 1 Prompt Incoming call press the pick up button to answer 2 To accept the call press
6. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Select the Devices tab Select Bluetooth Select Custom Settings Select Change Pairing Code Input the new PIN code to be set Select W NH Nn A WwW N V Available Language Type B The Bluetooth Hands Free System applies to the following languages e English e Spanish e French Refer to Settings on page 5 49 V Voice Recognition Type B In this section the basic operation of the voice recognition is explained Activating Voice Recognition Press the talk button Ending Voice Recognition Use one of the following methods e Press the hang up button e Say Cancel e Operate the commander switch or the center display only when vehicle is stopped 5 88 Skipping Voice Guidance for faster operation Press and release the talk button Troubleshooting for Voice Recognition If you do not understand an operation method while in the voice recognition mode say Tutorial or Help Commands useable anytime during Voice recognition Go Back and Cancel are commands which can be used at anytime during voice recognition Returning to previous operation To return to the previous operation say Go Back while in voice recognition mode Cancel To put the Bluetooth Hands Free system in standby mode say Cancel while in
7. 3 Select Delete 4 Select the radio station or radio frequency you want to delete 5 Select Delete 5 40 Some models Changing Favorites list order 1 Select the X icon to display the Favorites list 2 Select Add Edit Radio Favorites 3 Select Move 4 Select a radio station or radio frequency The selected radio station can be moved 5 Slide the radio station or move it using the commander switch then select OK Radio Broadcast Data System RBDS Radio text information display Radio text information sent from a broadcasting station is displayed in the center display NOTE Radio text information is a function of FM radio Text information is not displayed in the following During HD Radio reception e Not an RBDS broadcast RBDS broadcast but radio text is not transmitted from the radio station Genre Seek Some FM stations transmit Genre codes Program type like a Rock News and so on This code enables alternative stations transmitting the same Genre code to be found quickly To scan for Genre Seek 1 Select the icon while in the FM mode 2 Select to open the genre list 3 Select the genre type you want to select 4 Select the M4 gt gt I icon NOTE To change the desired genre select the icon Ex 89 3 is currently being received With Rock selected as the Genre the radio sta
8. V Wrench Indication Indicator Light n Type A Perform maintenance in accordance with the message Some models 4 41 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Type B This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON The wrench indicator light illuminates when the engine oil replacement period is reached If the light is illuminated replace the engine oil Refer to Engine Oil on page 6 27 YV TCS DSC Indicator Light ee This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON If the TCS or DSC is operating the indicator light flashes If the light stays on the TCS DSC or the brake assist system may have a malfunction and they may not operate correctly Take your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer NOTE e In addition to the indicator light flashing a slight lugging sound will come from the engine This indicates that the TCS DSC is operating properly e On slippery surfaces such as fresh snow it will be impossible to achieve high rpm when the TCS is on 4 42 Some models Y DSC OFF Indicator Light ee OFF This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON It also illuminates when the DSC OFF switch is pressed and TCS DSC is switched off Refer to DSC OFF Switch on page 4 82 If the light remains illuminated and the TCS DSC is not switched off take your vehicle to an Authoriz
9. WARNING Never allow a person to ride in the trunk Allowing a person to ride in the trunk is dangerous The person in the trunk could be seriously injured or killed during sudden braking or a collision Do not drive with the trunk lid open Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicle is dangerous An open trunk lid in a moving vehicle will cause exhaust gas to be drawn into the cabin This gas contains CO carbon monoxide which is colorless odorless and highly poisonous and it can cause loss of consciousness and death Moreover an open trunk lid could cause occupants to fall out in an accident 3 19 Before Driving Doors and Locks A CAUTION gt Before opening the trunk lid remove any snow and ice accumulation on it Otherwise the trunk lid could close under the weight of the snow and ice resulting in injury gt Be careful when opening closing the trunk lid during strong winds If a strong gust blows against the trunk lid it could close suddenly resulting in injury gt Fully open the trunk lid and make sure that it stays open If the trunk lid is only opened partially it could slam shut by vibration or wind gusts resulting in injury gt When loading or unloading luggage in the trunk turn off the engine Otherwise you could get burned by the heat of the exhaust gas 3 20 Y Opening and Closing the Trunk Lid Opening the trunk lid with Electric trunk lid opener With the advanced keyless fun
10. 1 575 mm 62 0 in Rear tread i 19 inch wheel vehicle 1 585 mm 62 4 in Wheelbase 2 830 mm 111 4 in V Weights U S A and Canada Weight Item Manual transaxle Automatic transaxle GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 1 917 kg 4 226 Ibs 1 945 kg 4 288 Ibs GVW Gross Vehicle Weight Front i f Front 999 kg 2 202 lbs 1 029 kg 2 269 Ibs GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating Rear 923 kg 2 035 Ibs 921 kg 2 030 Ibs Mexico Item Weight Total 1 941 kg 4 279 Ibs 993 kg 2 189 Ibs Rear 948 kg 2 090 Ibs 9 5 Specifications V Air Conditioner The type of refrigerant used is indicated on a label attached to the inside of the engine compartment Check the label before recharging the refrigerant Refer to Climate Control System on page 5 2 Item Classification Refrigerant Type HFC134a R 134a Light Bulbs Exterior light i Category Light bulb zI Wattage UNECE SAE High beam 60 HB3 9005 Halogen Low beam 55 H11 H11 Headlights 77 High beam LED LED 7 Low beam LED With halogen bulb 60 HB3 9005 Daytime running lights headlights With LED headlights LED Front turn signal lights Parking With halogen bulb lights Front side marker lights headlights 27 8 7444NA Front turn signal lights Front With
11. 5 33 Interior Features Audio System NOTE Long press operation of the commander knob is also possible for some functions Touch panel operation A CAUTION Do not press the screen strongly or press it with a sharp pointed object Otherwise the screen could be damaged NOTE For safety reasons touch panel operation is disabled while the vehicle is moving Basic Operation Method TOUCH amp TAP 1 Touch or tap on the item indicated on the screen 2 The operation is launched and the next item is displayed m 10 20 ORORO Settings 5 34 Interior Features Audio System SLIDE 1 Touch the setting item displaying a slider bar 2 Touch the slider with your finger and move to the desired level m 10 20 m 10 20 SWIPE 1 Touch the screen with your finger and move up or down 2 Items which were not displayed can be displayed a 10 20 Sut 10 20 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Return to previous screen Touch the lt Displaying the home screen Touch the 5 35 Interior Features Audio System Y Home screen Icon Function O Applications Information such as average fuel economy maintenance and warnings can be verified Depending on the grade and specification the screen display may differ Entertainment Operates audio such as the radio and CDs The audio source most recently
12. 9999 95 10 1F 16 2016 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS 9999 95 050C 16NAV a ee SYSTEM OWNER S MANUAL 9999 EC 050C 16NAV a Sneed SYSTEM OWNER S MANUAL 9999 PR 050C 16NAV ee ee SYSTEM OWNER S MANUAL Y WORKSHOP MANUAL Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train body and chassis Y WIRING DIAGRAM Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical system VOWNER S MANUAL This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle This is not a technician s manual 8 54 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Service Publications V SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda YV NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER S MANUAL This booklet contains information regarding the proper operation and use of the navigation system This is not a technician s manual 8 55 8 56 Specifications Technical information about your Mazda Identification Numbers cssssssccssssssssssscsccccccesccssesssssscesencsscees 9 2 Vehicle Information Labels 0 0 ccccccccccceessceesssceesseceesseeeenees 9 2 Specifications cccssccscsssssccsssssssssssscessssssssscsssessssssssssssessseseees 9 4 SPeCifiCatiOns c2eveceescoseeeeeGiee etotie eel aeS 9 4 Personalization Features ssssscsssccsssscscscccsssssssssssssssccccssccccees 9 9 Personalization Features ccc
13. Before Driving Security System Immobilizer System The immobilizer system allows the engine to start only with a key the system recognizes If someone attempts to start the engine with an unrecognized key the engine will not start thereby helping to prevent the theft of your vehicle If you have a problem with the immobilizer system or the key consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer A CAUTION gt Radio equipment like this is governed by laws Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment gt To avoid damage to the key do not gt Drop the key gt Get the key wet gt Expose the key to any kind of magnetic field gt Expose the key to high temperatures on places such as the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight gt If the engine does not start with the correct key and the security indicator light keeps illuminating or flashing the system may have a malfunction Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer 3 39 Before Driving Security System NOTE The keys carry a unique electronic code For this reason and to assure your safety obtaining a replacement key requires some waiting time They are only available through an Authorized Mazda Dealer Always keep a spare key in case one is lost Ifa key is lost consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible Ifyou lose a key an Authorized
14. CANCEL switch RES switch A switch w switch Cruise control SET SET switch ON switch When the ON switch is pressed the vehicle speed and the distance between vehicles while in headway control can be set The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC indication is shown in the display of the instrument cluster NOTE e When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC is ON the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC remains ON automatically e When the ON switch is pressed continuously for about 2 seconds while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is turned on the system switches the function to only cruise control 4 121 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE How to Set the Speed 1 Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired setting using the accelerator pedal 2 Headway control begins when the SET or SET switch is pressed The set speed and the inter vehicle distance display filled with white lines are displayed The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC indicator light green is indicated simultaneously Travel status Display During travel at constant speed k RS 8Okmh S During travel under Y headway control RS 80kmh NOTE Ifa vehicle ahead is detected while traveling at a constant speed the vehicle ahead indication is displayed and headway control is performed Additionally when a vehicle ahead is no longer detected the vehicle ahead indicatio
15. Deletes a message The messages stored in a device is also deleted ACP PTE 5 105 Interior Features Bluetooth NOTE Up to three preset messages can be selected Example of use verify unread E mail 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select to display the inbox D ail 10 20 Update Inbox Xa Inbox All Inboxes Q xxxxxx KA xxxxx mazda com Q xxxxxx 2 xxxxxx 3 Select the unread message displayed in bold 4 The details of the message are displayed and replying to the message making a call or playback can be performed Changing account for displaying E mail only 1 Select 2 Select the account which you would like to display Only the messages for the selected account are displayed in the inbox Editing preset messages 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Settings 3 Select Edit Preset Messages 5 106 4 Select the preset message which you would like to edit The keyboard screen is displayed 5 When the message is input and Y is selected the message is stored as a preset message NOTE e Select the SW icon to change the language e Select the A icon to switch between capitalized and lower case characters e Select the icon to return to the previous screen without storing the edit
16. If an indicator light flashes abnormally one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer V If the security indicator light illuminates or flashes eh If the engine does not start with the correct key and the security indicator light keeps illuminating or flashing the system may have a malfunction Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer 7 32 Some models VW If the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Warning Light Amber illuminates v a The warning light turns on if there is a malfunction in the system while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is on Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer V If the blind spot monitoring BSM system OFF indication indicator light illuminates By OFF If the indication remains displayed even though the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch has been operated it indicates a problem in the system Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Type B A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer e The light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds e It remains illuminated even though the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch has been switched off e It turns on while driving the vehicle NOTE If the vehicle is driven on a road with
17. NOTE The Smart Brake Support SBS system operates when all of the following conditions are met The ignition is switched ON The Smart Brake Support SBS system is on The vehicle speed is about 15 km h or faster 10 mph or faster The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is about 15 km h or faster 10 mph or faster The Dynamic Stability Control DSC is not operating The Smart Brake Support SBS system may not operate under the following conditions If the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and it comes close to a vehicle ahead The vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead The accelerator pedal is depressed The brake pedal is depressed The steering wheel is being operated The selector lever is being operated The turn signal is being used When the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off When warnings and messages such as a dirty windshield related to the Forward Sensing Camera FSC laser sensor front are being displayed in the multi information display Although the objects which activate the system are four wheeled vehicles the radar sensor could detect the following objects determine them to be an obstruction and operate the Smart Brake Support SBS system Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve including guardrails and snow banks A vehicle appears in the opposite lane while cornering or rounding a curve When c
18. To turn off the system press the OFF switch NOTE e Setting the temperature to maximum high or low will not provide the desired temperature at a faster rate When selecting heat the system will restrict airflow until it has warmed to prevent cold air from blowing out of the vents V Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Press the windshield defroster switch In this position the outside air position is automatically selected and the air conditioner automatically turns on The air conditioner will directly dehumidify the air to the front windshield and side windows page 5 4 Airflow amount will be increased 5 11 Interior Features Climate Control System AWARNING Set the temperature control to the hot or warm position when defogging sw position Using the position with the temperature control set to the cold position is dangerous as it will cause the outside of the windshield to fog up Your vision will be hampered which could lead to a serious accident NOTE Use the temperature control dial to increase the air flow temperature and defog the windshield more quickly VY Sunlight Temperature Sensor The fully automatic air conditioner function measures inside and outside temperatures and sunlight It then sets temperatures inside the passenger compartment accordingly A CAUTION Do not obstruct either sensor otherwise the automatic air conditioner will not operate properly Sunlight se
19. e Ignition switch off e Headlight switch 200 or 2D e Lights which turn on Low beams Parking lights Taillights License lights Unlock button Lock button NOTE e Operation of the leaving home light system can be turned on or off Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 e When the transmitter lock button is pressed and the vehicle receives the transmitter signal the lights turn off When the headlight switch is in a position other than 200 or O the headlights turn ofj 4 62 Some models V Headlight Leveling The number of passengers and weight of cargo in the luggage compartment change the angle of the headlights The angle of the headlights will be automatically adjusted when turning on the headlights A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 V Daytime Running Lights Some countries require moving vehicles to have their lights on daytime running lights during the daytime The daytime running lights turn on automatically when the vehicle starts moving They turn off when the parking brake is operated or the shift lever is shifted to the P position automatic transaxle vehicle NOTE Except Canada The daytime running lights can be deactivated Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Fog Lights Can be used when the ignition is switched ON Use this switch to turn on t
20. is the aspect ratio This two digit number indicates the tire s ratio of height to width R R is the tire construction symbol R indicates Radial ply construction 15 15 is the wheel rim diameter in inches 95 95 is the Load Index This two or three digit number indicates how much weight each tire can support 8 26 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A H H is the speed rating The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of the tire is rated Letter Rating Speed Rating 99 mph 106 mph 112 mph 118 mph 124 mph 130 mph 149 mph 168 mph 186 mph lt la lt lao ual alo For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR M S or M S Mud and Snow AT All Terrain AS All Season The M S or M S indicates that the tire has some functional use in mud and snow U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT which indicates the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured For example the numbers 457 means the 45st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go
21. 3 Prompt Swapping calls NOTE e To refuse an incoming call press the hang up button e After receiving a new incoming call the previous call is placed on hold Switching calls Switching back to the previous call can also be done Method 1 1 Press the pick up button 2 Prompt Swapping calls Method 2 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Swap calls 3 Prompt Swapping calls Three way call function 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Join calls 3 Prompt Joining calls Making a call using a telephone number 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Dial 3 Prompt Number please 4 Say Beep XXXXXXXXXXX Telephone number 5 Prompt XXXXXXXXXXX Telephone number After the beep continue to add numbers or say Go Back to re enter the last entered numbers or press the Pick Up button to execute dialing 6 Dialing Press the pick up button or say Dial then go to Step 7 Adding inputting telephone number Say XXXX desired telephone number then go to Step 5 Telephone number correction Say Go Back The prompt replies Go Back The last entered numbers have been removed Then go back to Step 3 7 Prompt Dialing Interior Features Bluetooth Making calls using the phonebook 1 Press the talk button with a sho
22. 4 Press 7 times Cancel setting NOTE e The doors cannot be locked or unlocked while the setting function is being performed The procedure can be cancelled by pressing the lock side of the driver s door lock switch 3 17 Before Driving Doors and Locks Locking Unlocking with Door Lock Knob Operation from inside To lock any door from the inside press the door lock knob To unlock pull it outward This does not operate the other door locks Lock ws Unlock NOTE The red indication can be seen when the door lock knob is unlocked Red indication 3 18 Operation from outside To lock the front passenger door with the door lock knob from the outside press the door lock knob to the lock position and close the door holding the door handle pulled is not required This does not operate the other door locks Door lock knob NOTE When locking the door this way be careful not to leave the key inside the vehicle Rear Door Child Safety Locks These locks are intended to help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors Use them both whenever a child rides in the vehicle If you slide the child safety lock to the lock position before closing that door the door cannot be opened from the inside The door can be opened only by pulling the outside handle Oy Za v ed Lock Before Driving Doors and Locks Trunk Lid
23. A WARNING Do not drive with worn disc pads Driving with worn disc pads is dangerous The brakes could fail and cause a serious accident As soon as you hear a screeching noise consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer 4 77 When Driving Brake Brake Assist During emergency braking situations when it is necessary to depress the brake pedal with greater force the brake assist system provides braking assistance thus enhancing braking performance When the brake pedal is depressed hard or depressed more quickly the brakes apply more firmly NOTE When the brake pedal is depressed hard or depressed more quickly the pedal will feel softer but the brakes will apply more firmly This is a normal effect of the brake assist operation and does not indicate a malfunction When the brake pedal is depressed hard or depressed more quickly a motor pump operation noise may be heard This is a normal effect of the brake assist and does not indicate a malfunction e The brake assist equipment does not supersede the functionality of the vehicle s main braking system 4 78 Hill Launch Assist HLA Hill Launch Assist HLA is a function which assists the driver in accelerating from a stop while on a slope When the driver releases the brake pedal and depresses the accelerator pedal while on a slope the function prevents the vehicle from rolling The braking force is maintained automatically after the brake pedal is
24. Album name File number Elapsed time File number Song name 5 61 Interior Features Audio System NOTE The information artist name music name is displayed only when the iPod has information which can be displayed This unit cannot display some characters Characters which cannot be displayed are indicated by an asterisk Display scroll 13 characters can be displayed at one time To display the rest of the characters of a long title press and hold the text button 3 The display scrolls the next 13 characters Press and hold the text button 3 again after the last 13 characters have been displayed to return to the beginning of the title NOTE The number of characters which can be displayed is restricted Error Messages If the message CHECK iPod is displayed it indicates that there is a malfunction in the iPod Verify that the content recorded in the iPod has playable files and connect correctly If the message reappears have the unit checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer 5 62 YW Error Indications Type A If you see an error indication on the display find the cause in the chart If you cannot clear the error indication take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer Indication Cause Solution Verify that the content recorded in the USB device has USB device MP3 WMA AAC files CHECK USB Jand re connect correctly malfunction If the er
25. Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the information in this owner s manual Driving your vehicle with under inflated tires is dangerous Under inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may result in severe cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It results in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at them Vv Checking Tire Pressure 1 When you check the air pressure make sure the tires are cold meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile Remove the cap from the valve on one tire Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve Add air to achieve recommended air pressure nA A W N If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 6 Replace the valve cap 7 Repeat with each tire including the spare NOTE Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure 8 Visually inspect the tires to m
26. Beep French Say the desired language English French or Spanish Change the desired language by saying the language name NOTE Other language settings can also be made while in the current setting by saying the name of the language in the native pronunciation Interior Features Bluetooth 3 Prompt Would you like to change the language to French Desired language 4 Say Beep Yes 5 Prompt Please wait Switching to French phonebook French selected Spoken in the newly selected language V Voice Recognition Type A In this section the basic operation of the voice recognition is explained Activating Voice Recognition To Activate the Main Menu Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press Ending Voice Recognition Use one of the following methods e Press and hold the talk button e Press the hang up button Skipping Voice Guidance for faster operation Press and release the talk button NOTE The Bluetooth Hands Free system is operable several seconds after the ignition is switched to ACC or ON requires less than 15 seconds When operating the audio unit or the A C while using Bluetooth Hands Free the beep sounds or voice guidance audio unit cannot be heard 5 81 Interior Features Bluetooth Tutorial The tutorial explains how to use Bluetooth Hands Free To activate the tutorial do the follo
27. Driving with the head restraints not installed is dangerous With no support behind your head your neck could be seriously injured in a collision After installing a head restraint try lifting it to make sure that it does not pull out Driving with an unsecured head restraint is dangerous as the effectiveness of the head restraint will be compromised which could cause it to unexpectedly detach from the seat 2 13 Essential Safety Equipment Seats A CAUTION gt When installing a head restraint 2 14 make sure that it is installed correctly with the front of the head restraint facing forward If the head restraint is installed incorrectly it could detach from the seat during a collision and result in injury The head restraints on each of the front and rear seats are specialized to each seat Do not switch around the head restraint positions If a head restraint is not installed to its correct seat position the effectiveness of the head restraint during a collision will be compromised which could cause injury Essential Safety Equipment Seat Belt Systems Seat Belt Precautions Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden stops Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap shoulder belts out of the way when not in use The driver s seat belt has no provisions for ch
28. Ex Calling John s device Is this correct When the confirmation prompt function is turned off Ex Calling John s device NOTE If the confirmation prompt function is turned off when making an emergency call the system reads out and confirms the command before executing it 5 83 Interior Features Bluetooth 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Confirmation prompts 5 Prompt Confirmation prompts are on off Would you like to turn confirmation prompts off on 6 Say Beep Yes 7 Prompt Confirmation prompts are off on V Voice Recognition Learning Function Speaker Enrollment Type A The voice recognition learning function enables voice recognition appropriate to the characteristics of the user s voice If the recognition of the voice input commands to the system is not adequate this function can largely improve the system s voice recognition of the user If your voice can be recognized sufficiently without using this function you may not realize the added benefit of the function To register your voice the voice input command list must be read out Read out the list when the vehicle is parked Perform the registration in as quiet a place as poss
29. For vehicles with the type A instrument cluster check the vehicle condition or have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication e A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning In addition the buzzer may also activate depending on the system abnormality or operation condition Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 Refer to Warning Sound is Activated on page 7 33 A CAUTION Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme left or right for more than 5 seconds with the engine running This could damage the power steering system e e 4 91 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE i ACTIVSENSE i ACTIVSENSE is a collective term covering a series of advanced safety and driver support systems which make use of a Forward Sensing Camera FSC and radar sensors These systems consist of active safety and pre crash safety systems These systems are designed to assist the driver in safe driving by reducing the load on the driver and helping to avert collisions or reduce their severity However because each system has its limitations always drive carefully and do not rely solely on the systems V Active Safety Technology Active Safety Technology supports safe and assured driving by helping the driver to recognize potential hazards and avert accidents Driver awareness support systems Nighttime visibility Adaptive Front Lighting System AFS ccceceesce
30. Mary s phone Bill s phone Voice guidance reads out the voice tags registered to the phonebook Press the talk button with a short press during the read out at the desired name and then say one of the following voice commands to execute it e Continue Continues the list readout Call Calls the registered phonebook data when the talk button is short pressed Edit Edits the registered phonebook data when the talk button is short pressed Delete Deletes the registered phonebook data when the talk button is short pressed Previous Returns to the previous phonebook data in read out when the talk button is short pressed 6 Prompt End of list would you like to start from the beginning 7 Say Beep No 8 The procedure returns to Step 3 Redial Function Redialing the number of the person previously dialed using the phone is possible 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Redial 3 Prompt Dialing Telephone Number Input NOTE Practice this while parked until you are confident you can do it while driving in a non taxing road situation If you are not completely comfortable make all calls from a safe parking position and only start driving when you can devote your full attention to driving 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Dial 3 Prompt Number please
31. PAIR SUCCESS continues to be displayed for three seconds and then the unit returns to the normal display NOTE If pairing cannot be completed try 1234 instead Refer to the owner s manual of your mobile device for the right PIN code Some Bluetooth audio devices need a certain amount of time before the symbol is displayed e If the pairing failed Err flashes for three seconds e Pairing cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving If you attempt to perform pairing while the vehicle is moving PAIR DISABLE is displayed If seven Bluetooth audio devices have already been paired to the vehicle pairing cannot be performed and MEMORY FULL is displayed Delete one paired device to pair another one Device selection If several devices have been paired the Bluetooth unit links the device last paired If you would like to link a different paired device it is necessary to change the link The order of device priority after the link has been changed is maintained even when the ignition is switched off 1 Using the audio control dial select the link change mode LINK CHANGE in the BT SETUP mode Refer to Bluetooth audio device set up for details 2 Press the audio control dial to determine the mode 5 78 3 The name of the currently linked Bluetooth audio device is displayed If no Bluetooth audio device is currently linked the name of t
32. You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical ability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual e Engine coolant page 6 29 e Engine oil page 6 27 Improper or incomplete service may result in problems This section gives instructions only for items that are easy to perform As explained in the Introduction page 6 2 several procedures can be done only by a qualified service technician with special tools Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage Refer to Introduction page 6 2 for owner s responsibility in protecting your investment For details read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle If you are unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure have it done by an Authorized Mazda Dealer There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids Please dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer 6 22 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance AWARNING Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work Have maintenance work done by a qualified technician Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly You can be seriously
33. and can more easily be thrown out in an accident Always close all the windows and moonroof lock the doors and take the key with you when leaving your vehicle unattended Leaving your vehicle unlocked is dangerous as children could lock themselves in a hot vehicle which could result in death Also a vehicle left unlocked becomes an easy target for thieves and intruders Before Driving Doors and Locks After closing the doors always verify that they are securely closed Doors not securely closed are dangerous if the vehicle is driven with a door not securely closed the door could open unexpectedly resulting in an accident Always confirm the safety around the vehicle before opening a door Suddenly opening a door is dangerous A passing vehicle or a pedestrian could be hit and cause an accident A CAUTION Always confirm the conditions around the vehicle before opening closing the doors and use caution during strong winds or when parked on an incline Not being aware of the conditions around the vehicle is dangerous because fingers could get caught in the door or a passing pedestrian could be hit resulting in an unexpected accident or injury 3 11 Before Driving Doors and Locks NOTE e When the ignition is switched to ACC or ON the vehicle lock out prevention feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle All doors will automatically unlock if they are locked using the
34. e Do not use abrasive cleansers or wax that contain abrasives 6 64 A CAUTION Do not use steel wool abrasive cleaners or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome plated or anodized aluminum parts This may damage the protective coating also cleaners and detergents may discolor or deteriorate the paint Pay special attention to removing salt dirt mud and other foreign material from the underside of the fenders and make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are clean Insects tar tree sap bird droppings industrial fallout and similar deposits can damage the finish if not removed immediately When prompt washing with plain water is ineffective use a mild soap made for use on vehicles Thoroughly rinse off all soap with lukewarm or cold water Do not allow soap to dry on the finish After washing the vehicle dry it with a clean chamois to prevent water spots from forming AWARNING Dry off brakes that have become wet by driving slowly releasing the accelerator pedal and lightly applying the brakes several times until the brake performance returns to normal Driving with wet brakes is dangerous Increased stopping distance or the vehicle pulling to one side when braking could result in a serious accident Light braking will indicate whether the brakes have been affected When using an automatic car wash e Retract the door mirror
35. All the doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 20 3 km h 12 mph or more All the doors unlock when the ignition is switched from ON to Off Automatic transaxle vehicles only When the ignition is switched ON and the shift lever is shifted from park P to any other gear position all the doors lock automatically 1 Automatic transaxle vehicles only When the ignition is switched ON and the shift lever is shifted from park P to any other gear 5 position all the doors lock automatically When the shift lever is shifted to park P while the ignition is switched ON all the doors unlock automatically Automatic transaxle vehicles only All the doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 20 6 km h 12 mph or more When the shift lever is shifted to park P while the ignition is switched ON all the doors unlock automatically 1 Other settings for the auto door lock function are available at an Authorized Mazda Dealer For details consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 3 16 1 Safely park the vehicle All doors must remain closed Switch the ignition ON Press and hold the lock side of the driver s door lock switch within 20 seconds of switching the ignition ON and make sure a beep sound is heard about eight seconds afterwards Referring to the auto lock unlock function setting
36. An unsecured child restraint system is dangerous In a sudden stop or a collision it could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants Follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions on belt routing to secure the seat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in an improperly secured seat later on When not in use remove it from the vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child restraint systems Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH child restraint system Not following the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions when installing the child restraint system is dangerous If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the child restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and the child restraint system is installed improperly the child restraint system could move in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants When installing the child restraint system make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors Always follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions 2 37 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint Installation on rear outboard seats 1 First adjust the front seat to allow clearance between the child restraint system and the fro
37. Code 6 Say Beep Edit 7 Prompt Please say the name of the device you would like to edit Available devices are XXXXX Ex device A XXXXX Ex device B XXXXX Ex device C Which device please 8 Say Beep X Say the number of the device to be edited 9 Prompt New name please 10 Say Beep XXXXX Ex Device C Speak a device tag an arbitrary name for the device 11 Prompt XXXXX Ex device C Device tag is this correct 12 Say Beep Yes 13 Prompt New name saved Interior Features Bluetooth Bluetooth Audio Preparation Bluetooth audio device set up Bluetooth audio pairing changes deletions and display of paired device information can be performed 1 The mode changes as follows each time the menu button MENU is pressed Select BT SETUP ALC OFF BASS TREB FADE BEEP 0H BT SETUP l2Hr lt gt 2HHr Depending on the mode selected the indication changes 5 75 Interior Features Bluetooth 2 Turn the audio control dial and select a desired mode PAIR DEVICE LINK CHANGE wv 4 PAIR DELETE v4 DEWICE INFO v4 GO BACK KO Display Mode Function PAIR DEVICE Pairing mode Bluetooth audio device pairing Changing link to Bluet
38. Enrollment is enabled disabled Would you like to disable enable or retrain 4 Say Beep Retrain 5 Prompt This operation must be performed in a quiet environment while the vehicle is stopped See the owner s manual for the list of required training phrases Press and release the talk button when you are ready to begin Press the hang up button to cancel at any time 6 Press the talk button with a short press 7 The voice guidance reads out the voice input command number refer to the voice input command list for voice recognition learning Ex Please read phrase 1 8 Say Beep 0123456789 Say the voice input command for voice recognition learning 1 to 8 according to the voice guidance 9 Prompt Speaker enrollment is complete NOTE If an error occurred in the voice recognition learning re learning can be done by pressing the talk button with a short press Voice input command list for voice recognition learning When reading out the following points must be observed e Read out the numbers one at a time correctly and naturally For example 1234 must be read out one two three four not twelve thirty four Interior Features Bluetooth e Do not read out parentheses and hyphens are used for separating numbers in a phone number Ex 888 555 1212 must be spoken Eight eight eight five five five
39. If the current device is AVRCP Ver 1 3 The playback time is displayed NOTE If the Bluetooth audio device does not begin playback press the Play Pause button 4 Ifacall is received on a Hands Free mobile phone during playback from the Bluetooth audio device the playback is stopped Playback from the Bluetooth audio device resumes after the call ends Playback 1 To listen to a Bluetooth audio device over the vehicle s speaker system switch the mode to Bluetooth audio mode Refer to Switching to Bluetooth audio mode 2 To stop playback press the Play Pause button 4 3 Press the button again to resume playback Selecting a file track Selects the next file track Short press the track up button DPI Selects the beginning of the current file track Short press the track down button Kd Interior Features Bluetooth Fast forward Reverse AVRCP Ver 1 3 Fast forward Press and hold the fast forward button O Reverse Press and hold the reverse down button Ka Switching the display AVRCP Ver 1 3 The information displayed on the audio display changes as follows each time the text button 3 is pressed during playback Information displayed on audio display Elapsed time Album name Song name Artist name NOTE e If title information is not available NO TITLE is displayed This unit cannot display some c
40. Jacking up the vehicle higher than is necessary is dangerous as it could destabilize the vehicle resulting in an accident Do not start the engine or shake the vehicle while it is jacked up Starting the engine or shaking the vehicle while it is jacked up is dangerous as it could cause the vehicle to fall off the jack resulting in an accident Never go under the vehicle while it is jacked up Going under the vehicle while it is jacked up is dangerous as it could result in death or serious injury if the vehicle were to fall off the jack 8 Remove the lug nuts by turning them counterclockwise then remove the wheel and center cap If Trouble Arises Flat Tire Locking Lug Nuts If your vehicle has Mazda optional antitheft wheel lug nuts one on each wheel will lock the tires and you must use a special key to unlock them This key will attach to the lug wrench and can be stored with the spare tire Register them with the lock manufacturer by filling out the card provided in the glove compartment and mailing it in the accompanying envelope If you lose this key consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer or use the lock manufacturer s order form which is with the registration card Antitheft lug nut Ce To remove an antitheft lug nut Special key Obtain the special key for the antitheft lug nut 2 Place the special key on top of the antitheft lug nut and be sure to hold the key square to it If you hold
41. L Lubricate T Tighten Remarks 1 2 3 4 Engine oil flexible maintenance is available for U S A and Puerto Rico residents whose vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply Extended periods of idling or low speed operation such as police car taxi or driving school car Driving in dusty conditions If any do apply follow fixed maintenance The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year or within 16 000 km 10 000 miles since last engine oil and filter change The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the message wrench indicator light display Use of FL 22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant Using engine coolant other than FL 22 may cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system According to state provincial and federal regulations failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties However Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or mileage kilometer period to ensure long term reliability The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS initialization must be performed so that the system operates normally if equipped 6 10 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Canada residents Number of months or kilometers miles whichever comes first 7 Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 3
42. Loading golf bags Golf bags can be carried in the luggage compartment Up to three golf bags can be carried in the luggage compartment Place each of the three golf bags into the luggage compartment with the bottom of each bag pointed to the left and then set the top of each bag so that it is pointed to the right 3 21 Before Driving Doors and Locks NOTE Some golf bags cannot fit depending on their size 3 22 Some models Inside Trunk Release Lever Your vehicle is equipped with an inside trunk release lever that provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk No matter how careful adults might be with keys and locking their cars parents should be aware that children may be tempted to play around vehicles and use the trunk as a hiding place Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the inside trunk release lever so that all children can be told about it in an appropriate way keeping in mind that most vehicles do not have such levers AWARNING Close the trunk lid be sure the seat backs are latched and do not allow children to play inside the vehicle Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving children in the vehicle with the keys is dangerous Children could open the trunk lid and climb inside resulting in possible injury or death from heat exposure Always keep the car from being
43. Phonebook data from your device Mobile phone can be sent and registered to your Bluetooth Hands Free phonebook using Bluetooth 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Phonebook 3 Prompt Select one of the following New entry edit list names delete erase all or import contact 4 Say Beep Import contact 5 92 5 Prompt The Hands Free System is ready to receive a contact from a phone Only a home a work and a mobile number can be imported This process requires operation of a mobile phone refer to the phone s manual for more information 6 Device Mobile phone operation Select one entry from the phonebook and send it using Bluetooth 7 Prompt X Number of locations which include data numbers have been imported What name would you like to use for these numbers 8 Say Beep XXXXxX Ex Mary s phone Say a voice tag for the name registered 9 Prompt Adding XXXXX Ex Mary s phone Voice tag Is this correct 10 Say Beep Yes 11 Prompt Number saved Would you like to import another contact 12 Say Beep Yes or No 13 If Yes the procedure proceeds to Step 5 If No the system returns to standby status Editing phonebook The data registered to the Bluetooth Hands Free phonebook can be edited NOTE Do this function only when
44. The radar sensor front functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle ahead or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor The radar sensor front is mounted behind the front emblem Radar Sensor Front iN gt If Front radar blocked is displayed in the multi information display of the instrument cluster clean the area around the radar sensor front 4 138 Some models When Driving i ACTIVSENSE A CAUTION Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of each system gt Do not adhere stickers including transparent stickers to the surface of the radiator grille and front emblem in and around the radar sensor front and do not replace the radiator grille and front emblem with any product that is not a genuine product designed for use with the radar sensor front gt The radar sensor front includes a function for detecting soiling of the radar sensor s front surface and informing the driver however depending on the conditions it may require time to detect or it may not detect plastic shopping bags ice or snow If this occurs the system may not operate correctly therefore always keep the radar sensor front clean gt Do not install a grille guard gt If the front part of the vehicle has been damaged in a vehicle accident the position of the radar sensor front may have moved Stop the system immediately and always have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
45. Within 30 seconds of opening the driver s door press and hold the LOCK button on the key for 5 seconds or longer All of the doors lock and the beep sound activates at the currently set volume If the beep sound is currently set to not activate it will not activate The setting changes each time the LOCK button on the key is pressed and the beep sound activates at the set volume If the beep sound has been set to not activate it will not activate 4 The setting change is completed by doing any one of the following e Switch the ignition to ACC or ON e Close the driver s door Open the trunk lid e The key is not operated for 10 seconds Press any button except the LOCK button on the key A request switch is pressed The operation indicator light flashes when the buttons are pressed Lock button To lock the doors press the lock button and the hazard warning lights will flash once With the advanced keyless function A beep sound will be heard once To confirm that all doors have been locked press the lock button again within 5 seconds If they are closed and locked the horn will sound 8 Before Driving Keys NOTE The doors can be locked by pressing the lock button while any other door or the trunk lid is open The hazard warning lights will not flash When the lock button is pressed while any door is open and then the door is closed all the doors are locked Confirm that all door
46. Y Lane Change Signals Move the lever halfway toward the direction of the change until the indicator flashes and hold it there It will return to the off position when released Some models 4 63 When Driving Switches and Controls Y Three Flash Turn Signal To signal a lane change operate the turn signal lever up or down slightly and release After releasing the lever the turn signal indicator flashes three times The operation can be cancelled by moving the lever in the direction opposite to which it was operated NOTE The three flash turn signal function can be switched to operable inoperable using the personalization function Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 4 64 Windshield Wipers and AWTS IT a The ignition must be switched ON A WARNING Use only windshield washer fluid or plain water in the reservoir Using radiator antifreeze as washer fluid is dangerous If sprayed on the windshield it will dirty the windshield affect your visibility and could result in an accident Only use windshield washer fluid mixed with anti freeze protection in freezing weather conditions Using windshield washer fluid without anti freeze protection in freezing weather conditions is dangerous as it could freeze on the windshield and block your vision which could cause an accident In addition make sure the windshield is sufficiently warmed using the defroster before spraying the washer f
47. covered with ice and or snow Driving without proper traction devices on snow and or ice covered roads is dangerous The Traction Control System TCS alone cannot provide adequate traction and you could still have an accident NOTE To turn off the TCS press the DSC OFF switch page 4 82 4 81 When Driving ABS TCS DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC The Dynamic Stability Control DSC automatically controls braking and engine torque in conjunction with systems such as ABS and TCS to help control side slip when driving on slippery surfaces or during sudden or evasive maneuvering enhancing vehicle safety Refer to ABS page 4 80 and TCS page 4 81 DSC operation is possible at speeds greater than 20 km h 12 mph A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 A WARNING Do not rely on the Dynamic Stability Control as a substitute for safe driving The Dynamic Stability Control DSC cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless driving excessive speed tailgating following another vehicle too closely and hydroplaning reduced tire friction and road contact because of water on the road surface You can still have an accident 4 82 CAUTION gt The DSC may not operate correctly unless the following are observed gt Use tires of the correct size specified for your Mazda on all four wheels gt Use tires of
48. during a side collision the pretensioner operates on the side in which the collision occurs The pretensioners operate differently depending on what types of air bags are equipped For details on the seat belt pretensioner operation refer to SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria page 2 54 With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System The front seat belt pretensioners are also designed to deploy in a roll over accident V Driver Air Bag The driver s air bag is mounted in the steering wheel When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force the driver s air bag inflates quickly helping to reduce injury mainly to the driver s head or chest caused by directly hitting the steering wheel For more details about air bag deployment refer to SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria page 2 54 With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System The driver s dual stage air bag controls air bag inflation in two energy stages During an impact of moderate severity the driver s air bag deploys with lesser energy whereas during more severe impacts it deploys with more energy 2 50 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags V Front Passenger Air Bag The front passenger air bag is mounted in the front passenger dashboard The inflation mechanism for the front passenger air bag is the same as the driver s air bag as mentioned above For more details about air bag deployment refer to SRS Air Bag
49. in the United States and other countries A CAUTION Do not use an audio file extension on files other than audio files In addition do not change the audio file extension Otherwise the unit will not recognize the file correctly resulting in noise or a malfunction e WMA files written under specifications other than the indicated specification may not play normally or files or folder names may not display correctly e The file extension may not be provided depending on the computer operating system version software or settings In this case add the file extension wma to the end of the file name and then write it to the disc Vv Operating Tips for AAC AAC stands for Advanced Audio Coding which is standardized voice compression established by the ISO working group MPEG Audio data can be created and stored at a higher compression ratio than MP3 This unit plays files with the extensions aac m4a wav as the AAC files International Organization for Standardization 2 Type B A CAUTION Do not use an audio file extension on files other than audio files In addition do not change the audio file extension Otherwise the unit will not recognize the file correctly resulting in noise or a malfunction e AAC files written under specifications other than the indicated specification may not play normally or files or folder names may not display correctly e The file extension may not be
50. instrument cluster 1 Refer to Type A on page 4 22 Vehicle equipped with Type B 5 instrument cluster The KEY indicator light green flashes for approximately 30 seconds 2 Refer to Type B on page 4 26 e Automatic transaxle If the engine is turned off while the shift lever is in a position other than P the ignition switches to ACC Y Emergency Engine Stop Continuously pressing the push button start or quickly pressing it any number of times while the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven will turn the engine off immediately The ignition switches to ACC When Driving Start Stop Engine 4 9 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Meters and Gauges 3 1 Type A Type B Ch Speedometer cons 6s ese her ee ie ee tee ete page 4 11 Odometer Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector cccccccseccscsseseesesesseseseeseeees page 4 11 G Tachometer facies ca tdiincnncthesdind ida han doth cies bad page 4 12 FueliGraus EPE E Ursin E EE E Tos fa aac eae Ss page 4 13 O Dashboard Mlumination esien n A A page 4 14 Outside Temperature Display cccccccccscssesessesessesesseseseeseseeseseeseseesesecseseeseseees page 4 14 Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed Display Type A instrument cluster page 4 15 Maintenance Monitor Type A instrument cluster 0 cceecesceeseeseeeeeteeeeeees page 4 15 Trip Computer and INFO Switch ccccccccccsceessese
51. remaining number of days is less than 15 whichever comes first Resets the time and distance to the initial values Tire Rotation Reset Once the system turns on it needs to be reset whenever carrying out maintenance Setting Notification can be switched on off Distance mile or km Displays the distance until tire rotation is due Select this item to set the tire rotation distance Tire Rotation Due is displayed in red and the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile Reset Resets the remaining distance to the initial value Once the system turns on it needs to be reset whenever rotating the tires Oil Change Setting Oil replacement period can be selected from the flexible setting or fixed setting or it can be set to non display The flexible setting is available only in the United States and Puerto Rico Once engine oil flexible maintenance is selected the vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine operating conditions The vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by illuminating the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster Mazda Genuine 0W 20 oil and Castrol 0W 20 oil are required to achieve optimum performance Distance mile or km Displays only in fixed setting Displays the distance until the oil replacement is due Select this item to set the oil repl
52. 000 km 10 000 miles COOLING SYSTEM Engine coolant Replace at first 192 000 km 120 000 miles or 10 years after that every 96 000 km 60 000 miles or 5 years FUEL SYSTEM Air filter Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil Max interval 36 months 60 000 km 37 500 miles Fuel lines and hoses I I I I Hoses and tubes for emission I I IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs Replace every 120 000 km 75 000 miles CHASSIS and BODY Brake lines hoses and connections Disc brakes I I I I Tire Rotation Rotate every 8 000 km 5 000 miles Steering operation and linkages I I I I Front and rear suspension ball joints and wheel I I I I bearing axial play Driveshaft dust boots I I I I Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T Exhaust system and heat shields I I 6 5 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Number of months or kilometers miles whichever comes first Maintenance Interval Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 x1000 km 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 x1000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Cabin air filter Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil Max interval 24 months 48 000 km 30 000 miles Chart symbols I Inspect Inspect
53. 1 Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lug wrench from the luggage compartment page 7 3 2 Wrap a flathead screwdriver or similar tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage to a painted bumper and open the cap located on the front or rear bumper Front If Trouble Arises Emergency Towing Rear A CAUTION Do not use excessive force as it may damage the cap or scratch the painted bumper surface NOTE Remove the cap completely and store it so as not to lose it 3 Securely install the tiedown eyelet using the lug wrench or equivalent Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Front l Tiedown eyelet Long type Some models 7 21 If Trouble Arises Emergency Towing Rear Tiedown eyelet Short type 4 Hook the tying rope to the tiedown eyelet A CAUTION If the tiedown eyelet is not securely tightened it may loosen or disengage from the bumper when tying the vehicle Make sure that the tiedown eyelet is securely tightened to the bumper If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds When Warning Indicator Lights Illuminate Flash If any warning light turns on flashes take appropriate action for each light There is no problem if the light turns off however if the light does not turn off or turns on flashes again consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Vehicles with type B audio The warning contents can be verified on the audio 1 Select the
54. 1 Switch the ignition off and close all of the doors and the trunk lid 2 Open the driver s door 3 Within 30 seconds of opening the driver s door press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key for 5 seconds or longer The sound of the doors locking unlocking can be heard After this the system switches the setting each time the UNLOCK button is pressed the sound of the doors locking unlocking can be heard 4 The setting change is completed by doing any one of the following e Switch the ignition to ACC or ON Close the driver s door Open the trunk lid The key is not operated for 10 seconds Press any button except the UNLOCK button on the key e A request switch is pressed e Confirm that all doors and the trunk lid are securely locked For the trunk lid move it without pressing the electric trunk lid opener to verify that the trunk lid has not been left ajar All doors cannot be locked when any door is open e It may require a few seconds for the doors to unlock after the request switch is pressed 3 13 Before Driving Doors and Locks A beep sound is heard for confirmation when the doors are locked unlocked using the request switch If you prefer the beep sound can be turned off The volume of the beep sound can also be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Use the following procedure to change the setting 1 2 3 Switch the ignition off and close all
55. 14 Fan control switch The fan has seven speeds The selected speed will be displayed Mode selector switch The desired airflow mode can be selected page 5 4 5 10 NOTE With the airflow mode set to the 4 position and the temperature control dial set at a medium temperature heated air is directed to the feet and air at a comparably lower temperature will flow through the central left and right vents e To set the air vent to W press the windshield defroster switch e Inthe or YY position the air conditioner is automatically turned on and the outside air position is automatically selected to defrost the windshield In the 4 or WW position the outside air position cannot be changed to the recirculated air position A C switch Pressing the A C switch while the AUTO switch is turned on will turn off the air conditioning cooling dehumidifying functions The air conditioning can be turned on and off by pressing the A C switch while the fan control switch is on NOTE The air conditioning operates when the A C switch is pressed even if the fan is off The air conditioner may not function when the outside temperature approaches 0 C 32 F Air intake selector Outside or recirculated air positions can be selected Press the switch to select outside recirculated air positions Recirculated air position S Outside air is shut off Use this position when going through tunnels driving
56. 17 Starting a Flooded Engine 0 ccccecceeseesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeteeseeees 7 17 Push Starting onina senate Madsen See 7 17 Overheating cccccsssccrsscsccrscsscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssonssessesees 7 18 Overheating 6i 5 2 0cc ocak sage a theciesae a ia 7 18 Emergency Towing ccsscsscssscsssssscssssssessssssssessssscssssessenes 7 20 Towing Description siseses iina i ies 7 20 Tiedown Hooks Sescewausinciestnn cactus Meee 7 21 Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds 000 7 23 When Warning Indicator Lights Illuminate Flash 7 23 Warning Sound is Activated cccceeceseeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeseeenees 7 33 When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened csscsssesscsesssssesees 7 38 When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened ecceeceseeeseeteeeeeeeees 7 38 Active Driving Display Does Not Operate scssccsessssseees 7 39 Active Driving Display Does Not Operate cies 7 39 Some models 7 1 If Trouble Arises Parking in an Emergency Parking in an Emergency The hazard warning lights should always be used when you stop on or near a roadway in an emergency The hazard warning lights warn other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard and that they must take extreme caution when near it Depress the hazard warning flasher switch and all the turn signals will flash The hazard warning indicator lights in the instrument cluster flash simultaneous
57. 3 19 Child safety locks ccccccsccscsesscscssecessesessecesecsesecseseescseescseeeseeecseeeeseescsenecseeeens page 3 19 0 OuUtSId 6 AMOR so so chsh eeaeee A R dea ees ieee omens eeee het page 3 30 1 6 The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle Essential Safety Equipment Important information about safety equipment including seats seat belt system child restraint systems and SRS air bags SEAIS orse nen E O R O E E e a 2 2 Seat Precaution s haccvinsastitin Quien a a a 2 2 Front Seater e ee eardat ade iaa bes AE OE EAEAN E SAA 2 5 Rear Seat cciivcn Gaia eaten widen 2 10 Head REStra tits 5 oue enna a a ienssdiaes 2 12 Seat Belt Systems ccsssscssssssssssssscsscssssssssssssesssssssoesssseeees 2 15 Seat Belt Precautions crenn naianei 2 15 Seat Belt c sucsthestel striata caters n a a eee epee e a 2 18 Seat Belt Warning Systems 0 c ccsceeseesseeseeseeeseeseeeseeteenseees 2 19 Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems 2 19 Seat Belt Extender oo0s ai hig di Anes ata eee 2 21 Child Restraint ssc cdcavivcssiccsessssccescessssossecessontesevcdsbaesnasdesesosndsedsse 2 23 Child Restraint Precautions cseceeeeceeecteeseseeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 23 Child Restraint System Installation cceceseeseeseeteeeseees 2 28 Installing Child Restraint Systems 0 0 ececeeeseeseeteeeeeeneeees 2 29 SRS Air Ba E E T 2 41 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Prec
58. 36 Tire pressure monitoring SYSTEM e E iena EA 4 38 Warning BUZzer ccecceeseeeeteeees 7 23 Warranty ee nani RS 8 16 Weights nnen sennne i Ata ered as 9 5 Windows Power windows s es 3 33 Windshield Washer sseeeeeees 4 68 Windshield Wipers cseceseees 4 65 Winter Driving ceeceeseeseereetseees 3 45 Index W Wiper Replacing Windshield Wiper Bladesiy iii vais 6 33 10 9 10 10
59. 5 68 Interior Features Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth Hands Free outline When a Bluetooth device mobile phone is connected to the vehicle s Bluetooth unit via radio wave transmission a call can be made or received by pressing the talk button pick up button or hang up button on the audio remote control switch or by operating the center display For example even if a device mobile phone is in your coat pocket a call can be made without taking the device mobile phone out and operating it directly Bluetooth audio outline When a portable audio unit equipped with the Bluetooth communication function is paired to the vehicle you can listen to music stored on the paired portable audio device from the vehicle s speakers It is not necessary to connect the portable audio device to the vehicle s external input terminal After programming operate the vehicle audio control panel to play stop the audio NOTE e For your safety a device can be paired only when the vehicle is parked If the vehicle starts to move the pairing procedure will end Park the vehicle in a safe place before pairing e The communication range of a Bluetooth equipped device is about 10 meters 32 fi or less e Basic audio operation is available using voice commands even if Bluetooth is not connected A CAUTION Some Bluetooth mobile devices are not compatible with the vehicle Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Mazda s call center or
60. 5100 for further details about the program 8 6 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance Customer Assistance Canada VW Satisfaction Review Process Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda All Authorized Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition In our experience any questions problems or complaints regarding the operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your dealer If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal dealership procedures we recommend that you take the following steps Y STEP 1 Contact the Mazda Dealer Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management If the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns contact the owner of the dealership or its General Manager V STEP 2 Contact the Mazda Regional Office If you feel that you still require assistance ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative If more expedient contact Mazda Canada Inc Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements Regional Office address and phone numbers are shown page 8 9 V STEP 3 Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department If still not substantially satisfied contact the Customer Relations Department Mazda Canada Inc 55 Vogell Road Richmond Hill Ontario L4B 3K5 Ca
61. A WARNING Radio waves from the key may affect medical devices such as pacemakers Before using the key near people who use medical devices ask the medical device manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the key will affect the device The advanced keyless function allows you to lock unlock the doors or open the trunk lid while carrying the key without using the key System malfunctions or warnings are indicated by the following warning beeps Request switch Inoperable Warning Beep Refer to Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep With the advanced keyless function on page 7 35 e Key Left in Trunk Warning Beep Refer to Key Left in trunk Warning Beep With the advanced keyless function on page 7 36 e Key Left in vehicle Warning Beep Refer to Key Left in vehicle Warning Beep With the advanced keyless function on page 7 36 Before Driving Advanced Keyless Entry System NOTE The advanced keyless entry system functions can be deactivated to prevent any possible adverse effect on a user wearing a pacemaker or other medical device If the system is deactivated you will be unable to start the engine by carrying the key Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details If the advanced keyless entry system has been deactivated you can start the engine by following the procedure indicated when the key battery goes dead Refer to Engine Start Function When Key Battery is Dead on page 4 6 Before Dr
62. Adaptive Front Lighting System AFS 4 94 High Beam Control System HBC 4 95 Lane Departure Warning System DD WS ine R E 4 98 Blind Spot Monitoring BSM SYSUCM serora a aR 4 104 Distance Recognition Support System DRISS anaren n tbe 4 109 Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA 4 112 Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCO fasten e n AR 4 117 Smart City Brake Support SEBS snasao enn 4 127 Smart Brake Support SBS 4 132 Forward Sensing Camera FSC 4 135 Radar Sensor Front 4 138 Laser Sensor Front wee 4 141 Radar Sensors Rear o c cseceese 4 143 Cruise Control sccscssssessssesseeeees 4 145 Cruise Control c ccccecscescseecseeeeee 4 145 Tire Pressure Monitoring System 4 149 Tire Pressure Monitoring System 4 149 Rear View Monitor ssscccsssssseesees 4 153 Rear View Monitor ccscsseeseeeeees 4 153 Some models 4 1 When Driving Start Stop Engine Ignition Switch Push Button Start Positions The system operates only when the driver is in the vehicle or within operational range while the key is being carried Each time the push button start is pressed the ignition switches in the order of off ACC and ON Pressing the push button start again from ON switches the ignition off Push button start NOTE The engine starts by pressing the push button start while depressing the clutch pedal manual transaxle or the
63. COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO Recordable ReWritable COMPACT MSE d COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO ISG ISG TEXT Recordable ReWritable Use discs that have been legitimately produced If illegally copied discs such as pirated discs are used the system may not operate properly e Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling the CDs Pick up a CD by grasping the outer edge or the edge of the hole and the outer edge e Do not stick paper or tape on the CD Avoid scratching the reverse side the side without a label The disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction e Dust finger smudges and dirt can decrease the amount of light reflected from the signal surface thus affecting sound quality If the CD should become soiled gently wipe it with a soft cloth from the center of the CD to the edge Interior Features Audio System Do not use record sprays antistatic agents or household spray cleaners Volatile chemicals such as benzine and thinner can also damage the surface of the CD and must not be used Anything that can damage warp or fog plastic should never be used to clean CDs The CD player ejects the CD if the CD is inserted upside down Also dirty and or defective CDs may be ejected Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD player Do not insert any disc with a peel off seal affixed to it This unit may not be able to play certain CD R CD RWs made using a computer or music CD recorder du
64. Control To Temporarily Cancel To temporarily cancel the system use one of these methods e Slightly depress the brake pedal e Manual transaxle Depress the clutch pedal e Press the CANCEL switch If the RESUME switch is pressed when the vehicle speed is 25 km h 16 mph or higher the system reverts to the previously set speed NOTE Ifany of the following conditions occur the cruise control system is temporarily canceled The parking brake is applied Automatic transaxle The selector lever is in the P or N position Manual transaxle The shift lever is in the neutral position e When the cruise control system is temporarily canceled by even one of the applicable cancel conditions the speed cannot be re set Automatic transaxle The cruise control cannot be cancelled while driving in manual mode selector lever shifted from D to M position Therefore engine braking will not be applied even if the transaxle is shifted down to a lower gear If deceleration is required lower the set speed or depress the brake pedal YW To Deactivate To deactivate the system press the OFF switch 4 148 When Driving Tire Pressure Monitoring System Tire Pressure Monitoring System e The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors the air pressure of all four tires If the air pressure of one or more tires is too low the system warns the driver by indicating the tire pressure monitoring system wa
65. Dealer gt Do not use the front bumper to push other vehicles or obstructions such as when pulling out of a parking space Otherwise the radar sensor front could be hit and its position deviated gt Do not remove disassemble or modify the radar sensor front gt For repairs replacement or paint work around the radar sensor front consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer gt Do not modify the suspension If the suspension are modified the vehicle s posture could change and the radar sensor front may not be able to correctly detect a vehicle ahead or an obstruction 4 139 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE e Under the following conditions the radar sensor front may not be able to detect vehicles ahead or obstructions correctly and each system may not operate normally The rear surface of a vehicle ahead does not reflect radio waves effectively such as an unloaded trailer or an automobile with a loading platform covered by a soft top vehicles with a hard plastic tailgate and round shaped vehicles Vehicles ahead with low vehicle height and thus less area for reflecting radio waves Visibility is reduced due to a vehicle ahead casting off water snow or sand from its tires and onto your windshield The trunk uggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats are occupied Ice snow or soiling is on the front surface of the front emblem During inclement weather such as rain snow or sand
66. Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer V Brake Pedal Operation Demand Indicator Light Type B This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON The light turns on when the electric parking brake is released using the electric parking brake switch without depressing the brake pedal When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Charging System Warning Indication Warning Light E This warning light illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and turns off when the engine is started If the warning light indication illuminates while driving it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the charging system Drive to the side of the road and park off the right of way Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer CAUTION Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the engine could stop unexpectedly V Engine Oil Warning Indication Warning Light 7 This warning light illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and turns off when the engine is started This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure 4 31 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display A CAUTION Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low Otherwise it could result in extensive engine damage If the light illuminates while driving 1 Drive to the side of the road and park off the right of way on level ground 2
67. I I I I I I I I Brake fluid R R R Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I Tire Rotation Rotate every 10 000 km Tire inflation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I I I I I I Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I I I I I I I Front and rear suspension ball joints and wheel bearing axial play i l I I i I Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I I Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T T T Exhaust system and heat shields I I I I I I All locks and hinges LILJILI LI L LJ LJ L LI L L J L Washer fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I 6 14 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Number of months or kilometers whichever comes first Maintenance Interval Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 x1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Cabin air filter R R R Chart symbols I Inspect Inspect and clean repair adjust fill up or replace if necessary R Replace L Lubricate T Tighten Remarks 1 Use of FL 22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant Using engine coolant other than FL 22 may cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system 2 According to state provincial and federal regulations failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties However Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommen
68. Icon Function J Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source Music CD Displays the track list of the CD _ Select the track you want to play MP3 WMA AAC CD isplays the top level folder file list a Displays the top level folder file list Select the folder you want to select The files in the selected folder are displayed Select the file you want to play O MP3 WMA ACC CDs only Displays the file list of the folder currently being played Select the song you want to listen to CO Music CD Replays the song currently being played repeatedly Select it again to cancel MP3 WMA AAC CD Replays the song currently being played repeatedly When selected again the songs in the folder are played repeatedly Select it again to cancel Music CD Plays songs on the CD in random order Select it again to cancel MP3 WMA AAC CD Plays songs in the folder in random order When selected again the songs on the CD are played in random order Select it again to cancel Music CD The beginning of each track on a CD is played to aid in searching for a desired track When selected again the operation is canceled and the song currently being played continues MP3 WMA AAC CD The beginning of each track in a folder is played to aid in searching for a desired track When selected again the operation is canceled and the song currently being played continues If
69. Improper wheel alignment e Out of balance wheel e Severe braking After rotation inflate all tire pressures to specification page 9 7 and inspect the lug nuts for tightness After adjusting the tire pressure initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is necessary to make the system operates normally Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4 151 A CAUTION Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern or studs only from front to rear not from side to side Tire performance will be reduced if rotated from side to side 6 42 Replacing a Tire A WARNING Always use tires that are in good condition Driving with worn tires is dangerous Reduced braking steering and traction could result in an accident Replace all four tires at the same time Replacing just one tire is dangerous It could cause poor handling and poor braking resulting in loss of vehicle control Mazda strongly recommends that you replace all four tires at the same time If a tire wears evenly a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread Replace the tire when this happens Tread wear indicator x e BR J i f New tread Worn tread You should replace the tire before the band crosses the entire tread After adjusting the tire pressure initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is necessary to make the system operates normal
70. LED headlights 27 8 7444NA side marker lights Fog lights LED Signature wing illumination LED Side turn signal lights LED High mount brake light LED Rear turn signal lights 21 WY21W 7443NA With halogen bulb 5 W5W Rear side marker lights headlights With LED headlights LED Brake lights Taillights LED With halogen bulb 5 W5W Taillights headlights E With LED headlights LED Reverse lights 21 W21W 7440 License plate lights 5 w5W 1 UNECE stands for United Nations Economic Commission for Europe 2 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode 9 6 Some models Specifications Interior light Category Light bulb 7T Wattage UNECE Trunk light 3 Bulb type 8 Overhead light Front Map lights Fy LED type LED Bulb 8 Rear map lights uib type 77 LED type LED Courtesy lights 5 Vanity mirror lights 2 1 UNECE stands for United Nations Economic Commission for Europe 2 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode YW Tires NOTE The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle When replacing tires Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally fitted to your vehicle For details contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer Check the tire pressure label for tire size and infl
71. Light 4 38 Iq KEY Warning Light Red Indicator Light Green 4 39 e High Beam Control System HBC Warning Light Amber Indicator Light 4 41 Green Wrench Indicator Light 4 41 TCS DSC Indicator Light 4 42 ee ee DSC OFF Indicator Light 4 42 OF A E Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light Blue 4 43 ews PRNDM Shift Position Indication 4 43 Headlight High Beam Indicator Light 4 44 4a e Turn Signal Hazard Warning Indicator Lights 4 44 en Security Indicator Light 4 44 amp Cruise Main Indicator Light Amber Cruise Set Indicator Light Green 4 45 SPORT _ Select Mode Indication 4 44 8 a 4 46 4 28 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display CN 2S Signal Warning Indicator Lights Page 0 02 Lights On Indicator Light 4 46 LED Headlight Warning Light 4 46 V Master Warning Light Type A Displays when notification of the system malfunctions is required Check the message indicated in the display and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Type B The light illuminates continuously if any one of the following occurs Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer e There is a malfunction in the battery management system e There is a malfunction in the brake switch V Brake System Warning Light BRAKE This warning light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON This warning has the following functions When the light turns on The light turns on whe
72. Parking Brake The electric parking brake equipment applies the parking brake using an electric motor The indicator light on the electric parking brake switch turns on when the switch is turned on Indicator light A WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the electric parking brake applied If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake applied the brake parts may generate heat and the brake system may not operate leading to an accident Before driving release the electric parking brake and verify that the brake system warning light is turned off 4 75 When Driving Brake NOTE The electric parking brake cannot be applied or released while the vehicle battery is dead An operation sound occurs when applying or releasing the electric parking brake however this does not indicate a malfunction e If the electric parking brake is not used for long periods an automatic inspection of the system is performed while the vehicle is parked An operation sound can be heard however this does not indicate a problem When the electric parking brake is applied and the ignition is switched OFF an operation sound can be heard however this does not indicate a problem The brake pedal may move while the electric parking brake is being applied or released however this does not indicate a problem If the electric parking brake switch is continually pulled while driving the vehicle the electric parkin
73. Quality Grading System UTQGS AWARNING Keep your vehicle s tires properly inflated and not overloaded Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary with respect to grade ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND TO ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS V UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A UTQGS MARK example TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A 8 24 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Tire Labeling Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a tire identification number for safety standa
74. SALES SERVICE or PARTS MANAGER then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER V STEP 2 If after following STEP 1 you feel the need for further assistance please contact your area s Mazda representative Indicated on the next page Please help us by providing the following information 1 Your name address and telephone number 2 Year and model of vehicle 3 Vehicle Identification Number 17 digits noted on your registration or title or located on the upper driver s side corner of the dash 4 Purchase date and current mileage 5 Your dealer s name and location 6 Your question s 8 10 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance Customer Assistance Mexico Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business We are here to serve you All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel we recommend that you take the following steps V Contact Your Mazda Dealer Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer This is the quickest and best way to address the issue e If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS SALES SERVICE or PARTS MANAGER then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER e Ifit becomes necess
75. System HBC switches the headlights to low beams The low beams may not switch to high beams when cornering Operation of the High Beam Control System HBC function can be disabled Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Y Manual Switching Switching to low beams Shift the lever to the low beam position The High Beam Control System HBC indicator light Green turns off Switching to high beams Turn the headlight switch to the 2D position The High Beam Control System HBC indicator light Green turns off and the O is illuminated 4 97 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Lane Departure Warning System LDWS The LDWS system notifies the driver that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane The system detects the white or yellow lines on the traffic lane using the forward sensing camera and if it determines that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane it notifies the driver using the multi information display vehicles with type A instrument cluster and by flashing the LDWS warning light vehicles with type B instrument cluster and activating the LDWS warning beep Use the LDWS when you drive the vehicle on roads with white or yellow lines Refer to Forward Sensing Camera FSC on page 4 135 Forward Sensing Camera FSC ee ae gt Vehicles with type A instrument cluster The LDWS OFF indication illuminates when the system has a mal
76. The seat position adjustment is canceled in the following cases Any of the seat adjustment switches is operated The SET button is pressed e Programming button 1 or 2 is pressed The key lock switch or unlock switch is operated The vehicle starts moving When programming to the key 1 Unlock the doors by pressing a request switch or the key switch 2 After unlocking the doors the seat position adjustment begins within 40 seconds of opening the driver s door and a beep sounds when the operation is finished 2 9 Essential Safety Equipment Seats NOTE e If there is no seat position movement a beep is not heard When the ignition is switched ON the seat position memory function does not operate unless the selector lever is in the P position Automatic transaxle or the parking brake is applied Manual transaxle When the ignition is switched OFF the seat position memory function is operable while the selector lever is in a position other than P position Automatic transaxle or the parking brake is not applied Manual transaxle however if the ignition is switched ON while the seat position memory function is operating the operation is stopped The seat position adjustment is canceled in the following cases Any of the seat adjustment switches is operated The SET button is pressed e Programming button 1 or 2 is pressed The key switch or A switch is operated e The v
77. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan 3 Inspect the engine oil level page 6 28 If it s low add the appropriate amount of engine oil while being careful not to overfill A CAUTION Do not run the engine if the oil level is low Otherwise it could result in extensive engine damage 4 Start the engine and check the warning light If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil stop the engine immediately and have your vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer Vv Check Engine Light ae This indicator light illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and turns off when the engine is started 4 32 If this light illuminates while driving the vehicle may have a problem It is important to note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer The check engine light may illuminate in the following cases e The fuel tank level being very low or approaching empty e The engine s electrical system has a problem e The emission control system has a problem e U S A and Canada The fuel filler cap is missing or not tightened securely If the check engine light remains on do not drive at high speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible V High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Red F bi When the ignition is switched ON the light illu
78. Type A 2 Type B NOTE If the volume is lower compared to other audio modes increase the volume from the device side 5 70 Type B Interior Features Bluetooth Conversation volume and the volume of the voice guidance and ringtone can each be set in advance 1 Select the amp icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Settings 3 Adjust the Phone Volume and the using the slider Bluetooth Preparation Type A Bluetooth Hands Free Preparation Pairing code setting The 4 digit pairing code setting for registration of your cell phone pairing can be set beforehand NOTE The initial setting value is 0000 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Pairing options 5 Prompt Select one of the following Pair Edit Delete List or Set Pairing Code 6 Say Beep Set pairing code 7 Prompt Your current pairing code is XXXX Do you want to change it to a different pairing code 8 Say Beep Yes 9 Prompt Please say a 4 digit pairing code 10 Say Beep YYYY 11 Prompt YYYY is this correct 12 Say Beep Yes or No 13 If Yes go to Ste
79. USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warranties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems
80. Voice recognition related problems mobile device once again and pair to a newly detected Mazda s ON both on your phone and on the Symptom Cause Solution method Poor voice recognition False recognition of numbers e Excessive slow speech e Excessive forceful speech shouting e Speaking before the beep sound has ended e Loud noise speaking or noise from outside inside vehicle e Airflow from A C is blowing against the microphone e Speaking in off standard expressions dialect Regarding the causes indicated on the left be careful with how you speak In addition when numbers are spoken in a sequence recognition ability will improve if no stop is placed between the numbers Poor voice recognition There is a malfunction in the microphone A poor connection or malfunction with the microphone may have occurred Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Phone related voice recognition is disabled Names in the phonebook are not easily recognized There is a problem with the connection between the Bluetooth unit and the device The Bluetooth system is under a condition in which recognition is difficult If there is any malfunction after checking the pairing situation check for device pairing or connection problems By carrying out the following measures the rate of recognition will improve e Clear memory from the phonebook which is not used v
81. Water that contains minerals will Authorized Mazda Dealer cut down on the coolant s effectiveness gt Do not add only water Always add a proper coolant mixture gt The engine has aluminum parts and must be protected by an ethylene glycol based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing gt DO NOT USE coolants Containing Alcohol methanol Borate or Silicate These coolants could damage the cooling system gt DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol with the coolant This could damage the cooling system gt Do not use a solution that contains more than 60 antifreeze This would reduce effectiveness gt If the FL22 mark is shown on or near the cooling system cap use of FL 22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant Using engine coolant other than FL 22 may cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system 6 30 Brake Clutch Fluid V Inspecting Brake Clutch Fluid Level A WARNING If the brake clutch fluid level is low have the brakes inspected A low brake clutch fluid level is dangerous A low level could indicate brake lining wear or a brake system leak which could cause the brakes to fail and lead to an accident The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the same reservoir Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir regularly It should be kept between the MAX and MIN lines The level normally drops with accumulated distance a condition associated with wear of brake and clutch linings If
82. Web support center for information regarding Bluetooth mobile device compatibility gt USA Phone 800 430 0153 Web www MazdaUSA com bluetooth gt Canada Phone 800 430 0153 Web www mazdahandsfree ca gt Mexico Center of Attention to Client CAC Phone 01 800 01 MAZDA Web www mazdamexico com mx Applicable Bluetooth specification Recommended Type A Ver 2 0 Type B Ver 1 1 1 2 2 0 EDR 2 1 EDR 3 0 conformity 5 69 Interior Features Bluetooth V Component Parts Audio unit Type A Type B Talk button Pick up button and Hang up button Microphone ie Microphone Hands Free The microphone is used for speaking voice commands or when making a Hands Free call Talk button Pick Up button and Hang Up button Hands Free The basic functions of Bluetooth Hands Free can be used for such things as making calls or hanging up using the talk pick up and hang up buttons on the steering wheel Commander switch Type B The commander switch is used for volume adjustment and display operation Tilt or turn the commander knob to move the cursor Press the commander knob to select the icon Volume adjustment The power volume dial of the audio unit or the volume dial of the commander switch is used to adjust the volume Turn the dial to the right to increase volume to the left to decrease it The volume can also be adjusted using the volume button on the steering wheel 1
83. a device receives a message a message received notification is displayed The Email Notifications E mail or Text Notifications SMS setting must be on Refer to Communication Settings on page 5 107 Select Read and display the message Method 2 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Notifications and display the new message list for e mail and SMS 3 Select the message you would like to display 5 104 Interior Features Bluetooth The following icons are displayed in the lower part of the details on the message Icons which can be used differ depending on use conditions Icon Function Displays the Communication menu a Displays the inbox p Plays back a message When selected again playback is temporarily stopped Displays the previous message Displays the next message Only replies to the sender of the currently displayed message Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from the preset message Select Send Only E mail Replies to all members including CC Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from the preset message Select Send Makes a call to a person who sent a message For E mail this function may not work depending on the device
84. a steep downgrade downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life When Driving Transaxle Automatic Transaxle Controls Lock release button Various Lockouts gt Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal and hold in the lock release button to shift The ignition must be switched ACC or ON EY Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position gt Indicates that you must hold in the lock release button to shift NOTE The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle giving the driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to shift gears Even if you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional automatic you should also be aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may be retained as the vehicle speed increases If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear the engine racing confirm you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode page 4 52 4 49 When Driving Transaxle Display Indication For vehicles with the type A instrument cluster check the vehicle condition or have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication V Warning Light A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 VY Transax
85. accident Front occupants could be seriously injured Do not modify the suspension Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous If the vehicle s height or the suspension is modified the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision or roll over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries 2 44 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags To prevent false detection by the air bag sensor system heed the following gt Do not use tires or wheels other than those specified for your Mazda Use of any tire or wheel other than those specified for your Mazda page 9 7 is dangerous Use of such wheels will prevent the vehicle s accident detection system from accurately detecting a collision or roll over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries gt Do not overload your vehicle Overloading your vehicle is dangerous as it could prevent the air bag crash sensor system from accurately detecting a collision or roll over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries The gross axle weight rating GAWR and the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR for your vehicle are on the Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the driver s door frame Do not exceed these ratings gt Do not drive the vehicle off road Driving your Mazda off road is dangerous because the vehicle
86. and Canadian French If the language setting is changed all of the voice guidance and voice input commands are done in the selected language NOTE e If the language setting is changed device registration is maintained e Phonebook records are not cleared but each language has a separate phonebook Therefore entries created in one language will need to be re entered in the phonebook of the new language Do these steps before you start driving These less used functions are too distracting to undertake while driving until you are fully familiar with the system Method 1 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Language 5 Prompt Select a language English French or Spanish 6 Say Beep French Speak the desired language English French or Spanish NOTE Other language settings can also be made while in the current setting by saying the name of the language in the native pronunciation 7 Prompt French Desired language selected Is this correct 8 Say Beep Yes 9 Prompt French Desired language selected Spoken in the newly selected language Method 2 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say
87. and cause the tire to come off resulting in an accident In addition lug nuts and bolts could be damaged if tightened more than necessary If Trouble Arises Flat Tire 4 Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise and lower the vehicle Use the lug wrench to tighten the nuts in the order shown If you are unsure of how tight the nuts should be have them inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Nut tightening torque 108 147 12 14 80 108 A WARNING Always securely and correctly tighten the lug nuts Improperly or loosely tightened lug nuts are dangerous The wheel could wobble or come off This could result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident N m kgfm ft lbf Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you removed or replace them with metric nuts of the same configuration Because the wheel studs and lug nuts on your Mazda have metric threads using a non metric nut is dangerous On a metric stud it would not secure the wheel and would damage the stud which could cause the wheel to slip off and cause an accident 5 Open the trunk mat 7 11 If Trouble Arises Flat Tire 6 Remove the belt for securing the flat tire 7 Put the flat tire into the trunk on the left and toward the back 10 Thread the buckle through the wheel as shown in the figure and secure it so that the buckle does not contact the wheel 8 Fold the seat back forward on the right
88. at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Some models 4 33 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Type B This indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer e The light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON e It remains illuminated even though the LDWS switch has been switched off A CAUTION gt Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size and the same manufacture brand and tread pattern In addition do not use tires with significantly different wear patterns on the same vehicle If such improper tires are used the LDWS may not operate normally gt When an emergency spare tire is used the system may not operate normally V Automatic Transaxle Warning Indication Warning Light AT Type B This warning light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON 4 34 Some models Type A Type B The light indication illuminates when the transaxle has a problem A CAUTION If the automatic transaxle warning light warning indication illuminates the transaxle has an electrical problem Continuing to drive your Mazda in this condition could cause damage to your transaxle Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible V Power Steering Malfunction Indication Indicator Light
89. be made to calls and messages in the received messages Interior Features Bluetooth Downloading messages Up to 20 new messages can be downloaded and displayed from a connected device NOTE For e mail 20 messages for each account can be downloaded Automatic downloading The Auto Download Email E mail or Auto Download Text Message SMS setting must be on A message is downloaded automatically when the Bluetooth unit is connected to the device Refer to Communication Settings on page 5 107 Manually downloading When the Auto Download Email E mail or Auto Download Text Message SMS setting is off the message is downloaded using the following procedure 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Email or Text Messages to display the Inbox 3 Select Update Inbox 4 Download will be started from the mobile phone 5 103 Interior Features Bluetooth NOTE e Attached data is not downloaded e Messages up to 1 kilobyte e mail 140 bytes SMS can be downloaded A message list is created for each device Ifthe connected device does not correspond to MAP 1 0 the AT command is used to download The downloaded message indicates that it is already read Downloading using the AT command may not function depending on the connected device Receiving messages Method 1 When
90. cargo stacked higher than the seatbacks is dangerous as visibility to the rear and sides of the vehicle is reduced which could interfere with driving operations and lead to an accident Lowering the seatbacks A CAUTION Check the position of a front seat before folding a rear seatback Depending on the position of a front seat it may not be possible to fold a rear seatback all the way down because it may hit the seatback of the front seat which could scratch or damage the front seat or its pocket Lower or remove the head restraint on the rear outboard seat if necessary 1 With seat warmer Turn the rear seat warmer switch off Refer to Seat Warmer on page 2 7 2 Open the trunk lid and pull the lever for the seatback you want to fold down Essential Safety Equipment Seats 3 Open a rear door and fold the rear seat forward To return the seatback to its upright AWARNING When returning a seatback to its upright position make sure the 3 point seat belt is not caught in the seatback If the seat belt is used while it is caught in the seatback the seat belt cannot function at its full capacity which could cause serious injury or death Press the seatback rearward and lock it in place After returning the seatback to its upright position make sure it is securely locked Vv Armrest The rear armrest in the center of the rear seatback can be used no occupant in the center seat
91. child restraint systems on the front passenger seat Except Mexico W Mexico A AIRBAG 2 47 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Supplemental Restraint System Components With front passenger occupant classification system 2 48 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Without front passenger occupant classification system Driver Front passenger inflators and air bags Roll over sensor crash sensors and diagnostic module SAS unit Front seat belt pretensioners page 2 19 Front air bag sensors Side crash sensors Air bag front seat belt pretensioner system warning light page 4 22 Side and curtain inflators and air bags Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light page 2 57 Front passenger occupant classification sensor page 2 57 Front passenger occupant classification module Some models 2 49 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags How the SRS Air Bags Work Your Mazda is equipped with the following types of SRS air bags SRS air bags are designed to work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries during an accident The SRS air bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition to the seat belt functions Be sure to wear seat belts properly V Front Seat Belt Pretensioners The front seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal near frontal collisions In addition
92. collision If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out retract the belt once and then try pulling it out slowly If this fails pull the belt strongly one time and loosen then pull it out again slowly Seat Belt with Automatic Locking Mode When the seat belt is fastened it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion it may be in the automatic locking mode because the belt has been pulled too far out To return the belt to the more comfortable emergency locking mode wait until the vehicle has stopped in a safe level area retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and then extend it around you again Vv Automatic Locking Mode Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child restraint system from shifting to an unsafe position in the event of an accident To enable seat belt automatic locking mode pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child restraint system It will retract down to the child restraint system and stay locked on it See the section on child restraint page 2 23 2 17 Essential Safety Equipment Seat Belt Systems V Fastening the Seat Belt 5 Seat belt tongue Pow oe Position the lap belt as low as possible not on the abdominal area then adjust the shoulde
93. complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc and our dealers Mazda s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that goal There is no charge for using CAMVAP CAMVAP results are fast fair and final as the award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc VY Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP If a specific item of concern arises where a solution cannot be reached between an owner Mazda and or one of its dealers that all parties cannot agree upon the owner may wish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings However before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously 8 8 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the Provincial Administrator at 1 800 207 0685 or by contacting the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan 235 Yorkland Boulevard suite 300 North York Ontario M2J 4Y8 http camvap ca Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below Provin
94. could See manual See manual Stg will be stop unexpectedly for instructions for instructions very difficult Action Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected View the symbol indicated in the upper part of the screen and refer to the Indication and method for taking action list containing the symbol to see what action should be taken Indication on display AT la Keyless system Transmission malfunction malfunction Action Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected Indication on display A A A A Blind Spot Monitor Battery Mgmt Brake Override Vehicle system malfunction System malfunction System malfunction malfunction Smart City Brake Smart Brake System Support Malfunction malfunction Forward SCBS Disabled Indication and method for taking action list Signal Warning Indicator Lights Page AN Master Warning Light 4 29 4 23 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Seat Belt Warning Light Signal Warning Indicator Lights Page O Brake System Warning Light 4 29 BRAKE s ABS Warning Light 4 30 P Electric Parking Brake Warning Light 4 31 Charging System Warning Indication Warning Light 4 31 527i Engine Oil Warning Light 4 31 KK Check Engine Light 4 32 ni E High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Red 4 32 vrn H I Lane Depa
95. cruise main indicator light Amber illuminates Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 To deactivate the system press the OFF switch The cruise main indicator light Amber turns off A WARNING Always turn off the cruise control system when it is not in use Leaving the cruise control system in an activation ready state while the cruise control is not in use is dangerous as the cruise control could unexpectedly activate if the activation button is accidentally pressed and result in loss of vehicle control and an accident NOTE When the ignition is switched OFF the system status before it was turned off is maintained For example if the ignition is switched OFF with the cruise control system operable the system will be operable when the ignition is switched ON the next time V To Set Speed 1 Activate the cruise control system by pressing the ON switch The cruise main indicator light Amber illuminates Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 2 Accelerate to the desired speed which must be more than 25 km h 16 mph 4 146 3 Set the cruise control by pressing the SET or SET switch at the desired speed The cruise control is set at the moment the SET or SET switch is pressed Release the accelerator pedal simultaneously The cruise set indicator light Green illuminates NOTE e The cruise control speed setting cannot be performed under the following conditions Au
96. current program as Dislike Like Evaluates the current program as Like Adds the current station to your favorites or deletes the current station from your favorites Reverses for 30 seconds Plays the station Select it again to pause playback Goes to the next station Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 5 122 Station list Interior Features Bluetooth 1 Select the icon and display the station list Favorites station name Select to display the program registered to your favorites Category name A recommended category selected from your favorites by Stitcher is displayed Select it to display the category program Stitcher Browse Shows mat 10 20 Custom Station 1 D Custom Station2 _ Popular amp Trending New amp Noteworthy Comedy 2 Select the program name to play it Add to your favorites If the current program has not been registered to your favorites it can be registered to your favorites 1 Select the amp icon to display the favorites station which the registration can be added 2 Select the station name which you want to register 3 Select to add the program to the selected favorites station NOTE Multiple favorites stations can be selected and registered Favorites stations registered by one
97. data e Music data CD DA Music MP3 WMA e MP3 WMA AAC file AAC CD player NOTE Ifa disc has both music data CD DA and MP3 WMA AAC files playback of the two or three file types differs depending on how the disc was recorded Inserting the CD Insert the CD into the slot label side up The auto loading mechanism will set the CD and begin play NOTE There will be a short lapse before play begins while the player reads the digital signals on the CD 5 28 Ejecting the CD Press the CD eject button 4 to eject the CD Playback Press the media button MEDIA to switch to CD mode and start playback NOTE The CD mode cannot be selected if a CD has not been inserted Pause To stop playback press the Play Pause button 4 Press the button again to resume playback Fast forward Reverse Press and hold the fast forward button gt gt I to advance through a track at high speed Press and hold the reverse button M44 to reverse through a track at high speed Track search Press the track up button gt gt I once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track Press the track down button I 4 within a few seconds after playback begins to track down to the beginning of the previous track Press the track down button M4 after a few seconds have elapsed to start playback from the beginning of the current track Folder search during MP3 WMA AAC CD playback
98. details about wearing seat belts refer to Fastening the seat belts page 2 18 2 20 Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has been expended Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately inspect the front seat belt pretensioners and air bags after any collision Like the air bags the front seat belt pretensioners and load limiters will only function once and must be replaced after any collision that caused them to deploy A seat belt with an expended pretensioner or load limiter is still better than wearing no seat belt at all however if the front seat belt pretensioners and load limiters are not replaced the risk of injury in a collision will increase Do not modify the components or wiring or use electronic testing devices on the pretensioner system Modifying the components or wiring of the pretensioner system including the use of electronic testing devices is dangerous You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable which would prevent it from activating in an accident The occupants or repairers could be seriously injured Properly dispose of the pretensioner system Improper disposal of the pretensioner system or a vehicle with non deactivated pretensioners is dangerous Unless all safety procedures are followed injury could result Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer safely dispose of the pretensioner system or scrap a pretensioner system equip
99. engine oil is not available use SAE 5W 20 engine oil The quality designation SM or ILSAC must be on the label C 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 F 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 5W 30 V Inspecting Engine Oil Level 1 Be sure the vehicle is on a level surface 2 Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature 3 Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes for the oil to return to the oil pan 6 28 4 Pull out the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it fully 5 Pull it out again and examine the level The level is normal if it is between Low and Full If it is near or below Low add enough oil to bring the level to Full A CAUTION Do not add engine oil over Full This may cause engine damage 6 Make sure the O ring on the dipstick is positioned properly before reinserting the dipstick 7 Reinsert the dipstick fully Engine Coolant V Inspecting Coolant Level A WARNING Do not use a match or live flame in the engine compartment DO NOT ADD COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT A hot engine is dangerous If the engine has been running parts of the engine compartment can become very hot You could be burned Carefully inspect the engine coolant in the coolant reservoir but do not open it ey 3 Switch the ignition to off and make sure the fan is not running before attempting to work near the cooling fan Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous The fan could con
100. for your vehicle Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your Mazda inadequate incomplete and insufficient servicing may result in problems This could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries For expert advice and quality service consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer To continue warranty eligibility and to protect your investment it is your responsibility to properly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended schedules outlined in this manual As part of this you must keep your maintenance records receipts repair orders and any other documents as evidence this maintenance was performed You must present these documents should any warranty coverage disagreement occur Failure to do so can result in your warranty being voided either in whole or in part This evidence may consist of the following e The Mazda Scheduled Maintenance Record refer to the Warranty Booklet must be completely filled out showing mileage repair order number date for each service and signed by a qualified automotive service technician who service vehicles e Original copies of repair orders or other receipts that include the mileage and date the vehicle was serviced Each receipt should be signed by a qualified automotive service technician e For self maintenance a statement that you completed the maintenance yourself displaying mileage and the date the work was performed Also receipts for th
101. gt Drop the key gt Get the key wet gt Disassemble the key gt Expose the key to high temperatures on places such as the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight gt Expose the key to any kind of magnetic field gt Place heavy objects on the key gt Put the key in an ultrasonic cleaner gt Put any magnetized objects close to the key A code number is stamped on the plate attached to the key set detach this plate and store it in a safe place not in the vehicle for use if you need to make a replacement key auxiliary key Also write down the code number and keep it in a separate safe and convenient place but not in the vehicle If your key auxiliary key is lost consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer and have your code number ready NOTE e The driver must carry the key to ensure the system functions properly e Always keep a spare key in case one is lost Ifa key is lost consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible Transmitter Auxiliary key Kami __ Key code number plate Before Driving Keys To use the auxiliary key press the knob and pull out the key transmitter Knob To ee Before Driving Keys Keyless Entry System This system uses the key buttons to remotely lock and unlock the doors and opens the trunk lid The system can start the engine without having to take the key out of your purse or pocket It can also help you signal for at
102. hand from the icon or the commander knob Launches the iTunes Tagging function for Apple devices with USB use only Can be used when the HD Radio is on Automatic radio station selection When long pressed the radio frequency changes continually It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 5 39 Interior Features Audio System Favorites Radio Selected stations can be registered for convenient operation Up to 50 stations can be registered The Favorites list is common to AM FM and satellite radio Registering to Favorites Long press the K icon to register the current radio station The registration can also be performed using the following procedure 1 Select the X icon to display the Favorites list 2 Select Add Edit Radio Favorites 3 Select Add lt active station gt 4 The station is added to the bottom of the Favorites list NOTE If the battery is disconnected your Favorites list will be not deleted Selecting radio station from Favorites 1 Select the X icon to display the Favorites list 2 Select the radio station name or radio frequency to tune in the radio station Deleting from Favorites 1 Select the X icon to display the Favorites list 2 Select Add Edit Radio Favorites
103. has been completed is indicated in the instrument cluster ara If the system initialization is performed without adjusting the tire pressure the system cannot detect the normal tire pressure and it may not illuminate the tire pressure monitoring system warning light even if a tire pressure is low or it may illuminate the light even if the pressures are normal Adjust the tire pressure on all four tires and initialize the system when the warning light is turned on If the warning light turns on for a reason other than a flat tire the tire pressure of all four tires may have decreased naturally The system initialization will not be performed if the switch is pressed while the vehicle is being driven 4 152 When Driving Rear View Monitor Rear View Monitor The rear view monitor provides visual images of the rear of the vehicle when reversing A WARNING Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding conditions by looking directly with your eyes Reversing the vehicle by only looking at the screen is dangerous as it may cause an accident or a collision with an object The rear view monitor is only a visual assist device when reversing the vehicle The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions A CAUTION gt Do not use the rear view monitor under the following conditions Using the rear view monitor under the following conditions is dangerous and could resu
104. has not been designed to do so Driving the vehicle off road could prevent the air bag crash sensor system from accurately detecting a collision or roll over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries Do not modify a front door or leave any damage unrepaired Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect a damaged front door Modifying a front door or leaving any damage unrepaired is dangerous Each front door has a side crash sensor as a component of the supplemental restraint system If holes are drilled in a front door a door speaker is left removed or a damaged door is left unrepaired the sensor could be adversely affected causing it to not detect the pressure of an impact correctly during a side collision If a sensor does not detect a side impact correctly the side and curtain air bags and the front seat belt pretensioner may not operate normally which could result in serious injury to occupants Do not modify the supplemental restraint system Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is dangerous You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable Do not make any modifications to the supplemental restraint system This includes installing trim badges or anything else over the air bag modules It also includes installing extra electrical equipment on or near system components or wiring An Authorized Mazda Dealer can provide the special car
105. have a problem It is important to note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer The check engine light may illuminate in the following cases e The fuel tank level being very low or approaching empty e The engine s electrical system has a problem e The emission control system has a problem e U S A and Canada The fuel filler cap is missing or not tightened securely If the check engine light remains on or it flashes continuously do not drive at high speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds V If the high engine coolant temperature warning light red illuminates or flashes oie be ae lal The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high and illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further Handling Procedure Flashing light Drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down Illuminated light This indicates the possibility of overheating Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine Refer to Overheating page 7 18 A CAUTION Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated Otherwise it could result in damage to the engine V If the lane departure warning system LDWS OFF Indic
106. held in the unlock position for one second or longer Turn the key toward the front to lock toward the back to unlock NOTE Holding the key in the unlocked position in the driver s door lock for about a second unlocks all doors To unlock only the driver s door insert the key into the driver s door lock and turn the key briefly to the unlock position and then immediately return it to the center position Locking Unlocking with Request Switch With the advanced keyless function All doors can be locked unlocked by pressing the request switch on the front doors while the key is being carried Front doors To lock To lock the doors press the request switch and the hazard warning lights will flash once A beep sound will be heard once To unlock Driver s door request switch To unlock the driver s door press the request switch A beep sound will be heard twice and the hazard warning lights will flash twice To unlock all doors press the request switch again within 3 seconds and two more beep sounds will be heard Front passenger door request switch To unlock all doors press the request switch A beep sound will be heard twice and the hazard warning lights will flash twice Before Driving Doors and Locks NOTE The system can be set to unlock all doors by performing a single operation Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Use the following procedure to change the setting
107. icon on the home screen to display the applications screen 2 Select the Warning Guidance V If the master warning light illuminates Type A Displays when notification of the system malfunctions is required Check the message indicated in the display and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Display example Displays as follows E Charging system Master Miten warning Stop ehicle l light in a safe location Indication in display and master warning light in instrument cluster are illuminated at same time This indicates a malfunction with the vehicle system Check the message indicated in the display and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer For details refer to the explanations for the warning indicator lights in the warning indicator lights section which match the symbol in the upper part of the display If a message is not indicated in the display operate the INFO switch to display the Warning screen Type B The light illuminates continuously if any one of the following occurs Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer e There is a malfunction in the battery management system e There is a malfunction in the brake switch 7 23 If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds V If the brake system warning light illuminates BRAKE When the light turns on If the brake system warning light remains turned on even though the electric parking brake is released t
108. is inserted into the SD card slot and used Auxiliary jack USB port Y Auxiliary jack a USB a ff How to use AUX mode Type AN ise Seadoves chet eaivaccee ces Gate oct page 5 54 How to use USB mode Type Aye E EE page 5 56 How to use iPod mode Type A ites Sakae aie page 5 60 How to use AUX mode Type By inaenea page 5 63 How to use USB mode Type B E E E E page 5 63 A WARNING Do not adjust the portable audio unit or a similar product while driving the vehicle Adjusting the portable audio unit or a similar product while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the vehicle operation which could lead to a serious accident Always adjust the portable audio unit or a similar product while the vehicle is stopped Interior Features Audio System CAUTION gt Always close the auxiliary jack USB port lid when it is not in use If foreign matter or liquid penetrates the auxiliary jack USB port it may cause a malfunction gt Depending on the portable audio device noise may occur when the device is connected to the vehicle accessory socket If noise occurs do not use the accessory socket NOTE This mode may not be usable depending on the portable audio device to be connected Before using the auxiliary jack USB port refer to the instruction manual for the portable audio device e Use acommercially available non impedance 3 5
109. is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes 1 l appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2 l utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage vadio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible d en compromettre le fonctionnement Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with FCC IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled enviromment and meets the FCC radio frequency RF Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET6S5 and RSS 102 of the IC radio frequency RF Exposure rules The antenna should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Le pr sent appareil est conforme a l exposition aux radiations FCC IC d finies pour un environnement non contr l et r pond aux directives d exposition de la fr quence de la FCC radiofr quence RF dans le Suppl ment C OET6S5 et RSS 102 de la fr quence radio RF IC r gles d exposition L antenne doit tre install de fa on garder une distance minimale de
110. is too distracting to attempt while driving and you may make too many errors to be effective 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Pairing options 5 Prompt Select one of the following Pair Edit Delete List or Set Pairing Code NOTE A registered device Mobile phone can be deleted using the registration list 6 Say Beep Delete 7 Prompt Please say the name of the device you would like to delete Available devices are XX XXX Ex device A XXXXX Ex device B XXXXX Ex device C or all Which device please 8 Say Beep X Say the number of the device to be deleted NOTE Say All to delete all devices Mobile phone 9 Prompt Deleting XXXXX Ex device B Registered device tag Is this correct 10 Say Beep Yes 11 Prompt Deleted Registered device editing 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Pairing options 5 Prompt Select one of the following Pair Edit Delete List or Set Pairing
111. it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the charging system Drive to the side of the road and park off the right of way Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer CAUTION Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the engine could stop unexpectedly 7 25 If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds V If the engine oil warning indication warning light is indicated 7 This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure A CAUTION Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low Otherwise it could result in extensive engine damage If the light illuminates while driving 1 Drive to the side of the road and park off the right of way on level ground 2 Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan 3 Inspect the engine oil level page 6 28 If it s low add the appropriate amount of engine oil while being careful not to overfill A CAUTION Do not run the engine if the oil level is low Otherwise it could result in extensive engine damage 4 Start the engine and check the warning light If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil stop the engine immediately and have your vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer 7 26 V If the check engine light illuminates or flashes cy If this light illuminates while driving the vehicle may
112. less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can detect the system may pause The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indication indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates However it does not indicate a malfunction V If the lights on indicator light flashes z002 The light continues to flash if the lighting system has a malfunction Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer V If the LED headlight warning light illuminates This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight Have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer Warning Sound is Activated V Lights On Reminder When the time setting for the auto headlight off function is set to QFF lights on reminder warning sound is enabled When the light switch is in the z002 position the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF and the driver s door is opened the warning sound alerts the driver that the headlights have not been turned off NOTE When the ignition is switched to ACC the ignition not switched off STOP warning beep takes priority over the lights on reminder warning sound The volume of the lights not off warning sound can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 When the time setting for the auto headlight off function is not set to OFF lights on reminder warning sound is disabled When the light switch is not in the OFF position and the ignition is switched OFF the auto headlight of
113. light flashes abnormally one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer VY Security Indicator Light ein This indicator light starts flashing every two seconds when the ignition is switched from ON to OFF and the immobilizer system is armed The light stops flashing when the ignition is switched ON with the correct key At this time the immobilizer system is disarmed and the light illuminates for about three seconds and then turns off If the engine does not start with the correct key and the security indicator light keeps illuminating or flashing the system may have a malfunction Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer V Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Warning Light Amber Indicator Light Green d R Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Warning Light Amber Illuminated When the ignition is switched ON the warning light is illuminated and then turns off after a few seconds The warning light turns on if there is a malfunction in the system while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is on Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Indicator Light Green Illuminated Illuminated when the speed for the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is set When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Cruise Main Indicator Light Amber Cruise Set Indicator Light Green The indicator li
114. lower body height such as sports cars e Under the following conditions the radar sensors rear cannot detect target objects or it may be difficult to detect them A vehicle is in the detection area at the rear in an adjacent driving lane but it does not approach The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system determines the condition based on radar detection data A vehicle is traveling alongside your vehicle at nearly the same speed for an extended period of time Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction Avehicle in an adjacent driving lane is attempting to pass your vehicle A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a road with extremely wide driving lanes The detection area of the radar sensors rear is set at the road width of expressways 4 105 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE e In the following cases the activation of the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights and the warning beep may not occur or they may be delayed Avehicle makes a lane change from a driving lane two lanes over to an adjacent lane Driving on steep slopes Crossing the summit of a hill or mountain pass The turning radius is small making a sharp curve turning at intersections When there is a difference in the height between your driving lane and the adjacent lane Directly after pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch and the system becomes operable If the road width is extremely narrow vehicles two lanes over m
115. need to be on The headlight high beam indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates simultaneously The lever will return to the normal position when released Flashing When Driving Switches and Controls V Coming Home Light System When the surroundings are dark while leaving your vehicle visibility at the front of the vehicle can be assured for a certain period of time When the ignition is switched to ACC or off the headlights Low beams illuminate when the lever is pulled The headlights turn off after a certain period of time has elapsed after the doors are closed NOTE The time until the headlights turn off after all of the doors are closed can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 e Ifno operations are done for 3 minutes after the lever is pulled the headlights turn off The headlights turn off if the lever is pulled again while the headlights are illuminated 4 61 When Driving Switches and Controls V Leaving Home Light System When the surroundings are dark while approaching your vehicle visibility at the front of the vehicle can be assured for a certain period of time When the ignition switch and the headlight switch are as indicated below the following lights turn on after the transmitter unlock switch is pressed and the vehicle receives the transmitter signal The headlights turn off after a certain period of time has elapsed 30 seconds
116. not change the audio file extension Otherwise the unit will not recognize the file correctly resulting in noise or a malfunction NOTE Playback may not be possible depending on the type and condition of the USB flash memory even if the audio file complies with the standard above e A copyright protected WMA AAC file cannot be played in this unit The order of the music data stored in the device may differ from the playback order To prevent loss or damage of stored data we recommend that you always back up your data e Ifa device exceeds the maximum electric current value of 1 000 mA it may not operate or recharge when connected Do not pull out the USB device while in the USB mode only pull it out while in FM AM radio or CD mode The device will not operate if the data is password protected e MP3 WMA AAC OGG files written under specifications other than the indicated specification may not play normally or files folder names may not display correctly Type B 5 20 Y Operating Tips for iPod This unit supports playback of music files recorded to an iPod iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries The iPod may not be compatible depending on the model or OS version In this case an error message is displayed CAUTION gt Remove the iPod when it is not in use Because the iPod is not designed to withstand excessive changes in temperature inside
117. not flash when the buttons are pressed e The system s operational range is reduced Replacing the battery at an Authorized Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent damage to the key If replacing the battery by yourself follow the instruction below Replacing the key battery 1 Press the knob and pull out the auxiliary key 2 Twist a tape wrapped flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow and open the cover slightly Cover 3 Insert the tape wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap and slide it in the direction of the arrow 4 Twist the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance 5 Remove the battery cap then remove the battery 6 Insert a new battery with the positive pole facing up and then cover the battery with the battery cap 7 Close the cover 8 Reinsert the auxiliary key 6 39 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance A CAUTION gt Be careful not to allow the rubber ring shown in the figure to be scratched or damaged gt If the rubber ring detaches reattach it before inserting a new battery Rubber ring 6 40 Tires For reasons of proper performance safety and better fuel economy always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the recommended load limits and weight distribution A WARNING Using Different Tire Types Driving your vehicl
118. number of characters which can be displayed is restricted Error Messages When the message CHECK USB is displayed it indicates that there is some error in the USB device Verify that the content recorded in the USB device has MP3 WMA AAC files and re connect correctly If the message reappears have the unit checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer 5 58 MEMO Interior Features Audio System VY How to use iPod mode Type A Audio display Text button Play Pause button Random button Repeat button Category down button Category up button Track down Reverse button Track up Fast forward button List up button List down button Media Scan button An iPod may not be compatible depending on the model or OS version In this case an error message is displayed NOTE The iPod functions on the iPod cannot be operated while it is connected to the unit because the unit controls the iPod functions Playback 1 Switch the ignition to ACC or ON 2 Press the power volume dial to turn the audio system on 3 Press the media button MEDIA to switch to the iPod mode and start playback NOTE e When an iPod is not connected the mode does not switch to the iPod mode When there is no playable data in the iPod NO CONTENTS is flashed Do not remove the iPod while in the iPod mode Otherwise the data could be damaged Pause To stop playback press the
119. of Bluetooth audio devices increases while Bluetooth is connected e Ifa general mobile phone device is USB connected during music playback over the Bluetooth connection the Bluetooth connection is disconnected For this reason you cannot have music playback over a Bluetooth connection and music playback using a USB connection at the same time The system may not operate normally depending on the Bluetooth audio device V How to Use the Bluetooth Audio System Switching to Bluetooth audio mode To listen to music or voice audio recorded to a Bluetooth audio device switch to the Bluetooth audio mode to operate the audio device using the audio system control panel Any Bluetooth audio device must be paired to the vehicle s Bluetooth unit before it can be used Refer to Bluetooth Preparation Type A on page 5 71 1 Turn on the Bluetooth audio device s power 2 Switch the ignition to ACC or ON Make sure that the J symbol is displayed in the audio display The symbol is not displayed if an un paired Bluetooth audio device is being used or the vehicle s Bluetooth unit has a malfunction NOTE Some Bluetooth audio devices need a certain amount of time before the symbol is displayed 3 Press the media button MEDIA to switch to the Bluetooth audio mode and start playback If the current device version is lower than AVRCP Ver 1 3 BT Audio is displayed
120. of a lane departure the system indicates the direction it determines that the vehicle is deviating in the multi information display Operate the steering wheel appropriately and steer the vehicle to the center of the lane Indication on display AN NOTE e Ifthe LDWS warning sound is set to rumble the sound will be heard from the vehicle speaker on the side which the system determined the vehicle may be deviating from its lane e It may be difficult to hear the LDWS warning beep depending on the surrounding conditions such as outside noise The type of warning sound and the volume can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE 4 103 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Blind Spot Monitoring BSM System The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system is designed to assist the driver in checking the area to the rear of the vehicle on both sides during lane changes by alerting the driver to the presence of vehicles approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system detects vehicles approaching from the rear while traveling in the forward direction at a speed of 10 km h 6 3 mph or faster and turns on the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights equipped on the door mirrors depending on the conditions If the turn signal lever is operated to signal a lane change in the direction in which the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light is illum
121. of being tethered Place tether equipped child restraint systems where there are tether anchors V Anchor Bracket Anchor brackets for securing child restraint systems are equipped in the vehicle Locate each anchor position using the illustration To install a child restraint system always follow the instruction manual accompanying the child restraint system Anchor bracket location Use the indicated anchor bracket locations when installing a child restraint system equipped with a tether For left For center l Except Mexico JI 2 29 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint AWARNING Always attach the tether strap to the correct tether anchor position Attaching the tether strap to the incorrect tether anchor position is dangerous In a collision the tether strap could come off and loosen the child restraint system If the child restraint system moves it could result in death or injury to the child 2 30 Always route the tether strap between the head restraint and the seatback Routing the tether strap on top of the head restraint is dangerous In a collision the tether strap could slide off the head restraint and loosen the child restraint system The child restraint system could move which may result in death or injury to the child Tether strap Tether strap ae V Using Automatic Locking Mode Follow these instructions when using a child restraint system unless y
122. of the doors and the trunk lid Open the driver s door Within 30 seconds of opening the driver s door press and hold the LOCK button on the key for 5 seconds or longer All of the doors lock and the beep sound activates at the currently set volume If the beep sound is currently set to not activate it will not activate The setting changes each time the LOCK button on the key is pressed and the beep sound activates at the set volume If the beep sound has been set to not activate it will not activate The setting change is completed by doing any one of the following e Switch the ignition to ACC or ON e Close the driver s door e Open the trunk lid The key is not operated for 10 seconds e Press any button except the LOCK button on the key e A request switch is pressed With theft deterrent system The hazard warning lights flash when the theft deterrent system is armed or turned off Refer to Theft Deterrent System on page 3 41 3 14 The setting can be changed so that the doors are locked automatically without pressing the request switch Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Auto lock function A beep sound is heard when all doors are closed while the advanced key is being carried All doors are locked automatically after about three seconds when the advanced key is out of the operational range Also the hazard warning lights flash once Even if the driver is in the operationa
123. one two one two Phrase Command 1 0123456789 888 555 1212 Call Dial Setup Cancel Continue Help COPA DA nm BY wld NOTE The applicable phrase appears in the audio display e After user voice registration is completed voice guidance Speaker enrollment is complete is announced Voice recognition learning on off 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Voice training 3 Prompt Enrollment is enabled disabled Would you like to disable enable or retrain 4 Say Beep Disable or Enable 5 When Disable is spoken the voice recognition learning is turned off When Enable is spoken the voice recognition learning is turned on 6 Prompt Speaker Enrollment is disabled enabled 5 85 Interior Features Bluetooth Bluetooth Preparation Type B Device pairing To use Bluetooth audio and Hands Free the device equipped with Bluetooth has to be paired to the unit using the following procedure A maximum of seven devices including Bluetooth audio devices and Hands Free mobile phones can be paired NOTE The Bluetooth system may not operate for 1 or 2 minutes after the ignition is switched to ACC or ON However this does not indicate a problem If the Bluetooth system does not connect automatically after 1 or 2 minutes have elapsed make sure tha
124. or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mazda Motor Corporation Your Mazda Importer Distributor If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mazda Motor Corporation Your Mazda Importer Distributor To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov NOTE If you live in the U S A all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be forwarded to Mazda North American Operations 7755 Irvine Center Drive Irvine California 92618 2922 or P O Box 19734 Irvine CA 92623 9734 Customer Experience Center or toll free at 1 800 222 5500 If you live outside of the U S A please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown page 8 13 in this booklet 8 14 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Canada Canadian customers who wish to report a safety related defect to Trans
125. or placed upright 2 11 Essential Safety Equipment Seats AWARNING Never put your hands and fingers around the moving parts of the seat and armrest Putting your hands and fingers around the moving parts of the seat and armrest is dangerous as they could get injured 2 12 Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints on all outboard seats and the rear center seat The head restraints are intended to help protect you and the passengers from neck injury A WARNING Always drive with the head restraints installed when seats are being used and make sure they are properly adjusted Driving with the head restraints adjusted too low or removed is dangerous With no support behind your head your neck could be seriously injured in a collision V Height Adjustment Adjust the head restraint so that the center is even with the top of the passenger s To raise a head restraint pull it up to the desired position To lower the head restraint press the stop catch release then push the head restraint down Front outboard seat Essential Safety Equipment Seats VY Removal Installation To remove the head restraint pull it up while pressing the stop catch To install the head restraint insert the legs into the holes while pressing the stop catch A WARNING Always drive with the head restraints installed when seats are being used and make sure they are properly installed
126. other passengers rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is stopped Adjusting the driver s seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The driver could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Do not modify or replace the front seats Modifying or replacing the front seats such as replacing the upholstery or loosening any bolts is dangerous The front seats contain air bag components essential to the supplemental restraint system Such modifications could damage the supplemental restraint system and result in serious injury Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is any need to remove or reinstall the front seats Do not drive with damaged front seats Driving with damaged front seats is dangerous A collision even one not strong enough to inflate the air bags could damage the front seats which contain essential air bag components If there was a subsequent collision an air bag may not deploy which could lead to injuries Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats front seat belt pretensioners and air bags after a collision Do not drive with either front seats reclined Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you do not get the full protection from seat belts During sudden braking or a collision you can slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries For maximum protection sit well back
127. parked It is too distracting to attempt while driving and you may make too many errors to be effective 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Phonebook 3 Prompt Select one of the following New entry edit list names delete erase all or import contact 4 Say Beep Edit 5 Prompt Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit or say 99 99 List names 6 Say Beep XXXXX Ex Mary s phone Say the voice tag for the registered name to be edited in the phonebook 7 Prompt Home Work Mobile or Other 8 Say Beep Home Say the registered location to be edited Home Work Mobile or Other 9 Prompt XXXXX Ex Mary s phone Registered voice tag XXXX Ex Home Registered location Is this correct 10 Say Beep Yes 11 Prompt The current number is XXXXXXXXXXX Ex 555 1234 Currently registered number New number please NOTE If there was no previous phone number registered to a location Ex Work the prompt will only read out Number please 12 Say Beep XXXXXXXXXXX Ex 555 5678 Say the new phone number to be registered Interior Features Bluetooth 13 Prompt XXXXXXXX Telephone number After the beep continue to add numbers or say Go Back to re enter t
128. phone Registered voice tag Home Registered location deleted Complete deletion of the phonebook data All data registered to the Bluetooth Hands Free phonebook can be erased NOTE Do this function only when parked It is too distracting to attempt while driving and you may make too many errors to be effective 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Phonebook 3 Prompt Select one of the following New entry edit list names delete erase all or import contact 4 Say Beep Erase all 5 Prompt Are you sure you want to erase everything from your Hands Free system phonebook 6 Say Beep Yes 7 Prompt You are about to delete everything from your Hands Free system phonebook Do you want to continue 8 Say Beep Yes 5 94 9 Prompt Please wait erasing the Hands Free system phonebook 10 Prompt Hands Free system phonebook erased Read out of names registered to the Bluetooth Hands Free phonebook Bluetooth Hands Free can read out the list of names registered to its phonebook 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Phonebook 3 Prompt Select one of the following New entry edit list names delete erase all or import contact 4 Say Beep List names 5 Prompt XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX Ex John s phone
129. physically challenged people gt People with delicate skin gt People who are excessively fatigued gt People who are intoxicated gt People who have taken sleep inducing medicine such as sleeping pills or cold medicine Do not use the seat warmer with anything having high moisture retention ability such as a blanket or cushion on the seat The seat may be heated excessively and cause a low temperature burn Do not use the seat warmer even when taking a short nap in the vehicle The seat may be heated excessively and cause a low temperature burn Do not place heavy objects with sharp projections on the seat or insert needles or pins into it This could cause the seat to become excessively heated and result in injury from a minor burn Some models 2 7 Essential Safety Equipment Seats A CAUTION gt Before folding a rear seatback make sure that the rear seat warmer switch is off If a rear seatback is folded while the rear seat warmer is in operation it may heat the seat excessively and damage the seat surface gt Do not use organic solvents to clean the seat It may damage the seat surface and the heater NOTE e Use the seat warmer when the engine is running Leaving the seat warmer on for long periods with the engine not running could cause the battery power to be depleted Front If the ignition is switched off while the seat warmer is operating High Mid or Low and then switched ON
130. place according to the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions When not in use remove it from the vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child restraint systems and the corresponding tether anchor Always secure a child in a proper child restraint system Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous No matter how strong the person may be he or she cannot hold onto a child in a sudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or other occupants Even in a moderate accident the child may be exposed to air bag forces that could result in serious injury or death to the child or the child may be slammed into an adult causing injury to both child and adult Never use a rear facing child restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that could deploy Rear facing child restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates The child restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child 2 24 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint Except Mexico Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shown below The warnin
131. player Selects device Music player when the talk button is short pressed e Edit Edits device when the talk button is short pressed Continue Continues the list readout e Delete Deletes the registered device when the talk button is short pressed Interior Features Bluetooth e Previous Returns to the previous device in read out when the talk button is short pressed 8 Prompt End of list would you like to start from the beginning 9 Say Beep No 10 Prompt Returning to main menu Device selection If several devices have been paired the Bluetooth unit links the device last paired If you would like to link a different paired device it is necessary to change the link The order of device priority after the link has been changed is maintained even when the ignition is switched off Hands Free phone 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Select phone 5 Prompt Please say the name of the device you would like to select Available devices are XXXXX Ex device A XXXXX Ex device B XXXXX Ex device C Which device please 6 Say Beep XXXXX Ex Device B 7 Prompt XXXXxX Ex Device B I
132. position 2 Set the temperature control dial to the desired position 3 Set the fan control dial to the desired speed 4 If dehumidified heating is desired turn on the air conditioner A WARNING Do not defog the windshield using the GW position with the temperature control set to the cold position Using the position with the temperature control set to the cold position is dangerous as it will cause the outside of the windshield to fog up Your vision will be hampered which could lead to a serious accident Set the temperature control to the hot or warm position when using the GV position NOTE e For maximum defrosting turn on the air conditioner set the temperature control dial to the extreme hot position and turn the fan control dial fully clockwise e Ifwarm air is desired at the floor set the mode selector dial to the 4 position nthe or Ww position the air conditioner is automatically turned on and the outside air position is automatically selected to defrost the windshield In the P or W position the outside air position cannot be changed to the recirculated air position Interior Features Climate Control System Dehumidifying With air conditioner Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold weather to help defog the windshield and side windows 1 Set the mode selector dial to the desired position 2 Set the air intake selector to the outside air position indicator light turne
133. provided depending on the computer operating system version software or settings In this case add the file extension aac m4a or wav to the end of the file name and then write it to the memory 2 Type B Interior Features Audio System Vv Operating Tips for OGG OGG is the audio compression format for Xiph Org Foundation Audio data can be created and stored at a higher compression ratio than MP3 This unit plays files with the extension ogg as OGG files A CAUTION Do not use an audio file extension on files other than audio files In addition do not change the audio file extension Otherwise the unit will not recognize the file correctly resulting in noise or a malfunction e OGG files written under specifications other than the indicated specification may not play normally or files or folder names may not display correctly e The file extension may not be provided depending on the computer operating system version software or settings In this case add the file extension ogg to the end of the file name and then write it to the disc Y Operating Tips for USB device This unit plays audio files as follows Extension Playback with this unit mp3 MP3 m4a AAC wav ogg OGG Type B 5 19 Interior Features Audio System A CAUTION Do not use an audio file extension on files other than audio files In addition do
134. released on a steep grade For vehicles with a manual transaxle Hill Launch Assist HLA operates on a downward slope when the shift lever is in the reverse R position and on an upward slope when the shift lever is in a position other than the reverse R position For vehicles with an automatic transaxle Hill Launch Assist HLA operates on a downward slope when the shift lever is in the reverse R position and on an upward slope when the shift lever is in a forward gear AWARNING Do not rely completely on Hill Launch Assist HLA Hill Launch Assist HLA is an auxiliary device for accelerating from a stop on a slope The system only operates for about two seconds and therefore relying only on the system when accelerating from a stop is dangerous because the vehicle may move roll unexpectedly and cause an accident The vehicle could roll depending on the vehicle s load or if it is towing something In addition for vehicles with a manual transaxle the vehicle could still roll depending on how the clutch pedal or the accelerator pedal is operated Always confirm the safety around the vehicle before starting to drive the vehicle When Driving Brake NOTE Hill Launch Assist HLA does not operate on a gentle slope In addition the gradient of the slope on which the system will operate changes depending on the vehicle s load Hill Launch Assist HLA does not operate if the parking brake is applied th
135. sec 2301 et seq If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 or Title I of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if Mazda or its representative is unable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts Mazda may be required to replace or repurchase the vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b creates a presumption that Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18 000 miles on the vehicle s odometer whichever occurs first one or more of the following occurs e The same nonconformity a failure to conform to the written warranty that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND the nonconformity has been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agents AND the buyer or lessee has directly notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the nonconformity OR The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda or its agents AND the buyer has notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the nonconformity OR The vehicle
136. selected pressing the selector again within one second will change to trip meter B mode When trip meter A is selected TRIP A will be displayed When trip meter B is selected TRIP B will be displayed The trip meter records the total distance the vehicle is driven until the meter is again reset Return it to 0 0 by holding the selector depressed for 1 second or more Use this meter to measure trip distances and to compute fuel consumption NOTE Vehicles with type B audio If the fuel economy data is reset using the fuel economy monitor or trip A is reset using the trip meter when the function which synchronizes the fuel economy monitor and the trip meter is on the fuel economy data and trip A are reset simultaneously Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page 4 87 Only the trip meters record tenths of kilometers miles The trip record will be erased when The power supply is interrupted blown fuse or the battery is disconnected The vehicle is driven over 9999 9 km mile 4 12 Y Tachometer The tachometer shows engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm A CAUTION Do not run the engine with the tachometer needle in the RED ZONE This may cause severe engine damage 1 Striped zone 1 Red zone 1 The range varies depending on the type of gauge NOTE When the tachometer needle enters the STRIPED ZONE this indicates to the driver that the gears should be s
137. size and the same manufacturer brand and tread pattern In addition do not use tires with significantly different wear patterns on the same vehicle as the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system may not operate normally gt The laser sensor includes a function for detecting a soiled windshield and informing the driver however depending on the conditions it may not detect plastic shopping bags ice or snow on the windshield In such cases the system cannot accurately determine a vehicle ahead and may not be able to operate normally Always drive carefully and pay attention to the road ahead 4 129 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE e The Smart City Brake Support SCBS system will not operate if the driver is deliberately performing driving operations accelerator pedal and steering wheel The Smart City Brake Support SCBS system will operate under the following conditions The engine is running The vehicle speed is between about 4 to 30 km h 2 to 18 mph The Smart City Brake Support SCBS system is not turned off The DSC is not malfunctioning e The Smart City Brake Support SCBS detects a vehicle ahead by emitting a near infrared laser beam and receiving the beam reflected off the reflector of the vehicle ahead and then using it for the measurement Consequently the Smart City Brake Support SCBS may not operate under the following conditions Reflection of the laser is poor due to the shape of the vehicl
138. sources of light in the area such as street lamps illuminated signboards and traffic signals When there are reflective objects in the surrounding area such as reflective plates and signs e When visibility is reduced under rain snow and foggy conditions When driving on roads with sharp curves or hilly terrain When the headlights rear lamps of vehicles in front of you or in the opposite lane are dim or not illuminated When there is sufficient darkness such as at dawn or dusk When the luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats are occupied e When visibility is reduced due to a vehicle in front of you spraying water from its tires onto your windshield 4 96 V To Operate the System The High Beam Control System HBC operates to switch the headlights automatically between high and low beams after the ignition is switched ON and the headlight switch is in the AUTO and high beam position At the same time the High Beam Control System HBC indicator light green in the instrument cluster illuminates The High Beam Control System HBC determines that it is dark based on the brightness of the surrounding area NOTE e When the vehicle speed is 30 km h 18 mph or higher the headlights automatically switch to high beams when there are no vehicles ahead or approaching in the opposite direction When the vehicle speed is less than about 20 km h 12 mph the High Beam Control
139. speakers consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer A difference in the fuel economy may occur depending on use conditions such as with the A C and headlights Ifthe capacitor is to be disposed of always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer For details go to the following URL http www mazda com csr environment recycling 4 85 When Driving i ELOOP Vv i ELOOP Charging Display If the engine is started after the vehicle has not been driven for a long period of time an i ELOOP charging message may be indicated in the display Leave the engine idling and wait until the message disappears NOTE If the vehicle is driven while the message is displayed a beep sound is heard If you turn the steering wheel while the message is displayed it will feel heavier than normal but this does not indicate an abnormality Stop the vehicle in a safe location with the engine running and do not attempt to turn the steering wheel The steering operation will return to normal after the message is no longer displayed i ELOOP i ELOOP charging Please don t drive 4 86 When Driving Fuel Economy Monitor Fuel Economy Monitor For vehicles with type B audio the Control Status and Fuel Consumption are switched and displayed by operating each icon in the display In addition after completing a trip the total energy efficiency to date is displayed in the ending display when the ending display is turned on 1 Se
140. standards of the country in which the vehicle will be driven Consequently your vehicle may require modifications at personal expense in order to meet the regulations In addition you should be aware of the following issues Satisfactory vehicle servicing may be difficult or impossible in another country The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable Parts servicing techniques and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your vehicle The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries 8 18 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Warranty Add On Non Genuine Parts and Accessories Non genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores These may fit your vehicle but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda vehicles When you install non genuine parts or accessories they could affect your vehicle s performance or safety systems the Mazda warranty doesn t cover this Before you install any non genuine parts or accessories consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer A WARNING Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non genuine parts or accessories Installation of non genuine parts or accessories is dangerous Improperly designed parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle s performance or safety systems This could cause you to have an a
141. started The message is no longer displayed when the engine is running and the charging is completed The vehicle may be driven after the message is no longer displayed i ELOOP i ELOOP charging Please don t drive NOTE If the vehicle is driven while the message is displayed a beep sound is heard If you turn the steering wheel while the message is displayed it will feel heavier than normal but this does not indicate an abnormality The steering operation will return to normal after the message is no longer displayed Do not remove the jumper cables while the message is displayed 7 When finished carefully disconnect the cables in the reverse order described in the illustration 8 If the battery cover has been removed install it in the reverse order of removal 7 16 NOTE Verify that the covers are securely installed Starting a Flooded Engine If the engine fails to start it may be flooded excessive fuel in the engine Follow this procedure 1 If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try wait ten seconds and try again 2 Make sure the parking brake is on 3 Depress the accelerator all the way and hold it there 4 Depress the clutch pedal Manual transaxle or the brake pedal Automatic transaxle then press the push button start If the engine starts release the accelerator immediately because the engine will suddenly rev up 5 If the engine fails to s
142. station Max 30 seconds Recording stops automatically when the recordable time has elapsed You can then post or delete the recording Interior Features Bluetooth V How to Use Stitcher Radio What is Stitcher Radio Stitcher radio is an application which can be used to listen to Internet radio or stream podcasts Recommended content is automatically selected by registering content which you put into your favorites or by pressing the Like or Dislike button For details on Stitcher Radio refer to http stitcher com 1 Stitcher the Stitcher logo and the Stitcher trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Stitcher Inc used with permission NOTE To operate Stitcher Radio from your Bluetooth device perform the following in advance e Install the Stitcher Radio application to your device Create a Stitcher Radio account for your device e Log onto Stitcher Radio using your device 5 121 Interior Features Bluetooth Playback Select the Entertainment screen and display the T icon on the home screen When Stitcher is selected the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display Icon Function Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source Displays the station list Use t itch to other stati se to switch to other stations Dislike Evaluates the
143. sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES 2000 to present Gracenote Inc 5 67 Interior Features Audio System Updating the database The Gracenote media database can be updated using USB device 1 Connect a USB device containing the software for updating Gracenote Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Select the System tab and select Music Database Update Select The list of the update package stored in the USB device and the version are displayed RW N 5 Select the package to use the update 6 Select Linstall NOTE Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda Hands free Website
144. table and determine the function number for the desired setting Press the unlock side of the driver s door lock switch the same number of times as the selected function number Ex If you select function 2 press the unlock side of the switch only 2 times Three seconds after the function setting has been changed a beep sound will beep in the amount of the selected function number Ex Function number 3 3 beep sounds Manual transaxle vehicles Current Function Number Press unlock side of lock switch once Function Number 1 5 Press 2 times lock switch y Function Number 2 Cancel setting 5 Press 3 times Function Numter 3 yy Press 4 times Cancel setting Wait for 3 second Function set The number of beeps heard is the same as the selected function number Before Driving Doors and Locks Automatic transaxle vehicles Current Function Number Press unlock side of lock switch once Function Number 1 g Press 2 times Function Number 2 4 Press 3 times Function Numter 3 Function Number 4 4 Press 5 times 4 Press 6 times Function Numter 5 Press lock side of lock switch y Cancel setting y Function set The number of beeps heard is the same as the selected function number 4 Press 4 times i Function Number 6
145. the audio is operated during scan play the track being scan played is played normally Then the audio operation is performed If selected within a few seconds of a song which has started to play the previous song is selected If more than a few seconds have elapsed after a song has begun to play the song currently being played is replayed from the beginning Long press to fast reverse It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob 5 47 Interior Features Audio System Icon Function gt Il Plays a CD When selected again playback is temporarily stopped commander knob Advances to the beginning of the next song Long press to fast forward It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 Example of use When searching for a song from the top level of an MP3 WMA AAC CD 1 Select the icon and display the folder file list at the top level 2 When the folder is selected folders file lists in the folder are displayed 3 Select the desired song ma 10 20 Folder Name A Folder Name B Folder Name C Audio Filename 1 Audio Filename 2 NOTE SelectEY to move toa folder one level higher The appearance of the repeat and shuffle icons changes depending on the type of operation in which the fun
146. the key at an angle you may damage both key and nut Do not use a power impact wrench 3 Place the lug wrench on top of the key and apply pressure Turn the wrench counterclockwise 7 10 To install the antitheft lug nut 1 Place the special key on top of the nut and be sure to hold the key square to it If you hold the key at an angle you may damage both key and nut Do not use a power impact wrench 2 Place the lug wrench on top of the special key apply pressure and turn it clockwise Nut tightening torque 108 147 Nm kgfm ft lbf 12 14 80 108 V Mounting the Spare Tire 1 Remove dirt and grime from the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub including the hub bolts with a cloth A WARNING Make sure the mounting surfaces of the wheel hub and lug nuts are clean before changing or replacing tires When changing or replacing a tire not removing dirt and grime from the mounting surfaces of the wheel hub and hub bolts is dangerous The lug nuts could loosen while driving and cause the tire to come off resulting in an accident 2 Mount the spare tire 3 Install the lug nuts with the beveled edge inward tighten them by hand A WARNING Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts and bolts and do not tighten the lug nuts beyond the recommended tightening torque Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and bolts is dangerous The lug nuts could loosen while driving
147. the pick up button To reject the call press the hang up button Vv Hanging Up a Call Press the hang up button during the call A beep sound will confirm that call is ended Y Mute The microphone can be muted during a call 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Mute 3 Prompt Microphone muted Canceling mute 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Mute off 3 Prompt Microphone unmuted V Transferring a Call from Hands Free to a Device Mobile Phone Communication between the Hands Free unit and a device Mobile phone is canceled and the line can be switched to a standard call using a device Mobile phone 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Transfer call 3 Prompt Transferred call to phone 5 96 VY Transferring a Call from a Device Mobile Phone to Hands Free Communication between devices Mobile phone can be switched to Bluetooth Hands Free 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Transfer call 3 Prompt Transferred call to Hands Free system V Call interrupt A call can be interrupted to receive an incoming call from a third party Switch to a new incoming call using the following methods Method 1 1 Press the pick up button 2 Prompt Swapping calls Method 2 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Swap calls
148. the same manufacturer brand and tread pattern on all four wheels gt Do not mix worn tires gt The DSC may not operate correctly when tire chains are used or a temporary spare tire is installed because the tire diameter changes Y DSC OFF Switch Press the DSC OFF switch to turn off the TCS DSC The DSC OFF indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate Press the switch again to turn the TCS DSC back on The DSC OFF indicator light will turn off NOTE When DSC is on and you attempt to free the vehicle when it is stuck or drive it out of freshly fallen snow the TCS part of the DSC system will activate Depressing the accelerator will not increase engine power and freeing the vehicle may be difficult When this happens turn off the TCS DSC If the TCS DSC is off when the engine is turned off it automatically activates when the ignition is switched ON Leaving the TCS DSC on will provide the best traction If the DSC OFF switch is pressed and held for 10 seconds or more the DSC OFF switch malfunction detection function operates and the DSC system activates automatically The DSC OFF indicator light turns off while the DSC system is operative When Driving ABS TCS DSC 4 83 When Driving i ELOOP i ELOOP On conventional vehicles the kinetic energy that is generated when the vehicle is decelerated by applying the brakes or during engine braking ends up being discarded as heat By uti
149. the vehicle is moving and instead concentrate on the full time job of driving 8 20 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Event Data Recorder Event Data Recorder U S A and Canada This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash or near crash like situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash inv
150. to enter the cabin Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide it could cause loss of consciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin 3 26 Fuel Filler Lid and Cap A WARNING When removing the fuel filler cap loosen the cap slightly and wait for any hissing to stop Then remove it Fuel spray is dangerous Fuel can burn skin and eyes and cause illness if ingested Fuel spray is released when there is pressure in the fuel tank and the fuel filler cap is removed too quickly Before refueling stop the engine and always keep sparks and flames away from the filler neck Fuel vapor is dangerous It could be ignited by sparks or flames causing serious burns and injuries Additionally use of the incorrect fuel filler cap or not using a fuel filler cap may result in fuel leak which could result in serious burns or death in an accident Do not continue refueling after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continuing to add fuel after the fuel pump nozzle has shut off automatically is dangerous because overfilling the fuel tank may cause fuel overflow or leakage Fuel overflow and leakage could damage the vehicle and if the fuel ignites it could cause a fire and explosion resulting in serious injury or death Before Driving Fuel and Emission A CAUTION U S A and Canada Always use only a genuine Mazda fuel filler cap or an approved equivalent available at an Authorized Mazda De
151. used is displayed An audio source which cannot be used at that time is skipped and the previous audio source is displayed To change the audio source select the O icon again Communication Bluetooth related functions are available Navigation Navigation screen is displayed vehicles with navigation system If the SD card for the navigation system is not inserted the compass indicating the direction in which the vehicle is moving is displayed The compass may not indicate the correct bearing when the vehicle is stopped or traveling at a slow speed Settings i Overall setting menu Such as display sound Bluetooth and Language Depending on the grade and specification the screen display may differ V Volume Display Sound Controls Commander switch Audio control switch 5 36 Volume dial PUSH vor Volume switch Volume adjustment Turn the commander switch volume dial The volume switch on the steering switch can also be pressed Display setting Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Select the Display tab to select the item you would like to change Display OFF Clock The center display can be turned off Select Turn Display off to turn the display off When Turn Display Off and Show Clock js selected the center display turns off and the clock is displayed The center display can be turned back on as follows e Touch the
152. when transmitting DTMF via the dial pad The receiver of a DTMF ss transmission is generally a home telephone answering machine or a company s automated sae guidance call center Input the number using a dial pad 5 102 NOTE e If the ignition is switched off during a Hands Free call the line is transferred to the device Mobile phone automatically Ifthe DTMF code has two or more digits or symbols each one must be transmitted individually V Call Interrupt A call can be interrupted to receive an incoming call from a third party When is selected or the pick up button on the steering wheel is pressed the current call is held and the system switches to the new incoming call When End Answer is selected the current call is ended and the system switches to the new incoming call GSM network only When L gnore is selected or the hang up button on the steering wheel is pressed an incoming call is refused NOTE The function may not be available depending on the contractual content of the mobile device The function may not be operable depending on the type of the telephone network and the mobile device V Receiving and Replying to Messages available only with E mail SMS compatible phones SMS Short Message Service messages and E mail received by connected devices can be downloaded displayed and played read by the system Additionally replies can also
153. whichever comes first Reset method Press and hold the TRIP button with the ignition switched off then switch it on Keep pressing the TRIP button for more than 5 seconds The master warning light will flash for a few seconds when the reset is completed 1 The flexible setting is available in the United States and Puerto Rico Based on the engine operating conditions the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining oil life Mazda Genuine 0W 20 oil and Castrol 0W 20 oil are required to achieve optimum calculation performance 2 Once the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is selected the system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil VY Maintenance Monitor Type B 1 Select the icon on the home screen to display the Applications screen 2 Select the Maintenance to display the maintenance list screen 6 20 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance 3 Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change You can customize settings in the setup display as follows Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be switched on off Time months Displays the time or distance until maintenance is due Select this item to set the maintenance period Scheduled Due is displayed in red and the wrench indicator Maintenance Distance mile or km light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile or the
154. will automatically switch off approximately 30 seconds after switching the ignition off The time setting can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 To prevent discharging the battery do not leave the lights on while the engine is off unless safety requires them Without auto light control Switch Position OFF DOZ ty oe ACC or ACC or ACC or Ignition Position ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Headlights Off Off Off Off On Off Daytime running lights On Off On Off Off Off Taillights Parking lights License lights Off Off On On On On Side marker lights Dashboard illumination 1 It turns on while driving the vehicle 2 Ifthe driver s door is opened or 30 s have elapsed with the headlights turned on the headlights turn off 4 58 When Driving Switches and Controls With auto light control Switch Position OFF AUTO 2002 in ae ACC or ACC or ACC or ACC or Ignition Position ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Headlights Off Off Auto Off Off Off On Off Daytime running lights On Off Auto Off On Off Off Off Taillights Parking lights License lights off Off Auto On off On On On On Side marker lights Dashboard illumination jk by the sensor 2 It turns on while driving the vehic e The headlight and other light settings switch automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected 3 Whi
155. with their feet gt Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the front passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat bottom gt An object such as a seat cushion is put on the front passenger s seat or between the passenger s back and the seatback gt Aseat cover is put on the front passenger s seat gt Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child restraint system gt A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback gt Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint gt The seat is washed gt Liquids are spilled on the seat gt The front passenger seat is moved backward pushing into luggage or other items placed behind it gt The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat gt Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat gt An electric device is put on the front passenger s seat gt An additional electrical device such as a seat warmer is installed to the surface of the front passenger seat The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will deactivate if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on A CAUTION gt To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the sensor in the front seat cushion gt Do not place sharp objects on the f
156. 0 seconds e Press any button except the UNLOCK button on the key e A request switch is pressed e Auto re lock function After unlocking with the key all doors will automatically lock if any of the following operations are not performed within about 60 seconds If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system the hazard warning lights will flash for confirmation The time required for the doors to lock automatically can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 A door or the trunk lid is opened The push button start is switched to any position other than off With theft deterrent system When the doors are unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the key while the theft deterrent system is turned off the hazard warning lights will flash twice to indicate that the system is turned off Trunk button To open the trunk lid press and hold the trunk button until the trunk lid opens Zoe HOLD Panic button If you witness from a distance someone attempting to break into or damage your vehicle press and hold the panic button to activate the vehicle s alarm HOLD NOTE The panic button will work whether any door or the trunk lid is open or closed Turning on the alarm Pressing the panic button for 1 second or more will trigger the alarm for about 2 minutes and 30 seconds and the following will occur e The horn sounds intermittently e The hazard warning lights flas
157. 18 mph the headlights are switched to high beams when there are no vehicles ahead or approaching in the opposite direction The system switches the headlights to low beams when one of the following occurs e The system detects a vehicle or the headlights lights of a vehicle approaching in the opposite direction e The vehicle is driven on roads lined with streetlamps or on roads in well lit cities and towns e The vehicle is driven at less than about 20 km h 12 mph The recognition distance of the Forward Sensing Camera FSC varies according to the surrounding conditions Forward Sensing Camera FSC The warning light illuminates or flashes when the system has a malfunction Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 A CAUTION gt Do not adjust the vehicle height modify the headlight units or remove the camera otherwise the system will not operate normally gt Do not rely excessively on the High Beam Control System HBC and drive the vehicle while paying sufficient attention to safety Switch the headlights between the high beams and low beams manually if necessary Some models 4 95 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE The timing in which the system switches the headlights changes under the following conditions If the system does not switch the headlights appropriately manually switch between high and low beams according to the visibility as well as road and traffic conditions When there are
158. 2 36 40 44 48 Maintenance Interval x1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 x1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 SKYACTIV G 2 5 Drive belts I Engine oil amp filter R R IR RYIR JR RIRIRI_RIRIR COOLING SYSTEM Engine coolant Engine coolant level Replace at first 192 000 km 120 000 miles or 10 years after that every 96 000 km 60 000 miles or 5 years FUEL SYSTEM Air filter Fuel lines and hoses a Hoses and tubes for emission IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs Replace every 120 000 km 75 000 miles ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I CHASSIS and BODY Brake lines hoses and connections Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I Disc brakes I I I I Tire Rotation Rotate every 8 000 km 5 000 miles eae 33 Tire inflation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I I I I I I Steering operation and linkages I I Front and rear suspension ball joints and wheel bearing axial play I I Driveshaft dust boots I I Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72 000 km 45 000 miles or 5 years All locks and hinges Washer fluid level E Bo bef Eh Baik BiG E BA E E 6 11 Maintenance and Care Sch
159. 2 Wait for the beep sound 3 Say Call XXXXX Ex John Mobile 4 Follow the voice guidance to place the call Screen operation 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Contacts to display the contact list 3 Select the contact you would like to call to display the details for the contact 4 Select the desired phone number to make the call Import contact Download Phonebook Phonebook data from your device Mobile phone can be sent and registered to your Bluetooth Hands Free phonebook using Bluetooth Automatic downloading The Auto Download Contacts setting must be on When Hands Free is connected to the device the phonebook is downloaded automatically Refer to Communication Settings on page 5 107 Manually downloading If the Auto Download Contacts setting is off download the phonebook using the following procedure 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Contacts to display the contact list 3 Select Edit Contacts 4 Select Import All Contacts or Import Selected Contact to switch to the device operation 5 If import All Contacts is selected select Download 6 Download will be started from the mobile phone NOTE If Import All Contacts is performed after saving the phoneb
160. 20 centim tres entre la source de rayonnements et votre corps L metteur ne doit pas tre colocalis ni fonctionner conjointement avec autre antenne ou autre metteur 8 50 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity Mexico 0 RCPJOMA13 1301 8 51 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity Y Smart Brake Support SBS Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Distance Recognition Support System DRSS FCC ID HYQ DNMWROO6 FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator antenna and your body This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 8 52 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity This device complies with Industr
161. 5 4 51 Shift lock system ceeeeee 4 51 Transaxle ranges eeeeeeeees 4 50 B Battery canned Gaia ca aes 6 36 Maintenance s s s 6 37 Replacement c cecceceseeees 6 37 Specifications ceeeeseeeeeees 9 4 Battery runs out eee eeeeeeteeeeeeeee 7 14 Jump Starting cee eee 7 14 10 2 B Beep sounds Power steering warning buzzer 7 37 Beep Sounds Air bag front seat belt pretensioner system Warning eseese 7 34 Blind spot monitoring BSM system warning 7 36 Electric parking brake warning 7 37 FELOOP wigecteveciies aiiensces 7 36 Ignition not switched off STOP warning eeeeeee 7 35 Key left in trunk compartment WANE seinne e ea a 7 36 Key left in vehicle warning 7 36 Key removed from vehicle WAITING goeree anarei EREE TE 7 35 Lane departure warning 7 36 Lights on reminder eee 7 33 Request switch inoperable WAITING oo ceeesceseesseeseeeesseeseeeees 7 35 Seat belt warning c eee 7 34 Tire inflation pressure warning 7 36 Blind Spot Monitoring BSM System ee eeeeeeeeeneeeees 4 104 Bluetooth ceeeeceeseeseeseeeteereeeees 5 69 Bluetooth Audio Type A 5 108 Bluetooth Audio Type B 5 110 Bluetooth Hands Free Type A eins ie eae 5 91 Bluetooth Hands Free Type B siicesicccavecciaienc deen 5 98 Troubleshooting 0 0 0 5 124 Body Lubrication cecseeeeee
162. 5th gear 6th gear the gear will shift to M4 M5 4 52 Indicators Manual shift mode indicator In manual shift mode the M of the shift position indicator in the instrument panel illuminates Gear position indicator The numeral for the selected gear illuminates n M SS indicator NOTE Ifthe gears cannot be shifted down when driving at higher speeds the gear position indicator will flash twice to signal that the gears cannot be shifted down to protect the transaxle e Ifthe automatic transaxle fluid ATF temperature becomes too high there is the possibility that the transaxle will switch to automatic shift mode canceling manual shift mode and turning off the gear position indicator illumination This is a normal function to protect the automatic transaxle After the ATF temperature has decreased the gear position indicator illumination turns back on and driving in manual shift mode is restored Shifting You can shift gears up and down by operating the selector lever or the steering shift switches Manually Shifting up M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 To shift up to a higher gear move the selector lever back once To shift up to a higher gear with the steering shift switches pull the UP switch OFF toward you once with your fingers UP switch OFF When Driving Transaxle AWARNING Keep your hands on the steering wheel rim when using fingers
163. 6 mph Meter display for vehicle speed indicated in mph 1 mph 1 6 km h To increase speed using accelerator pedal Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate to the desired speed Press the SET or SET switch and release it immediately When Driving Cruise Control NOTE Accelerate if you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on Greater speed will not interfere with or change the set speed Take your foot off the accelerator to return to the set speed VY To Decrease Cruising Speed Press the SET switch and hold it The vehicle will gradually slow Release the switch at the speed you want Press the SET switch and release it immediately to adjust the preset speed Multiple operations will decrease the preset speed according to the number of times it is operated Decreasing speed with a single SET operation Meter display for vehicle speed indicated in km h 1 km h 0 6 mph Meter display for vehicle speed indicated in mph 1 mph 1 6 km h VY To Resume Cruising Speed at More Than 25 km h 16 mph If some other method besides the OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed such as applying the brake pedal and the system is still activated the most recent set speed will automatically resume when the RES switch is pressed If vehicle speed is below 25 km h 16 mph increase the vehicle speed up to 25 km h 16 mph or more and press the RES switch 4 147 When Driving Cruise
164. A e Type B This indicator light illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and turns off when the engine is started Type A Type B The power steering malfunction indicator light warning indication illuminates if there is a malfunction with the power steering while the engine is running If the indicator light warning indication illuminates park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine If the indicator light warning indication does not turn off even if the engine is restarted afterwards consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer NOTE e If the indicator light warning indication illuminates the power steering will not operate normally If this happens the steering wheel can still be operated however the operation may feel heavy compared to normal and the steering wheel could vibrate when turning Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which will make the steering feel heavy but this does not indicate a problem If this occurs park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal V Air Bag Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light ey ry If the air bag front seat belt pretensioner system is working properly the warning light illuminates when the ignition is switched ON or after the engine is cranked The warning light turn
165. Always make sure the shoulder portion of the seat belt is positioned across your shoulder and near your neck but never under your arm on your neck or on your upper arm Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat Belt The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous In a collision this would concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area causing serious injury Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible A CAUTION Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled so try to keep them clean For more details about cleaning the seat belts refer to Cleaning the Lap Shoulder Belt Webbing page 6 69 Ring 2 16 Essential Safety Equipment Seat Belt Systems V Pregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions Pregnant women should always wear seat belts Ask your doctor for specific recommendations The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly but never across the stomach area Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts Check with your doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions V Emergency Locking Mode When the seat belt is fastened it will always be in the emergency locking mode In the emergency locking mode the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the retractor will lock in position during a
166. Always keep the jack clean e Make sure the moving parts are kept free from dirt or rust e Make sure the screw thread is adequately lubricated Vv Spare Tire Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire The temporary spare tire is lighter and smaller than a conventional tire and is designed only for emergency use and should be used only for VERY short periods Temporary spare tires should NEVER be used for long drives or extended periods A WARNING Do not install the temporary spare tire on the front wheels driving wheels Driving with the temporary spare tire on one of the front driving wheels is dangerous Handling will be affected You could lose control of the vehicle especially on ice or snow bound roads and have an accident Move a regular tire to the front wheel and install the temporary spare tire to the rear If Trouble Arises Flat Tire A CAUTION gt When using the temporary spare tire driving stability may decrease compared to when using only the conventional tire Drive carefully gt To avoid damage to the temporary spare tire or to the vehicle observe the following precautions gt Do not exceed 80 km h 50 mph gt Avoid driving over obstacles Also do not drive through an automatic car wash This tire s diameter is smaller than a conventional tire so the ground clearance is reduced about 10 mm 0 4 in gt Do not use a tire chain on this tire because it will not fit properl
167. Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible 2 36 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint V Using LATCH Lower Anchor Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH child restraint systems in the rear seats Both anchors must be used otherwise the seat will bounce around and put the child in danger Most LATCH child restraint systems must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective If they have a tether you must use it to better assure your child s safety A WARNING Follow the manufacturer s instructions for the use of the child restraint system An unsecured child restraint system is dangerous In a sudden stop or a collision it could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants Make sure the child restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions Never attach two child restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor Attaching two child restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous In a collision one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child restraint system attachments and it may break causing serious injury or death If you use the seat position for another child restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is occupied use the center seat belts instead and the tether if tether equipped Make sure the child restraint system is properly secured
168. Bluetooth Hands Free Type A V Making a Call Phonebook Usage Telephone calls can be made by saying the name of a person voice tag whose phone number has been registered in Bluetooth Hands Free in advance Refer to Phonebook registration 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Call 3 Prompt Name please 4 Say Beep XXXXX Ex John s phone Say a voice tag registered in the phonebook 5 Prompt Calling XXXXX Ex John s phone XXXX Ex at home Is this correct Voice tag and phone number location registered in phonebook 6 Say Beep Yes 7 Prompt Dialing NOTE The Call command and the voice tag can be combined Ex In Step 2 say Call John s phone then Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped Phonebook registration Phone numbers can be registered to the Bluetooth Hands Free phonebook NOTE Do this function only when parked It is too distracting to attempt while driving and you may make too many errors to be effective Interior Features Bluetooth Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Phonebook 3 Prompt Select one of the following New entry edit list names delete erase all or import contact 4 Say Beep New entry 5 Prompt Name please 6 Say Beep XXXXX Ex Mary s phone
169. CTIVSENSE e The vehicle speed is 70 km h 44 mph or faster e The vehicle is driven on a straight road or road with gentle curves On the type A instrument cluster the lane indication is indicated in the multi information display Indication on display The LDWS does not operate in the following cases e The system cannot detect white or yellow lines e The vehicle speed is less than 65 km h 40 mph The vehicle is making a sharp curve The vehicle is making a curve at an inadequate speed 4 101 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE The LDWS does not operate until the system detects a white or yellow line on either the left or right e When the system detects a white or yellow line on one side only the system will activate the warning only when the vehicle deviates on the side where the white or yellow line is being detected The distance and warning sensitivity likelihood of a warning which the system uses to determine the possibility of a lane departure can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Auto cancel Vehicle with type A instrument cluster The lane indication border line is indicated in the display The LDWS is enabled automatically when operation conditions are met and the lane indication is indicated in the display Vehicle with type B instrument cluster In the following cases the LDWS cancels automatically and the LDWS warning light in the instrument
170. Communication Settings on page 5 107 After a device is registered the system automatically identifies the device By activating Bluetooth Hands Free again or by activating Bluetooth Hands Free first after switching the ignition from OFF to ACC the device connection condition is indicated in the center display IMPORTANT note about pairing and automatic reconnection e If pairing is redone on the same mobile phone device first clear Mazda displayed on the Bluetooth setting screen of the mobile device e When the OS of the device is updated the pairing information may be deleted If this happens reprogram the pairing information to the Bluetooth unit e Before you pair your device make sure that Bluetooth is ON both on your phone and on the vehicle Device selection If several devices have been paired the Bluetooth unit links the device last paired If you would like to link a different paired device it is necessary to change the link The order of device priority after the link has been changed is maintained even when the ignition is switched off Connecting other devices 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen 2 Select the Devices tab 3 Select Bluetooth 4 Turn the Bluetooth setting on 5 Select the name of the device you would like to connect 6 Phone and Audio selection Connects both devices as Hands
171. Controls NOTE Switching the auto wiper lever from the OFF to the AUTO position while driving activates the windshield wipers once after which they operate according to the rainfall amount The auto wiper control may not operate when the rain sensor temperature is about 10 C or lower or about 85 C or higher e If the windshield is coated with water repellent the rain sensor may not be able to sense the amount of rainfall correctly and auto wiper control may not operate properly e If dirt or foreign matter Such as ice or matter containing salt water adheres to the windshield above the rain sensor or if the windshield is iced it could cause the wipers to move automatically However if the wipers cannot remove this ice dirt or foreign matter the auto wiper control will stop operation In this case set the wiper lever to the low speed position or high speed position for manual operation or remove the ice dirt or foreign matter by hand to restore the auto wiper operation e If the auto wiper lever is left in the AUTO position the wipers could operate automatically from the effect of strong light sources electromagnetic waves or infrared light because the rain sensor uses an optical sensor It is recommended that the auto wiper lever be switched to the OFF position other than when driving the vehicle under rainy conditions e The auto wiper control functions can be turned off Refer to Personalization Featur
172. D WS ask aa eiin 4 33 EDWS GOEF 20eesn hatha 4 33 Low engine coolant temperature eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 43 Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC aeneon cece 4 45 Power steering malfunction 4 34 SECUTI acena ni 4 44 Select mode noine taie nini 4 44 Shift position cece 4 43 Smart City Brake Support SCBS saitechde eee ete 4 43 Smart City Brake Support SCBS OFF occ eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 42 TCS DSG ratier 4 42 Turn signal hazard warning 4 44 Inside Trunk Release Lever 3 22 Inspecting Brake Clutch Fluid eyeliner enese ey Balad eee 6 31 Inspecting Coolant Level 6 29 Inspecting Engine Oil Level 6 28 Inspecting Washer Fluid Level 6 31 Instrument Cluster eee eeeeeeeeees 4 10 10 5 Index I Interior Cave nesonora atic 6 67 Cleaning the Lap Shoulder Belt Webbing cccececceeseeseeeteeteeteeee 6 69 Cleaning the Upholstery and Interior dl Dal a AAEE EEES 6 67 Cleaning the Window Interiors 6 70 Dashboard Precautions 6 67 Interior Lights ossessione 5 128 Courtesy Lights cee 5 128 Map Lights ce eeeeseeseeeeee 5 128 Overhead Lights eee 5 128 J Ja Chea N aeutien day 7 4 Jump Starting 0 eee eeeeseeseeeeeseeeees 7 14 K Key Suspend Function ceee 3 8 Keyless Entry System 0 0 0 cee 3 4 Keys aiei e eaee 3 2 Key suspend function 0 3 8 Transmitter sseeeeeeeeee
173. D16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating Here is an explanation of the various components of that tire size and load index rating Note that the tire size and load index rating may be different from the example T Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks as designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA us 115 is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters This three digit number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 8 29 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A 70 70 is the aspect ratio This two digit number indicates the tire s ratio of height to width D D is the tire construction symbol D indicates diagonal ply construction 16 16 is the wheel rim diameter in inches 90 90 is the Load Index This two or three digit number indicates how much weight each tire can support M M is the speed rating The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of the tire is rated Letter Rating Speed Rating M 81 mph 8 30 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Location of the Tire Label Placard You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important informatio
174. DIO 40 A Audio system 14 EPB R 20 A Electric parking brake RH 15 ENG MAIN 40 A Engine control system 16 ABS DSC M 50A ABS Dynamic stability control system 17 CABIN B 50A For protection of various circuits Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance DESCRIPTION oR G PROTECTED COMPONENT 18 WIPER 20A Front window wiper and washer 19 HEATER 40A Air conditioner 20 DCDC REG 30A For protection of various circuits 21 ENGINE IG1 7 5 A Engine control system 22 C U IG1 15A For protection of various circuits 23 HTS w L 15A Headlight low beam LH 24 H L LOWR ISA Headlight low beam RH 25 ENGINE3 15A Engine control system 26 ENGINE2 15A Engine control system 27 ENGINE1 15A Engine control system 28 AT 15A Transaxle control system a 29 H CLEAN 20A 30 A C 7 5A Air conditioner 31 AT PUMP 15A Transaxle control system 32 STOP 10A Brake lights 33 R WIPER 15A Theft deterrent system 34 H L HI 20A Headlight high beam 35 HIDR 15A 36 FOG 15A Fog lights 37 ENG B 7 5A Engine control system 38 AUDIO2 7 5A Audio system 39 GLOW SIG 5A 40 METER2 7 5A 41 METER1 10A Instrument cluster 42 SRS1 75A Air bag 43 BOSE 25A Bose Sound System equipped model 44 AUDIO1 15A Audio system 45 ABS DSC S 30A ABS Dynamic stability control system 46 FUEL PUMP 15A Fuel system 47 FUEL WARM 25A 48 TAIL 15A Taillights License plate lig
175. Dealer as soon as possible The system may not work properly in an accident A WARNING Do not allow an occupant in the front passenger s seat to sit with a posture which makes it difficult for the front passenger occupant classification sensor to detect the occupant correctly Sitting in the front passenger s seat with a posture which makes it difficult for the front passenger occupant classification sensor to detect the occupant correctly is dangerous If the front passenger occupant classification sensor cannot detect the occupant sitting on the front passenger s seat correctly the front passenger front and side air bags and pretensioner system may not operate deploy or they may operate deploy accidentally The front passenger will not have the supplementary protection of the air bags or the accidental operation deployment of the air bags could result in serious injury or death Under the following conditions the front passenger occupant classification sensor cannot detect a passenger sitting on the front passenger s seat correctly and the deployment non deployment of the air bags cannot be controlled as indicated in the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on off condition chart For example 2 58 Essential Safe ty Equipment SRS Air Bags gt A front passenger is seated as shown in the following figure Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags gt A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat
176. Deployment Criteria page 2 54 With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System In addition the front passenger air bag is designed to only deploy when the front passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger s seat For details refer to the front passenger occupant classification system page 2 57 V Side Air Bags The side air bags are mounted in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force the system inflates the side air bag only on the side in which the vehicle was hit The side air bag inflates quickly to reduce injury to the driver or front passenger s chest caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window For more details about air bag deployment refer to SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria page 2 54 2 51 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System In addition the front passenger side air bag is designed to only deploy when the front passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger s seat For details refer to the front passenger occupant classification system page 2 57 Vv Curtain Air Bags The curtain air bags are mounted in the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both sides When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than m
177. Driving i ACTIVSENSE Forward Sensing Camera FSC Your vehicle is equipped with a Forward Sensing Camera FSC The Forward Sensing Camera FSC is positioned near the rearview mirror and used by the following systems e High Beam Control System HBC e Lane Departure Warning System LDWS e Smart Brake Support SBS The Forward Sensing Camera FSC determines the conditions ahead of the vehicle while traveling at night and detects traffic lanes The distance in which the Forward Sensing Camera FSC can detect objects varies depending on the surrounding conditions Some models 4 135 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE A CAUTION gt Do not apply accessories stickers or film to the windshield near the Forward Sensing Camera FSC If the area in front of the Forward Sensing Camera FSC lens is obstructed it will cause the system to not operate correctly Consequently each system may not operate normally which could lead to an unexpected accident gt Do not disassemble or modify the Forward Sensing Camera FSC Disassembly or modification of the Forward Sensing Camera FSC will cause a malfunction or mistaken operation Consequently each system may not operate normally which could lead to an unexpected accident gt Heed the following cautions to assure the correct operation of the Forward Sensing Camera FSC gt The direction of the Forward Sensing Camera FSC has been finely adjusted therefore do not change the ins
178. E Smart Brake Support SBS Smart Brake Support SBS is a system which alerts the driver of a possible collision using an indicator and warning sound in the instrument cluster while the vehicle is being driven at about 15 km h or faster 10 mph or faster and the system s radar sensor determines that your vehicle may hit a vehicle ahead Furthermore if the radar sensor determines that a collision is unavoidable the automatic brake control is performed to reduce damage in the event of a collision In addition when the driver depresses the brake pedal the brakes operate more quickly to assist the driver vehicles with brake fluid pre fill A WARNING Do not rely completely on the Smart Brake Support SBS system and always drive carefully The Smart Brake Support SBS is designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision not avoid an accident The ability to detect an obstruction is limited depending on the obstruction weather conditions or traffic conditions Therefore if the accelerator pedal or brake pedal is mistakenly operated it could result in an accident Always verify the safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safe distance from vehicles ahead or on coming vehicles A CAUTION If the vehicle is towed or you are towing something switch the Smart Brake Support SBS system off to prevent a mistaken operation 4 132 Some models When Driving i ACTIVSENSE
179. Free and Bluetooth audio Phone Only selection Connects as a Hands Free device Audio Only selection Connects as Bluetooth audio Interior Features Bluetooth NOTE The following functions can be used for the Hands Free or audio e Hands Free Phone calls and E mail SMS e Audio Bluetooth audio Pandora Aha Stitcher radio Disconnecting a device 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Select the Devices tab Select Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth setting on nA A WwW N Select the device name which is currently connected 6 Select Disconnect Deleting a device Selecting and deleting devices 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Select the Devices tab Select Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth setting on nA A U N Select the device name which you would like to delete 6 Select Unpair This Device 7 Select Yes Deleting all devices 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen 2 Select the Devices tab 3 Select Bluetooth 4 Select Custom Settings 5 87 Interior Features Bluetooth 5 Select Unpair All Paired Devices 6 Select Yes Changing PIN code PIN code 4 digits can be changed
180. ION Do not place objects or apply force to the auxiliary jack USB port with the plug connected NOTE e Insert the plug into the auxiliary jack USB port securely e Insert or pull out the plug with the plug perpendicular to the auxiliary jack USB port hole e Insert or remove the plug by holding its base V How to use AUX mode Type A 1 Switch the ignition to ACC or ON 2 Press the power volume dial to turn the audio system on Interior Features Audio System 3 Press the media button MEDIA of the audio unit to change to the AUX mode NOTE When the device is not connected to the auxiliary jack the mode does not switch to the AUX mode Adjust the audio volume using the portable audio device or audio unit Audio adjustments other than audio volume can only be done using the portable audio device e Ifthe connection plug is pulled out from the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode noise may occur 5 55 Interior Features Audio System VY How to use USB mode Type A Random button Audio display Text button Play Pause button Repeat button STROUD GIZA EIN AEN EGE STITT CLOCK SdAN Track down Reverse button Track up Fast forward button Type USB mode This unit does not support a USB 3 0 device In addition other devices may not be supported depending on the model or OS version Playback 1 Switch the ignition to ACC or ON Playable data M
181. If the contact is long pressed when the favorites list is displayed the contact information can be edited deleted moved Telephone Number Input NOTE Practice this while parked until you are confident you can do it while driving in a non taxing road situation If you are not completely comfortable make all calls from a safe parking position and only start driving when you can devote your full attention to driving 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 When Dial Phone is pressed the dial pad is displayed 3 Input the telephone number using the dial pad 4 Select amp to make the call Numeral or symbol entry Use the dial pad Long press the to input Select to delete the currently input value Long press 4 to delete all input values Redial Function Makes a call to the last person called latest person on outgoing call record from the mobile phone Vvehicle 1 Press the talk button 2 Wait for the beep sound 3 Say Redial Call back Function Makes a call to the last person who called your latest person on incoming call record mobile phone vehicle 1 Press the talk button 2 Wait for the beep sound 3 Say Call back Mobile 911 U S A Canada only If the vehicle is involved in a moderate to severe collision a call is made automatically to 911 from the connected device The Emergen
182. Irvine Center Drive Irvine CA 92618 2922 U S A P O Box 19734 Irvine CA 92623 9734 U S A TEL 1 800 222 5500 in U S A 949 727 1990 outside U S A VCANADA Mazda Canada Inc 55 Vogell Road Richmond Hill Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada TEL 1 800 263 4680 in Canada 905 787 7000 outside Canada Y PUERTO RICO USS Virgin Island International Automotive Distributor Group LLC Mazda de Puerto Rico P O Box 191850 San Juan Puerto Rico 00919 1850 TEL 787 641 1777 Vv MEXICO Mazda Motor de Mexico Mario Pani 150 PB Col Lomas de Santa Fe Mexico D F C P 05300 Del Cuajimalpa TEL Center of Attention to Clients 01 800 016 2932 in Mexico VGUAM Triple J Motors 157 South Marine Drive Tamuning GUAM 96911 USA P O Box 6066 Tamuning Guam 96931 TEL 671 649 6555 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Mazda Importer Distributors Y SAIPAN Pacific International Marianas Inc d b a Midway Motors P O Box 887 Saipan MP 96950 TEL 670 234 7524 Triple J Saipan Inc d b a Triple J Motors P O Box 500487 Saipan MP 96950 0487 TEL 670 234 7133 3051 YV AMERICAN SAMOA Polynesia Motors Inc P O Box 1120 Pago Pago American Samoa 96799 TEL 684 699 9347 8 13 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects U S A If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
183. Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal tools to contact the positive or negative terminal of the battery when working near a battery Do not allow the positive terminal to contact the vehicle body Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous Hydrogen gas produced during normal battery operation could ignite and cause the battery to explode An exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries Keep all flames including cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells 6 36 4 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Keep all flames including cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous Hydrogen gas produced during normal battery operation could ignite and cause the battery to explode An exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries NOTE Before performing battery maintenance remove the battery cover by pulling the tab To get the best service from a battery e Keep it securely mounted Keep the top clean and dry Keep terminals and connections clean tight and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease Rinse off spilled electrolyte immediately with a solution of water and baking soda e Ifthe vehicle will not be used for an extended time disconnect the battery cables and charge the battery every six weeks V Battery Replacement Contact an Authorized M
184. Locking doors using the request Once All Driver s Refer to Unlocking switch transmitter can be Doors Once All Settings with x changed Twice Doors on page Request Twice 5 49 Switch With the advanced keyless function on page 3 13 Advanced keyless entry x system Refer to Refer to Locking Vehicle Advanced Unlocking Keyless The volume of the answer back High x with Entry beep during advanced keyless jedi Medium Refer to Request System on entry system operation can be edum Low Settings Switch x page 3 9 changed Off on page With the 5 49 advanced keyless function on page 3 13 The function to automatically R lock the doors when leaving the efer to vehicle while carrying the key oi omon Settings m x can be changed on page 5 49 The time required for the doors mei ds x to telock automatically after 60 60 Refer to Switchiransmittercan be sevonds seconds Settings changed ae asi gee seconds 5 49 9 13 Personalization Features ica R Factory Available Settings change method Setting Settings O Q The time required for the a tes XxX interior lamp to turn off 30 30 Refer to o automatically can be changed minutes minutes Settings XxX Illumination prevents battery depletion 10 on page ay l when a door is open ajar jth ae 5 49 efer to Illuminated 60 Entry seconds x System on The time required for the 30 p
185. Loom Zoom All children instinctively know it A few adults still remember it One unique car company refuses to outgrow it In grown up language it means the exhilaration and liberation that come from experiencing sheer motion But as usual children put it much better and simply call it Go Zoom Zoom We practice it every day It s why we build the kind of cars we do Zoom Zoom Can we re awaken it in you today A Word to Mazda Owners Thank you for choosing a Mazda We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete customer satisfaction in mind To help ensure enjoyable and trouble free operation of your Mazda read this manual carefully and follow its recommendations An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best So when maintenance or service is necessary that s the place to go Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best possible service We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product Mazda Motor Corporation HIROSHIMA JAPAN Important Notes About This Manual Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda Should you resell the vehicle leave this manual with it for the next owner All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing Because improvement is a constant goal at Mazda we reserve
186. Mazda Dealer will reset the electronic codes of your remaining keys and immobilizer system Bring all the remaining keys to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset Starting the vehicle with a key that has not been reset is not possible V Operation NOTE The engine may not start and security indicator light may illuminate or flash if the key is placed in an area where it is difficult for the system to detect the signal such as on the dashboard or in the glove compartment Move the key to a location within the signal range switch the ignition off and then restart the engine e Signals from a TV or radio station or from a transceiver or mobile telephone could interfere with your immobilizer system If you are using the proper key and the engine fails to start check the security indicator light 3 40 Armin The system is armed when the push button start is pressed from ON to off The security indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes every 2 seconds until the system is disarmed Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 Disarming The system is disarmed when the ignition is switched ON with the correct programmed key The security indicator light illuminates for about 3 seconds and then turns off If the engine does not start with the correct key and the security indicator light remains illuminated or flashing try the following Make sure the key is within the operational range for signal transmissio
187. P3 WMA AAC file 2 Press the power volume dial to turn the audio system on 3 Press the media button MEDIA to switch to the USB mode and start playback NOTE e Some devices such as smart phones may require a setting change to allow operation using a USB connection e When the USB device is not connected the mode does not switch to USB mode e When there is no playable data in the USB device NO CONTENTS is flashed e Playback of the USB device is in the order of the folder numbers Folders which have no MP3 WMA AAC files are skipped Do not remove the USB device while in the USB mode The data may be damaged 5 56 Media Scan button PUSH POWER Folder up button Folder down button Pause To stop playback press the play pause button 4 Press the button again to resume playback Fast forward Reverse Press and hold the fast forward button gt gt I to advance through a track at high speed Press and hold the reverse button M4 to reverse through a track at high speed Track search Press the track up button gt gt I once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track Press the track down button M4 within a few seconds after playback begins to track down to the beginning of the previous track Press the track down button M4 after a few seconds have elapsed to start playback from the beginning of the current track Folder search To change to th
188. Placard visi cccssscentcscestdevesesaessecencses Tire Maintenance Vehicle Loading eee 8 37 Steps for Determining the Correct Load FAME AEE T 8 43 Declaration of Conformity 0000 8 44 Declaration of Conformity 8 44 Service Publications scsssssessees 8 54 Service Publications ceeeeeee 8 54 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance Customer Assistance U S A Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business We are here to serve you All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel we recommend that you take the following steps NOTE If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer Y STEP 1 Contact Your Mazda Dealer Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer This is the quickest and best way to address the issue e If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS SALES SERVICE or PARTS MANAGER then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER If it becomes necessary to have the comp
189. R R R R R R R COOLING SYSTEM Replace at first 192 000 km 120 000 miles or 10 years after 1 Engine coolant that every 96 000 km 60 000 miles or 5 years FUEL SYSTEM Air filter R Fuel lines and hoses I I Hoses and tubes for emission I IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs Replace every 120 000 km 75 000 miles CHASSIS and BODY Brake lines hoses and connections I I Disc brakes I I I I Tire Rotation Rotate every 12 000 km 7 500 miles Steering operation and linkages I I Front and rear suspension ball joints and wheel I I bearing axial play Driveshaft dust boots I I Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72 000 km 45 000 miles or 5 years 6 7 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Number of months or kilometers miles whichever comes first Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 x1000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 x1000 miles 7 5 15 22 5 30 37 5 45 52 5 60 Maintenance Interval AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Cabin air filter R R Chart symbols I Inspect Inspect and clean repair adjust fill up or replace if necessary R Replace L Lubricate T Tighten Remarks 1 Use of FL 22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant Using engine coolant other than FL 22 may cause serious damage to the engine and cooling s
190. S Operation Conditions Refer to Smart City Brake Support SCBS on page 4 127 Distance Recognition Support System DRSS Operation Conditions and Warnings Refer to Distance Recognition Support System DRSS on page 4 109 Vehicle Speed Setting Using Cruise Control Refer to Cruise Control on page 4 145 Turn by Turn TBT Direction and Distance and Lane Guidance Vehicle Speed Each setting adjustment for the active driving display can be performed on the center display Type B audio 1 2 3 e o o o o Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Select the AD Disp tab Select the desired item and perform the setting adjustment Height Active driving display position Brightness Control Method for adjusting screen brightness Automatically Manually Calibration Brightness initialization setting when selecting automatic adjustment Brightness Brightness adjustment when selecting manual adjustment Navigation On Off Active Driving Display On Off Reset 4 21 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Warning Indicator Lights V Type A Warning Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas Display example Displays as follows E Charging system Master malfunction warning Stop Vehicle light in a safe location A Indication in display and master warning light in instrument cluster are illuminated at same time This indic
191. SENSE NOTE In the following cases the Forward Sensing Camera FSC cannot detect target objects correctly and each system may be unable to operate normally The height of the vehicle ahead is low You drive your vehicle at the same speed as the vehicle ahead Headlights are not turned on during the night or when going through a tunnel In the following cases the Forward Sensing Camera FSC may not be able to detect target objects correctly When driving next to walls with no patterning including fences and longitudinally striped walls The taillights of the vehicle ahead are turned off A vehicle is outside the illumination range of the headlights The vehicle is making a sharp curve or ascending or descending a steep slope e Entering or exiting a tunnel Heavy luggage is loaded causing the vehicle to tilt Strong light is shone at the front of the vehicle back light or high beam light from on coming vehicles There are many light emitters on the vehicle ahead When the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off at nighttime The vehicle ahead has a special shape 4 137 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Radar Sensor Front Your vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor front The following systems also use the radar sensor front e Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC e Distance Recognition Support System DRSS e Smart Brake Support SBS
192. TA systems become operable and the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indication indicator light turns off 4 108 NOTE When the ignition is switched off the condition before the system was turned off is maintained For example if the ignition is switched OFF while the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA systems are operational the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA systems remain operational the next time the ignition is switched ON The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA systems are turned off when the battery is disconnected such as when the battery terminals or fuses have been removed and re installed To turn the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA systems back on press the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch Distance Recognition Support System DRSS The Distance Recognition Support System DRSS measures the distance between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead using a radar sensor front while the vehicle speed is 30 km h or faster 19 mph or faster and indicates a recommended distance to maintain between the vehicles Furthermore if your vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead more closely than the appropriate distance to maintain between the vehicles the vehicle ahead indication in the multi information display or the active driving display with active driving display is flashed to advise th
193. TE Distance to empty mode e Ifany of the INFO switches up A down This mode displays the approximate V or INFO button is pressed while a distance you can travel on the remaining message is displayed it will no longer be fuel based on the fuel economy displayed the next time the ignition is switched ON e After the vehicle is serviced and the remaining time distance is reset the message for the next maintenance period will be displayed when the remaining Type A distance or time to the next maintenance period approaches 0 displays when engine is started D l t t E t e If there are multiple messages they are IS a n Ce O m p y displayed according to their order If OFF is set for Messages messages are 1 not displayed mli es V Trip Computer and INFO Switch The following information can be selected Type B by pressing the up A or down W part of the INFO switch with the ignition RAN GE switched ON e Approximate distance you can travel on the available fuel wl i mi l es e Average fuel economy Current fuel economy J JR R e Average vehicle speed e Lane departure warning system LDWS display Type A instrument cluster e Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC display Type A instrument cluster e Distance Recognition Support System DRSS display Type A instrument cluster e Warning Type A instrument cluster If you have any problems with your trip computer consult an Authorized Mazda D
194. To change to the previous folder press the folder down button W or press the folder up button A to advance to the next folder Music scan During music CD playback This function scans the titles on a CD and plays 10 seconds of each song to aid you in finding a song you want to listen to Press and hold the scan button MEDIA during playback to start the scan play operation the track number will flash Press and hold the scan button MEDIA again to cancel scan playback Interior Features Audio System During MP3 WMA AAC CD playback This function scans the titles in a folder currently being played and plays 10 seconds of each song to aid you in finding a song you want to listen to Press and hold the scan button MEDIA during playback to start the scan play operation the track number will flash Press and hold the scan button MEDIA again to cancel scan playback NOTE If the unit is left in scan normal playback will resume where scan was selected Repeat playback During music CD playback 1 Press the repeat button 1 during playback to play the current track repeatedly TRACK RPT is displayed 1 is displayed next to RPT at the bottom of the display area 2 Press the button again to cancel the repeat playback During MP3 WMA AAC CD playback Track repeat 1 Press the repeat button 1 during playback to play the current track repeatedly TRACK RPT is displayed f is disp
195. UULCTI As 2 TE deeederue ds 2 54 Supplemental restraint system COMPONENHS 0 eeeeeeeeseeeeteeeteeeee 2 48 Starting the Engine cece 4 3 Steering Wheel cceeeceereeseeees 3 29 Horn eaten dee eat 4 69 Storage Compartments 5 133 Center console eeeeeteeeees 5 134 Glove compartment 5 134 Overhead console 0 5 133 Rear coat hooks ccceceee 5 134 Storage pocket ceeeeeeeeees 5 133 Storage Pocket cceceseeseeseeeeee 5 133 Sunshadei iets eds ital eee 3 38 SUNVISOTS iio Sesep Steet alent 5 127 T Tachometer ceeeeseseeeeereeseeeeeeees 4 12 Theft Deterrent System 06 3 41 Tiedown Hooks castes tice tion 6 7 21 Tire Information cceeeeseeeeeees 8 25 10 8 T Tire Pressure Monitoring System 4 149 Tiesin ena n din edad 6 40 Blat Tirei crepes innisettar 7 3 Replacing a Tire 0 0 6 42 Replacing a Wheel ee 6 43 Snow tires oo eeeeeeeeeeceeeteeneeee 3 46 Specifications cceeeeeeeeeees 9 7 Temporary Spare Tire 6 43 Tire Chas vaccagniieniees 3 46 Tire Inflation Pressure 6 41 Tire Rotation seses 6 41 Uniform tire quality grading system UTOGS Jn enans 8 23 Towing Recreational towing 6 3 49 Trailer TOWING eeeeseseeeeees 3 49 Towing Description cceeceees 7 20 Traction Control System TCS 4 81 Transmitter einer rena
196. Use only the front and rear jacking positions recommended in this manual Attempting to jack the vehicle in positions other than those recommended in this manual is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and seriously injure or even kill someone Use only the front and rear jacking positions recommended in this manual Do not jack up the vehicle in a position other than the designated jack up position or place any objects on or under the jack Jacking up the vehicle in a position other than the designated jack up position or placing objects on or under the jack is dangerous as it could deform the vehicle body or the vehicle could fall off the jack resulting in an accident Use only the jack provided with your Mazda Using a jack that is not designed for your Mazda is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and seriously injure someone Never place objects under the jack Jacking the vehicle with an object under the jack is dangerous The jack could slip and someone could be seriously injured by the jack or the falling vehicle 6 Insert the jack lever and attach the lug wrench to tire jack 7 Turn the jack handle clockwise and raise the vehicle high enough so that the spare tire can be installed Before removing the lug nuts make sure your Mazda is firmly in position and that it cannot slip or move If Trouble Arises Flat Tire AWARNING Do not jack up the vehicle higher than is necessary
197. a tempting place to play by latching the rear seats doors and the trunk and keeping the keys where children can not play with them Leaving children or animals unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous Babies left sleeping and children who lock themselves in cars or trunks can die very quickly from heat prostration Do not leave your children or pets alone in a car at any time Do not leave the car the rear folding seats or the trunk unlocked Before Driving Doors and Locks Vv Opening the Trunk Lid from the Inside Slide the inside trunk release lever in the direction of the arrow The lever is made of material that will glow for hours in the darkness of the trunk following a brief exposure to ambient light The inside trunk release lever is located on the inside of the trunk lid ws 3 23 Before Driving Fuel and Emission Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions V Fuel Requirements Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table Fuel Octane Rating Anti knock index Regular unleaded fuel 87 R M 2 method or above 91 RON or above U S federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane 91 RON could cause the emission control system t
198. abits for your own benefit e Observe posted speed limits and drive at speeds that are safe for the existing weather conditions e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking 8 35 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A A CAUTION If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tire for damage If the tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove the tire and rim and replace it with your spare tire If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest vehicle or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected 8 36 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Vehicle Loading A WARNING Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle damage This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize y
199. acement distance Oil Change Due is displayed in red and the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile Oil life Displays only in flexible setting Displays the engine oil life until the oil replacement is due Oil Change Due is displayed in red and the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the remaining oil life distance is less than 500 km 300 mile or remaining days are less than 15 whichever comes first Reset In flexible setting Resets the remaining oil life to 100 In fixed setting Resets the remaining distance to the initial value Once the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is selected the system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil 6 21 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Owner Maintenance Precautions The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible When Refueling e Brake and clutch fluid level page 6 31 e Engine coolant level page 6 29 e Engine oil level page 6 28 e Washer fluid level page 6 31 At Least Monthly Tire inflation pressures page 6 41 At Least Twice a Year For Example Every Spring and Fall
200. ads It may cause tire slipping NOTE When the sport mode is selected driving at higher engine speeds increases and it may increase fuel consumption Mazda recommends to cancel the sport mode on normal driving e Drive mode cannot be switched in the following conditions e ABS TCS DSC is operating The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system cruise control is operating e Steering wheel is being operated abruptly Y Drive Selection Switch NOTE e When the ignition is switched off the sport Press the drive selection switch to the Modeiscanceled SPORT side forward to select the sport mode Pull the drive selection switch to the side backward to cancel the sport mode e Depending on the driving conditions when sport mode is selected the vehicle may perform shift down or slightly accelerate V Select Mode Indication When the sport mode is selected the select mode indication turns on in the instrument cluster SPORT NOTE If the mode cannot be switched to drive mode the select mode indication flashes to notify the driver 4 90 Some models When Driving Power Steering Power Steering Power steering is only operable when the engine is running If the engine is off or if the power steering system is inoperable you can still steer but it requires more physical effort If the steering feels stiffer than usual during normal driving or the steering vibrates consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer
201. again the seat warmer will automatically operate at the temperature set before switching off the ignition Rear When the ignition is switched OFF during seat warmer operation the seat warmers are automatically turned off at the next engine start To turn the seat warmers back on press the seat warmer switch again The temperature of the seat warmer cannot be adjusted beyond High Mid and Low because the seat warmer is controlled by a thermostat 2 8 Some models Y Seat Position Memory Driver s seat The seat position memory function allows you to program the driver s seat to a desired seat position and to call up a programmed position with the simple touch of a button A CAUTION Do not place fingers or hands around the bottom of the seat while the seat memory function is operating The seat moves automatically while the seat memory function is operating and fingers or hands could get pinched and injured SET button The seat position can be programmed or operated using the following operations e Operation of the buttons on the side of the seat e Operation using the key NOTE Individual seat positions can be programmed to the two available programming buttons on the side of the driver s seat plus one seat position for each registered key e Ifthe vehicle has been serviced and the battery cables disconnected the programmed seat positions will have been erased Re program the seat posi
202. age 5 129 interior lamp to turn off 15 seconds Refer to x automatically after all doors are seconds 15 Settings closed can be changed seconds 0M page 7 5 5 49 seconds Auto wiper control Refer to 5 Refer to Windshield The auto wiper control function On Onoff Sics x Wipers and can be changed e o Washer on ets page 4 64 Daytime Vehicle running lights Refer to The function of the daytime On On _ x Daytime running lights can be changed off Running Lights on page 4 62 120 Auto seconds 90 x ere of The time required for headlights 30 seconds Refer to to turn off after ignition is 60 Setti x Headlights seconds ettings switched off can be changed seconds on page 30 on page 4 58 5 49 seconds offs Auto light et x control The headlight illumination Hi h Refer to on off sensitivity based on Medium Med m Refer to x Headlights surrounding lightness darkness Med Settings on page can be changed L 7 on page 4 58 5 49 Low 9 14 Personalization Features Settings change method Ten Feature Factory Available Setting Settings High Beam Control System HBC The Hi x Refer to e High Beam Control System Refer to High Beam HBC function can be On On Off Settings x Control changed on page System 5 49 HBC on page 4 95 Adaptive Front Lighting System AFS 3 E x Refer to The adaptive front lighting Refer to Adaptive syst
203. air bags and seat belt pretensioner system from deploying if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag the system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on Refer to the following table for the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illumination conditions This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on according to the following table The air bag front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible malfunction If this happens the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light This indicator light turns on to remind you that the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision Some models 2 57 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags If the front passenger occupant classification sensor is normal the indicator light turns on when the ignition is switched ON The light turns
204. ake sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 9 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts bulges cracks or other irregularities 8 32 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A VY Glossary of Terms Tire Placard A label indicating the OE tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Inflation Pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire kPa Kilopascal the metric unit for air pressure psi Pounds per square inch the English unit for air pressure B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Original Equipment OE Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle Vehicle Load Limit The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and cargo Bead Area of the Tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall Area of the Tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread Area of the Tire Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it s mounted on the vehicle Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants Seating capacity is described on the tire label Production options weight is the com
205. al objects bumps or protruding objects on the road When passing through a toll gate equipped with a bar When passing under a vinyl curtain or flag e Plastic objects such as pylons e Two wheeled vehicles pedestrians animals or standing trees When the system operates the user is notified by the flashing Smart City Brake Support SCBS warning indication and the multi information display 4 130 V Automatic Brake Operation Display Smart City Brake Support activated is displayed in the multi information display while the SCBS brakes or the brake assist SCBS brake assist is operating Smart City Brake Support activated NOTE The collision warning beep sounds intermittently while the SCBS brake or brake assist SCBS brake assist is operating If the vehicle is stopped by the SCBS operation and the brake pedal is not depressed the warning beep sounds one time after about 2 seconds and the SCBS brake is automatically released When Driving i ACTIVSENSE V Stopping the Smart City Brake Support SCBS System Operation The Smart City Brake Support SCBS system can be temporarily deactivated Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 When the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system is turned off the Smart City Brake Support SCBS OFF indicator light turns on He Orr When the engine is restarted the system becomes operational 4 131 When Driving i ACTIVSENS
206. al restraint system This system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the front passenger seat belt pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat the system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off Mazda strongly recommends that children be properly restrained and child restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear seats which are the best place for children For more details refer to Front passenger occupant classification sensor page 2 57 2 23 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint AWARNING Use the correct size child restraint system For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops a child must be properly restrained using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on age and size If not the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident Follow the manufacturer s instructions and always keep the child restraint system buckled down An unsecured child restraint system is dangerous In a sudden stop or a collision it could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants Make sure any child restraint system is properly secured in
207. aler The wrong cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel and emission control systems It may also cause the check engine light in the instrument cluster to illuminate VW Fuel Filler Lid To open pull the remote fuel filler lid release To close press the fuel filler lid until it locks securely Remote fuel filler lid release V Fuel Filler Cap To remove the fuel filler cap turn it counterclockwise Attach the removed cap to the inner side of the fuel lid 3 27 Before Driving Fuel and Emission To close the fuel filler cap turn it clockwise until a click is heard A CAUTION U S A and Canada If the check fuel cap warning light illuminates the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed If the warning light illuminates park your vehicle safely off the right of way remove the fuel filler cap and reinstall it correctly After the cap has been correctly installed the fuel cap warning light may continue to illuminate until a number of driving cycles have been completed A drive cycle consists of starting the engine after four or more hours with the engine off and driving the vehicle on city and highway roads Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap warning light illuminated could cause the check engine light to illuminate as well 3 28 Steering Wheel A WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving Adjusting the steering whee
208. ality of the rear view monitor while the vehicle is stopped Do not adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while driving the vehicle Adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor such as brightness contrast color and tint while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the vehicle operation which could lead to an accident Picture quality adjustment can be done while the shift lever is in reverse R There are four settings which can be adjusted including brightness contrast color and tint When adjusting pay sufficient attention to the vehicle surroundings 1 Select the Y icon on the screen to display the tabs 2 Select the desired tab item 3 Adjust the brightness contrast tint and color using the slider If you need to reset press the reset button 4 Select the R icon on the screen to close the tab 4 162 Interior Features Use of various features for ride comfort including air conditioning and audio system Climate Control System sccsccscsscssscssesssscsssssssssssssssesseesoees 5 2 Operating Tips 22220 ech N heen edie 5 2 Vent Operation x vec sitions AAEE estan ihe ah det Aiea 5 3 Man al Type iii cise E tay is ae ee Reese 5 5 Fully Automatic Type cccccecesceeseesecseceseeeeeeeeseeseeseeseeeeaes 5 9 A dio SySteM csccsccsssssserssssveessscesesssssssssseessssssesssssesssesseseees Antenna 22 022 oh ities ie E teseakes Hee R
209. an off e If the key does not operate when pressing a button or the operational range becomes too small the battery may be dead To install a new battery refer to Replace Electrical Battery page 6 38 Battery life is about one year Replace the battery with a new one if the KEY indicator light green flashes in the instrument cluster Replacing the battery about once a year is recommended because the KEY warning light indicator light may not illuminate or flash depending on the rate of battery depletion e Additional keys can be obtained at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Up to 6 keys can be used with the keyless functions per vehicle Bring all keys to an Authorized Mazda Dealer when additional keys are required YW Transmitter Operation indicator light Operation buttons NOTE With theft deterrent system The hazard warning lights flash when the theft deterrent system is armed or turned off Refer to Theft Deterrent System on page 3 41 With the advanced keyless function A beep sound can be heard for confirmation when the doors are locked unlocked using the key If you prefer the beep sound can be turned off The volume of the beep sound can also be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Use the following procedure to change the setting 1 Switch the ignition off and close all of the doors and the trunk lid 2 Open the driver s door Before Driving Keys 3
210. an the speed limit Shift down The gear does not shift down while the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit and the gear does not shift down the gear position indication flashes 2 times to notify the driver that the gear cannot be shifted Kickdown When the accelerator pedal is depressed fully while driving the gear shifts down NOTE The gear also shifts down using kickdown while in the second gear fixed mode Auto shift down The gear shifts down automatically depending on the vehicle speed during deceleration NOTE If the vehicle comes to a stop while in the second gear fixed mode the gear remains in second 4 55 When Driving Transaxle Recommendations for shifting U S A and Canada Upshifting For normal acceleration and cruising we recommend these shift points Gear Vehicle speed MI to M2 24 km h 15 mph M2 to M3 40 km h 25 mph M3 to M4 65 km h 40 mph M4 to M5 73 km h 45 mph MS to M6 81 km h 50 mph 1 Always observe local speed limit regulations Downshifting When you must slow down in heavy traffic or on a steep upgrade downshift before the engine starts to overwork This gives better acceleration when you need more speed On a steep downgrade downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life Direct Mode Direct mode can be used for temporarily switching gears by operating the steering shift s
211. ance Fuses Your vehicle s electrical system is protected by fuses If any lights accessories or controls do not work inspect the appropriate circuit protector If a fuse has blown the inside element will be melted If the same fuse blows again avoid using that system and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible YV Fuse Replacement Replacing the fuses on the vehicle s left side If the electrical system does not work first inspect the fuses on the vehicle s left side 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and other switches are off 2 Open the fuse panel cover AY 6 56 3 Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse puller provided on the fuse block located in the engine compartment 4 Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is blown 5 Insert a new fuse of the same amperage rating and make sure it fits tightly If it does not fit tightly have an expert install it We recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer If you have no spare fuses borrow one of the same rating from a circuit not essential to vehicle operation such as the AUDIO or OUTLET circuit A CAUTION Always replace a fuse with a genuine Mazda fuse or equivalent of the same rating Otherwise you may damage the electric system 6 Reinstall the cover and make sure that it is securely installed Replacing the fuses under the hood If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuse
212. and Sensors Forward Sensing Camera FSC The Forward Sensing Camera FSC detects lane indications and recognizes headlights taillights and city lights during nighttime driving The following systems also use the Forward Sensing Camera FSC e High Beam Control system HBC e Lane Departure Warning System LDWS e Smart Brake Support SBS The Forward Sensing Camera FSC is installed at the top of the windshield near the rearview mirror Refer to Forward Sensing Camera FSC on page 4 135 Radar sensor front The radar sensor front functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle ahead sent from the radar sensor The following systems also use the radar sensor front e Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC e Distance Recognition Support System DRSS e Smart Brake Support SBS The radar sensor front is mounted behind the radiator grille Refer to Radar Sensor Front on page 4 138 Laser sensor front The laser sensor front emits a near infrared laser beam and receives the beam reflected off the reflective surface of a vehicle in front and the detected beam is then used for measurement The following systems also use the laser sensor front e Smart Brake Support SBS e Smart City Brake Support SCBS The laser sensor front is installed at the top of the windshield near the rearview mirror Refer to Laser Sensor Front on page 4 141 Radar sensors rear The radar sensors rear function by
213. and clean repair adjust fill up or replace if necessary T Tighten Remarks The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year or within 16 000 km 10 000 miles since last engine oil and filter change The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the message wrench indicator light display 2 Use of FL 22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant Using engine coolant other than FL 22 may cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system 3 According to state provincial and federal regulations failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties However Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or mileage kilometer period to ensure long term reliability 4 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS initialization must be performed so that the system operates normally if equipped 6 6 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance U S A residents Fixed maintenance interval Use when the maintenance monitor for Oil Change is set to Fixed For details see maintenance monitor page 6 67 Number of months or kilometers miles whichever comes first Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 x1000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 x1000 miles 7 5 15 22 5 30 37 5 45 52 5 60 Maintenance Interval SKYACTIV G 2 5 Drive belts I Engine oil amp filter R
214. and more like it Rate songs by giving thumbs up and thumbs down feedback to further refine your station discover new music and help Pandora play only music you like 1 Pandora the Pandora logo and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media Inc used with permission NOTE To operate Pandora from your Bluetooth device perform the following in advance Create Pandora account on the Web Create Pandora station using Pandora application Install Pandora application on your device Playback Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen When Pandora is selected the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display Icon Function Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source Displays the station list Use to switch to other stati B se to switch to other stations Thumbs Down p Press the icon to tell Pandora not to play this track Thumbs Up Press the icon to tell Pandora like it to your station you like this track and it helps to bring in more tracks Bookmarking Bookmarks the song or artist currently being played Plays the track When selected again playback is temporarily stopped Goes to the next song Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on pa
215. and the hood closed Refer to Transmitter on page 3 5 The system will disarm if one of the following operations takes place within 20 seconds after pressing the lock button e Unlocking a door Any door or the trunk lid is opened The hood is opened The ignition is switched on With the advanced keyless function Press the electric trunk lid opener while the key is being carried To rearm the system do the arming procedure again When the doors are locked by pressing the lock button on the transmitter or using the auxiliary key while the theft deterrent system is armed the hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that the system is armed VY To Turn Off an Armed System An armed system can be turned off using any one of the following methods e Press the unlock button on the transmitter e Switch the ignition ON e With the advanced keyless function Press a request switch on the doors The hazard warning lights will flash twice NOTE When the doors are unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the transmitter while the theft deterrent system is turned off the hazard warning lights will flash twice to indicate that the system is turned off 3 42 V To Stop the Alarm A triggered alarm can be turned off using any one of the following methods e Press the unlock button on the transmitter e The engine is started with the push button start e With the advanced keyless f
216. and upright 2 2 Essential Safety Equipment Seats Do not place an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back Putting an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back is dangerous because you will be unable to maintain a safe driving posture and the seat belt cannot function at its full capacity in a collision which could result in a serious accident injury or death Do not place objects under the seat The object could get stuck and cause the seat to not be fixed securely and result in an accident Do not stack cargo higher than the seatbacks Stacking luggage or other cargo higher than the seatbacks is dangerous During sudden braking or a collision objects can fly around and become projectiles that may hit and injure passengers Make sure luggage and cargo is secured before driving Not securing cargo while driving is dangerous as it could move or be crushed during sudden braking or a collision and cause injury Never allow a passenger to sit or stand on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving Driving with a passenger on the folded seatback is dangerous Allowing a child to sit up on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving is particularly dangerous In a sudden stop or even a minor collision a child not in a proper seat or child restraint system and seat belt could be thrown forward back or even out of the vehicle resulting in serious injuries or death The child in the baggage
217. anels and metallic trim as they can be easily scratched Maintenance and Care Appearance Care Y Maintenance of the Active Driving Display The combiner and mirror surface have a special coating When cleaning do not use a hard or rough surface cloth or cleaning detergent In addition if a chemical solvent gets on the active driving display wipe it off immediately Otherwise the combiner and mirror could be damaged and the surface coating could be scratched Use a fine soft cloth such as those used for cleaning eyeglasses V Cleaning the Lap Shoulder Belt Webbing Clean the webbing with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets Follow instructions Do not bleach or dye the webbing this may weaken it After cleaning the belts thoroughly dry the belt webbing and make sure there is no remaining moisture before retracting them A WARNING Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer replace damaged seat belts immediately Using damaged seat belts is dangerous In a collision damaged belts cannot provide adequate protection Some models 6 69 Maintenance and Care Appearance Care Vv Cleaning the Window Interiors If the windows become covered with an oily greasy or waxy film clean them with glass cleaner Follow the directions on the container A CAUTION gt Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the window glass It could damage the thermal filaments and the antenna lines gt W
218. ap 6 26 Engine Oil NOTE Changing the engine oil should be performed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer Refer to Introduction page 6 2 for owner s responsibility in protecting your investment V Recommended Oil U S A and CANADA Use SAE 0W 20 engine oil Mazda Genuine Oil is used in your Mazda vehicle Mazda Genuine 0W 20 Oil is required to achieve optimum fuel economy For maintenance service Mazda recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and Castrol U S A only S Castrol ILSAC Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Only use SAE 0W 20 oil Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API Oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers C 0 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 F 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 OW 20 Except U S A and CANADA Use SAE 5W 30 engine oil Oil container labels provide important information A chief contribution this type of oil makes to fuel economy is reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction For maintenance service Mazda recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and Castrol Mexico only 6 27 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance ILSAC Mexico Use SAE 5W 30 engine oil If SAE 5W 30
219. ar bumper near the radar sensors rear clean so that the radar sensors rear operate normally Also do not apply items such as stickers Refer to Exterior Care on page 6 62 A CAUTION If the rear bumper receives a severe impact the system may no longer operate normally Stop the system immediately and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Some models 4 143 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE The detection ability of the radar sensors rear has limitations In the following cases the detection ability may lower and the system may not operate normally The rear bumper near the radar sensors rear has become deformed Snow ice or mud adheres to the radar sensors rear on the rear bumper Under bad weather conditions such as rain snow and fog Under the following conditions the radar sensors rear cannot detect target objects or it may be difficult to detect them e Stationary objects on a road or a road side such as small two wheeled vehicles bicycles pedestrians animals and shopping carts Vehicle shapes which do not reflect radar waves well such as empty trailers with a low vehicle height and sports cars Vehicles are shipped with the direction of the radar sensors rear adjusted for each vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so that the radar sensors rear detect approaching vehicles correctly If the direction of the radar sensors rear has deviated for some reason have the v
220. area could be thrown into other occupants and cause serious injury Never give the car keys to children and do not allow them to play in the vehicle Playing with the folding rear seats is dangerous Once the seatbacks are back up a child in the trunk would not be able to get out the way they had entered If you have small children keep the seatbacks locked Always leave your car locked and keep the car keys safely away from children Leaving your car unlocked or the keys in reach of children is dangerous Children who find their way into the trunk through an unlocked rear seatback or an open trunk can become accidentally locked in the trunk This could result in death or brain damage from heat prostration particularly in the summer Always lock the doors and the trunk and as an added measure keep the rear seatbacks locked whether you have children in your home or not Essential Safety Equipment Se ats A CAUTION NO gt When operating a seat be careful not to put your hands or fingers near the moving parts of the seat or on the side trim to prevent injury gt When moving the seats make sure there is no cargo in the surrounding area If the cargo gets caught it could damage the cargo gt Manual Seat When returning a rear reclined seatback to its upright position make sure you hold onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever If the seatback is not supported it will flip forward suddenly and could cau
221. argo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 8 43 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity V Keyless Entry System Immobilizer System FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment FCC IC This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux la Partie 15 des r gles de la FCC et CNR d Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes 1 l appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2 l utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible d en compromettre le fonctionnement MEXICO La operaci n de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones 1 es posible que este equipo
222. art has been pressed to ACC and the doors will not lock unlock even if they have been locked manually ON This is the normal running position after the engine is started The indicator light amber turns off The indicator light amber illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and the engine is not running Some indicator lights warning lights should be inspected before the engine is started page 4 22 NOTE When the push button start is pressed to ON the sound of the fuel pump motor operating near the fuel tank can be heard This does not indicate an abnormality When Driving Start Stop Engine Starting the Engine A WARNING Radio waves from the key may affect medical devices such as pacemakers Before using the key near people who use medical devices ask the medical device manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the key will affect the device 4 3 When Driving Start Stop Engine NOTE The key must be carried because the key carries an immobilizer chip that must communicate with the engine controls at short range The engine can be started when the push button start is pressed from off ACC or ON The push button start system functions function which can start the engine by only carrying the key can be deactivated to prevent any possible adverse effect on a user wearing a pacemaker or other medical device If the system is deactivated you will be unable to start the en
223. ary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical condition in accordance with a certified physician you must contact your dealership in order to avoid the potential loss of the warranty of your vehicle which may occur if some third party is hired by the customer to make any modifications to this system Log on at www MazdaMexico com mx Answers to many questions including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in Mexico can be found here E mail click on Contactanos at the top of the page at www MazdaMexico com mx By phone at 01 800 01 MAZDA 62932 By letter at Attn Customer Assistance Mazda Motor de Mexico Mario Pani 150 PB Col Lomas de Santa Fe Mexico D F C P 05300 Del Cuajimalpa de Morelos Tel Customer Assistance 01 800 01 MAZDA 62932 In order to serve you efficiently and effectively please help us by providing the following information 1 Your name address and telephone number 8 11 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance 2 Year and model of vehicle 3 Vehicle Identification Number 17 digits noted on your registration or title or located on the upper driver s side corner of the dash 4 Purchase date and current mileage 5 Your dealer s name and location 6 Your question s 8 12 Importer Distributor V U S A Mazda North American Operations 7755
224. as speed bumps An enhanced DSP algorithm allows faster and more effective compensation for unusual situations such as driving on a very rough road or at high speeds 5 AudioPilot is a registered trademark of Bose Corporation 5 38 Interior Features Audio System V Operating the Radio Radio ON Select the amp icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen When selecting the desired radio the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the center display AM FM Radio Icon Function Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source Displays the station list Select Update Station List to display the frequencies of up to ten radio stations on the auto memory preset list Select the desired frequency Displays the Favorites list Long press to store radio station currently being aired Switches the HD Radio on and off Displays the multi cast channel list of the HD Radio ill ili You can search for receivable radio stations Scanning stops at each station for about five seconds Select again to continue receiving the radio station lt gt HIH You can change the radio frequency manually Rotate the commander knob slide the screen or touch the radio frequency Press or to change the radio frequency one step at a time When 4 orP is long pressed the radio frequency changes continually It stops when you remove your
225. ate direction Mirror switch Center position After adjusting the mirror lock the control by rotating the switch in the center position Folding mirror A WARNING Always return the outside mirrors to the driving position before you start driving Driving with the outside mirrors folded in is dangerous Your rear view will be restricted and you could have an accident Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is flush with the vehicle Ie bo Driver s side auto dimming door mirror The movement of the auto dimming door mirror is interlocked with the auto dimming rearview mirror in the interior to automatically reduce glare from rear on coming vehicles Refer to Rearview Mirror on page 3 31 NOTE The front passenger side door mirror does not have the auto dimming feature YW Rearview Mirror A WARNING Do not stack cargo or objects higher than the seatbacks Cargo stacked higher than the seatbacks is dangerous It can block your view in the rearview mirror which might cause you to hit another car when changing lanes Rearview mirror adjustment Before driving adjust the rearview mirror to center on the scene through the rear window Before Driving Mirrors NOTE For the manual day night mirror perform the adjustment with the day night lever in the day position Reducing glare from headlights Manual day night mirror Push the day night lever forward for day driving Pull it ba
226. ates a malfunction with the vehicle system Check the message indicated in the display and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer For details refer to the explanations for the warning indicator lights in the warning indicator lights section which match the symbol in the upper part of the display If a message is not indicated in the display operate the INFO switch to display the Warning screen Multi information display A message such as the system operation status a malfunction or an abnormality is indicated e When a symbol and message are indicated in the display For details on the symbols indicated in the upper part of the screen check the indication and method for taking action list 4 22 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display e When only a message is indicated in the display Follow the instructions indicated in the display If any of the content in the following illustrations is indicated there may be a problem with the vehicle The method for taking action differs depending on the indication Check the following illustrations below Action Park the vehicle immediately view the symbol indicated in the upper part of the screen and then refer to the Indication and method for taking action list containing the symbol to see what action should be taken Indication on display c E7 E A Charging system Engine oil level is Engine oil level Power Steering malfunction too high is low malfunction Engine
227. ation Indicator Light is indicated Q OFF If the indication remains displayed even though the LDWS switch has been operated it indicates a problem in the system Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Type B A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer e The light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON e It remains illuminated even though the LDWS switch has been switched off ACAUTION gt Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size and the same manufacture brand and tread pattern In addition do not use tires with significantly different wear patterns on the same vehicle If such improper tires are used the LDWS may not operate normally gt When an emergency spare tire is used the system may not operate normally Some models 7 27 If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds V If the automatic transaxle warning indication warning light is indicated AT The light indication illuminates when the transaxle has a problem A CAUTION If the automatic transaxle warning light warning indication illuminates the transaxle has an electrical problem Continuing to drive your Mazda in this condition could cause damage to your transaxle Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible 7 28 Some models V If the power steeri
228. ation pressure Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure on page 6 41 After adjusting the tire pressure initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is necessary to make the system operates normally Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4 151 Standard tire U S A and Canada Inflation pressure Tire size Front Rear P225 55R17 95V 250 kPa 36 psi 250 kPa 36 psi P225 45R19 92W 240 kPa 35 psi 240 kPa 35 psi Mexico a Inflation pressure Tire size Up to 3 persons Full load Front 230 kPa 2 3 bar 33 psi 250 kPa 2 5 bar 36 psi 225 55R17 97V Rear 230 kPa 2 3 bar 33 psi 320 kPa 3 2 bar 46 psi Front 230 kPa 2 3 bar 33 psi 250 kPa 2 5 bar 36 psi 225 45R19 92W Rear 230 kPa 2 3 bar 33 psi 320 kPa 3 2 bar 46 psi 1 person s weight About 75 kg 9 7 Some models Specifications Temporary spare tire U S A and Canada Tire size Inflation pressure T125 70R17 98M 420 kPa 60 psi Mexico Tire size Inflation pressure 185 55R16 87M 320 kPa 3 2 bar 46 psi Lug nut tightening torque When installing a tire tighten the lug nut to the following torque 108 147 N m 12 14 kgfm 80 108 ft lbf V Fuses Refer to Fuses on page 6 56 9 8 Personalization Features Personalization Features The following personalization features can be set or changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer Co
229. autions 2 41 Supplemental Restraint System Components 1 0 0 0 eens 2 48 How the SRS Air Bags Work ccececececeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 50 SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria ceceeceeseseeteeteeeeeees 2 54 Limitations to SRS Air Bag ceccceeseescceseeseeeeeeseeeeenseeneeenees 2 55 Front Passenger Occupant Classification System 2 57 Constant Monitoring cceceecceeseesceeseeseceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeess 2 62 Some models 2 1 Essential Safety Equipment Seats AWARNING Make sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place Adjustable seats and seatbacks that are not securely locked are dangerous Ina sudden stop or collision the seat or seatback could move causing injury Make sure the adjustable components of the seat are locked in place by attempting to slide the seat forward and backward and rocking the seatback Never allow children to adjust a seat Allowing children to adjust a seat is dangerous as it could result in serious injury if a child s hands or feet become caught in the seat Do not drive with the seatback unlocked All of the seatbacks play an important role in your protection in a vehicle Leaving the seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected or thrown around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision resulting in severe injury After adjusting the seatback at any time even when there are no
230. ave the key inside the vehicle VY Auto Lock Unlock Function A WARNING e When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km h 12 mph all doors lock automatically e When the ignition is switched off all doors unlock automatically These functions can also be disabled so that they do not operate Auto lock unlock function setting change using door lock switch The doors can set to lock or unlock automatically by selecting any one of the functions from the following table and using the driver s door lock switch on the interior door panel to perform the setting change as indicated in the procedure which follows Settings can be changed using the following operation NOTE Function number 3 is the factory setting for your vehicle There are only a total of six auto lock unlock settings available for automatic transaxle vehicles and three for manual transaxle vehicles Be sure to press the unlock side of the driver s door lock switch the correct number of times according to the selected function number If the switch is mistakenly pressed seven times on an automatic transaxle vehicle or four times on a manual transaxle the procedure will be invalidated If this occurs start the procedure from the beginning 3 15 Before Driving Doors and Locks Function number Function The auto door lock function is disabled All the doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 20 km h 12 mph or more
231. ay pull or press the switch in the opposite direction and then release it Power window system initialization procedure If the battery was disconnected during vehicle maintenance or for other reasons such as a switch continues to be operated after the window is fully open closed the window will not fully open and close automatically Resetting of the automatic function can be performed using the master control switches or each passenger door switch The power window auto function reset procedure can be done on all door switches The power window auto function will only resume on the power window that has been reset 1 Switch the ignition ON 2 Make sure that the power window lock switch located on the driver s door is not depressed 3 34 U Press the switch and fully open the window Pull up the switch to fully close the window and continue holding the switch for about 2 seconds after the window fully closed Repeat Steps 3 4 for the front passenger power window while seated in the front passenger seat Repeat Steps 3 4 for both the left and right rear power windows while seated in the rear seat Make sure that the power windows operate correctly using the door switches After the system has been re initialized each passenger window can be fully opened or closed automatically using the master control switches P Nn Oo N Jam safe window If a person s hands head or an object blocks the window
232. ay be detected The detection area of the radar sensors rear is set according to the road width of expressways e Although the system may detect objects on the road side such as parked vehicles or guardrails and operate the warning light beep it does not indicate a malfunction e A Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light may flash or the warning beep may be activated several times when making a turn at a city intersection e Turn off the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle Otherwise the radar s radio waves will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally e In the following cases it may be difficult to view the illumination flashing of the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights equipped on the door mirrors e Snow or ice is adhering to the door mirrors The front door glass is fogged or covered in snow frost or dirt The radar sensors of the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system may be regulated under the radio wave related laws of the country where the vehicle is driven The sensors in this system are approved for use in the U S A including territories Canada and Mexico If a vehicle with a Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system is driven in a country other than the U S A Canada or Mexico the system has to be turned off using the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch The system switches to the Rear Cross Traffi
233. ayed ALC Automatic volume adjustment The automatic level control ALC changes the audio volume automatically according to the vehicle speed The faster the vehicle speed the higher the volume increases ALC has ALC OFF and ALC LEVEL 1 to 7 modes At ALC LEVEL 7 the amount that the volume can increase is at the maximum Select the mode according to the driving conditions BEEP Audio operation sound The setting for the operation sound when pressing and holding a button can be changed The initial setting is ON Set to OFF to mute the operation sound BT SETUP mode Music and other audio such as voice data recorded on portable audio devices and mobile phones available on the market which are equipped with the Bluetooth transmission function can be listened to via wireless transmission over the vehicle s speakers Using the BT SETUP mode these devices can be programmed to the Bluetooth unit or changed Refer to Bluetooth Preparation Type A on page 5 71 12Hr lt gt 24Hr 12 Hr 24 Hr time adjustment Rotating the audio control dial switches the display between 12 and 24 hour clock time Refer to Clock on page 5 24 Interior Features Audio System 5 23 Interior Features Audio System VY Clock 00 button Audio control dial Audio display 00 IEA A EN voL a E T ENN CLOCK SCAN Clock button Hour Minute set switch Setting the time The clock can be
234. ays the top level folder file list lt Select the folder which you want to select The files in the selected folder are displayed Select the file you want to play AVRCP Ver 1 3 or higher Replays the song currently being played repeatedly When selected again the songs in the folder are played repeatedly Select it again to cancel Icons change when the song is repeated or the folder is repeated AVRCP Ver 1 3 or higher Plays songs in the folder in random order When selected again the songs on the device are played in random order Select it again to cancel Icons change during folder shuffle or device shuffle Scans the titles in a folder and plays the beginning of each song to aid in finding a desired song When selected again the beginning of each song on the device is played When selected again the operation is canceled and the song currently being played continues Returns to the beginning of the previous song Long press to fast reverse It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob Plays the Bluetooth audio When selected again playback is temporarily stopped Advances to the beginning of the next song Long press to fast forward It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 5 113 Interior Features Blu
235. azda Dealer for a battery replacement purchase 6 37 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Key Battery Replacement If the buttons on the transmitter are inoperable and the operation indicator light does not flash the battery may be dead Replace with a new battery before the transmitter becomes unusable CAUTION gt Make sure the battery is installed correctly Battery leakage could occur if it is not installed correctly gt When replacing the battery be careful not to touch any of the internal circuitry and electrical terminals bend the electrical terminals or get dirt in the transmitter as the transmitter could be damaged gt There is the danger of explosion if the battery is not correctly replaced gt Dispose of used batteries according to the following instructions gt Insulate the plus and minus terminals of the battery using cellophane or equivalent tape gt Never disassemble gt Never throw the battery into fire or water gt Never deform or crush gt Replace only with the same type battery CR2025 or equivalent The following conditions indicate that the battery power is low The KEY indicator light green flashes in the instrument cluster for about 30 seconds after the engine is turned off for vehicles with a type A meter messages are displayed in the instrument cluster 6 38 e The system does not operate and the operation indicator light on the transmitter does
236. be served Refer to MEXICO page 8 13 in Importer Distributor section e Names and addresses of where to acquire spare parts consumables and accessories Refer to MEXICO page 8 13 in Importer Distributor section Warranty period items covered by the warranty and its possible limitations or exceptions Refer to the Warranty Booklet for detailed warranty information 8 48 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity e Warranty procedure Center of Attention to Client CAC Phone 01 800 01 MAZDA Web www mazdamexico com mx e Electrical specifications Voltage 9 16V Frequency 2 4Ghz Current 270mA Typ 8 49 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity Type B U S A and Canada Type B Model MAZDA GEN 65 CMU FCC ID CB262932 IC 279B 62932 FCC IC Regulatory Notice Modification statement Johnson Controls Interiors LLC has not approved any changes or modifications to this device by the user Any changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Johnson Controls Interiors LLC n approuve aucune modification apport e l appareil par utilisateur quelle qu en soit la nature Tout changement ou modification peuvent annuler le droit utilisation de l appareil par utilisateur Interference statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation
237. being driven 2 62 Before Driving Use of various features including keys doors mirrors and windows KEYS Si atsctcctsicsccsocccssodenssesonsscsonssendecsastseinctes Keys Keyless Entry System Advanced Keyless Entry System 3 9 Advanced Keyless Entry System 3 9 Operational Range ceeeeeeeeeee 3 10 Doors and Locks c scccsescssescssseeeeee 3 11 Door Locks s cecSres cee 3 11 Tunk bidikan ia R e 3 19 Inside Trunk Release Lever 3 22 Fuel and Emission csssccsssssssesseee 3 24 Fuel and Engine Exhaust PrecautiOns cccccsscceesecesseeesseeessees 3 24 Fuel Filler Lid and Cap eee 3 27 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel MI TOES sscesssssscesssosesensesoseossesssenseenecasesaases 3 30 MITTOTS snesena aaa a 3 30 Wind WS ikisicsecsctacsacdscesecceascacestdestessesess Power Windows Moonroof oossoo Security System essessessescesessessesoesossoesee 3 39 Modification and Add On Equipment 0 ccccecceseeseeseeseeseeteeees 3 39 Immobilizer System ccs 3 39 Theft Deterrent System c0 c 3 41 Driving Tips sccscsccssssssesssessescesesees Break In Period Saving Fuel and Protection of the Environment 0 0 ceceeeseeeseeeeeseneeeeee Hazardous Driving Floor Mat cv3i0 0h ranean Rocking the Vehicle cece Winter Driving cccceeseseeseeseeteees Driving In Flooded Area Overloa
238. ber of vehicle occupants The cargo weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from the combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed value on the tire label 8 39 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Examples Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg 150 Ibs and a value of 385 kg 849 Ibs for the combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg 849 Ibs 68 kg 150 Ibs 317 kg 699 Ibs The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg 849 Ibs 68 x 2 kg 150 x 2 Ibs 249 kg 549 Ibs If the weight of the occupant increases the cargo weight limit decreases by that much GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver s door frame or door pillar The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown o
239. bination weight of installed regular production options weighing over 2 3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim Rim is the metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated 8 33 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Tire Maintenance Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Here are some important maintenance points Y Tire Inflation Pressure Inspect all tire pressure monthly including the spare when the tires are cold Maintain recommended pressures for the best ride top handling and minimum tire wear Use the pressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service Tire Rotation To equalize tread wear rotate the tires every 12 000 km 7 500 miles or sooner if irregular wear develops During rotation inspect them for correct balance Z C S67 Do not include TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire in rotation Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a combination of the following e Incorrect tire pressure e Improper wheel alignment e Out of balance wheel e Severe braking After rotation inflate all tire pressures to sp
240. blems or damage to electrical parts gt When washing and waxing the vehicle be careful not to apply excessive force to any single area of the vehicle roof or the antenna Otherwise you could dent the vehicle or damage the antenna 6 63 Maintenance and Care Appearance Care To help protect the finish from rust and deterioration wash your Mazda thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water If the vehicle is washed improperly the paint surface could be scratched Here are some examples of how scratching could occur Scratches occur on the paint surface when e The vehicle is washed without first rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter e The vehicle is washed with a rough dry or dirty cloth e The vehicle is washed at a car wash that uses brushes that are dirty or too stiff e Cleansers or wax containing abrasives are used NOTE Mazda is not responsible for scratches caused by automatic car washes or improper washing e Scratches are more noticeable on vehicles with darker paint finishes To minimize scratches on the vehicle s paint finish e Rinse off any dirt or other foreign matter using lukewarm or cold water before washing e Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water and a soft cloth when washing the vehicle Do not use a nylon cloth e Rub gently when washing or drying the vehicle e Take your vehicle only to a car wash that keeps its brushes well maintained
241. brake pedal automatic transaxle To switch the ignition position press the push button start without depressing the pedal Do not leave the ignition switched ON while the engine is not running Doing so could result in the battery going dead If the ignition is left in ACC For automatic transaxle the shift lever is in the P position and the ignition is in ACC the ignition switches off automatically after about 25 minutes Off The power supply to electrical devices turns off and the push button start indicator light amber also turns off A WARNING Before leaving the driver s seat always switch the ignition off set the parking brake and make sure the shift lever is in P automatic transaxle or in 1st gear or R manual transaxle Leaving the driver s seat without switching the ignition off setting the parking brake and shifting the shift lever to P automatic transaxle or to ist gear or R manual transaxle is dangerous Unexpected vehicle movement could occur which could result in an accident In addition if your intention is to leave the vehicle for even a short period it is important to switch the ignition off as leaving it in another position will disable some of the vehicle s security systems and run the battery down ACC Accessory Some electrical accessories will operate and the indicator light amber illuminates NOTE The keyless entry system does not function while the push button st
242. bs When a halogen bulb breaks it is dangerous These bulbs contain pressurized gas If one is broken it will explode and serious injuries could be caused by the flying glass If the glass portion is touched with bare hands body oil could cause the bulb to overheat and explode when lit Always keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children Playing with a halogen bulb is dangerous Serious injuries could be caused by dropping a halogen bulb or breaking it some other way NOTE To replace the bulb contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used Use the protective cover and carton for the replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb promptly and out of the reach of children V Replacing Exterior Light Bulbs Headlights With LED headlights Low High beam bulbs The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a single unit because it is an integrated unit The LED bulb has to be replaced with the unit We recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer when the replacement is necessary Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Headlights With halogen headlights Low beam bulbs 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and the headlight switch is off 2 If you are changing the right bulb start the engine turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and turn off engine If you are changing the left bulb turn the steering wheel to t
243. c Alert function when the shift lever manual transaxle or the selector lever automatic transaxle is shifted to the reverse R position Refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA on page 4 112 4 106 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE VY Blind Spot Monitoring BSM Warning Lights Blind Spot Monitoring BSM Warning Beep The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM or Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system notifies the driver of the presence of vehicles in adjacent lanes to the rear of your vehicle using the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights and the warning beep while the systems are operational Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights are equipped on the left and right door mirrors The warning lights turn on when a vehicle approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane is detected When the ignition is switched ON the malfunction warning light turns on momentarily and then turns off after a few seconds Forward driving Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system operation The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system detects vehicles approaching from the rear and turns on the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights equipped on the door mirrors according to the conditions Additionally while a Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light is illuminated if the turn signal lever is operated to signal a turn in the direction in which the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light is illumina
244. cabin if the vehicle is suddenly accelerated and cause injury depending on how the article is stored A CAUTION Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in the storage boxes while parked under the sun A lighter could explode or the plastic material in eyeglasses could deform and crack from high temperature Interior Features Interior Equipment V Overhead Console This console box is designed to store eyeglasses or other accessories Push and release to open V Storage Pocket To use open the lid Some models 5 133 Interior Features Interior Equipment V Glove Compartment To open the glove compartment pull the latch toward you To close the glove compartment firmly press in the center of the glove compartment lid V Center Console To open pull the lower release handle 5 134 Rear Coat Hooks A WARNING Never hang heavy or sharp objects on the assist grips and coat hooks Hanging heavy or sharp ended objects such as a coat hanger from the assist grips or coat hooks is dangerous as they can fly off and hit an occupant in the cabin if a curtain air bag was to deploy which could result in serious injury or death Always hang clothes on the coat hooks and the assist grips without hangers Coat hook Maintenance and Care How to keep your Mazda in top condition Essential Information ccsccscsssscsssscscccccsecesssssessssssccsssccscees 6 2 In
245. caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury 7 14 If Trouble Arises Battery Runs Out A CAUTION Use only a 12 V booster system You can damage a 12 V starter ignition system and other electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply two 12 V batteries in series or a 24 V motor generator set Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order Jumper cables 3 If the booster battery is in another vehicle do not allow both vehicles to touch Turn off the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and all unnecessary electrical loads in both vehicles 4 Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence as in the illustration e Connect one end of a cable to the positive terminal on the discharged battery 1 e Attach the other end to the positive 2 Make sure the booster battery is 12 V terminal on the booster battery 2 and that its negative terminal is Connect one end of the other cable grounded to the negative terminal of the booster battery 3 e Connect the other end to the ground point indicated in the illustration away from the discharged battery 4 7 15 If Trouble Arises Battery Runs Out 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run it a few minutes Then start the engine of the other vehicle 6 With i ELOOP system i ELOOP charging is displayed in the multi display of the instrument cluster after the engine is
246. cccccscsccesscceesssccesssccesseceesseeessaes 9 9 9 1 Identification Numbers Vehicle Information Labels V Vehicle Identification Number The vehicle identification number legally identifies your vehicle The number is on a plate attached to the cowl panel located on the left corner of the dashboard This plate can easily be seen through the windshield V Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label U S A and Canada 9 2 Chassis Number Open the cover shown in the figure to check the chassis number LO VY Vehicle Emission Control Information Label U S A and Canada ca Identification Numbers YW Tire Pressure Label 9 3 Specifications Specifications Vv Engine Item Specification Type DOHC 16V in line 4 cylinder Bore x Stroke 89 0 x 100 mm 3 50 x 3 94 in Displacement 2 488 5 ml 2 488 5 cc Compression ratio 13 0 Electrical System Item Classification Q 85 Battery 773 77 12V 60Ah 20HR or 12V 65Ah 20HR Spark plug number n Genuine spark PESR 18 110 or PESS 18 110 1 Q 85 is designed for i ELOOP system Only Q 85 should be used to ensure correct operation of i ELOOP system Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details 2 Not for i ELOOP system 3 This spark plug provides the SKYACTIV G engine with optimum performance Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details A CAUTION When cleaning the iridium plugs do not us
247. ccident or increase your chances of injuries in an accident Be very careful in choosing and installing add on electrical equipment such as mobile telephones two way radios stereo systems and car alarm systems Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add on equipment or choosing an improper installer is dangerous Essential systems could be damaged causing engine stalling air bag SRS activation ABS TCS DSC inactivation or a fire in the vehicle Mazda assumes no responsibility for death injury or expenses that may result from the installation of add on non genuine parts or accessories 8 19 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Cell Phones Cell Phones Warning A WARNING Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles in your country Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones computers portable radios vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties up the driver s hands Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident If a passenger is unable to use the device pull off the right of way to a safe area before use If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning use a hands free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices while
248. ce Territory CAMVAP Number British Columbia amp Yukon Territories 1 800 207 0685 Alberta amp Northwest Territories 1 800 207 0685 Saskatchewan 1 800 207 0685 Manitoba 1 800 207 0685 Ontario 1 800 207 0685 Atlantic Canada 1 800 207 0685 Quebec 1 800 207 0685 V Regional Offices REGIONAL OFFICES COVERING AREAS MAZDA CANADA INC WESTERN REGION ALBERTA 5011 275 STREET BRITISH COLUMBIA LANGLEY BRITISH COLUMBIA MANITOBA V4W 0A8 SASKATCHEWAN 778 369 2100 YUKON 1 800 663 0908 MAZDA CANADA INC ONTARIO CENTRAL REGION NEW BRUNSWICK 55 VOGELL ROAD RICHMOND HILL NOYA SCOTIA PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND ONTARIO L4B 3K5 NEWFOUNDLAND 1 800 263 4680 MAZDA CANADA INC QUEBEC REGION 6111 ROUTE TRANSCANADIENNE POINTE CLAIRE QUEBEC QUEBEC HOR 5A5 514 694 6390 8 9 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance Customer Assistance Puerto Rico Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business That is why all Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel we recommend that you take the following steps VSTEP 1 Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer This is the quickest and best way to address the issue If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS
249. center display e Operate the commander switch Daytime nighttime System screen setting The daytime or nighttime screen can be selected Auto Switches screen automatically according to headlight illumination condition Day Daytime screen setting Non Nighttime screen setting 1 The display is constantly on daytime screen when the illumination dimmer is cancelled Brightness adjustment Adjust the center display brightness using the slider Contrast adjustment Adjust the center display contrast using the slider Display setting reset Interior Features Audio System All of the screen setting values can be reset to their initial settings 1 Select Restore Factory settings 2 Select Yes Audio sound adjustment Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Select the Sound would like to change Indication tab to select the item you Setting value Bass Low pitch sound Side Low pitch enhancement Side Low pitch reduction Treble Treble sound Side Treble enhancement Side Treble reduction Front Front speaker Audio operation sound Fade Front Rear volume volume enhancement balance Rear Rear speaker volume enhancement Right Right speaker a hevolume volume enhancement balance Left Left speaker volu
250. cessary Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Y Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades When the wipers no longer clean well the blades are probably worn or cracked Replace them A CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components do not try to sweep the wiper arm by hand NOTE To prevent damage to the wiper arm blades when raising both the driver and passenger side wiper arms raise the driver side wiper arm first Conversely when setting down the wiper arms set the passenger side wiper arm down first 1 Raise the wiper arm 2 Open the clip and slide the blade assembly in the direction of the arrow amp 6 33 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance 3 Tilt the blade assembly and remove it from the arm a To prevent damage to the windshield let the wiper arm down easily do not let it slap down on the windshield ac 7 4 Pull down the blade rubber and slide it out of blade holder 6 34 5 Remove the metal stiffeners from each blade rubber and install them in the new blade CAUTION gt Do not bend or discard the stiffeners You need to use them again gt Ifthe metal stiffeners are switched the blade s wiping efficiency could be reduced So do not use the driver s side metal stiffeners on the passenger s side or vice versa gt Be sure to reinstall the metal stiffeners in the new blade rubber so that the curve is the same as it was i
251. cessary for starting the engine such as having the key in the cabin and depressing the clutch pedal manual transaxle or the brake pedal automatic transaxle are required 4 8 Turning the Engine Off A WARNING Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is moving Stopping the engine while the vehicle is moving for any reason other than in an emergency is dangerous Stopping the engine while the vehicle is moving will result in reduced braking ability due to the loss of power braking which could cause an accident and serious injury Stop the vehicle completely N Manual transaxle Shift into neutral Automatic transaxle Shift the shift lever to the P position U Press the push button start to turn off the engine The ignition position is off CAUTION When leaving the vehicle make sure the push button start is pressed to off NOTE The cooling fan in the engine compartment could turn on for a few minutes after the ignition is switched from ON to OFF whether or not the A C is on or off to cool the engine compartment quickly e Ifthe system detects that the remaining battery power of the key is low when the ignition is switched from ON to ACC or OFF the following is indicated Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable Refer to Key Battery Replacement on page 6 38 Vehicle equipped with Type A instrument cluster A message is indicated in the display of the
252. ch or select Answer on the screen To reject the call press the hang up button on the audio control switch or select Lgnore on the screen The following icons are displayed on the screen during a call Icons which can be used differ depending on use conditions Icon Function Displays the Communication menu am Ends the call Transferring a call from Hands Free to a mobile phone A Communication between the Bluetooth unit and a device mobile phone is canceled and an incoming call will be received by the device mobile phone like a standard call Transferring a call from a device mobile phone to Hands Free G Communication between devices mobile phone can be switched to Bluetooth Hands Free Mute amp The microphone can be muted during a call When selected again the mute is canceled A call is made to other person during a call and a 3 way call can be made Select the contact from the following to make a call fe Call History Call History is displayed Contacts The phonebook is displayed Dial The dial pad is displayed Input the phone number The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content The call on hold is made to make a 3 way call e Switches the call on hold DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Signal Transmission see This function is used
253. ck to reduce glare of headlights from cars at the rear Day Night lever ae ee fa Auto dimming mirror The auto dimming mirror automatically reduces glare of headlights from cars at the rear when the ignition is switched ON Some models 3 31 Before Driving Mirrors Press the OFF button O to cancel the automatic dimming function The indicator light will turn off To reactivate the automatic dimming function press the ON button The indicator light will illuminate Indicator light OFF button ON button NOTE Do not use glass cleaner or suspend objects on or around the light sensor Otherwise light sensor sensitivity will be affected and may not operate normally e For information regarding the 3 buttons om Ge aes on the auto dimming mirror Refer to HomeLink Wireless Control System on page 4 70 The auto dimmer function is canceled when the ignition is switched ON and the shift lever is in reverse R 3 32 Power Windows The ignition must be switched ON for the power windows to operate A WARNING Make sure the opening is clear before closing a window Closing power windows are dangerous A person s hands head or even neck could be caught by the window and result in serious injury or even death This warning applies especially to children Never allow children to play with power window switches Power window switches that are not locked with the power window l
254. cluster The key battery is dead The key is out of operational range e The key is placed in areas where it is difficult for the system to detect the signal page 3 7 A key from another manufacturer similar to the key is in the operational range Forced engine starting method If the KEY warning light red illuminates or the push button start indicator light amber flashes this could indicate that the engine may not start using the usual starting method for vehicles with a type A meter messages are displayed in the instrument cluster Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible If this occurs the engine can be force started Press and hold the push button start until the engine starts Other procedures necessary for starting the engine such as having the key in the cabin and depressing the clutch pedal manual transaxle or the brake pedal automatic transaxle are required e When the engine is force started the KEY warning light red if equipped remains illuminated and the push button start indicator light amber remains flashing Automatic transaxle When the shift lever is in the neutral N position the KEY indicator light green if equipped and the push button start indicator light green do not illuminate 4 5 When Driving Start Stop Engine 7 Press the push button start after both the KEY indicator light green if equipped in t
255. cluster turns on e The temperature inside the camera is high or low e The windshield around the camera is foggy e The windshield around the camera is blocked by an obstruction causing poor forward visibility 4 102 Auto cancel warning When the following operations are performed the LDWS determines that the driver intends to make a lane change and the LDWS warning is canceled automatically The LDWS is enabled automatically after the driver performs the operation e The steering wheel is operated abruptly e The brake pedal is depressed abruptly e The accelerator pedal is depressed abruptly e The turn signal lever is operated after the turn signal lever is returned the LDWS may not operate for about 3 seconds which is the period of time required to make a lane correction NOTE After about 60 seconds have elapsed with the turn signal lever left operating the LDWS warning may operate if the vehicle is close to a white or yellow line V Canceling the System Press the LDWS switch to cancel the LDWS The LDWS OFF indication indicator light turns on The lane indication displayed in the type A instrument cluster turns off GI OFF V LDWS Warning If the system determines that there is the possibility of a lane departure the LDWS warning beep activates and the LDWS warning light flashes vehicle with type B instrument cluster Vehicles with type A instrument cluster if there is the possibility
256. cseeseeseeaeeees page 3 30 OOP lock S Witch aspueren ides ae atts iene tl page 3 15 Q Power window lock switch cccccccccscesessesecseeseeseeseeseeecseesecsecsecsessecseesesseeaeeeens page 3 35 2 Power window switches cccccssesssesesseceseesesesseseeeesesseseeesseesesseeeseeecsseeesseeesees page 3 33 1 2 The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle Pictorial Index Interior Overview Kio ol D D Audio control SWitChes c ccccccccccsessssessesessescseesesecseseseeseeecsesseseeseseseesesseseeaeseees page 5 51 2 Instrument cluster 2 024 80i0 sessesiede st edseest aliseiveedicidis eid a page 4 10 Cruise control switch c cccccccscesesessesessesescesesecsesecsesecseecseseesesesseseeees page 4 121 4 145 Dashboard illumination knob cccccesscsesessesesseseeeesessesesecseseeseeecseeecseeeeseeeesees page 4 14 CG Pushi button Start aena a vat Weceectes sizes Piaadec tan E ET page 4 2 Hazard warning flasher switch ccccccccssssesesseseseeseeseseseeseeecseeecseeecseeeeseeeesees page 4 70 Steering shift switches cccccccsccssesssseeceseseeseseeseseeseeecsesesseeesseeecseeecseeesseeeesees page 4 52 Lock release lever 522532 iexeaseisiviiacasieiciiec eeeviiens E page 3 29 Hood release handle c ccccccccssssssesseseeceseseesesseseeeesesecseecseceeseeecsesecseeecseeeesees page 6 24 W Remote fuel filler lid release oo ccc cccccsseseesceseeseeseeseeecsecsecsecseeseeseeseeeeeeeeese
257. cted as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment Impacts involving trees or poles Limitations to side collision detection Frontal offset impact to the vehicle The following illustrations are examples of side collisions that may not be detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment Side impacts involving trees or poles Side impacts with two wheeled vehicles 2 55 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Roll over Without Driver and Front Passenger Occupant Classification System With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System Limitations to roll over detection The following illustration is an example of an accident that may not be detected as a roll over accident Therefore the front seat belt pretensioners and curtain air bags may not deploy Pitch end over end t We Q 2 56 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Front Passenger Occupant Classification System First please read Supplemental Restraint System SRS Precautions page 2 41 carefully Y Front Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sensor as a part of the supplemental restraint system This sensor is equipped in the front passenger s seat cushion This sensor measures the electrostatic capacity of the front passenger s seat The SAS unit is designed to prevent the front passenger front and side
258. ction A locked trunk lid can also be opened while the key is being carried Press the electric trunk lid opener on the trunk lid and then raise the trunk lid when the latch releases S S Electric trunk lid NOTE When opening the trunk lid with the doors and the trunk lid locked it may require a few seconds for the trunk lid latch to release after the electric trunk lid opener is pressed The trunk lid can be closed when the doors are locked with the key left in the vehicle However to prevent leaving the key in the vehicle the trunk lid can be opened by pressing the electric trunk lid opener If the trunk lid cannot be opened despite doing this procedure press the electric trunk lid opener to fully open the trunk lid after pushing the trunk lid completely closed Opening the trunk lid with the remote release button Push the remote release button NOTE If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a malfunction in the electrical system and the trunk lid cannot be unlocked the trunk lid can be opened by performing the emergency procedure Refer to When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened on page 7 38 Closing the trunk lid To close lower the trunk lid slowly using the trunk lid grip recess and then push the trunk lid closed using both hands Do not slam it Pull up on the trunk lid to make sure it is secure Eo Sk lid grip recess a Before Driving Doors and Locks Vv Luggage Compartment
259. ction e The vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed The system does not operate with the following objects Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction e Stationary objects stopped vehicles obstructions Some models 4 109 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Indication on Display The Distance Recognition Support System DRSS operation status is displayed in the multi information display or the active driving display with active driving display Problems are indicated in the center display Type B audio If there is a problem take appropriate action according to the displayed message Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 NOTE When the ignition is switched off the operation status before the system was turned off is maintained For example if the ignition is switched off with the Distance Recognition Support System DRSS operable the system will be operable when the ignition is switched ON the next time e The Distance Recognition Support System DRSS can be turned on off and the system s sensitivity can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Vehicle ahead display Distance between R vehicle display 4 110 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Distance between vehicles guidelines Distance between vehicles Distance between vehicles AOOO IDIA guidelines guidelines During travel at about 40km h During travel at about 80
260. ction is used 5 48 V How to use Auxiliary jack USB port Audio can be heard from the vehicle s speakers by connecting a commercially available portable audio unit to the auxiliary jack Use a commercially available non impedance 3 5 stereo mini plug cable In addition audio can be played from the vehicle audio device by connecting a USB device or an iPod to the USB port Refer to AUX USB iPod mode on page 5 52 Interior Features Audio System V Settings NOTE Depending on the grade and specification the screen display may differ Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change You can customize settings in the setup display as follows Tab Item Function Height AD Disp Brightness Control Refer to Active Driving Display on page 4 20 Other Display Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 Distance Recognition Support System Safety SBS SCBS Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Other Sound Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 Displays the currently set time is displayed Press to advance the hour minute and select Adjust Time to move the hour minute back AM PM can only be selected with the 12 hour clock display GPS Sync When ON is selected Adjust Time is Clock disabled Time Format Changes the display between 12 and 24 hour clock time Time Zo
261. cts Reporting 8 14 Satellite Radio ce eceeeseeseeseeeees 5 42 Saving Fuel and Protection of the Environment 000 0 cecceeseeseeseeeteeeeeeees 3 43 Scheduled Maintenance 6 4 Seat Seat Position Memory Driver s Seat cceceseeseeseeeeees 2 8 Seat Belt System 3 point type oo eeeeeeeseeeeteeteeee 2 18 Automatic locking 2 17 Emergency locking 04 2 17 Extender enaena 2 21 Pregnant Women sesser 2 17 Seats Front Seat isinin iioii 2 5 Head restraint 0 0 0 cece 2 12 Rear seats senceis s ation okey 2 10 Seat Warmer ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeees 2 7 Security System Immobilizer system 000 3 39 Theft deterrent system 3 41 Service Publications cceeeeees 8 54 Smart Brake Support SBS 4 132 Collision warning 0 0 4 134 Stoping the Smart Brake Support SBS system operation 4 134 10 7 Index S Smart City Brake Support SCBS rie iiinis idii 4 127 Stopping the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system operation 4 131 Spare Pregan EEE RER 7 5 Specifications cceceesesseeseeeeeeeees 9 4 Speedometer s ss ssssssesseseesesees sesser 4 11 SRS Air Bags Front passenger occupant classification system 06 2 57 How the SRS air bags work 2 50 Limitations to SRS air bag 2 55 Monitoring eceeeeseeseeseeeees 2 62 SRS air bag deployment C
262. cy Assistance Call setting must be on Refer to Communication Settings on page 5 107 A CAUTION Though the system can be set to not call 911 doing so will defeat the purpose of the system Mazda recommends that the Mobile 911 system remain activated NOTE Mobile 911 is a secondary function of the audio entertainment system Therefore the mobile 911 function does not assure that the call is always made to 911 after an accident occurs A Hands Free device must be paired and connected The 911 operator can verify the vehicle s position information using the Hands Free device GPS if equipped The 911 operator can verify the vehicle s position information Interior Features Bluetooth 1 If the vehicle is involved in a moderate to severe collision notification of the call to 911 is made via audio and screen display To cancel the call press Cancel Emergency Assistance Call or hang up button within 10 seconds 2 If Cancel Emergency Assistance Call or hang up button is not pressed within 10 seconds the call is made to 911 automatically 5 101 Interior Features Bluetooth V Receiving an Incoming Call When an incoming call is received the incoming call notification screen is displayed The Incoming Call Notifications setting must be on Refer to Communication Settings on page 5 107 To accept the call press the pick up button on the audio control swit
263. d key battery the engine can be started using the following procedure 1 Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly until the engine has completely started 2 Manual transaxle Continue to depress the clutch pedal firmly until the engine has completely started 3 Verify that the push button start indicator light green flashes NOTE The push button start indicator light green will flash even if the push button start is pressed before depressing the brake pedal automatic transaxle or the clutch pedal manual transaxle If the clutch pedal is depressed manual transaxle or the brake pedal is depressed automatic transaxle under this condition the engine can be started by resuming the procedure following this 4 Touch the push button start using the backside of the key as shown while the push button start indicator light green flashes Push button start NOTE When touching the push button start using the backside of the key as shown in the illustration touch the push button start with the lock switch side of the key facing up 5 Verify that the push button start indicator light green turns on When Driving Start Stop Engine 6 Press the push button start to start the engine NOTE The engine cannot be started unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed manual transaxle or the brake pedal is fully depressed automatic transaxle e If there is a malfunction with the push button s
264. d off 3 Set the temperature control dial to the desired position 4 Set the fan control dial to the desired speed 5 Turn on the air conditioner by pressing the A C switch NOTE One of the functions of the air conditioner is dehumidifying the air and to use this function the temperature does not have to be set to cold Therefore set the temperature control dial to the desired position hot or cold and turn on the air conditioner when you want to dehumidify the cabin air Interior Features Climate Control System Fully Automatic Type Climate control information is displayed on the display Temperature setting display driver Driver temperature control dial recirculated air position Air intake selector outside air position AUTO switch Fan control switch Air intake selector A C mode display 2 T amp ZN As GY FRONT OFF switch Mode selector Windshield defroster switch Rear window defogger switch Passenger temperature control dial Ey ZN DUAL switch Mode selector switch display Airflow display Temperature setting display passenger V Control Switches NOTE AUTO switch indicator light AUTO switch By pressing the AUTO switch the following functions will be automatically controlled in accordance with the selected set temperature e Airflow temperature e Amount of airflow e Selection of airflow mode Outside Recirculated air select
265. d screwdriver with a soft cloth to prevent damage to the lens and then remove the lens by carefully prying on the edge of the lens with a flathead screwdriver 6 53 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance 3 Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out 4 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure V Replacing Interior Light Bulbs Overhead lights Front map lights LED type Rear map lights LED type The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a single unit because it is an integrated unit The LED bulb has to be replaced with the unit We recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer when the replacement is necessary Overhead lights Front map lights Bulb type Rear map lights Bulb type Vanity mirror lights Courtesy lights 1 Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with a soft cloth to prevent damage to the lens and then remove the lens by carefully prying on the edge of the lens with the flathead screwdriver 2 Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out 6 54 Some models Overhead lights Front map lights 3 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Trunk light 1 Press both sides of the lens cap to remove it 2 Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out 3 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure Some models 6 55 Maintenance and Care Owner Mainten
266. d to an accident Note the following conditions that may cause a variance in distance perspective When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load When the vehicle rear is lowered the object displayed on the screen appears farther than the actual distance Variance 4 160 When Driving Rear View Monitor When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle When there is a steep upgrade downgrade behind the vehicle the object displayed on the screen appears farther downgrade closer than the actual distance Appears Appears A B farther than Ma loser than pee actual see acti Z IDN S distance f Mo b gt distance EOL LIC OOA NL Object at actual position O One on screen Object on screen A Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen Object at on B Actual distance between the vehicle and object position 4 161 When Driving Rear View Monitor Three dimensional object on vehicle rear Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a flat surface the distance to the three dimensional object displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance Screen display Actual condition E A e amp CB Actual distance B gt C A Sensed distance on screen A gt B gt C V Picture Quality Adjustment A WARNING Always adjust the picture qu
267. dal is depressed with the electric parking brake applied and all of the following conditions met the parking brake is released automatically e The engine is running e The driver s door is closed e The driver s seat belt is fastened Manual transaxle e The change lever is in a position other than neutral e The clutch pedal is depressed halfway Automatic transaxle e Selector lever is in the D M or R position NOTE If something such as the driver s foot contacts the accelerator pedal with the engine running and the electric parking brake applied the parking brake may be released automatically If you do not intend to drive immediately shift the change lever manual transmission to the neutral position or shift the selector lever automatic transmission to the P or N position When Driving Brake Display Indication For vehicles with the type A instrument cluster check the vehicle condition or have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication V Warning Light A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 YW Brake Pad Wear Indicator When the disc brake pads become worn the built in wear indicators contact the disc plates This causes a screeching noise to warn that the pads should be replaced When you hear this noise consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible
268. ded time or kilometer period to ensure long term reliability 3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS initialization must be performed so that the system operates normally if equipped 6 15 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance V Schedule 2 Number of months or kilometers whichever comes first Maintenance Interval Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 x1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 SKYACTIV G 2 5 Drive belts I Engine oil R R IR R IRIR RIRIRI _RIRIR Engine oil filter R R IR R I RI RI RIRIRI_RIRIR COOLING SYSTEM Cooling system I Engine Gonti Replace at first it rae 1 P after that every Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I FUEL SYSTEM Air filter C R C R C R Fuel lines and hoses Hoses and tubes for emission Fuel filter Replace every 60 000 km IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs Replace every 120 000 km ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Function of all lights CHASSIS and BODY Brake lines hoses and connections Brake and clutch fluid level Brake fluid R Disc brakes I I Tire Rotation Rotate every 10 000 km ere 3 Tire inflation pressure and tire wear Steering operation and linkages Front and rear suspension ball joints and wheel bearing axial play Driveshaft dust boots Bolts and
269. detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensors The following systems also use the radar sensors rear e Blind Spot Monitoring BSM System e Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA The radar sensors rear are installed inside the rear bumper one each on the left and right sides Refer to Radar Sensors Rear on page 4 143 4 93 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Adaptive Front Lighting System AFS The adaptive front lighting system AFS automatically adjusts the headlight beams to the left or right in conjunction with the operation of the steering wheel after the headlights have been turned on and the vehicle speed is about 2 km h 2 mph or higher A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 NOTE The Adaptive Front Lighting System AFS function can be switched to operable inoperable using the personalization function Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 4 94 Some models When Driving i ACTIVSENSE High Beam Control System HBC The High Beam Control System HBC determines the conditions in front of the vehicle using the Forward Sensing Camera FSC while driving in darkness to automatically switch the headlights between high and low beams Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 While driving the vehicle at a speed of about 30 km h
270. dguard 5 Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it 6 Disconnect the bulb from the socket Front turn signal lights Front side marker lights Parking lights With halogen headlights 7 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure Fog lights With LED headlights The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a single unit because it is an integrated unit The LED bulb has to be replaced with the unit We recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer when the replacement is necessary Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Brake lights Taillights High mount brake light Side turn signal lights Rear side marker lights With LED headlights The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a single unit because it is an integrated unit The LED bulb has to be replaced with the unit We recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer when the replacement is necessary Rear turn signal lights Rear side marker lights With halogen headlights 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and the turn signal switch is off 2 Lift the trunk mat 3 Left side Pull the center of each plastic retainer and remove the retainers and the pocket Right side Remove the pocket Left side Removal Some models 6 51 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Right side 4 Pull the center of each plastic retainer and remove the retainers and the trunk end trim Removal I
271. dicator light illuminates when the engine oil replacement period is reached If the light is illuminated replace the engine oil Refer to Engine Oil on page 6 27 V If the traction control system TCS dynamic stability control DSC indicator light illuminates m ee If the light stays on the TCS DSC or the brake assist system may have a malfunction and they may not operate correctly Take your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer NOTE In addition to the indicator light flashing a slight lugging sound will come from the engine This indicates that the TCS DSC is operating properly On slippery surfaces such as fresh snow it will be impossible to achieve high rpm when the TCS is on V If the dynamic stability control system DSC OFF indicator light illuminates e e OFF If the light remains illuminated and the TCS DSC is not switched off take your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer The DSC may have a malfunction V If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light blue does not turn off ee ee If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine has been sufficiently warmed up the temperature sensor could have a malfunction Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer 7 31 If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds V If the turn signal hazard warning indicator light illuminates or flashes at an abnormally high speed
272. ding eee Driving on Uneven Road TOWING sssscsrserssssesssccecsscsscsscsscsscseessess 3 49 Trailer TOWING eeeeeeeeeseeeeteeteeeee 3 49 Recreational Towing ccceeeeeee 3 49 Some models 3 1 Before Driving Keys A WARNING Do not leave the key in your vehicle with children and keep them in a place where your children will not find or play with them Leaving children in a vehicle with the key is dangerous This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed Children may find these keys to be an interesting toy to play with and could cause the power windows or other controls to operate or even make the vehicle move A CAUTION gt gt gt Because the key transmitter uses low intensity radio waves it may not function correctly under the following conditions gt The key is carried with communication devices such as cellular phones gt The key contacts or is covered by a metal object gt The key is near electronic devices such as personal computers gt Non Mazda genuine electronic equipment is installed in the vehicle gt There is equipment which discharges radio waves near the vehicle The key transmitter may consume battery power excessively if it receives high intensity radio waves Do not place the key near electronic devices such as televisions or personal computers To avoid damage to the key transmitter DO NOT
273. dio device and the location of the device in the vehicle not in the trunk or a metal type box and then try the link operation again e Device selection can also be done using voice recognition How to confirm the device currently linked Switch to the link change mode Refer to Changing the link to a Bluetooth audio device The device name displayed first is the device which is currently linked Deleting a device 1 Using the audio control dial select the pairing delete mode PAIR DELETE in the BT SETUP mode Refer to Bluetooth audio device set up for details Interior Features Bluetooth 2 Press the audio control dial to determine the mode 3 The name of the first device among the paired devices is displayed 4 Rotate the audio control dial and select the name of the paired device you would like to delete Device name 1 y Device name 2 v4 Device name 3 Device name 4 v4 Device name 5 Device name 6 v4 Device name 7 v4 GO BACK lt GaN NOTE Only the names of paired devices can be displayed If only one device is paired only the name for this device is displayed 5 Ifa selection other than GO BACK is made and the audio control dial is pressed SURE NO is displayed 6 Rotate the audio control dial clockwise and switch the display to SURE YES 5 79 In
274. during the manual closing operation or the auto closing operation the window will stop and open halfway A WARNING Make sure nothing blocks the window just before it reaches the fully closed position or while fully holding up the power window switch Blocking the power window just before it reaches the fully closed position or while fully holding up the power window switch is dangerous In this case the jam safe function cannot prevent the window from closing all the way If fingers are caught serious injuries could occur NOTE e Depending on driving conditions a closing power window could stop and start opening when the window feels a shock that is similar to something blocking it In the event the jam safe function activates and the power window cannot be closed automatically pull and hold the switch fully and the window will close The jam safe window function does not operate until the system has been reset Engine off power window operation The power window can be operated for about 40 seconds after the ignition is switched from ON to off with all doors closed If any door is opened the power window will stop operating NOTE For engine off operation of the power window the switch must be held up firmly throughout window closure because the auto closing function will be inoperable Y Power Window Lock Switch This feature prevents all power windows from operating except the driver s power window Keep th
275. e Control MRCC system is not canceled To Deactivate The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC is canceled when the OFF switch is pressed When the system is temporarily canceled In the following cases the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is temporarily canceled and the MRCC Cancelled indication is displayed in the display in the instrument cluster The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC indicator light green turns off simultaneously e The CANCEL switch is pressed e The brake pedal is depressed e The parking brake is applied e The selector lever is shifted to park P neutral N or reverse R 4 123 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE In the following cases the MRCC Cancelled indication is displayed and the beep sounds one time e The vehicle speed decreases to less than 25 km 16 mph e The DSC has operated e The TCS has operated for a certain period of time The Smart City Brake Support SCBS has operated e The Smart Brake Support SBS has operated e When traveling on a down slope for a long period of time e There is a problem with the system NOTE e The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system may be canceled during rain fog snow or other inclement weather conditions or the front surface of the radiator grille is dirty If you have temporarily canceled the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC you can return to your previously set speed by pressing the RES sw
276. e replacement parts fluid filters etc indicating the date and mileage must accompany this statement NOTE If you elect to perform maintenance yourself or have your vehicle serviced at a location other than an Authorized Mazda Dealer Mazda requires that all fluids parts and materials must meet Mazda standards for durability and performance as described in this manual Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance as opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship will not be honored Maintenance and Care Essential Information Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda s original equipment may perform maintenance But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts 6 3 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Scheduled Maintenance U S A Canada and Puerto Rico Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions severe driving conditions apply e Repeated short distance driving e Driving in dusty conditions e Driving with extended use of brakes e Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used e Driving on rough or muddy roads e Extended periods of idling or low speed operation e Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates e Driving in extremely hot conditions e Driving in mountainous conditions continually If any do apply fol
277. e a wire brush The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged VY Lubricant Quality Lubricant Classification Engine oil Refer to Recommended Oil on page 6 27 API i L 4 Manual transaxle oil Service g SAE 75W 80 Automatic transaxle fluid Mazda Genuine ATF FZ Brake Clutch fluid SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT 3 NOTE Refer to Introduction on page 6 2 for owner s responsibility in protecting your investment Specifications Vv Capacities Approximate Quantities Item Capacity With oil filter replacement 4 5 L 4 8 US qt 4 0 Imp qt Engine oil Without oil filter replacement 4 3 L 4 5 US qt 3 8 Imp qt Manual transaxle 6 9 L 7 3 US qt 6 1 Imp qt Coolant Automatic transaxle 7 2 L 7 6 US qt 6 3 Imp qt Manual transaxle oil Automatic transaxle fluid 1 65 L 1 74 US qt 1 45 Imp qt 7 8 L 8 2 US qt 6 9 Imp qt Fuel tank 62 0 L 16 4 US gal 13 6 Imp gal Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges VY Dimensions Item Vehicle specification Without license plate holder Overall length 4 865 mm 191 5 in With license plate holder 4 895 mm 192 7 in Overall width Overall height 1 840 mm 72 4 in 1 450 mm 57 1 in 17 inch wheel vehicle Front tread 1 585 mm 62 4 in 19 inch wheel vehicle 1 595 mm 62 8 in 17 inch wheel vehicle
278. e active driving display If water or other liquids are splashed on the active driving display it could cause damage gt Do not place objects above the active driving display screen or apply stickers to the combiner as they will cause interference gt A sensor is integrated to control the display s luminosity If the optical receiver is covered the display s luminosity will lower making the display difficult to view gt Do not allow intense light to hit the optical receiver Otherwise it could cause damage NOTE It may be difficult to view the display when wearing sunglasses Take off your sunglasses or adjust the luminosity If the battery has been removed and re installed or the battery voltage is low the adjusted position may deviate The display may be difficult to view or temporarily affected by weather conditions such as rain snow light and temperature e If the audio system is removed the active driving display cannot be operated 4 20 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display The active driving display indicates the following information Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Operation Conditions and Warnings Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC on page 4 117 Lane Departure Warning System LDWS Operation Conditions and Warnings Refer to Lane Departure Warning System LDWS on page 4 98 Smart Brake Support SBS Warnings Refer to Smart Brake Support SBS on page 4 132 Smart City Brake Support SCB
279. e ahead The vehicle ahead is significantly dirty Under bad weather condition such as rain fog and snow The window washer is being used or the windshield wipers are not used when it s raining The windshield is dirty The steering wheel is turned completely left or right or the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and comes close to the vehicle ahead e Trucks with low loading platforms and vehicles with an extremely low or high profile e Vehicles with certain shapes such as a vehicle carrier e Under the following conditions the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system may not operate normally e Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat If there is the possibility of partial contact with a vehicle ahead When driving on continuously curving roads and entering and exiting exits Elongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the laser sensor e Exhaust gas from the vehicle in front sand snow and water vapor rising from manholes and grating and water splashed into the air When towing a malfunctioning vehicle When driving with tires having significantly different wear e In the following cases the laser sensor may inadvertently determine that there is a vehicle ahead and the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system may operate e Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve Vehicles passing in the opposite lane while making a curve Met
280. e and cause serious injury Open the hood ONLY after steam is no longer escaping from the engine Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous The escaping steam could seriously burn you If the High engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates 1 Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right of way 7 18 2 Put a vehicle with an automatic transaxle in park P a manual transaxle in neutral 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Turn off the air conditioner 5 Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from the engine compartment If steam is coming from the engine compartment Do not go near the front of the vehicle Stop the engine Wait until the steam dissipates then open the hood and start the engine If neither coolant nor steam is Open the hood and idle the engine until it cools A CAUTION If the cooling fan does not operate while the engine is running the engine temperature will increase Stop the engine and call an Authorized Mazda Dealer 6 Make sure the cooling fan is operating then turn off the engine after the temperature has decreased 7 When cool check the coolant level If it is low look for coolant leaks from the radiator and hoses If you find a leak or other damage or if coolant is still leaking Stop the engine and call an Authorized Mazda Dealer Cooling fan If you find no problems the engine is cool and no leaks are obvious Caref
281. e and speed directly expanding along the door on the side the car is hit Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the door or leaning against a window or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front seatbacks Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air bags deploy Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing something in front of them is dangerous In an accident an object could interfere with air bag inflation and injure the occupants 2 43 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys Attaching objects to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the seat in any way is dangerous In an accident the object could interfere with the side air bag which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats impeding the added protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is dangerous Furthermore the bag could be cut open releasing the gas Do not hang net bags map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front seats Never use seat covers on the front seats Always keep the side air bag modules in your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision Do not attach
282. e child restraint system for the child s age and size 2 42 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Never use a rear facing child restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that could deploy Rear facing child restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates The child restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands or feet on them is extremely dangerous The driver and front passenger air bags inflate with great force and speed Serious injuries could occur if someone is too close The driver should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel The front seat passenger should keep both feet on the floor Front seat occupants should adjust their seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn properly Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them or sleeping up against the door or hanging out the windows is extremely dangerous The side and curtain air bags inflate with great forc
283. e driver s vision which could result in a serious accident Vv Opening the Hood 1 With the vehicle parked pull the release handle to unlock the hood 2 Insert your hand into the hood opening slide the latch lever to the right and lift up the hood 6 24 NOTE The lever is located a little to the left of center when facing the vehicle 3 Grasp the support rod in the padded area and secure it in the support rod hole indicated by the arrow to hold the hood open Closing the Hood 1 Check under the hood area to make certain all filler caps are in place and all loose items e g tools oil containers etc have been removed 2 Lift the hood grasp the padded area on the support rod and secure the support rod in the clip Verify that the support rod is secured in the clip before closing the hood 3 Lower the hood slowly to a height of about 20 cm 7 9 in above its closed position and then let it drop A CAUTION When closing the hood do not push it excessively such as by applying your weight Otherwise the hood could be deformed Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance 6 25 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Engine Compartment Overview Windshield washer fluid reservoir Brake Clutch fluid reservoir Engine oil dipstick Battery Fuse block Cooling system cap Engine oil filler c
284. e driver to keep a safe distance from the vehicle ahead AWARNING Do not rely completely on the Distance Recognition Support System DRSS and always drive carefully The Distance Recognition Support System DRSS provides advice for safe driving and notifies the driver of a recommended safe distance to maintain with a vehicle ahead The ability to detect a vehicle ahead is limited depending on the type of vehicle ahead the weather conditions and the traffic conditions Therefore if the accelerator and brake pedals are not operated correctly it could lead to an accident Always verify the safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safe distance from vehicles ahead or on coming vehicles When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE e The Distance Recognition Support System DRSS operates when all of the following conditions are met The ignition is switched ON e The Distance Recognition Support System DRSS is on The selector lever is in a position other than reverse R e The vehicle speed is 30 km h or faster 19 mph or faster e The objects which activate the system are 4 wheeled vehicles e The Distance Recognition Support System DRSS may also operate in the presence of motorcycles and bicycles e The Distance Recognition Support System DRSS may not operate normally under the following conditions The Dynamic Stability Control DSC has a malfun
285. e fan speeds The fan has seven speeds Mode selector dial Turn the mode selector dial to select airflow mode page 5 4 NOTE The mode selector dial can be set at the intermediate positions between each mode Set the dial to an intermediate position if you want to split the airflow between the two modes e For example when the mode selector dial is at the position between the i and 74 positions airflow from the floor vent is less than that of the 4 position A C switch Press the A C switch to turn the air conditioner on The indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the fan control dial is in any position except OFF Press the switch once again to turn the air conditioner off NOTE The air conditioner may not function when the outside temperature approaches 0 C 32 F 5 5 Interior Features Climate Control System Air intake selector This switch controls the source of air entering the vehicle Outside or recirculated air positions can be selected Press the switch to select outside recirculated air positions Recirculated air position indicator light illuminated Outside air is shut off Use this position when going through tunnels driving in congested traffic high engine exhaust areas or when quick cooling is desired Outside air position indicator light turned off Outside air is allowed to enter the cabin Use this mode for ventilation or windshield defrostin
286. e fired they must be replaced A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 Refer to Air Bag Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Beep on page 7 34 With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System In addition the pretensioner system for the front passenger like the front and side passenger air bag is designed to only deploy when the front passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger s seat For details refer to the front passenger occupant classification sensor page 2 57 2 19 Essential Safety Equipment Seat Belt Systems Load limiter The load limiting system releases belt webbing in a controlled manner to reduce belt force on the occupant s chest While the most severe load on a seat belt occurs in frontal collisions the load limiter has an automatic mechanical function and can activate in any accident mode with sufficient occupant movement Even if the pretensioners have not fired the load limiting function must be checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer A WARNING Wear seat belts only as recommended in this owner s manual Incorrect positioning of the driver and front passenger seat belts is dangerous Without proper positioning the pretensioner and load limiting systems cannot provide adequate protection in an accident and this could result in serious injury For more
287. e following Pair Edit Delete List or Set Pairing Code 7 Say Beep Pair 8 Prompt Start the pairing process on your Bluetooth device Your pairing code is 0000 XXXX Input this on your Bluetooth device when prompted on the device See device manual for instructions 9 Using the device perform a search for the Bluetooth device Peripheral device NOTE For the operation of the device refer to its instruction manual 10 Select Mazda from the device list searched by the device 11 Input the 4 digit pairing code to the device 12 Prompt Please say the name of the device after the beep 5 72 13 Say Beep XXXX Say a device tag an arbitrary name for the device Example Stan s device NOTE Say a paired device tag within 10 seconds If more than two devices are to be paired they cannot be paired with the same or similar device tag 14 15 16 Prompt XXXXXX Ex Stan s device Device tag Is this correct Say Beep Yes Prompt Pairing complete After a device is registered the system automatically identifies the device By activating Bluetooth Hands Free again or by activating Bluetooth Hands Free first after switching the ignition from OFF to ACC the system reads out a voice guidance XXXXXX Ex Stan s device Device tag is conn
288. e heater when the vehicle is cold the CD or optical components prism and lens in the CD player may become clouded with condensation At this time the CD will eject immediately when placed in the unit A clouded CD can be corrected simply by wiping it with a soft cloth Clouded optical components will clear naturally in about an hour Wait for normal operation to return before attempting to use the unit Handling the CD player The following precautions should be observed Do not use deformed or cracked CDs The disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction e Do not use non conventional discs such as heart shaped octagonal discs etc The disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction 5 16 e Ifthe memory portion of the CD is transparent or translucent do not use the disc Transparent e Anew CD may have rough edges on its inner and outer perimeters If a disc with rough edges is used proper setting will not be possible and the CD player will not play the CD In addition the disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction Remove the rough edges in advance by using a ball point pen or pencil as shown below To remove the rough edges rub the side of the pen or pencil against the inner and outer perimeter of the CD e When driving over uneven surfaces the sound may jump N CDs bearing the logo shown in the illustration can be played No other discs can be played COMPACT COMPACT
289. e jack is well lubricated before using it 1 Park on a level surface off the right of way and firmly set the parking brake 2 Put a vehicle with an automatic transaxle in Park P a manual transaxle in Reverse R or 1 and turn off the engine 3 Turn on the hazard warning flasher 4 Have everyone get out of the vehicle and away from the vehicle and traffic 5 Remove the jack tool and spare tire page 7 3 6 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire When blocking a wheel place a tire block both in front and behind the tire NOTE When blocking a tire use rocks or wood blocks of sufficient size if possible to hold the tire in place If Trouble Arises Flat Tire V Removing a Flat Tire 1 Loosen the lug nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn each but do not remove any lug nuts until the tire has been raised off the ground 2 Place the jack on the ground 3 Turn the jack screw in the direction shown in the figure and adjust the jack head so that it is close to the jack up position Jack head 7 7 If Trouble Arises Flat Tire 4 Place the jack under the jack up position closest to the tire being changed with the jack head squarely under the jack up point Jacking position 5 Continue raising the jack head gradually by rotating the screw with your hand until the jack head is inserted into the jack up position Tire blocks 7 8 AWARNING
290. e moonroof before operating it to avoid water penetration which could cause rust and water damage to your headliner V Tilt Operation The rear of the moonroof can be tilted open to provide more ventilation To fully tilt automatically momentarily press the tilt slide switch To fully close automatically momentarily press the tilt slide switch in the forward direction To stop tilting partway press the tilt slide switch Close Tilt down V Slide Operation To fully open automatically momentarily press the tilt slide switch in the backward direction To fully close automatically momentarily press the tilt slide switch in the forward direction To stop sliding partway press the tilt slide switch Power Moonroof Re set Procedure If the battery is disconnected the moonroof will not operate The moonroof will not operate correctly until it is re set Carry out the following procedure to re set the moonroof and resume operation 1 Switch the ignition ON 2 Press the tilt switch to partially tilt open the rear of the moonroof 3 Repeat Step 2 The rear of the moonroof tilts open to the fully open position then closes a little NOTE If the re set procedure is performed while the moonroof is in the slide position partially open it will close before the rear tilt opens Before Driving Windows VW Jam safe Moonroof If a person s hands head or an object blocks the moonroof durin
291. e needed in the removal and installation of front seats It is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that the bags do not accidentally deploy and that the seats retain an undamaged air bag connection 2 45 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous The components essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged and in the event of a side collision the appropriate air bags may not deploy which could result in death or serious injury To prevent damage to the components essential to the supplemental restraint system do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats Do not operate a vehicle with damaged air bag seat belt pretensioner system components Expended or damaged air bag seat belt pretensioner system components must be replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy or damage them Only a trained Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully evaluate these systems to see that they will work in any subsequent accident Driving with an expended or damaged air bag or pretensioner unit will not afford you the necessary protection in the event of any subsequent accident which could result in serious injury or death Do not remove interior air bag parts Removing any components such as the front seats front dashboard the steering wheel or parts on the front a
292. e parental lock function is in use Switching of Lock Unlock and PIN code setting changes can be performed v V Plays each channel in the current channel list for 5 seconds Select again to continue receiving the channel Plays the previous channel Plays the next channel Selection from channel list Receivable channels can be displayed on the channel list screen You can easily select the channel you want to listen from the list Each category can be also displayed 1 Select the icon to display the channel list 2 Select a desired channel Select from category list 1 Select the icon to display the channel list 2 Select Category to display the category list 5 44 Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 3 Select a desired category Parental lock If a channel is locked the channel is muted To use the parental lock function the PIN code must be initialized first By using the session lock the parental lock can be enabled or disabled during the current drive cycle from when the ignition is switched on to switched off When the session lock is on the parental lock is available When the session lock is off the parental lock is temporarily cancelled When canceling the parental lock or session lock or when changing the PIN code PIN code input is required PIN code
293. e previous folder press the folder down button W or press the folder up button A to advance to the next folder Music Scan This function scans the titles in a folder currently being played and plays ten seconds of each song to aid you in finding a song you want to listen to Press and hold the scan button MEDIA during playback to start the scan play operation the track number will flash Press and hold the scan button MEDIA again to cancel scan playback NOTE If the unit is left in scan normal playback will resume where scan was selected Repeat playback Track repeat 1 Press the repeat button 1 during playback to play the current track repeatedly TRACK RPT is displayed f is displayed next to RPT at the bottom of the display area 2 To cancel the repeat playback press the button again after 3 seconds Folder repeat 1 Press the repeat button 1 during playback and then press the button again within 3 seconds to play the tracks in the current folder repeatedly FOLDER RPT is displayed fa is displayed next to RPT at the bottom of the display area 2 Press the button again to cancel the repeat playback Interior Features Audio System Random playback Tracks are randomly selected and played Folder random 1 Press the random button 2 during playback to play the tracks in the folder randomly FOLDER RDM is displayed fm is displayed next to RDM at the botto
294. e to disc characteristics scratches smudges dirt etc or due to dust or condensation on the lens inside the unit Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to direct sunlight or high temperature may damage the CD R CD RWs and make them unplayable CD R CD RW exceeding 700 MB cannot be played This unit may not be able to play certain discs made using a computer due to the application writing software setting used For details consult the store where the application was purchased It is possible that certain text data such as titles recorded on a CD R CD RW may not be displayed when musical data CD DA is playing The period from when a CD RW is inserted to when it begins playing is longer than a normal CD or CD R Completely read the instruction manual and cautions for CD R CD RWs 5 17 Interior Features Audio System e Do not use discs with cellophane tape adhering partially peeled off labels or adhesive material exuding from the edges of the CD label Also do not use discs with a commercially available CD R label affixed The disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction Vv Operating Tips for MP3 This unit plays files with the extension mp3 as MP3 files A CAUTION Do not use an audio file extension on files other than audio files In addition do not change the audio file extension Otherwise the unit will not recognize the file correctly resulting in noise or a malfunction NOTE Supply of
295. e vehicle has not stopped completely or the clutch pedal is released While Hill Launch Assist HLA is operating the brake pedal may feel stiff and vibrate however this does not indicate a malfunction Hill Launch Assist HLA does not operate while the TCS DSC indicator light is illuminated Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 Hill Launch Assist HLA does not turn off even if the DSC OFF switch is pressed to turn off the TCS DSC 4 79 When Driving ABS TCS DSC Antilock Brake System ABS The ABS control unit continuously monitors the speed of each wheel If one wheel is about to lock up the ABS responds by automatically releasing and reapplying that wheel s brake The driver will feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal and may hear a chattering noise from the brake system This is normal ABS system operation Continue to depress the brake pedal without pumping the brakes A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 AWARNING Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for safe driving The ABS cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless driving excessive speed tailgating following another vehicle too closely driving on ice and snow and hydroplaning reduced tire friction and road contact because of water on the road surface You can still have an accident 4 80 NOTE Braking distances may be longer on loo
296. e with different types of tires is dangerous It could cause poor handling and poor braking leading to loss of control Except for the limited use of the temporary spare tire use only the same type tires radial bias belted bias type on all four wheels Using Wrong Sized Tires Using any other tire size than what is specified for your Mazda page 9 7 is dangerous It could seriously affect ride handling ground clearance tire clearance and speedometer calibration This could cause you to have an accident Use only tires that are the correct size specified for your Mazda Y Tire Inflation Pressure A WARNING Always inflate the tires to the correct pressure Overinflation or underinflation of tires is dangerous Adverse handling or unexpected tire failure could result in a serious accident Refer to Tires on page 9 7 Use only a Mazda genuine tire valve cap Use of a non genuine part is dangerous as the correct tire air pressure cannot be maintained if the tire valve becomes damaged If the vehicle is driven under this condition the tire air pressure will decrease which could result in a serious accident Do not use any part for the tire valve cap that is not a Mazda genuine part Inspect all tire pressures monthly including the spare when the tires are cold Maintain recommended pressures for the best ride handling and minimum tire wear Refer to the specification charts page 9 7 After adjusting the
297. ead life may be shorter depending on driving conditions gt The temporary spare tire is for limited use however if the tread wear solid band indicator appears replace the tire with the same type of temporary spare page 6 43 NOTE Tires degrade over time even when they are not being used on the road It is recommended that tires generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire The period in which the tire was manufactured both week and year is indicated by a 4 digit number Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8 25 Replacing a Wheel A WARNING Always use wheels of the correct size on your vehicle Using a wrong sized wheel is dangerous Braking and handling could be affected leading to loss of control and an accident 6 43 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance A CAUTION A wrong sized wheel may adversely affect gt Tire fit gt Wheel and bearing life gt Ground clearance gt Snow chain clearance gt Speedometer calibration gt Headlight aim gt Bumper height gt Tire Pressure Monitoring System When replacing a wheel make sure the new one is the same as the original factory wheel in diameter rim width and offset inset outset Proper tire balancing provides the best r
298. ealer The distance to empty will be calculated and displayed every second 4 16 Some models NOTE Even though the distance to empty display may indicate a sufficient amount of remaining driving distance before refueling is required refuel as soon as possible if the fuel level is very low or the low fuel warning light illuminates The display will not change unless you add more than approximately 10 L 2 6 US gal 2 2 Imp gal of fuel The distance to empty is the approximate remaining distance the vehicle can be driven until all the graduation marks in the fuel gauge indicating the remaining fuel supply disappear o If there is no past fuel economy information such as after first purchasing your vehicle or the information is deleted when the battery cables are disconnected the actual distance to empty range may differ from the amount indicated When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Average fuel economy mode This mode displays the average fuel economy by calculating the total fuel consumption and the total traveled distance since purchasing the vehicle re connecting the battery after disconnection or resetting the data The average fuel economy is calculated and displayed every minute Type A Average MPG 22 4 mpg Type B AVG ut tb aempg bm ee To clear the data being displayed press the INFO button for more than 1 5 seconds After pressing the INFO button L 100 km
299. ear map lights also turn on and off when the overhead light switch is operated Front Map Lights When the overhead light switch is in the door or off position press the lens to illuminate the front map lights and then press the lens again to turn them off 5 128 NOTE The front map lights will not turn off even if the lens is pressed in the following cases The overhead light switch is in the ON position e The overhead light switch is in the door position with the door open The illuminated entry system is on Rear Map Lights When the overhead light switch is in the door or off position press the lens to illuminate a rear map light and then press the lens again to turn it off NOTE e Once the rear map lights have been turned off they will turn on and off depending on the position to which the overhead light is switched The rear map lights will not turn off even if the lens is pressed in the following cases The overhead light switch is ON The overhead light switch is in the door position with the door open The illuminated entry system is on Trunk Light The trunk light is on when the lid is open and off when it s closed NOTE To prevent the battery from being discharged do not leave the trunk open for a long period when the engine is not running Courtesy Lights Turns on when any door is open or the illuminated entry system is on Courtesy light Int
300. eat may cause the front passenger s seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item To allow the front passenger seat weight sensor to function properly do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the front passenger s seat The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference Ifa small child is seated on the front passenger s seat the warning light may not operate VY Door Ajar Warning Indication Warning Light Type A ff C Type B A Type A This warning indication illuminates when any door is not securely closed Close the door securely before driving the vehicle When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Type B This warning light illuminates when any door or the trunk lid is not securely closed Close the door or the trunk lid securely before driving the vehicle V Trunk lid Ajar Warning Indication Type A instrument cluster gt As This warning indication is illuminated when the trunk lid is not securely closed Close the trunk lid securely before driving the vehicle V Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indication Warning Light POLS ff t Type B This warning light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON Type A Type B This warning light warning indication indicates that little washer fluid remains Add fluid page 6 31 Some models 4 37 When D
301. eat restrains a child s body using the harness Booster seat A booster seat is a child restraint accessory designed to improve the fit of the seat belt system around the child s body Installing Child Restraint Systems Accident statistics reveal that a child is safer in the rear seat The front passenger s seat is clearly the worst choice for any child under 12 and with rear facing child restraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to air bags NOTE Even if your vehicle is equipped with front passenger occupant classification sensor page 2 57 which automatically deactivates the front passenger air bag a rear seat is the safest place for a child of any age or size Some child restraint systems now come with tethers and therefore must be installed on the seats that take tethers to be effective In your Mazda tethered child restraint systems can only be accommodated in the three positions on the rear seat Some child restraint systems also employ specially designed LATCH attachments refer to Using LATCH Lower Anchor page 2 37 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint A WARNING Tethered Child Restraint Systems Work Only on Tether Equipped Rear Seats Installation of a tether equipped child restraint system in the front passenger s seat defeats the safety design of the system and will result in an increased chance of serious injury if the child restraint system goes forward without benefit
302. ecification page 9 7 and inspect the lug nuts for tightness A CAUTION Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern or studs only from front to rear not from side to side Tire performance will be weakened if rotated from side to side 8 34 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Replacing a Tire A WARNING Always use tires that are in good condition Driving with worn tires is dangerous Reduced braking steering and traction could result in an accident If a tire wears evenly a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread Replace the tire when this happens 7 New tread Worn tread Tread wear indicator Mi BR y JA L You should replace the tire before the band crosses the entire tread NOTE Tires degrade over time even when they are not being used on the road It is recommended that tires generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire The period in which the tire was manufactured both week and year is indicated by a 4 digit number Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8 25 V Safety Practices The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety So cultivate good driving h
303. ecome very hot in a closed vehicle during warm weather To avoid burning yourself or a child check them before you or your child touches them NOTE Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH child restraint systems in the rear seats When using these anchors to secure a child restraint system refer to Using LATCH Lower Anchor page 2 37 2 27 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint Child Restraint System Installation VY Child Restraint System Types In this owner s manual explanation of child restraint systems is provided for the following three types of popular child restraint systems infant seat child seat booster seat NOTE e Installation position is determined by the type of child restraint system Always read the manufacturer s instructions and this owner s manual carefully e Due to variations in the design of child restraint systems vehicle seats and seat belts all child restraint systems may not fit all seating positions Before purchasing a child restraint system it should be tested in the specific vehicle seating position or positions where it is intended to be used If a previously purchased child restraint system does not fit you may need to purchase a different one that will Infant seat An infant seat provides restraint by bracing the infant s head neck and back against the seating surface 2 28 Child seat A child s
304. ect the contact you would like to call to display the screen indicating the details for the contact Go to Step 4 5 99 Interior Features Bluetooth 4 Select the phone number you would like to call 5 Select Yes Deleting from your favorites 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Favorites to display the favorites list 3 Select Add Edit Communication Favorites 4 Select Delete 5 Select the contact information which you would like to delete 6 Select Delete Changing the display order of your favorites list 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Favorites to display the favorites list 3 Select Add Edit Communication Favorites 4 Select Move 5 The contact can be moved after it is selected 6 Slide the contact or move it using the commander switch then select Changing contact name of your favorites 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Favorites to display the favorites list 3 Select Add Edit Communication Favorites 4 Select Rename 5 100 5 Select the contact to display the keyboard screen 6 Ifa new name is input and is selected the contact name is stored NOTE
305. ected NOTE When the pairing is completed the B symbol is displayed Some Bluetooth audio devices need a certain amount of time before the B symbol is displayed Device registration can also be done by operating the audio unit Depending on the device the registration status may be lost after a certain period of time If this occurs repeat the entire process from Step 1 Registered device read out Bluetooth Hands Free can read out the devices registered to its system NOTE Do this function only when parked It is too distracting to attempt while driving and you may make too many errors to be effective 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Pairing options 5 Prompt Select one of the following Pair Edit Delete List or Set Pairing Code 6 Say Beep List 7 Prompt XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX Ex Device A device B device C The voice guidance reads out the device tags registered to the Hands Free system Press the talk button with a short press during the read out at the desired device and then say one of the following voice commands to execute it e Select phone Selects device Mobile phone when the talk button is short pressed e Select music
306. ed Mazda Dealer for more information A WARNING Do not use a seat belt extender unless it is necessary Using a seat belt extender when not necessary is dangerous The seat belt will be too long and not fit properly In an accident the seat belt will not provide adequate protection and you could be seriously injured Only use the extender when it is required to fasten the seat belt properly 2 21 Essential Safety Equipment Seat Belt Systems Do not use an improper extender Using a seat belt extender that is for another person or a different vehicle or seat is dangerous The seat belt will not provide adequate protection and the user could be seriously injured in an accident Only use the extender provided for you and for the particular vehicle and seat NEVER use the extender in a different vehicle or seat If you sell your Mazda do not leave your seat belt extender in the vehicle It could be used accidentally by the new owner of the vehicle After removing the seat belt extender discard it Never use the seat belt extender in any other vehicle you may own in the future Do not use an extender that is too long Using an extender that is too long is dangerous The seat belt will not fit properly In an accident the seat belt will not provide adequate protection and you could be seriously injured Do not use the extender or choose one shorter in length if the distance between the extender s buckle and the center o
307. ed Mazda Dealer The DSC may have a malfunction V Smart Brake Support Smart City Brake Support SBS SCBS OFF Indicator Light Type A O This indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON When the Smart Brake Support Smart City Brake Support SBS SCBS system is turned off the Smart Brake Support Smart City Brake Support SBS SCBS OFF indicator light turns on Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 YV Smart City Brake Support SCBS Warning Indication Type A The indication is displayed in the multi information display during SCBS brake operation or brake assist SCBS brake assist operation Vi ELOOP Indication Type A ELOOP If the engine is started after the vehicle has not been driven for a long period of time an i ELOOP charging message may be indicated in the display Leave the engine idling and wait until the message disappears NOTE If the vehicle is driven while the message is displayed a beep sound is heard If you turn the steering wheel while the message is displayed it will feel heavier than normal but this does not indicate an abnormality Stop the vehicle in a safe location with the engine running and do not attempt to turn the steering wheel The steering operation will return to normal after the message is no longer displayed When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display V Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Li
308. eduled Maintenance Number of months or kilometers miles whichever comes first Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 x1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 x1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Maintenance Interval AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Cabin air filter Replace every 40 000 km 25 000 miles or 2 years Chart symbols I Inspect Inspect and clean repair adjust fill up or replace if necessary R Replace L Lubricate T Tighten Remarks 1 Use of FL 22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant Using engine coolant other than FL 22 may cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system 2 According to state provincial and federal regulations failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties However Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or mileage kilometer period to ensure long term reliability 3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS initialization must be performed so that the system operates normally if equipped 6 12 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Scheduled Maintenance Mexico Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply Repeated short distance driving Driving in dusty conditions Driving with exte
309. edure for installation on the rear outboards seats is the same LATCH lower anchor location 2 39 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint AWARNING Always route the tether strap between the head restraint and the seatback Routing the tether strap on top of the head restraint is dangerous Ina collision the tether strap could slide off the head restraint and loosen the child restraint system The child restraint system could move which may result in death or injury to the child Tether strap Always attach the tether strap to the correct tether anchor position Attaching the tether strap to the incorrect tether anchor position is dangerous In a collision the tether strap could come off and loosen the child restraint system If the child restraint system moves it could result in death or injury to the child 2 40 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Supplemental Restraint System SRS Precautions The front and side supplemental restraint systems SRS include up to 6 air bags Please verify which kinds of air bags are equipped on your vehicle by locating the SRS AIRBAG location indicators These indicators are visible in the area where the air bags are installed The air bags are installed in the following locations e The steering wheel hub driver air bag e The front passenger dashboard front passenger air bag e The outboard sides of the front seatbacks side air bags The f
310. eeeeeeeeree 3 5 L Label Information cece 9 2 Lane Departure Warning System EDWS pieces ec 4 98 LDWS switch 0 eeeeeeeeneees 4 101 Lane Change Signals eee 4 63 Laser Sensor Front ccscceee 4 141 Leaving Home Light System 4 62 Light Bulbs Replacement c ecceeceseeees 6 46 Specifications cceeeeeeeeeees 9 6 Lighting Control cece 4 58 10 6 L Lubricant Quality 0 eeeeeeeseeseeeee 9 4 M Maintenance Information cececeeseeeeteeees 6 2 Scheduled sarantos 6 4 Maintenance and Care ceeeeeeee 6 2 Maintenance Monitor cce 4 15 Manual Transaxle Operation 4 47 Recommendations for shifting 4 48 Map Lights 0 ceceeseeseeseereeseeeeees 5 128 Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC vivian eee 4 117 Close proximity warning 4 120 Cruise control function 4 124 Display indication 06 4 120 Setting the system 0 0 0 4 121 Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC System Warnings 7 37 Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Warning Light Amber Indicator Light Green 6 4 45 Meters and Gauges eceseeeeeees 4 10 Mirror Defogger eccesceeeeeteeteees 4 69 Mirrors Rearview MUIror 00 cece 3 31 Moonroof cecceeseeseeeceeseeseeeseeseeeees 3 36 O Outside Temperature Display 4 14 Overhead Con
311. eees page 3 27 QO Trunk release bUttON oo ccc ccccecscssesesseseeceseeeseseeseeeseseesesecseeeseeecseeeeseeeeseeeesees page 3 20 The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle 1 3 Pictorial Index Interior Overview Interior Equipment View B COSRS ait ba es ois iene knee A AE BRU AR page 2 41 Active driving display cccccccccscessescssesesseseseescsecsesssseseeecseesesecseseceesecsesseeeasees page 4 20 Climate control System ccccccccccssesesseecseesessescseeecsececsececsesecsesecseceeseeecsesecseeeeaees page 5 2 Rear window defogger switch c ccccccccesssscssssessesesceecseeecseeecseeseseeecseeeeseeeenees page 4 68 GS AUGIO SyS iEn a ane reich ante awit arate page 5 13 Glove compartivient serisinin aa cian tii eh eeu page 5 134 M Wirain Sax les vs 52 04 lt ieesneSecdees yayextes cotta ates Avera each do ties cote ations EEEE ESE EEEE page 4 47 4 49 Commander switch scis sien ia E E ER EnS page 5 32 Electric parking brake switch ccccccscesesscsseseeeeseeseeseeseesceeeeeseesecsecseeseeseesees page 4 75 0 Drive selection SWitCh ssion en r ENEE OE EA page 4 90 MFUSE DlOCK ssec i ee eet E se oe page 6 58 1 4 The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle Pictorial Index Interior Overview Interior Equipment View C Seat belts sacs coke ee Pe See ee page 2 15 Q SRS Ait DAG ss cisscscsdesssslecsdcicassncsesnestceadeendsecesacescazshedecacaza
312. een Celsius and Fahrenheit using the following procedure 1 Press the INFO button with the ignition switched off and continue pressing the INFO button for 5 seconds or longer while switching the ignition ON The outside temperature display flashes 2 Press the up A or down V part of the INFO switch to change the outside temperature unit 3 Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or longer while the outside temperature display is flashing The outside temperature display illuminates VY Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed Display Type A instrument cluster The vehicle speed preset using the cruise control is displayed E Hmph V Maintenance Monitor Type A instrument cluster The following maintenance period notifications can be displayed by turning the Maintenance Monitor on e Scheduled Maintenance When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display e Tire Rotation e Oil Change For the setting method and indications for the maintenance monitor refer to the Maintenance Monitor Refer to Maintenance Monitor on page 6 20 The maintenance monitor displays the information when the ignition is switched ON NOTE This function is inoperable while the vehicle is being driven Message display When the remaining time or the distance approaches 0 a message is displayed each time the ignition is switched ON E Scheduled Maintenance Due 4 15 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display NO
313. eena Operating Tips for Audio System Audio Set TypeA ses vcecstiintiids A a RER OEO ER Audio Set Type B irere eie e r is atest eek Audio Control Switch Operation AUX USB iPod mod senen tenorin iae Bluetooth lt eeccesceccaviccssesacteiasvestectsoscesvescdenvesseasecteesesdccvaresssesesseces 5 69 Bluetooth anren dra gia wate EE i 5 69 Bluetooth Hands Free Type A ccccceeseesceeseetesereeteeseeneees 5 91 Bluetooth Hands Free Type B cccceesesseeseeteeereeteeseeeeees 5 98 Bluetooth Audio Type A ceccccecsesseeseesseeteeseeeseeseeeneens 5 108 Bluetooth Audio Type B ccececseeseeseeeseeseceeeeteeseeeseeeees 5 110 Troubleshoot cits sitetachesiies arenes 5 124 Interior Equipment ccccsscssesccssscsecssssssssssesessssssessessees 5 127 SUNVISOTS ee e Sect E ei cians 5 127 Int rior Lights uoin ini Sienna ie ehh 5 128 Accessory Sockets csi tiene then vere E de 5 130 Cup Holders ce ei anes AA Maan 5 131 Bottle Holders tito ta Celie anette E A Beats 5 132 Storage Compartment ccceeceesscesecesneeeseeeneeceaeceeeeneeeees 5 133 5 1 Interior Features Climate Control System Operating Tips e e e e e e Operate the climate control system with the engine running To prevent the battery from being discharged do not leave the fan control dial on for a long period of time with the ignition switched ON when the engine is not running Clear all obstruction
314. eep sounds When the warning light illuminates and the warning beep sound is heard about 3 seconds tire pressure is too low in one or more tires Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire pressure and initialize TPMS Refer to the specification charts page 9 7 NOTE Perform tire pressure adjustment when the tires are cold Tire pressure will vary according to the tire temperature therefore let the vehicle stand for I hour or only drive it 1 6 km 1 mile or less before adjusting the tire pressures When pressure is adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation pressure the TPMS warning light beep may turn on after the tires cool and pressure drops below specification Also an illuminated TPMS warning light resulting from the tire air pressure dropping due to cold ambient temperature will remain illuminated even if the ambient temperature rises In this case it will also be necessary to adjust the tire air pressures If the TPMS warning light illuminates due to a drop in tire air pressure make sure to check and adjust the tire air pressures e Tires lose air naturally over time and the TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too soft over time or you have a flat However when you find one low tire in a set of four that is an indication of trouble you should have someone drive the vehicle slowly forward so you can inspect any low tire for cuts and any metal objects sticking through tread or sidewall Put a few drop
315. eering malfunction light turns on or flashes and the buzzer operates at the same time Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 V Electric Parking Brake Warning Beep The warning buzzer is activated under the following conditions e The vehicle is driven with the electric parking brake applied e The electric parking brake switch is pulled while the vehicle is driven 7 37 Some models If Trouble Arises When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a malfunction in the electrical system and the trunk lid can not be opened perform the following procedure as an emergency measure to Open it 1 Open the cover 2 Turn the lever to the left to fold the seatback 3 Turn the lever to the left to open the trunk lid Type A I f N Type B amp x z Q Ry After performing this emergency measure have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible If Trouble Arises Active Driving Display Does Not Operate Active Driving Display Does Not Operate If the active driving display does not operate switch the ignition off and then restart the engine If the active driving display does not operate even with the engine restarted have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer 7 39 7 40 Customer Information and Reporting Sa
316. ehicle A beep sound will be heard 6 times NOTE Because the key utilizes low intensity radio waves the Key Removed From Vehicle Warning may activate if the key is carried together with a metal object or it is placed in a poor signal reception area V Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep With the advanced keyless function If the request switch is pressed under the following conditions while the key is being carried a beep will be heard for about 2 seconds to indicate that the front doors and the trunk can not be locked e A door is open door ajar included e The ignition has not been switched to off 7 35 If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds V Key Left in trunk Warning Beep With the advanced keyless function If the key is left in the trunk with all doors locked and the trunk lid closed a beep sound is heard for about 10 seconds to remind the driver the key has been left in the trunk If this happens open the trunk lid by pressing the electric trunk lid opener and remove the key A key removed from the trunk may not function because its functions may have been temporarily suspended To restore the key function perform the applicable procedure page 3 8 Y Key Left in vehicle Warning Beep With the advanced keyless function If a key is left in the vehicle cabin and all the doors and the trunk are locked using a separate key a beep sound is heard for about 10 seconds to re
317. ehicle the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light flashes and the warning beep is activated simultaneously With rearview monitor The Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA warning indication in the rearview monitor also synchronizes with the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light on the door mirrors With rearview monitor A WARNING Always check the surrounding area visually before actually putting the vehicle in reverse The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at the rear when putting the vehicle in reverse Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light may not flash or it might be delayed even though a vehicle is behind your vehicle Always make it your responsibility as a driver to check the rear 4 113 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE e In the following cases the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indication indicator light turns on and operation of the system is stopped If the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indication indicator light remains illuminated have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible Some problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights has occurred e A large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor rear on the vehicle has occurred There is a large accumulation of snow or ice on
318. ehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer For repairs or replacement of the radar sensors rear or bumper repairs paintwork and replacement near the radar sensors consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Turn off the system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle Otherwise the radio waves emitted by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally The radar sensors are regulated by the relevant radio wave laws of the country in which the vehicle is driven If the vehicle is driven abroad authorization from the country in which the vehicle is driven may be required 4 144 When Driving Cruise Control Cruise Control With cruise control you can set and automatically maintain any speed of more than about 25 km h 16 mph A WARNING Do not use the cruise control under the following conditions Using the cruise control under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in loss of vehicle control gt Hilly terrain gt Steep inclines gt Heavy or unsteady traffic gt Slippery or winding roads gt Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed V Cruise Control Switch CANCEL switch Z RES switch ON switch ON OFF switch amp Cruise control SET SET switch Some models 4 145 When Driving Cruise Control V Activation Deactivation To activate the system press the ON switch The
319. ehicle starts moving Erasing programmed seat positions Erasing the seat positions programmed to the key 1 Switch the ignition OFF 2 Continue pressing the seat SET button until a beep sound is heard 3 After the beep sounds press the key fa switch continuously within 5 seconds until the beep sounds 2 10 V Split Folding By lowering the rear seatbacks the luggage compartment space can be expanded A WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with occupants on folded down seatbacks or in the luggage compartment Putting occupants in the luggage compartment is dangerous because seat belts cannot be fastened which could lead to serious injury or death during sudden braking or a collision Do not allow children to play inside the vehicle with the seatbacks lowered Allowing children to play in the vehicle with the seatbacks folded down is dangerous If a child enters the luggage compartment and the seatbacks were raised back up the child may become trapped in the luggage compartment which could lead to an accident Tightly secure cargo in the luggage compartment when it is transported with the seatbacks folded down Driving without tightly securing cargo and luggage is dangerous as it could move and become an obstruction to driving during emergency braking or a collision resulting in an unexpected accident When transporting cargo do not allow the cargo to exceed the height of the seatbacks Transporting
320. el lines and hoses I I Hoses and tubes for emission I IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs Replace every 120 000 km 75 000 miles ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I CHASSIS and BODY Brake lines hoses and connections Brake and clutch fluid level I I Disc brakes I I I Tire Rotation Rotate every 8 000 km 5 000 miles Tire inflation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I I I I I I I Steering operation and linkages I I Front and rear suspension ball joints and wheel bearing axial play Driveshaft dust boots I I I I Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72 000 km 45 000 miles or 5 years All locks and hinges LILJILI L EJEA EI LIL Washer fluid level I I I I I 6 9 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Number of months or kilometers miles whichever comes first Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 x1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 x1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Maintenance Interval AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Cabin air filter Replace every 40 000 km 25 000 miles or 2 years Chart symbols I Inspect Inspect and clean repair adjust fill up or replace if necessary R Replace
321. elt portion of the seat belt until the entire length of the belt is out of the retractor 6 Push the child restraint system firmly into the vehicle seat Be sure the belt retracts as snugly as possible A clicking noise from the retractor will be heard during retraction if the system is in automatic locking mode If the belt does not lock the seat down tight repeat the previous step and also this one NOTE e Inspect this function before each use of the child restraint system You should not be able to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor while the system is in the automatic locking mode When you remove the child restraint system be sure the belt fully retracts to return the system to emergency locking mode before occupants use the seat belts Follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions carefully Depending on the type of child restraint system it may not employ seat belts which are in automatic locking mode 7 Seat your child safely in the child restraint system and secure the child according to the instructions from the child restraint system manufacturer Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint 8 With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System Switch the ignition ON and make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates after installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicato
322. em AFS function can be On On Off Settings X Front changed on page Vehicle Lighting 5 49 System AFS on page 4 94 Lights on reminder x Refer to The volume of the lights on Refer to Lights On reminder warning alarm can be Off High Low Off Settings x Reminder on changed on page page 7 33 5 49 Coming Min home light 90 x system The time required for the ds Refer to headlights to turn off after 30 ae S Refer to Coming closing all of the doors can be seconds Settings gt x Home Light changed ae o ds on page System on 5 49 page 4 61 seconds off 9 15 Personalization Features Factory Available Settings change method Item Feature Setti Setti etting ettings O Leaving home light system x Refer to The leaving home light system Refer to _ Leaving function can be changed On Off Settings x Home Light on page System on 5 49 page 4 62 Turn indicator Refer to is Turn and The turn indicator beep volume Refer to Lane level can be changed High High Low Settings x Change on page Signals on 5 49 Vehicle page 4 63 Three flash turn signal x Refer to The three flash turn function Refer to ae can be changed On On Off s ettings X urn Signa Gapare on page 5 49 4 64 Rear window defogger The operation time for the rear n Refer to 15 minutes window defogger can be x Rear chanced minutes Continu Window ged ous Defogge
323. en the headlight switch is in the z002 or D position the illumination of the instrument cluster dims When driving on snowy or foggy roads or in other situations when the instrument cluster s visibility is reduced due to glare from surrounding brightness cancel the illumination dimmer and increase the illumination intensity To cancel the illumination dimmer rotate the knob clockwise fully You will hear a beep sound and the illumination dimmer will be canceled 4 14 NOTE This symbol F1 indicates the knob to adjust the brightness of the dashboard illumination If the dashboard illumination knob is kept at the illumination dimmer cancel position the instrument cluster will not dim when the headlight switch is turned to the 00 or D position again Rotate the dashboard illumination knob counterclockwise to activate the illumination dimmer V Outside Temperature Display When the ignition is switched ON the outside temperature is displayed Type A 78 F Type B Oa m OUTSIDE amp IF NOTE Under the following conditions the outside temperature display may differ from the actual outside temperature depending on the surroundings and vehicle conditions Significantly cold or hot temperatures e Sudden changes in outside temperature e The vehicle is parked The vehicle is driven at low speeds Vehicles with type A audio The outside temperature unit can be switched betw
324. ending on the weight of the item To allow the front passenger seat weight sensor to function properly do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the front passenger s seat The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference Ifa small child is seated on the front passenger s seat the warning beep may not operate V Ignition Not Switched Off STOP Warning Beep If the driver s door is opened while the ignition is switched to ACC a continuous beep sound will be heard to notify the driver that the ignition has not been switched off STOP for vehicles with a type A meter messages are displayed in the instrument cluster Left in this condition the keyless entry system will not operate the car cannot be locked and the battery power will be depleted Y Key Removed from Vehicle Warning Beep Under the following conditions a beep sound will be heard and the KEY warning light red will flash continuously when the ignition has not been switched off to notify the driver that the key has been removed for vehicles with a type A meter messages are displayed in the instrument cluster The KEY warning light red will stop flashing when the key is back inside the vehicle for vehicles with a type A meter messages are displayed in the instrument cluster The ignition has not been switched off and all the doors are closed after removing the key from the v
325. enger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates for a specified time after the ignition is switched ON ES PASS Bs m AIRBAG OFF AV 2 Y v 7 jj Small children must be protected by a child restraint system as stipulated by law in every state and province In certain states and provinces larger children must use a child restraint system page 2 23 Carefully consider which child restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the installation directions in this Owner s Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions A WARNING Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous Alone air bags may not prevent serious injuries The appropriate air bags can be expected to inflate only in the first accident such as frontal near frontal or side collisions or roll over accident that are at least moderate Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts Children should not ride in the front passenger seat Placing a child 12 years or under in the front seat is dangerous The child could be hit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed A sleeping child is more likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side air bag in moderate collision to the front passenger side of the vehicle Whenever possible always secure a child 12 years and under on the rear seats with an appropriat
326. ential Safety Equipment Seats Seat Recline Manual Seat To change the seatback angle lean forward slightly while raising the lever Then lean back to the desired position and release the lever Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in place by attempting to push it forward and backward Power Seat To change the seatback angle press the front or rear side of the reclining switch Release the switch at the desired position Lumbar Support Adjustment Driver s Seat Manual Operation To increase the seat firmness push the lever forward Pull the lever backward to decrease firmness Power Operation To increase the seat firmness press and hold the front part of the switch to the desired position then release it Press the rear part of the switch to decrease firmness 2 6 V Seat Warmer The seats are electrically heated The ignition must be switched ON Press the seat warmer switch to illuminate the indicator light while the ignition is switched ON The mode changes as follow each time the seat warmer switch is pressed Front 000 w OFF l tite High l O88 w Mid 008 wf Low Essential Safety Equipment Seats AWARNING Be careful when using the seat warmer The heat from the seat warmer may be too hot for some people as indicated below and could cause a low temperature burn gt Infants small babies elderly people and
327. ents This is not a sign of trouble but a result of humid Knob Dial air being suddenly cooled The air vents can be fully opened and closed by operating the dial Side Vents driver Open Side Vents front passenger Bet Knob EA Dial Some models 5 3 Interior Features Climate Control System V Selecting the Airflow Mode Dashboard Vents Defroster and Floor Vents Dashboard and Floor Vents Defroster Vents ad With rear vents 5 4 Interior Features Climate Control System Manual Type Temperature control dial Fan control dial Mode selector dial C C N N APTO aa ewe X F Q gt N S i 5 i PUSH i 0 s be PUSH s Sax AIC lad w AIG fo Xx Y Yo A C switch Air intake selector switch Rear window defogger switch V Control Switches Temperature control dial This dial controls temperature Turn it clockwise for hot and counterclockwise for cold NOTE When the mode is set to 4 or 4 with the fan control dial in a position other than 0 and the temperature control dial in the maximum cold position the air intake selector switch to the recirculated air position and the A C turns on automatically If A C is not desired press the A C switch to turn it off Fan control dial This dial allows variabl
328. er stops automatically after 15 minutes have elapsed and when the ambient temperature is high When the ambient temperature is low it continues to operate until the switch is pressed again Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 V Mirror Defogger To turn on the mirror defoggers switch the ignition ON and press the rear window defogger switch page 4 68 When Driving Switches and Controls Horn To sound the horn press the kb mark on the steering wheel Some models 4 69 When Driving Switches and Controls Hazard Warning Flasher The hazard warning lights should always be used when you stop on or near a roadway in an emergency The hazard warning lights warn other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard and that they must take extreme caution when near it Depress the hazard warning flasher switch and all the turn signals will flash The hazard warning indicator lights in the instrument cluster flash simultaneously NOTE The turn signals do not work when the hazard warning lights are on e Check local regulations about the use of hazard warning lights while the vehicle is being towed to verify that it is not in violation of the law 4 70 Some models HomeLink Wireless Control System NOTE HomeLink and HomeLink house icon are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation The HomeLink system replaces up to 3 hand held transmitters with a single built in compone
329. erior Features Interior Equipment V Illuminated Entry System The overhead lights and the courtesy lights turn on when any of the following operations is done with the overhead light switch in the DOOR position and the ignition switched off e Turn on for about 30 seconds when the driver s door is unlocked e Turn on for about 15 seconds when a door is opened with a key left in the vehicle and then the door is closed e Turn on for about 5 seconds when a door is opened from the outside with a key being carried and then the door is closed The overhead lights turn on for about 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off with the overhead light switch in the DOOR position The overhead lights turn off immediately in the following cases e The ignition is switched on and all doors are closed e The driver s door is locked NOTE Battery saver If any door is left open with the overhead light switch in the DOOR position or the trunk lid is left open the overhead light or trunk light turns off after about 30 minutes to prevent battery depletion The operation of the illuminated entry system can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 5 129 Interior Features Interior Equipment Accessory Sockets Only use genuine Mazda accessories or the equivalent requiring no greater than 120 W DC 12 V 10 A Front The ignition must be switched to ACC or ON Cente
330. ery often Avoid shortened names use full names Recognition improves the longer the name is By not using names such as Mom Dad recogni tion will improve When operating the audio a song name is not recognized Song names cannot be recognized by voice You want to skip guidance Guidance can be skipped by quickly pressing and releasing the Talk button 5 125 Interior Features Bluetooth Regarding problems with calls Symptom Cause Solution method When starting a call vehicle noise from the other party can be heard For about three seconds after starting a call the Bluetooth unit s Noise Suppression function requires time to adapt to the call environment This does not indicate a problem with the device The other party cannot be heard or the speaker s voice is quiet The volume is set at zero or low Increase the volume Other problems Symptom Cause Solution method The indication for the remaining battery is different between the vehicle and the device The indication method is different between the vehicle and the device When a call is made from the vehicle the telephone number is updated in the incoming outgoing call record but the name does not appear The number has not been registered into the phonebook If the number has been registered into the phonebook the incoming outgoing call record is updated by the
331. es on page 9 9 4 67 When Driving Switches and Controls Y Windshield Washer Pull the wiper lever toward you and hold it to spray washer fluid Washer NOTE If the windshield washer is turned on when the windshield wipers are not operating the windshield wipers operate a few times If the washer does not work inspect the fluid level page 6 31 If it s normal consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer 4 68 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger clears fog from the rear window The ignition must be switched ON Press the switch to turn on the rear window defogger The rear window defogger operates for about 15 minutes and turns off automatically The indicator light illuminates during operation To turn off the rear window defogger before the 15 minutes has elapsed press the switch again Fully Automatic Type Climate Control Indicator light Manual Type Climate Control Indicator light ACAUTION Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaners with abrasives to clean the inside of the rear window surface They may damage the defogger grid inside the window NOTE This defogger is not designed for melting snow If there is an accumulation of snow on the rear window remove it before using the defogger The rear window defogger setting can be changed After changing the setting the rear window defogg
332. es previously set using the filter setting on your device NOTE The available Location Based Services may differ because the services depend on the content provided by Aha 5 119 Interior Features Bluetooth Example of use Location Based Services 1 Select the desired station from the Nearby tab on the main menu The destination name or address playback starts in the order of the destination name list 2 aa 10 20 XXXXX Branding XXX Mes aaa 321 E 8th Street Holland XXXXX Me A 3 1 km NE amp XXXXXXXXXX 1a 2 When the Ki icon is selected the currently displayed destination is displayed on the navigation system vehicles with navigation system 3 When the amp icon is selected a phone call is placed to the currently displayed destination 4 Select the icon and display the content list Selection of other destinations from the list can be made o E a 10 20 XXXXX _ Branding 123 Stee O gt E BR Sree O gt 5 120 Shout Some social stations such as Facebook or Caraoke support the ability to record and share voice messages using the Shout function 1 Select the icon and start the countdown 3 2 1 0 Recording starts when the countdown reaches zero 2 Records voice 3 Select Save and store post the recording NOTE Recordable time varies depending on the
333. eseeseesseeseeeeeeseceeenseeeeeseeteeeseens page 4 94 High Beam Control System HBC ccccceescesseeseeseeeseeeeeeeesecceeseenseeaeeneeeatensenaes page 4 95 Forward rear detection Lane Departure Warning System LDWS ccecceeceeseesececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeaeenseeaes page 4 98 Blind Spot Monitoring BSM System ccccceeseesceeseesceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeetens page 4 104 Inter vehicle distance recognition Distance Recognition Support System DRSS ccececceeseeseeseeeteeeeeeseeteeeeeeseens page 4 109 Rear obstruction detection when leaving a parking space Rear Cross Traffic Alert ROTA cccccceccesseeseesseeseeeeeeseeseceseeseeneeeaeceeeeaeeneeeaeenees page 4 112 Driver Support Systems Inter vehicle distance Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC cceceecceeseeseeeseeseeseeeseeseeeseeseceeeaeeneesseenees page 4 117 Y Pre Crash Safety Technology Pre crash safety technology is designed to assist the driver in averting collisions or reduce their severity in situations where they cannot be avoided Collision damage reduction in low vehicle speed range Forward driving Smart City Brake Support SCBS ccecccesessseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseceeeeeeseenseeaeeaes page 4 127 4 92 Some models When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Collision damage reduction in medium high speed range Smart Brake Support SBS ccccecceescesceeesseeeeeeseeseeeseeseeneeeseenseseeeseceeeeseeneenseens page 4 132 Vv Camera
334. estigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Mazda will not disclose any of the data recorded in an EDR to a third party unless e A written agreement from the vehicle owner or the lessee is obtained e Officially requested by the police or other law enforcement authorities e Used as a defense for Mazda in a law suit claim or arbitration e Ordered by a judge or court However if necessary Mazda will e Use the data for research on Mazda vehicle performance including safety e Disclose the data or the summarized data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing vehicle or owner identification information 8 21 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Recording of Vehicle Data Recording of Vehicle Data This vehicle is equipped with a computer which records the following main vehicle data related to vehicle controls operation and other driving conditions Recorded data e Vehicle conditions such as engine speed and vehicle speed e Driving operation conditions such as accelerator and brake pedals and information related to the environmental circumstances while the vehicle is driven e Malfunction diagnosis information from each on vehicle compute
335. estraints Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with side and curtain air bags It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window the area of the front passenger seat the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy even if a child restraint system is used The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could cause serious injury or death to an out of position child Furthermore leaning over or against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of supplemental protection With the front air bag and the additional side air bag that comes out of the front seat the rear seat is always a better location for children Take special care not to allow a child to lean over or against the side window even if the child is seated in a child restraint system 2 26 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous A seat belt used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed Never use one belt for more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly restrained A CAUTION A seat belt or child restraint system can b
336. etooth Example of use When searching for a song from the top level of a device 1 Select the icon and display the folder file list at the top level Bluetooth lt Device Na i al 10 20 BT Device Name i Folder Name A i Folder Name B amp Playlist Name A JI Audio Filename A ff Audio Filename B 2 When the folder is selected folders file lists in the folder are displayed When the playlist is selected the file list is displayed 3 Select the desired song NOTE Select EY to move to a folder one level higher 5 114 V Bluetooth Audio Device Information Display If a Bluetooth audio device is connected the following information is displayed in the center display AVRCP Ver AVR AVRCP Ver lower than 1 3 CP 14 or Dwe Ver higher 1 3 Device name X X X Remaining battery charge of X a si device Song name X X Artist name X X Album name X X Playback aa x x time Genre name X X Album art pi _ image X Available Not available NOTE Some information may not display depending on the device and if the information cannot be displayed Unknown is indicated Interior Features Bluetooth V How to Use Pandora Pandora is free personalized Internet radio Simply enter a favorite artist track genre and Pandora will create a personalized station that plays their music
337. ettings DRSS on display flashes can be changed on page page 4 109 5 49 Lock When Driving Unlock In Park Lock Out of Park Unlock In XxX Power door Changes the auto lock unlock Park Refer lock Lock X efer to function setting for all the doors Lock Aut Refer to When pe Refi uto according to the vehicle speed ioe Shifting efer to Lock Un Auto Driving Setti OCK UN x the vehicle power supply Out of etings lock Lock Unlock diti d the selector Unlock Park on page OCK Function on CMdition and the selector lever IGN Off ar E Function position Lock page 3 15 When on page 3 15 Driving Unlock Vehicle IGN Off Lock When Driving Off All Doors sites x x Driver s Once The method for unlocking the Once All Driver s Referto Refer to Keyless Be a the transmitter can Doors Once All Settings Transmit x entry system D changed Twice Doors on page ter on i to Twice 5 49 page 3 5 eyless Entry ee x System on The time required for the doors seconds page 3 4 to relock automatically after 60 60 Refer to _ x unlocking with the transmitter seconds seconds Settings can be changed 30 on page seconds 5 49 9 12 Personalization Features oe Boe Factory Available Settings change method Setting Settings D x Refer to Transmit ter on page 3 5 All Doors Refer to The method for unlocking the Driver s Once x
338. f Fuel Economy Monitor 10 the i stop function is available D Displays the operation readiness status of the i stop function on the vehicle side engine battery and A C using icon coloring The blue color indicates that the i stop function is ready to operate and the grey color indicates that it is not ready for operation i ELOOP Displays the i stop function status while the vehicle is stopped Indicates the operations required by the driver to operate the i stop function while it is not operating 9 Displays the current amount of time that the i stop function has been operating and the accumulated amount of time that it has been operating 6 The i stop function operation status is indicated by the color of the engine area The color is green during i stop function operation and gray when it is not operating O Average Since Reset 4 2 mpg V Fuel Consumption Display Information regarding the fuel economy is displayed Indication on display Control status ry F O Displays the fuel economy for the past 60 minutes Fuel Economy Monitor 10 20 Displays the fuel economy every minute for the past 1 to oO Fuel Economy This Drive 10 minutes Hie e Displays the fuel economy every 10 minutes for the past Tee O tata I 10 to 60 minutes Pritt mpa Average 60 50 40 30 20 10 5 Omin This Drive Displays the average
339. f function operates and the headlights turn off after a certain amount of time has elapsed At this time the lights on reminder warning sound does not activate even if the driver s door is opened NOTE The time until the lights turn off after the ignition is switched OFF can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Some models 7 33 If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds V Air Bag Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Beep If a malfunction is detected in the air bag front seat belt pretensioner systems and the warning light a warning beep sound will be heard for about 5 seconds every minute The air bag and seat belt pretensioner system warning beep sound will continue to be heard for approximately 35 minutes Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible A WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the air bag front seat belt pretensioner system warning beep sounding Driving the vehicle with the air bag front seat belt pretensioner system warning beep sounding is dangerous In a collision the air bags and the front seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy and this could result in death or serious injury Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected as soon as possible 7 34 Y Seat Belt Warning Beep Except Mexico If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON a beep so
340. f the user s body is less than 15 cm 6 in 2 22 Do not leave a seat belt extender connected to the buckle Leaving a seat belt extender connected to the buckle without using the seat belt is dangerous When the seat belt extender is connected to the driver s seat belt buckle or front passenger seat the SRS driver s or front passenger s air bag system will determine that the driver or front passenger is wearing the seat belt even if the driver or front passenger is not wearing it This condition could cause the driver s or front passenger s air bag to not activate correctly and result in death or serious injury in the event of collision Always wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat Using a seat belt extender to fasten a child restraint system on any seat is dangerous Always follow the child restraint system manufacturer s installation instructions and never use a seat belt extender NOTE When not in use remove the seat belt extender and store it in the vehicle If the seat belt extender is left connected the seat belt extender might get damaged as it will not retract with the rest of the seat belt and can easily fall out of the door when not in use and be damaged In addition the seat belt warning light will not illuminate and function properly Essential Safety Equipment Child Re
341. fety Defects Important consumer information including warranties and add on equipment Customer Assistance ccscessreersereees Customer Assistance U S A oo Customer Assistance Canada Customer Assistance Puerto Rico 8 10 Customer Assistance Mexico 8 11 Mazda Importer Distributors Importer Distributor 2 0 0 eee Reporting Safety Defects s00000 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects U S A 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects Canada 8 15 WALranty scccccsscccsscsssessessessessessenes 8 16 Warranties for Your Mazda 8 16 Outside the United States Canada 8 17 Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country Except United States and Canada sitio aed Shed aes 8 18 Add On Non Genuine Parts and CCESSOT ES seccteseeceededeeteedeevicssccesdcens 8 19 Cell Pome ssccssccssssssssscssscesssesenese 8 20 Cell Phones Warning ceeee 8 20 Event Data Recorder sscssccssssesees 8 21 Event Data Recorder U S A and Canada cccccceescesscessesseeseceseeeseesees 8 21 Recording of Vehicle Data c 0008 8 22 Recording of Vehicle Data 8 22 Uniform Tire Quality Grading System UT QGS ccsccscscssssssscscsseesssssssscssseseseees 8 23 Uniform Tire Quality Grading System UTOQGS oaen tas 8 23 Tire Information U S A ccsccseeeee 8 25 Tire Labeling Location of the Tire Label
342. fications Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident injury or damage to the vehicle Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label 8 42 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available c
343. follows each time the SET switch is pressed Short press 1 km h 1 mph Long press 10 km h 5 mph NOTE For example the set vehicle speed is changed by pressing the SET switch four times as follows The vehicle speed accelerates or decelerates by 4 km h 4 mph To accelerate using the accelerator pedal Depress the accelerator pedal and press and release the SET or SET switch at the desired speed If a switch cannot be operated the system returns to the set speed when you release your foot from the accelerator pedal A CAUTION The warnings and brake control do not operate while the accelerator pedal is depressed When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE When accelerating using the SET switch while in headway control the set vehicle speed can be adjusted but acceleration is not possible If there is no longer a vehicle ahead acceleration continues until reaching the set vehicle speed Check the set vehicle speed by viewing the set vehicle speed display in the display in the instrument cluster When depressing the accelerator pedal the inter vehicle distance display in the display in the instrument cluster changes to the white line display e The minimum settable speed is 30 km h 19 mph If the set vehicle speed reaches 30 km h 19 mph using the switch operation constant speed travel is maintained at about 30 km h 19 mph even if the SET switch is pressed The Mazda Radar Cruis
344. from 1 D to R Before Driving Driving Tips Winter Driving Carry emergency gear including tire chains window scraper flares a small shovel jumper cables and a small bag of sand or salt Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to pooni the following precautions e Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in the radiator Refer to Engine Coolant on page 6 29 Inspect the battery and its cables Cold reduces battery capacity e Use an engine oil appropriate for the lowest ambient temperatures that the vehicle will be driven in page 6 27 Inspect the ignition system for damage and loose connections Use washer fluid made with antifreeze but do not use engine coolant antifreeze for washer fluid page 6 31 Snow left on the windshield is dangerous as it could obstruct vision Remove snow before driving Do not apply excessive force to a window scraper when removing ice or frozen snow on the mirror glass and windshield e Never use warm or hot water for removing snow or ice from windows and mirrors as it could result in the glass cracking Braking performance can be adversely affected if snow or ice adheres to the brake components If this situation occurs drive the vehicle slowly releasing the accelerator pedal and lightly applying the brakes several times until the brake performance returns to normal e e e 3 45 Before Driving Driving Tips Y Snow Tires Use snow tires on all four wheels Do not
345. fuel economy over the past 5 Aver Fuel Economy History r 8 0 p resets and after the current reset 3 Calculates the average fuel economy every minute after Q mm mpg vehicle travel begins and displays it 6 5 4 3 2 Current 4 88 When Driving Fuel Economy Monitor NOTE The fuel economy data can be reset by doing the following operation Press the reset switch from the menu screen When the function which synchronizes the fuel economy monitor and the trip meter is on reset trip A of the trip meter Delete the average fuel economy information displayed in the trip computer After resetting the fuel economy data calculated e is displayed while the average fuel economy is V Ending Screen Display If the ending display on the combustion monitor is on when the ignition is switched from ON to OFF the actual energy efficiency performance is displayed 4 89 When Driving Drive Selection Drive Selection Drive selection is a system to switch the vehicle s drive mode When the sport mode is selected vehicle s response against accelerator operation is enhanced This provides additional quick acceleration which may be needed to safely make maneuvers such as lane changes merging onto freeways or passing other vehicles A CAUTION Do not use the sport mode when driving on slippery roads such as wet or snow covered ro
346. function Vehicles with type B instrument cluster The LDWS warning light illuminates when the system has a malfunction Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 4 98 Some models When Driving i ACTIVSENSE AWARNING Do not use the LDWS under the following conditions The system may not operate adequately according to the actual driving conditions resulting in an accident gt Driving on roads with tight curves gt Driving under bad weather conditions rain fog and snow The functions of the LDWS have limitations Always stay on course using the steering wheel and drive with care The system is not designed to compensate for a driver s lack of caution and if you rely too much on the LDWS it could lead to an accident The driver is responsible for assuring lane changes and other maneuvers Always pay attention to the direction in which the vehicle is traveling and the vehicle s surroundings A CAUTION Do not modify the suspension If the vehicle height or the damping force of the suspensions is changed the LDWS may not operate correctly 4 99 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE e If your vehicle deviates from its traffic lane the LDWS operates warning sound and indicator light Steer the vehicle adequately to drive the vehicle to the center of the lane When the turn signal lever is operated for a lane change the LDWS warning is automatically canceled The LDWS warning becomes operable when the turn signal le
347. function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS Should this happen consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible 4 30 NOTE When the engine is jump started to charge the battery uneven rpm occurs and the ABS warning light may illuminate If this occurs it is the result of the weak battery and does not indicate an ABS malfunction Recharge the battery The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated V Electronic Brake Force Distribution System Warning 191 If the electronic brake force distribution control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light simultaneously The problem is likely to be the electronic brake force distribution system AWARNING Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated Have the vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous When both lights are illuminated the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances V Electric Parking Brake Warning Light This warning light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON The warning light illuminates when the system has a malfunction
348. g A WARNING Do not use the lt amp gt position in cold or rainy weather Using the lt amp position in cold or rainy weather is dangerous as it will cause the windows to fog up Your vision will be hampered which could lead to a serious accident V Heating 1 Set the mode selector dial to the w position 2 Set the air intake selector to the outside air position indicator light turned off 3 Set the temperature control dial to the hot position 4 Set the fan control dial to the desired speed 5 If dehumidified heating is desired turn on the air conditioner 5 6 NOTE If the windshield fogs up easily set the mode selector dial to the 4 position If cooler air is desired at face level set the mode selector dial at the 74 position and adjust the temperature control dial to maintain maximum comfort The air to the floor is warmer than air to the face except when the temperature control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold position Inthe or YW position the air conditioner is automatically turned on and the outside air position is automatically selected to defrost the windshield In the 4 or W position the outside air position cannot be changed to the recirculated air position YV Cooling With air conditioner 1 Set the mode selector dial to the W position 2 Set the temperature control dial to the cold position 3 Set the fan control dial to the desired s
349. g brake will be applied and the electric parking brake warning beep will be activated When the switch is released the electric parking brake is released and the beep stops If the electric parking brake is applied with the ignition switched off or in ACC the brake system warning light in the instrument cluster and the indicator light in the switch may turn on for 15 seconds e When running the vehicle through an automatic car wash it may be necessary to switch the ignition off with the parking brake released depending on the type of automatic car wash 4 76 When applying the electric parking brake The electric parking brake can be applied regardless of the ignition switch position Securely depress the brake pedal and pull up the electric parking brake switch The electric parking brake is applied and the brake system warning light and the electric parking brake switch indicator light turn on Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 When releasing the electric parkin brake The electric parking brake can be released while the ignition is switched ON or the engine is running When the electric parking brake is released the brake system warning light and the electric parking brake switch indicator light turn off Electric parking brake manual release Securely depress the brake pedal and press the electric parking brake switch Electric parking brake automatic release If the accelerator pe
350. g closing operation the moonroof will stop and open halfway A WARNING Make sure nothing blocks the moonroof just before it reaches the fully closed position Blocking the moonroof just before it reaches the closed position is dangerous In this case the jam safe function cannot prevent the moonroof from closing If fingers are caught serious injuries could occur NOTE e Depending on driving conditions a closing moonroof could stop and start opening when the moonroof feels a shock that is similar to something blocking it The moonroof s jam safe function does not function while the moonroof is initializing 3 37 Before Driving Windows Y Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed by hand The sunshade opens automatically when the moonroof is opened but must be closed by hand Sunshade ay CAUTION gt The sunshade does not tilt To avoid damaging the sunshade do not push up on it gt Do not close the sunshade while the moonroof is opening Trying to force the sunshade closed could damage it 3 38 Modification and Add On Equipment Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer and the theft deterrent systems operation if the system have been modified or if any add on equipment has been installed A CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle do not modify the system or install any add on equipment to the immobilizer and the theft deterrent systems or the vehicle
351. g is being sent reconnect the device V Operating the Satellite Radio What is satellite radio With over 130 channels SirtusXM Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love Get channels and channels of commercial free music plus sports news talk entertainment and more Commercial free music from nearly every genre rock to pop hip hop to country jazz classical and more Plus live performances and artist dedicated channels Live sports Play by Play amp Expert Talk every NFL game every NASCAR race 24 7 sports talk college sports and more Exclusive entertainment comedy and talk The biggest names compelling talk hilarious comedy World class news plus local traffic and weather Sign up for SirtusXM Satellite Radio today NOTE e To listen to SiriusXM a prior subscription fee based is required The channels which you can receive depend on the package you subscribe to e Satellite radio is broadcast as Sirius XM and SiriusXM in the U S A and Sirius and XM in Canada In this owner s manual only the name SiriusXM is used For traffic and weather channels map information is not displayed and only audio broadcasts can be received e Call 888 539 7474 to activate For more information visit www siriusxm com Satellite radio is only available in regions providing satellite radio service some areas of the United States and Canada Contact Authorized Mazda Dealer for details H
352. g label reminds you not to put a rear facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat at any time Mexico NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shown below The warning label reminds you not to put a rear facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat at any time Do not install a front facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat unless it is unavoidable In a collision the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to the child If installing a front facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat is unavoidable move the front passenger seat as far back as possible P Adjust the seat bottom to the highest position when installing a child restraint system on the front passenger s seat Vehicles with height adjustment on front passenger s seat Installing a child restraint system on the front passenger s seat with the seat bottom at a low position is dangerous The seat belt cannot securely fasten the child restraint system which may result in death or injury to the child in a collision 2 25 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint Seating a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous under certain conditions With Front Passenger Occupant C
353. g systems e Smart Brake Support SBS e Smart City Brake Support SCBS A CAUTION Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of the system gt Keep the windshield clean at all times gt Do not apply stickers to the surface of the windshield including transparent stickers gt If cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris is visible near the laser sensor front stop using the system immediately and have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer See the next page on how to turn off the system Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 gt Do not apply a coating agent to the windshield gt When replacing the windshield wipers or windshield consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer gt Never remove the sensor gt Aremoved sensor will not meet the conditions for a class 1M laser under the IEC 60825 1 specification and therefore eye safety cannot be assured gt Do not peer into the sensor using optical instruments with a magnification function such as magnifying glasses and microscopic and objective lenses within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 in from the sensor Some models 4 141 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Laser classification label INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS MAGNIFIERS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT Laser explanatory label Max average power 45 mW Pulse duration 33ns Wavelength 905nm IEC 60825 1 2007 Complies wi
354. g time of this user manual the approvals listed above are granted 8 46 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity AWARNING Change or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the use s authority to operate the equipment Y HomeLink Wireless Control System A CAUTION HomeLink has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the device NOTE FCC ID NZLMOBHL4 CANADA 4112A MOBHL4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Bluetooth Hands Free Type A U S A and Canada Model MAZ Brand Johnson Controls Inc 915 E 32 St Holland MI 49423 Michigan United States of America MAZ C 0682 FCC ID CB2MBLUEC09 IC 279B MBLUEC09 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 8 47 Custome
355. ge 5 36 Some models 5 115 Interior Features Bluetooth NOTE The skip function may not be available depending on the device The number of skips is limited by Pandora e Ifthe icon is selected when the skip song function is running the next song is skipped Selection from station list Selection can be made from a programmed radio station list 1 Select the icon 2 Select the desired radio station NOTE When Shuffle is selected songs randomly selected from the radio station list are played Selecting the sort method The displayed order of the station list can be changed 1 Select the icon 2 Select Sort By 3 Select Date to display in the order starting from the newly created station 4 Select AZ to display in alphabetical order NOTE The displayed order of Shuffle cannot be changed Bookmarking You can bookmark song or artist to check out later on the Web 1 Select the icon 2 Select Bookmark Song to bookmark the song 5 116 3 Select artist Bookmark Artist to bookmark the Interior Features Bluetooth V How to Use Aha Aha is an application which can be used to enjoy various Internet content such as Internet radio and podcasts Stay connected to your friends activities by getting updates from Facebook and Twitter Using the location based service
356. ght Blue a tel The light illuminates continuously when the engine coolant temperature is low and turns off after the engine is warm If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine has been sufficiently warmed up the temperature sensor could have a malfunction Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer YW Shift Position Indication D N AAW s The selector position is indicated when the ignition is switched ON Gear position indicator In manual shift mode the M of the shift position indicator illuminates and the numeral for the selected gear displays Some models 4 43 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display YW Select Mode Indication SPORT When the sport mode is selected the select mode Indication turns on in the instrument cluster NOTE If the mode cannot be switched to drive mode the select mode indication flashes to notify the driver V Headlight High Beam Indicator Light This light indicates one of two things e The high beam headlights are on e The turn signal lever is in the flash to pass position 4 44 YV Turn Signal Hazard Warning Indicator Lights When operating the turn signal lights the left or right turn signal indicator light flashes to indicate which turn signal light is operating page 4 63 When operating the hazard warning lights both turn signal indicator lights flash page 4 70 If an indicator
357. ght has two colors Cruise Main Indicator Light Amber This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON The indicator light illuminates amber when the cruise control system is activated Cruise Set Indicator Light Green The indicator light illuminates green when a cruising speed has been set Some models 4 45 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF Indication Indicator Light epa OFF The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indication illuminates when the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch is pressed to turn off the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA systems If the indication remains displayed even though the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch has been operated it indicates a problem in the system Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Type B This indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indicator light illuminates when the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch is pressed to turn off the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA systems A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer e The light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON It remains illuminated even though the Blind Spot Monitori
358. gine by carrying the key Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details If the push button start system functions have been deactivated you can start the engine by following the procedure indicated when the key battery goes dead Refer to Engine Start Function When Key Battery is Dead on page 4 6 e After starting a cold engine the engine speed increases and a whining sound from the engine compartment can be heard This is for improved exhaust gas purification and does not indicate defect of the parts Engine starting is controlled by the spark ignition system This system meets all Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise 1 Make sure you are carrying the key 2 Occupants should fasten their seat belts 3 Make sure the parking brake is on 4 Continue to press the brake pedal firmly until the engine has completely started 4 4 5 Manual transaxle Continue to press the clutch pedal firmly until the engine has completely started Automatic transaxle Put the vehicle in park P If you must restart the engine while the vehicle is moving shift into neutral N NOTE Manual transaxle The starter will not operate if the clutch pedal is not depressed sufficiently Automatic transaxle The starter will not operate if the shift lever is not in P or N and the brake pedal is not depressed sufficiently 6 Verify
359. gned to carry The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load Information label on the driver s door frame or door pillar Look for THE COMBINATION WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg or XXX lbs for your maximum payload The payload listed on the tire label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be accurate 8 38 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A SAMPLE nN TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SZ SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed kg or lbs Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais d passer XXX kg ou XXX Ib COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES SEE OWNER S SIZE DIMENSIONS PNEUS FROID MDDITIONAL P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 psi INFORMATION VOIR LE MANUEL AREARE P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 psi DE FUSAGER POUR PLUS DE DE se cours T125 70D15 420 kPa 60 psi GASSES CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the num
360. go faster than 120 km h 75 mph while driving with snow tires Inflate snow tires 30 kPa 0 3 kgf cm 4 3 psi more than recommended on the tire pressure label driver s door frame but never more than the maximum cold tire pressure shown on the tires Your vehicle is originally equipped with all season radials designed to be used all year around In some extreme climates you may find it necessary to replace them with snow tires during the winter months to further improve traction on snow and ice covered roads A WARNING Use only the same size and type tires snow radial or non radial on all four wheels Using tires different in size or type is dangerous Your vehicle s handling could be greatly affected and result in an accident A CAUTION Check local regulations before using studded tires 3 46 VY Tire Chains Check local regulations before using tire chains A CAUTION gt Chains may affect handling gt Do not go faster than 50 km h 30 mph or the chain manufacturer s recommended limit whichever is lower gt Drive carefully and avoid bumps holes and sharp turns gt Avoid locked wheel braking gt Do not use chains on a temporary spare tire it may result in damage to the vehicle and to the tire gt Do not use chains on roads that are free of snow or ice The tires and chains could be damaged gt Chains may scratch or chip aluminum wheels NOTE The tire pressure monitoring
361. h Before Driving Keys Turning off the alarm The alarm stops by pressing any button on the key Vv Operational Range The system operates only when the driver is in the vehicle or within operational range while the key is being carried Starting the Engine NOTE e Starting the engine may be possible even if the key is outside of the vehicle and extremely close to a door and window however always start the engine from the driver s seat If the vehicle is started and the key is not in the vehicle the vehicle will not restart after it is shut off and the push button start is switched to off The trunk is out of the assured operational range however if the key transmitter is operable the engine will start With the advanced keyless function Interior antenna Before Driving Keys Without the advanced keyless function Interior antenna gt Operational range NOTE The engine may not start if the key is placed in the following areas Around the dashboard e In the storage compartments such as the glove compartment On the rear parcel shelf V Key Suspend Function If a key is left in the vehicle the functions of the key left in the vehicle are temporarily suspended to prevent theft of the vehicle To restore the functions press the unlock button on the functions suspended key in the vehicle Advanced Keyless Entry System
362. h Deep scratches or chips on the finish should be repaired promptly Exposed metal quickly rusts and can lead to major repairs A CAUTION If your Mazda is damaged and needs metal parts repaired or replaced make sure the body shop applies anti corrosion materials to all parts both repaired and new This will prevent them from rusting V Bright Metal Maintenance e Use tar remover to remove road tar and insects Never do this with a knife or similar tool e To prevent corrosion on bright metal surfaces apply wax or chrome preservative and rub it to a high luster 6 65 Maintenance and Care Appearance Care e During cold weather or in coastal areas cover bright metal parts with a coating of wax or preservative heavier than usual It would also help to coat them with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or some other protective compound A CAUTION Do not use steel wool abrasive cleaners or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome plated or anodized aluminum parts This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration Vv Underbody Maintenance Road chemicals and salt used for ice and snow removal and solvents used for dust control may collect on the underbody If not removed they will speed up rusting and deterioration of such underbody parts as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though these parts may be coated with a
363. haracters Characters which cannot be displayed are indicated by an asterisk Display scroll Only 13 characters can be displayed at one time To display the rest of the characters of a long title press and hold the text button 3 The display scrolls the next 13 characters Press and hold the text button 3 again after the last 13 characters have been displayed to return to the beginning of the title 5 109 Interior Features Bluetooth V Bluetooth Audio Device Information Display If a Bluetooth audio device is connected the following information is displayed in the audio display AVRCP Ver lower than 1 3 Ver 1 3 Device name X X Title Artist name File number X X Album name X X X Playback time Folder number X Available Not available NOTE Some information may not display depending on the device and if the information cannot be displayed NO TITLE is indicated 5 110 Bluetooth Audio Type B Applicable Bluetooth specification Recommended Ver 1 1 1 2 2 0 EDR 2 1 EDR 3 0 conformity Response profile e A2DP Advanced Audio Distribution Profile Ver 1 0 1 2 e AVRCP Audio Video Remote Control Profile Ver 1 0 1 3 1 4 A2DP is a profile which transmits only audio to the Bluetooth unit If your Bluetooth audio device corresponds only to A2DP but not AVRCP you cannot operate it usi
364. he brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer When the light is flashing The light flashes if the electric parking brake has a malfunction If the light remains flashing even if the electric parking brake switch is operated consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible A WARNING Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time If this light remains illuminated after checking that the parking brake is fully released have the brakes inspected immediately 7 24 A CAUTION In addition the effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to depress the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle V If the ABS warning light illuminates es If the ABS warning light stays on while you re driving the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction If this occurs your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS Should this happen consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible NOTE e When the engine is jump started to charge the battery uneven rpm occurs and the ABS war
365. he contact information in alphabetical order of the last name Edits the preset message Edit Preset Messages Refer to Receiving and Replying to Messages available only with E mail SMS compatible phones on page 5 103 Emergency Assistance On Off Mobile Utilizes the Mobile 911 function Call Restore Factory settings Initializes all Communication Settings Depending on the device it may be necessary to acquire download permission on the device side 5 107 Interior Features Bluetooth Bluetooth Audio Type A Applicable Bluetooth specification Recommended Ver 2 0 Response profile e A2DP Advanced Audio Distribution Profile Ver 1 0 1 2 e AVRCP Audio Video Remote Control Profile Ver 1 0 1 3 A2DP is a profile which transmits only audio to the Bluetooth unit If your Bluetooth audio device corresponds only to A2DP but not AVRCP you cannot operate it using the control panel of the vehicle s audio system In this case only the operations on the mobile device are available the same as when a portable audio device for a non compliant Bluetooth device is connected to the AUX terminal Function A2DP AVRCE Ver 1 0 Ver 1 3 Playback X X Pause X X File Track up down X X Reverse X Fast forward X Text display X X Available Not available 5 108 NOTE The battery consumption
366. he first device among the paired devices is displayed 4 Turn the audio control dial to select the name of the device you would like to link Device name 1 Device name 2 v4 Device name 3 v4 N Device name 4 Wp tto Device name 5 v4 Device name 6 v4 Device name 7 v4 CO BACK lt 5 Press the audio control dial to select the device you would like to link The symbol disappears and PAIRING flashes in the audio display NOTE When GO BACK is selected and the audio control dial is pressed the display returns to LINK CHANGE 6 If the link to the desired device is successful the symbol is displayed again together with LINK CHANGED LINK CHANGED is displayed for three seconds then it returns to the normal display NOTE Some Bluetooth audio devices need a certain amount of time before the symbol is displayed Ifa Hands Free type mobile phone has been the most recently paired device the Bluetooth unit links this device If you would like to use a Bluetooth audio type device which has been previously paired to the Bluetooth unit the link must be changed to this device Ifan error occurs while trying to link a device Err flashes in the audio display for three seconds and the display returns to LINK CHANGE If this occurs check the pairing status of the Bluetooth au
367. he fog lights The fog lights will improve visibility at night and during foggy conditions To turn the fog lights on rotate the fog light switch to the 40 position The headlight switch must be in the 2D position before turning on the fog lights Fog light switch To turn the fog lights off rotate the fog light switch to the OFF position or turn the headlight switch to the 200 or OFF position NOTE The fog lights will turn off when the headlights are set at high beams With auto light control If the fog light switch is in the 4 position and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the fog lights will turn on when the headlights the exterior lights and dashboard illumination turn on When Driving Switches and Controls Turn and Lane Change Signals NOTE Ifan indicator light flashes abnormally one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out A personalized function is available to change the turn indicator sound volume Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 YV Turn Signals Move the signal lever down for a left turn or up for a right turn to the stop position The signal will self cancel after the turn is completed If the indicator light continues to flash after a turn manually return the lever to its original position Right turn t Right lane change Left lane change t Left turn Green indicators on the dashboard show which signal is working
368. he instrument cluster and the push button start indicator light green illuminate NOTE e After starting the engine the push button start indicator light amber turn off and the ignition is in the ON position e After pressing the push button start and before the engine starts the operation sound of the fuel pump motor from near the fuel tank can be heard however this does not indicate a malfunction 8 After starting the engine let it idle for about ten seconds NOTE Whether the engine is cold or warm it should be started without the use of the accelerator e If the engine does not start the first time refer to Starting a Flooded Engine under Emergency Starting If the engine still does not start have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer page 7 17 Y Engine Start Function When Key Battery is Dead A CAUTION When starting the engine by holding the transmitter over the push button start due to a dead key battery ora malfunctioning key be careful not to allow the following Otherwise the signal from the key will not be received correctly and the engine may not start gt Metal parts of other keys or metal objects touch the key gt Spare keys or keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system touch or come near the key gt Devices for electronic purchases or security passage which touch or come near the key If the engine cannot be started due to a dea
369. he last entered numbers or press the Pick Up button to save the number 14 Number Change Press the pick up button then go to Step 15 Adding inputting telephone number Say XXXX desired telephone number then go to Step 13 Telephone number correction Say Go Back The prompt replies Go Back The last entered numbers have been removed Number please Then go back to Step 12 15 Prompt Number changed Phonebook data deletion Erasing individual phonebook data Individual data registered to the Bluetooth Hands Free phonebook can be cleared NOTE Do this function only when parked It is too distracting to attempt while driving and you may make too many errors to be effective 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Phonebook 3 Prompt Select one of the following New entry edit list names delete erase all or import contact 4 Say Beep Delete 5 Prompt Please say the name of the entry you would like to delete or say 99 099 List names 5 93 Interior Features Bluetooth 6 Say Beep XXXXX Ex John s phone Say the registered voice tag to be deleted from the phonebook 7 Prompt Deleting XXXXX Ex John s phone Registered voice tag Home Registered location Is this correct 8 Say Beep Yes 9 Prompt XXXXX Ex John s
370. he message continues to appear take the unit to an Authorized Mazda Dealer for service Interior Features Audio System Y How to use Auxiliary jack USB port Audio can be heard from the vehicle s speakers by connecting a commercially available portable audio unit to the auxiliary jack Use a commercially available non impedance 3 5 stereo mini plug cable Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details In addition audio can be played from the vehicle audio device by connecting a USB device or an iPod to the USB port Refer to AUX USB iPod mode on page 5 52 YW Error Indications If you see an error indication on the audio display find the cause in the chart If you cannot clear the error indication take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer Indication Cause Solution CD is Insert the CD properly If sened the error indication upside continues to display down consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer CHECK CD Insert another CD properly If the error CD is indication continues to defective display consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer 5 31 Interior Features Audio System Audio Set Type B NOTE The explanation of functions described in this manual may differ from the actual operation and the shapes of screens and buttons and the letters and characters displayed may also differ from the actual appearance Additionally depending on future software updates the content may succes
371. he right 3 Pull the center of each plastic retainer and remove the retainers Installation QD kaf 4 Turn the screw counterclockwise and remove it and then partially peel back the mudguard 6 47 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance 5 Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling the connector downward 6 Turn the socket and bulb assembly to remove it Carefully remove the bulb from its socket in the reflector by gently pulling it straight backward out LAEN G 7 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure High beam bulbs Daytime running lights Left side 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and the headlight switch is off 2 Lift the hood 6 48 3 Remove the clip 4 Move the air cleaner cover and create a space large enough to work in 5 Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling the connector downward f 6 Turn the socket and bulb assembly to remove it Carefully remove the bulb from its socket in the reflector by gently pulling it straight backward out of the socket Q 7 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure Right side 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and the headlight switch is off 2 Lift the hood 3 Disconnect the clip Mainte
372. hen washing the inside of the window glass use a soft cloth dampened in lukewarm water gently wiping the thermal filaments and the antenna lines Use of glass cleaning products could damage the thermal filaments and the antenna lines Cleaning the Floor Mats Rubber floor mats should be cleaned with mild soap and water only A WARNING Do not use rubber cleaners such as tire cleaner or tire shine when cleaning rubber floor mats Cleaning the rubber floor mats with rubber cleaning products makes the floor mats slippery This may cause an accident when depressing the accelerator brake or clutch Manual transaxle pedal or when getting in or out of the vehicle After removing the floor mats for cleaning always reinstall them securely Refer to Floor Mat on page 3 44 6 70 If Trouble Arises Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle Parking in an Emergency cscssscscsssssscsscssscsssesssssseesssssenseres 7 2 Parking in an Emergency ccceseeeeccseeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeeceneneeaesees 7 2 Elat TiC uua aa aaa 7 3 Spare Tire and Tool Storage ccescecseeseseeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeteeseees 7 3 Changing a Flat Tire 22 8 cestienedt eta Galanin Ra a 7 6 Battery Runs Out csccscsscssssssssssssssssersssessssssssssscsssssssessenes 7 14 J mp Starting serren re ari een eden OU eludes 7 14 Emergency Starting cccscsssssssssscsscsssssssssssssssssssssesssseesenes 7
373. hes and Controls e Verify that there is a remote control transmitter available for the device you would like to program e Disconnect the power to the device V Programming the HomeLink System ACAUTION When programming a garage door opener or a gate disconnect the power to these devices before performing programming as continuous operation of the devices could damage the motor The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons which can be individually selected and programmed using the transmitters for current on market devices as follows 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 2 5 7 5 cm 1 3 inches away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Do not release the buttons until step 3 has been completed NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 3 After the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons 4 71 When Driving Switches and Controls NOTE If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light contact HomeLink at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 for assistance 4 Firmly press and hold the program
374. hifted before entering the RED ZONE V Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows approximately how much fuel is remaining in the tank when the ignition is switched ON We recommend keeping the tank over 1 4 full Type A E lt x NEF 7 N EES C Empty E 1R Ra EF Pay a When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Type B Full Ez a NI 7 G TT as 1 4 Full E F Wanye lt BR Empty E F If the low fuel warning light illuminates or the fuel level is very low refuel as soon as possible Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 NOTE After refueling it may require some time for the indicator to stabilize In addition the indicator may deviate while driving on a slope or curve since the fuel moves in the tank The display indicating a quarter or less remaining fuel has more segments to show the remaining fuel level in greater detail e The direction of the arrow 4w indicates that the fuel filler lid is on the left side of the vehicle 4 13 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Dashboard Illumination Rotate the knob to adjust the brightness of the instrument cluster and other illuminations in the dashboard NOTE The brightness of dashboard illuminations can be adjusted when the headlights and Parking lights are turned on When the dashboard illumination brightness cannot be adjusted any more a beep sound will be heard Canceling the illumination dimmer Wh
375. hild restraint system could move which may result in death or injury to the child Tether strap SS Anchor bracket Always attach the tether strap to the correct tether anchor position Attaching the tether strap to the incorrect tether anchor position is dangerous In a collision the tether strap could come off and loosen the child restraint system If the child restraint system moves it could result in death or injury to the child Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint Installation on rear center seat The LATCH lower anchors at the center of the rear seat are much further apart than the sets of LATCH lower anchors for child restraint system installation at other seating positions Child restraint systems with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed on the center seating position Some LATCH equipped child restraint systems can be placed in the center position and will reach the nearest LATCH lower anchors which are 443 mm 17 4 in apart LATCH compatible child restraint systems with attachments on belt webbing can be used at this seating position only if the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions state that the child restraint system can be installed to LATCH lower anchors that are 443 mm 17 4 in apart Do not attach two child restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor If your child restraint system has a tether it must also be used for your child s optimum safety The proc
376. hole process normally takes 40 days or less The arbitration decision is not binding on you or Mazda unless you accept the decision For more information about BBB AUTO LINE including current eligibility standards please call 1 800 955 5100 or visit the BBB website at www lemonlaw bbb org Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda We hope to satisfy every customer directly but if there is ever a question about our decision Mazda believes in providing a fast fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers California Customers 1 Mazda North American Operations participates in BBB AUTO LINE a mediation arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus 4200 Wilson Boulevard Arlington Virginia 22203 through local Better Business Bureaus BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certified by the Arbitration Certification Program of the California Department of Consumer Affairs 2 If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty we encourage you to bring it to our attention If we are unable to resolve it you may file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE Claims must be filed with BBB AUTO LINE within six 6 months after the expiration of the warranty 3 To file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE call 1 800 955 5100 There is no charge for the call 4 In order to file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE yo
377. hs 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 x1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 SKYACTIV G 2 5 Drive belts I I Engine oil R R IR R IRI R IRIRIRI_RIRIR Engine oil filter R R R R IRIR RIRIRI _RIRIR COOLING SYSTEM Cooling system Engne coolant Replace at first 200 000 km or 10 years after that every 100 000 km or 5 years Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I FUEL SYSTEM Air filter C R C R C R Fuel lines and hoses 1 1 Hoses and tubes for emission 1 T Fuel filter Replace every 60 000 km IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs Replace every 120 000 km ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I CHASSIS and BODY Brake lines hoses and connections I I I Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I Brake fluid R R Disc brakes I I I I I I Tire Rotation Rotate every 10 000 km Tire inflation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I Front and rear suspension ball joints and wheel I I I bearing axial play Driveshaft dust boots I I I Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T Exhaust system and heat shields I I I All locks and hinges L L L L L Washer fluid level I I I I I I 6 18 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Number of months or kilome
378. hts 49 FUEL PUMP2 25A 50 HAZARD 25 A Eo Turn signal lights Front side marker 51 DRL 15A Daytime running lights 52 R OUTLET2 15A Accessory sockets 53 HORN 15A Horn 54 ROOM 15A Overhead light Some models 6 59 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Fuse block Left side g w a aa a a a a CO IN JO Jou JAR Oo PO oO 2 20 2 DESCRIPTION HUSE PROTECTED COMPONENT RATING 1 P SEAT D 30A Power seat 2 P WINDOW3 30A Power windows 3 R OUTLET3 15 A 4 P WINDOW2 25A Power windows 5 SRS2 ESCL 15 A 6 D LOCK 25A Power door locks 7 SEAT WARM 20A Seat warmer 8 SUNROOF 10A Moonroof 9 F OUTLET 15A Accessory sockets 10 MIRROR 7 5 A Power control mirror 11 R OUTLET1 ISA 12 13 14 m 15 16 17 M DEF 7 5A Mirror defogger 18 R SEAT W 20A Seat warmer 19 R SHADE 7 5 A 6 60 Some models Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance FUSE DESCRIPTION Ghats PROTECTED COMPONENT 20 AT IND 7 54 AT shift indicator 21 P SEAT P 30A Power seat Some models 6 61 Maintenance and Care Appearance Care Exterior Care The paintwork on your Mazda represents the latest technical developments in composition and methods of application Environmental hazards however can harm the paint s protective properties if proper care i
379. ible The system may not operate in an accident A WARNING Never tamper with the air bag pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs Self servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous An air bag pretensioner could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death V If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light flashes If the tire pressure monitoring system has a malfunction the tire pressure warning light flashes for about 1 minute when the ignition is switched ON and then continues illuminating Have your vehicle checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible V If the KEY warning indication warning light red is indicated Type A Keyless System malfunction is displayed This message is displayed if the advanced keyless entry amp push button start system has a problem Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer 7 29 If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds A CAUTION If the above message is indicated or the push button start indicator light amber flashes the engine may not start If the engine cannot be started try starting it using the emergency operation for starting the engine and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible Refer to Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine on page 4 8 Ignition is on is displayed This mes
380. ible page 5 81 The registration must be performed completely The required time is a few minutes The user needs to be seated in the driver s seat with the voice input command list for voice recognition learning open to the page indicated below 5 84 When voice recognition learning is done for the first time 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press Say Beep Voice training Prompt This operation must be performed in a quiet environment while the vehicle is stopped See the owner s manual for the list of required training phrases Press and release the talk button when you are ready to begin Press the hang up button to cancel at any time Press the talk button with a short press The voice guidance reads out the voice input command number refer to the voice input command list for voice recognition learning Ex Please read phrase 1 Say Beep 0123456789 Say the voice input command for voice recognition learning 1 to 8 according to the voice guidance Prompt Speaker enrollment is complete NOTE If an error occurred in the voice recognition learning re learning can be done by pressing the talk button with a short press Voice recognition re learning If voice recognition learning has already been done 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Voice training 3 Prompt
381. icacededensesessdaceacdeaseseeaned page 2 41 Bottle bolder apenan aaea E E REEE T page 5 132 U 1 EENEN ANE AN AEE E page 5 127 0 Vanity TOT eon e i EEE EER a a AE page 5 127 G Overhead Vighits iiite anre na i e are eh ei ede a page 5 128 M Moonroof switch c ccecccccccescesseseeseeseeseescescseesecseeseeseeseeeceesecsesseeseeseesecseeseeseerees page 3 36 Rearview mirror gerio dit Reh Geld E RAAR page 3 31 9 Ci Gd SiS A ez eens satan bas A E page 5 131 External input terminal 3 c 0 ccscedecescacsceaiessseaseaeecesceesetesdsdcessteev essncecevtbccscbeeveas page 5 52 QD Accessory SOCKS cccecsessssesseseseeseseseeseseeseseeseeesesecseecsesecseeeseeecseseeseeeeseeeens page 5 130 MONON Seat crnan aa ia ides E S dn een page 2 5 13 Geniter CONSOLE E E EA A E page 5 134 Rear Seat EA E nib A E E E page 2 10 9 Seat warmer Switches ccccccccscsesscscssesessesessesescescseessseeseseeecseecsseecseessseesseeeeaees page 2 7 The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle 1 5 Pictorial Index Exterior Overview PTA OGG 2 ss2s25s E EE A EAEE EEE page 6 24 Windshield wiper blades c ccccccccssescssesesseseseeseseeecseescseeceseeecseceeseeecseseeseeeens page 6 33 3 MOOnKO E E AE E A E beating an page 3 36 4 Door and Keys nna A page 3 12 CT En A A E E A page 3 27 C Wieekand Tireraenerrie rr a A page 6 40 Exterior ioie eenander EE AEA page 6 46 A bc ef I AEN E E EE meen E E EAE A EN fame ceeee Pant page
382. icle or two wheeled vehicle approaches on the left or right from behind your vehicle the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning sound is activated If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds Y Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC System Warnings The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system warnings notify the driver of system malfunctions and cautions on use when required Check based on the beep sound Cautions What to check The beep sounds time while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC is operating The vehicle speed is slower than 25 km h 16 mph and the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system has been canceled The beep continues to sound while the vehicle is being driven The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is too close Verify the safety of the surrounding area and reduce vehicle speed When the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC is operating the beep sounds and the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC warning light amber in the instrument cluster turns on A malfunction in the system may be indicated Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer V Collision warning If there is the possibility of a collision with a vehicle ahead the beep sounds continuously and a warning is indicated in the display V Power Steering Warning Buzzer If the power steering system has a malfunction the power st
383. ide corner of the dash 4 Purchase date and current mileage 5 Your dealer s name and location 6 Your question s If you live outside the U S A please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor V STEP 3 Contact Better Business Bureau BBB Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may not be possible As a final step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered Mazda North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program administered by the Better Business Bureau BBB system at no cost to you the consumer BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns If the BBB is not able to facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies under the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C 2301 et seq To the extent permitted by the applicable state Lemon Law you are also required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the Lemon Law If you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or the applicable state Lemon Law you are not required to first use BBB AUTO LINE 8 3 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance The w
384. iding comfort and helps reduce tread wear Out of balance tires can cause vibration and uneven wear such as cupping and flat spots 6 44 MEMO Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Light Bulbs With LED Headlights Courtesy lights Rear map lights Side turn signal lights Trunk light Overhead lights Front map lights With Halogen Headlights Courtesy lights Side turn signal lights Overhead lights Front map lights Front turn signal lights Front side marker lights Daytime running lights Parking lights Headlights Low beam Fog lights Headlights High beam Front turn signal lights Front side marker lights Parking lights Headlights Low beam Headlights High beam High mount brake light Signature wing illumination Rear map lights Trunk light High mount brake light Daytime running lights 6 46 Rear side marker lights Brake lights Taillights Brake lights Taillights Rear turn signal lights Reverse lights Taillights Trunk lid side License plate lights Rear side marker lights Brake lights Taillights Rear turn signal lights Reverse lights Taillights Trunk lid side License plate lights Some models AWARNING Never touch the glass portion of a halogen bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection when handling or working around the bul
385. ight Amber Cruise Set Indicator Light Green 4 45 S PO RT Select Mode Indication 4 44 ane Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF Indication 4 46 D Q Lights On Indicator Light 4 46 LED Headlight Warning Light 4 46 Warning Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas Signal Warning Indicator Lights Page Master Warning Light 4 29 4 26 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Warning Indicator Lights Brake System Warning Light ABS Warning Light Electric Parking Brake Warning Light Brake Pedal Operation Demand Indicator Light Charging System Warning Light Engine Oil Warning Light Check Engine Light High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Red Lane Departure Warning System LDWS Warning Light Lane Departure Warning System LDWS OFF Indicator Light Automatic Transaxle Warning Light Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light Air Bag Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light Check Fuel Cap Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display OFF Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF Indicator Light Signal Warning Indicator Lights Page Door Ajar Warning Light 4 37 as et Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light 4 37 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
386. ight of your load by weighing the items or people before putting them in the vehicle 3 47 Before Driving Driving Tips Driving on Uneven Road Your vehicle s suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough uneven roads or over speed bumps at excessive speeds Use care and reduce speed when traveling on rough uneven roads or over speed bumps Use care not to damage the vehicle s underbody bumpers or muffler s when driving under the following conditions e Ascending or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle e Ascending or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle Your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class leading performance and handling As a result the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be damaged if driven through potholes or on rough uneven roads at excessive speeds Use care and reduce speed when traveling on rough uneven roads or through potholes 3 48 Before Driving Towing Trailer Towing Recreational Towing Your Mazda is not designed for towing An example of recreational towing is Never tow a trailer with your Mazda towing your vehicle behind a motorhome The transaxle is not designed for towing this vehicle on all 4 wheels When doing recreational towing refer to Towing Description page 7 20 and Tiedown Hook page 7 21 and carefully follow the instructions 3 49 3 50 When Dri
387. igital broadcasts provide free crystal clear audio For more information and a guide to available radio stations and programming please visit www hdradio com Benefits of HD Radio Technology Information The song title artist name album name and genre will appear on the screen when available by the radio station Multicast On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have multiple or supplemental programs on each FM station Listening to HD Radio Technology If icon turns on by selecting a radio station which is an HD Radio broadcasting station the analog broadcast is switched to an HD Radio broadcast automatically after a few seconds and then received If the HD Radio broadcast is stopped and changed to an analog broadcast press down 4 to turn off Multicast channel selection FM If multi cast channels are available for an HD Radio broadcast currently being received the multi cast channel list is displayed Select the desired radio station 5 41 Interior Features Audio System NOTE e Ifan analog broadcast is received once and HD Radio is received while HD1 is selected the audio unit switches to the HD Radio station automatically e When the icon is illuminated there could be a noticeable difference in sound quality and volume when a change from digital to analog signals occurs If the sound quality and volume become noticeably diminished or cut off select the 4 icon to tur
388. ignals can be reflected by obstructions it is possible to receive both the direct signal and the reflected signal at the same time This causes a slight delay in reception and may be heard as a broken sound or a distortion This problem may also be encountered when in close proximity to the transmitter Reflected wave Flutter Skip noise Signals from an FM transmitter move in straight lines and become weak in valleys between tall buildings mountains and other obstacles When a vehicle passes through such an area the reception conditions may change suddenly resulting in annoying noise Interior Features Audio System Weak signal noise In suburban areas broadcast signals become weak because of distance from the transmitter Reception in such fringe areas is characterized by sound breakup Strong signal noise This occurs very close to a transmitter tower The broadcast signals are extremely strong so the result is noise and sound breakup at the radio receiver A When a vehicle reaches the area of two strong stations broadcasting at similar frequencies the original station may be temporarily lost and the second station picked up At this time there will be some noise from this disturbance Station drift noise Station 2 88 3 MHz Station 1 88 1 MHz 5 15 Interior Features Audio System V Operating Tips for CD Player Condensation phenomenon Immediately after turning on th
389. ild restraint systems and has only an emergency locking mode The driver may wear it comfortably and it will lock during a collision However in some models with automatic locking mode the front passenger s seat and all rear lap shoulder belt retractors operate in two modes emergency locking mode and for child restraint systems automatic locking mode While we recommend you put all children in the rear seats if you must use the front passenger seat for a child slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make sure any child restraint system is secured properly A WARNING Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous During a collision occupants not wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown out of the vehicle They could be seriously injured or even killed In the same collision occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer Do not wear twisted seat belts Twisted seat belts are dangerous In a collision the full width of the belt is not available to absorb the impact This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt which could cause serious injury or death So if your seat belt is twisted you must straighten the seat belt to remove any twists and to allow the full width of the belt to be used Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time Using one seat belt for more than o
390. in congested traffic high engine exhaust areas or when quick cooling is desired Outside air position S Outside air is allowed to enter the cabin Use this mode for ventilation or windshield defrosting A WARNING Do not use the lt amp position in cold or rainy weather Using the lt amp position in cold or rainy weather is dangerous as it will cause the windows to fog up Your vision will be hampered which could lead to a serious accident DUAL switch Use the DUAL switch to change the mode between the individual operation driver and passenger and interconnection simultaneous modes Individual operation mode indicator light illuminated The set temperature can be controlled individually for the driver and front passenger Interconnection mode indicator light turned off The set temperature for the driver and front passenger is controlled simultaneously Windshield defroster switch Press the switch to defrost the windshield and front door windows Interior Features Climate Control System Y Operation of Automatic Air Conditioning 1 Press the AUTO switch Selection of the airflow mode air intake selector and amount of airflow will be automatically controlled 2 Use the temperature control dial to select a desired temperature Press the DUAL switch or turn the front passenger temperature control dial to control the set temperature individually for the driver and front passenger
391. inated the system warns the driver of a vehicle in the detection area by flashing the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light and activating a beep sound Your vehicle t i I oy eseeeececececeen J oot rete J la SE o O y 5B w z fe D nm oc A WARNING Always check the surrounding area visually before making an actual lane change The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at your rear when making a lane change Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light may not flash or it might be delayed even though a vehicle is in an adjacent driving lane Always make it your responsibility as a driver to check the rear 4 104 Some models When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at your rear when making a lane change Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light may not flash or it might be delayed even though a vehicle is in an adjacent driving lane Always make it your responsibility as a driver to check the rear e The ignition is switched ON The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch is pressed and the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indication indicator light in the instrument cluster is turned off The vehicle speed is about 10 km h 6 3 mph or fa
392. ing the push button start If the system is triggered again the lights and horn will activate until the driver s door or the trunk lid is unlocked with the transmitter With advanced key The lights and horn can also be deactivated by pressing the request switch on a door e Before Driving Security System NOTE If the battery goes dead while the theft deterrent system is armed the horn will activate and the hazard warning lights will flash when the battery is charged or replaced V How to Arm the System 1 Close the windows and the moonroof securely 2 Press the push button start off 3 Make sure the hood the doors and the trunk lid are closed 4 Press the lock button on the transmitter or lock the driver s door from the outside with the auxiliary key The hazard warning lights will flash once The following method will also arm the theft deterrent system Press the door lock switch A while any door is open and then close all of the doors With the advanced keyless function Press a request switch The security indicator light in the instrument panel flashes twice per second for 20 seconds Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 enn 5 After 20 seconds the system is fully armed Some models 3 41 Before Driving Security System NOTE The theft deterrent system can also be armed by activating the auto relock function with all the doors the trunk lid
393. inges and locks should be lubricated each time the engine oil is changed Use a nonfreezing lubricant on locks during cold weather Make sure the hood s secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released Wiper Blades A CAUTION gt Hot waxes applied by automatic car washers have been known to affect the wiper s ability to clean windows gt To prevent damage to the wiper blades do not use gasoline kerosene paint thinner or other solvents on or near them gt When the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON the wipers may move automatically in the following cases gt If the windshield above the rain sensor is touched gt If the windshield above the rain sensor is wiped with a cloth gt If the windshield is struck with a hand or other object gt If the rain sensor is struck with a hand or other object from inside the vehicle Be careful not to pinch hands or fingers as it may cause injury or damage the wipers When washing or servicing your Mazda make sure the wiper lever is in the OFF position Contamination of either the windshield or the blades with foreign matter can reduce wiper effectiveness Common sources are insects tree sap and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes If the blades are not wiping properly clean the window and blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent then rinse thoroughly with clean water Repeat if ne
394. injured while performing some maintenance procedures If you must run the engine while working under the hood make certain that you remove all jewelry especially rings bracelets watches and necklaces and all neckties scarves and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fan which may turn on unexpectedly Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous It becomes even more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury ar Switch the ignition to off and make sure the fan is not running before attempting to work near the cooling fan Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous The fan could continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine compartment temperature is high You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured Do not leave items in the engine compartment After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment do not forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a fire leading to an unexpected accident 6 23 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance A WARNING Always check that the hood is closed and securely locked A hood that is not closed and securely locked is dangerous as it could fly open while the vehicle is moving and block th
395. ink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons begin with Programming step 1 For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 YV Gate operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Programming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink step 2 with the following NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly Proceed with Programming step 3 to complete V Operating the HomeLink System Press the programmed HomeLink button to operate a programmed device The code will continue being transmitted f
396. io waves the Key Removed From Vehicle Warning may activate if the key is carried together with a metal object or it is placed in a poor signal reception area KEY Indicator Light Green When illuminated When the brake pedal is depressed with an automatic transaxle or the clutch pedal is depressed with a manual transaxle the system confirms that the correct key is inside the vehicle the KEY indicator light green illuminates and the engine can be started page 4 3 When flashing When the ignition is switched from ON to off the KEY indicator light green flashes for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power is low Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable Refer to Key Battery Replacement on page 6 38 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Y HBC Warning Light Amber HBC Indicator Light Green hi HBC warning light Amber When illuminated When the ignition is switched ON this warning light illuminates and then turns off after a few seconds The warning light illuminates if the area of the windshield in front of the forward sensing camera FSC is fogged or obstructed This light turns on if there is a malfunction in the high beam control system HBC Have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer HBC indicator light Green This indicator light illuminates when the system is operating and turns off when the system operation is canceled
397. ion e Air conditioner operation e e When on it indicates auto operation and the system will function automatically Ifany of the following switches are operated while in auto control the AUTO switch indicator turns off e Mode selector switch Fan control switch Windshield defroster switch The functions for switches other than those operated in the above continue to operate in auto control OFF switch Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the climate control system 5 9 Interior Features Climate Control System Temperature control dial This dial controls temperature Turn it clockwise for hot and counterclockwise for cold e When the DUAL switch is off Turn the driver temperature control dial to control the temperature throughout the entire cabin e When the DUAL switch is on Turn the driver or front passenger temperature control dial to independently control the temperature on each side of the cabin NOTE The climate control system changes to the individual operation mode DUAL switch indicator light illuminated by turning the front passenger temperature control dial even when the DUAL switch is off which allows individual control of the set temperature for the driver and front passenger The temperature units for the temperature setting display can be changed in conjunction with the temperature units for the outside temperature display Refer to Outside Temperature Display on page 4
398. ion the screen display may 5 50 differ Select the icon on the home screen to display the Applications screen The following information can be verified Top screen Item Function HD Radio Traffic Map Fuel Refer to Fuel Fuel Consumption Economy Settings Economy Monitor Monitor 8 on page 4 87 Scheduled Refer to Mainiendnne Maintenance Maintenance Tire Rotation Monitor on page Oil Change 6 20 Refer to When Warning Warnings a Me Guidance active can be Lig ts verified Illuminate Flash on page 7 23 Audio Control Switch Operation V Adjusting the Volume To increase the volume press up the volume switch To decrease the volume press down the volume switch Interior Features Audio System Y Seek Switch AM FM radio Press the seek switch M4 gt I The radio switches to the next previous stored station in the order that it was stored Press and hold the seek switch M4 gt gt I to seek all usable stations at a higher or lower frequency whether programmed or not Radio stations which have been previously stored in the auto memory tuning Type A favorite radio Type B can be called up by pressing the seek switch M4 gt gt I while any radio station stored in the auto memory tuning Type A favorite radio Type B is being received Radio stations can be called up in the order they were stored with each press of the
399. ion of plastic parts or paint damage Maintenance and Care Appearance Care A WARNING Do not spray water in the cabin Splashing water on electrical parts such as the audio unit and switches is dangerous as it could cause a malfunction or a fire Dashboard Precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oils from contacting the dashboard They will damage and discolor the dashboard If these solutions get on the dashboard wipe them off immediately A CAUTION Do not use glazing agents Glazing agents contain ingredients which may cause discoloration wrinkling cracks and peeling soft pad e Extremely soft material is used for the soft pad surface When cleaning it is recommended that you use a clean towel dampened in a mild detergent to remove soiling If the soft pad surface is rubbed harshly it could result in the surface being damaged leaving white scratch marks Instrument panel to e Vv Cleaning the Upholstery and Interior Trim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner Clean vinyl with a leather and vinyl cleaner 6 67 Maintenance and Care Appearance Care Synthetic leather Remove dust and loose dirt from synthetic leather with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner Clean synthetic leather with a leather and synthetic leather cleaner Leather Remove dust and sand first using a vacuum cleaner or other means then wi
400. ir bag will have an SRS AIRBAG marking on the window pillars along the roof edge Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint AWARNING Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible if installing a front facing child restraint system on it is unavoidable As your vehicle has front air bags and doubly so because your vehicle has side air bags a front facing child restraint system should be put on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable Even if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates always move the seat as far back as possible because the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to the child Never use a rear facing child restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that could deploy Rear facing child restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous Even in a moderate collision the child restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child Even though you may feel assured that the front passenger air bag will not deploy based on the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates you should not use a rear facing child restraint system in the front seat 2 33 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with
401. is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or its agents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of the vehicle to the buyer NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THE FOLLOWING ADDRESS Mazda North American Operations 7755 Irvine Center Drive Irvine CA 92618 ATTN Customer Mediation The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE repairs reimbursement for money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehicle nonconformity repurchase or replacement of your vehicle and compensation for damages and remedies available under Mazda s written warranty or applicable law The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE punitive or multiple damages attorneys fees or consequential damages other than as provided in California Civil Code Section 1794 a and b 8 5 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance 10 You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator If you reject the decision you will be free to pursue further legal action The arbitrator s decision and any findings will be admissible in a court action 11 If you accept the arbitrator s decision Mazda will be bound by the decision and will comply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after we receive notice of your acceptance of the decision 12 Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955
402. is switch in the locked position while children are in the vehicle Locked position button depressed Only the driver s power window can be operated Before Driving Windows Unlocked position button not depressed All power windows on each door can be operated NOTE When the power window lock switch is in the locked position the light on each power window switch except for the driver s power window switch turns off The light may be difficult to see depending on the surrounding brightness 3 35 Before Driving Windows Moonroof The moonroof can be opened or closed electrically only when the ignition is switched ON Tilt Slide switch A WARNING Do not let passengers stand up or extend part of the body through the open moonroof while the vehicle is moving Extending the head arms or other parts of the body through the moonroof is dangerous The head or arms could hit something while the vehicle is moving This could cause serious injury or death Make sure the opening is clear before closing the moonroof A closing moonroof is dangerous The hands head or even neck of a person especially a child could be caught in it as it closes causing serious injury or even death 3 36 Some models NOTE Before washing your Mazda make sure the moonroof is completely closed so that water does not get inside the cabin area After washing your Mazda or after it rains wipe the water off th
403. isplay are activated simultaneously to alert you to maintain a sufficient distance between the vehicles Use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system on expressways and other highways which do not require a lot of repeated acceleration and deceleration Some models 4 117 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE AWARNING Do not rely completely on the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system and always drive carefully The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is designed to reduce load on the driver and although it maintains a constant vehicle speed or specifically it maintains a constant distance between your vehicle and the detected vehicle ahead according to the vehicle speed the system has detection limitations depending on the type of vehicle ahead and its conditions the weather conditions and the road conditions Additionally the system may be unable to decelerate sufficiently to avoid hitting the vehicle ahead if the vehicle ahead applies the brakes suddenly or another vehicle cuts into the driving lane which could result in an accident Always verify the safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safe distance from vehicles ahead or on coming vehicles Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system in the following locations Otherwise it could lead to an accident gt Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffic is heavy and there is insufficient space betwee
404. it is excessively low have the brake clutch system inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Washer Fluid V Inspecting Washer Fluid Level A WARNING Use only windshield washer fluid or plain water in the reservoir Using radiator antifreeze as washer fluid is dangerous If sprayed on the windshield it will dirty the windshield affect your visibility and could result in an accident Using Washer Fluid Without Anti freeze Protection in Cold Weather Operating your vehicle in temperatures below 4 degrees C 40 degrees F using washer fluid without anti freeze protection is dangerous as it could cause impaired windshield vision and result in an accident In cold weather always use washer fluid with anti freeze protection NOTE State or local regulations may restrict the use of volatile organic compounds VOCs which are commonly used as anti freeze agents in washer fluid A washer fluid with limited VOC content should be used only if it provides adequate freeze resistance for all regions and climates in which the vehicle will be operated 6 31 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir add fluid if necessary Use plain water if washer fluid is unavailable But use only washer fluid in cold weather to prevent it from freezing 6 32 Body Lubrication All moving points of the body such as door and hood h
405. itch and after all of the operation conditions have been met If the OFF switch is pressed to cancel the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC the system does not return to the previously set speed even if the RES switch is pressed VY Cruise Control Function While this function is operating the headway control operation is canceled and only the cruise control function operates The vehicle speed can be set more than about 25 km h 16 mph Use the cruise control function on expressways and other highways which do not require a lot of repeated acceleration and deceleration 4 124 AWARNING Do not use the cruise control function in the following locations Otherwise it could lead to an accident gt Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffic is heavy and there is insufficient space between vehicles Driving under these conditions using the cruise control function is not possible gt Steep down slopes Set speed may be exceeded because sufficient engine braking cannot be applied gt Slippery roads such as ice or snow bound roads Tires could spin causing you to lose vehicle control Always drive carefully The warnings and brake control will not operate after the headway control function is canceled and the system is switched to only the cruise control function Depress the brake pedal to decelerate according to the surrounding conditions while keeping a safe distance from the vehicle ahead and always drivi
406. iving Advanced Keyless Entry System Operational Range The system operates only when the driver is in the vehicle or within operational range while the key is being carried NOTE When the battery power is low or in places where there are high intensity radio waves or noise the operational range may become narrower or the system may not operate For determining battery replacement Refer to Keyless Entry System on page 3 4 Locking Unlocking the Doors 80cm 3lin e Exterior antenna 80cm 3 lin K Operational range NOTE The system may not operate if you are too close to the windows door handles Vv Opening the Trunk Lid Exterior antenna 80cm 3 lin 7an ___ Operational range 3 10 A WARNING Always take all children and pets with you or leave a responsible person with them Leaving a child or a pet unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous In hot weather temperatures inside a vehicle can become high enough to cause brain damage or even death Do not leave the key in your vehicle with children and keep them in a place where your children will not find or play with them Leaving children in a vehicle with the key is dangerous This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed Keep all doors locked when driving Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle are dangerous Passengers can fall out if a door is accidentally opened
407. km h 25 mph 50 mph oe About 25 m 82 ft About 50 m 164 ft a gt a oe About 20 m 66 ft About 40 m 131 ft gt A X S About 15 m 49 ft About 30 m 98 ft gt A X y O About 10 m 32 ft About 20 m 65 ft X S y 2 About 10 m 32 ft or less About 20 m 65 ft or less The distance between vehicles differs depending on vehicle speed 4 111 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA The Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system is designed to assist the driver in checking the area to the rear of the vehicle on both sides while the vehicle is reversing by alerting the driver to the presence of vehicles approaching the rear of the vehicle The Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system detects vehicles approaching from the left and right sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is being reversed out of a parking space and notifies the driver of possible danger using the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights and the warning buzzer Your vehicle t Detection areas Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA operation 1 The Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system operates when the shift lever manual transaxle or the selector lever automatic transaxle is shifted to the reverse R position 4 112 Some models When Driving i ACTIVSENSE 2 If there is the possibility of a collision with an approaching v
408. l find several WARNINGs CAUTIONS and NOTES in the manual A WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored A CAUTION A CAUTION indicates a situation in which bodily injury or damage to your vehicle or both could result if the caution is ignored NOTE A NOTE provides information and sometimes suggests how to make better use of your vehicle The symbol below located on some parts of the vehicle indicates that this manual contains information related to the part Please refer to the manual for a detailed explanation Table of Contents Pictorial Index ca Interior exterior views and part identification of your Mazda Essential Safety Equipment Important information about safety equipment including seats seat belt system child restraint systems and SRS air bags Before Driving Use of various features including keys doors mirrors and windows When Driving Information concerning safe driving and stopping Interior Features 5o Use of various features for ride comfort including air conditioning and audio system Maintenance and Care How to keep your Mazda in top condition If Trouble Arises Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Important consumer information including warranties and add on equipment Specifications Tech
409. l range all doors are locked automatically after about 30 seconds If you are out of the operational range before the doors and the trunk lid are completely closed or another key is left in the vehicle the auto lock function will not work Always make sure that all doors and the trunk lid are closed and locked before leaving the vehicle The auto lock function does not close the power windows Auto re lock function After unlocking with the request switch all doors will automatically lock if any of the following operations are not performed within about 60 seconds If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system the hazard warning lights will flash for confirmation The time required for the doors to lock automatically can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 A door or the trunk lid is opened The ignition is switched to any position other than off Y Locking Unlocking with Transmitter All doors can be locked unlocked by operating the keyless entry system transmitter refer to Keyless Entry System page 3 4 Locking Unlocking with Door Lock Switch All doors lock automatically when lock side is pressed They all unlock when unlock side is pressed Driver s door Unlock To lock all the doors from an open front door press the lock side of the door lock switch and then close the door Before Driving Doors and Locks NOTE When locking the doors this way be careful not to le
410. l utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible d en compromettre le fonctionnement Bandes de fr ochquences 24 05 24 25GHz Puissance ochmise Moins de 20 milliwatts 8 45 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity Mexico Certificado de homologacion RCPCOSR11 1177 Continental SRR2 A Este equipo opera a titulo secundario consecuentemente debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario Cofetel notice La operaci n de este equipo esta sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones 1 es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2 este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacion no deseada ATTENTION Cofetel requires that their notice is printed on the user manual in Spanish with the exact words above If the user manual in Spanish does not contain the notice it will not be accepted by Cofetel and they will not grant NOM 121 certificate Moreover it is important to tell your customer that Cofetel inspectors are checking the user manual in Spanish that is included with the product If the manual does not contain Cofetel notice as above they will put a penalty to the importer and distributor NOTE During printin
411. l while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Moving it can very easily cause the driver to abruptly turn to the left or right This can lead to loss of control or an accident V Steering Wheel Adjustment To change the angle or length of the steering wheel 1 Stop the vehicle and then pull down the lock release lever under the steering column Lock release lever 2 Tilt the steering wheel and or adjust the steering column length to the desired positions and then push the lever up to lock the column 3 Attempt to push the steering wheel up and down to make sure it s locked before driving Before Driving Steering Wheel 3 29 Before Driving Mirrors Mirrors Before driving adjust the inside and outside mirrors V Outside Mirrors A WARNING Be sure to look over your shoulder before changing lanes Changing lanes without taking into account the actual distance of the vehicle in the convex mirror is dangerous You could have a serious accident What you see in the convex mirror is closer than it appears Mirror type Flat type driver s side Flat surface mirror Convex type front passenger side The mirror has single curvature on its surface Power mirror adjustment The ignition must be switched to ACC or ON position To adjust 1 Rotate the mirror switch to the left L or right R to choose the left or right side mirror 3 30 2 Press the mirror switch in the appropri
412. lassification System Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger occupant classification sensor Even with the front passenger occupant classification sensor if you must use the front passenger seat to seat a child using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat under the following conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deploying and could result in serious injury or death to the child gt The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when seating a child in the child restraint system gt Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child restraint system gt A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger seatback gt Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint gt The seat is washed gt Liquids are spilled on the seat gt The front passenger seat is moved backward pushing into luggage or other items placed behind it gt The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat gt Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat gt An electric device is put on the front passenger s seat gt An additional electrical device such as a seat warmer is installed to the surface of the front passenger seat The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for children Always use seat belts and child r
413. layed next to RPT at the bottom of the display area 2 To cancel the repeat playback press the button again after 3 seconds 5 29 Interior Features Audio System Folder repeat 1 Press the repeat button 1 during playback and then press the button again within 3 seconds to play the tracks in the current folder repeatedly FOLDER RPT is displayed f is displayed next to RPT at the bottom of the display area 2 Press the button again to cancel the repeat playback Random playback Tracks are randomly selected and played During music CD playback 1 Press the random button 2 during playback to play the tracks on the CD randomly DISC RDM is displayed is displayed next to RDM at the bottom of the display area 2 Press the button again to cancel the random playback During MP3 WMA AAC CD playback Folder random 1 Press the random button 2 during playback to play the tracks in the folder randomly FOLDER RDM is displayed f is displayed next to RDM at the bottom of the display area 2 To cancel the random playback press the button again after 3 seconds 5 30 CD random 1 Press the random button 2 during playback and then press the button again within 3 seconds to play the tracks on the CD randomly DISC RDM is displayed is displayed next to RDM at the bottom of the display area 2 Press the button again to cancel the random playback Swi
414. le Ranges The shift position indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 The shift lever must be in P or N to operate the starter P Park P locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating A WARNING Always set the shift lever to P and set the parking brake Only setting the shift lever to the P position without using the parking brake to hold the vehicle is dangerous If P fails to hold the vehicle could move and cause an accident 4 50 A CAUTION gt Shifting into P N or R while the vehicle is moving can damage your transaxle gt Shifting into a driving gear or reverse when the engine is running faster than idle can damage the transaxle R Reverse In position R the vehicle moves only backward You must be at a complete stop before shifting to or from R except under rare circumstances as explained in Rocking the Vehicle page 3 45 N Neutral In N the wheels and transaxle are not locked The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or brakes are on A WARNING If the engine is running faster than idle do not shift from N or P into a driving gear It s dangerous to shift from N or P into a driving gear when the engine is running faster than idle If this is done the vehicle could move suddenly causing an accident or serious injury Do not shift into N when drivi
415. le is driven on an extremely rough road or a slippery icy road e Hard steering and rapid acceleration deceleration are repeated such as during aggressive driving on a winding road Load on the vehicle is applied to a tire such as by loading heavy luggage to one side of the vehicle e System initialization has not been implemented with the specified tire pressure V Tire Pressure Monitoring System 2 Let the tires cool then adjust the tire Initialization pressure of all four 4 tires to the specified pressure indicated on the tire pressure label located on the door jamb of the driver s door door open Refer to Tires on page 9 7 In the following cases system initialization must be performed so that the system operates normally e A tire pressure is adjusted e Tire rotation is performed 3 Switch the ignition ON e A tire or wheel is replaced e The battery is replaced or completely drained e The tire pressure monitoring system warning light is illuminated Initialization method 1 Park the car in a safe place and firmly apply the parking brake 4 151 When Driving Tire Pressure Monitoring System 4 While the vehicle is parked press and hold the tire pressure monitoring system set switch and verify that the tire pressure monitoring system warning light in the instrument cluster flashes twice and a beep sound is heard once With instrument cluster type A a message indicating that the initialization
416. le the lights are turned on they will remain on even if the ignition is switched to a position other than ON If the driver s door is opened or 30 s have elapsed with the headlights turned on the headlights turn off 4 When the ignition is switched to a position other than ON the lights will not turn on even if the light switch is switched to AUTO 5 Ifthe driver s door is opened or 30 s have elapsed with the headlights turned on the headlights turn off 4 59 When Driving Switches and Controls Auto light control When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON the light sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns the headlights other exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off see chart above A CAUTION gt Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield Otherwise the light sensor will not operate correctly gt The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto wiper control Keep hands and scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when the wipers activate automatically If you are going to clean the windshield be sure the wipers are turned off completely this is particularly important when clearing ice and snow when it is particularly tempting to leave the engine ru
417. lect the icon on the home screen to display the applications screen 2 Select the Fuel Economy Monitor 3 Operate the commander switch or touch the screen and display the menu NOTE When the menu is displayed by touching the screen the display is hidden automatically after 6 seconds 4 Select the icon in the menu and perform the operation Each icon operates as follows Indication on display Control status 40 20 CD Hides the menu display n 2 Returns to the application screen Switches the Fuel Economy Monitor in the order of Le ee Control Status and Fuel Consumption HLT ITE mpg Average 4 Resets the fuel economy data 60 50 40 30 20 1 Omin This Drive G Fuel Economy Monitor Economy This Drive Aver Fuel Economy History 7 Boa Displays the following setting screen Ending display on off switching e On off switching for function which synchronizes reset fuel economy data to trip meter Trip A Okaa los lot NOTE The fuel economy monitor screen after the ignition is switched from ON to OFF is changed to the original fuel economy monitor screen when the ignition is switched ON the next time 4 87 When Driving Fuel Economy Monitor VY Control Status Display The i stop operation status are displayed Indication on display Control status r 5 O Displays the readiness status as to whether operation o
418. less Control DYSUEM vroeere a aaea 4 70 Hood Release n se 6 24 HON Seine in e 4 69 I i ACTIVSENSE eeeeeeeesesereteeeeeeees 4 92 Active safety technology 4 92 Adaptive Front Lighting System ABS ssn nnineinianincain nda 4 94 Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system ce eeeeeeeeeeeee 4 104 Camera and Snsors n 4 93 Distance Recognition Support System DRSS e g A eee sess 4 109 Forward Sensing Camera ESO aiaee 4 135 High Beam Control System HBO aaen 4 95 Lane Departure Warning System LDWS 203 dunnan 4 98 Laser sensor front ee 4 141 Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC oon eeeeeseeseeeeeceeeneeneens 4 117 Pre crash safety technology 4 92 Radar sensor front 0 0 4 138 Radar sensors rear 06 4 143 Rear Cross Traffic Alert RETA Astin aitai 4 112 Smart Brake Support SBS 4 132 Smart City Brake Support SCBS ianeirensis 4 127 IFELOOP than Saas Aaa 4 84 Display asenne enia 4 84 i ELOOP Warning Beep 7 36 Ignition Switch aa eh ia a 4 2 Illuminated Entry System 5 129 Immobilizer System eee 3 39 Index I Indicator Lights Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF occ eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 46 Brake pedal operation 4 3 CTUISE ai donato ahs dct aes 4 45 DSC OFF sia cd iiine 4 42 ABCs eas Aah atte teat 4 4 Headlight high beam 4 44 FELOOP nganana 4 43 KE Yen titty iu sates hatte 4 39 L
419. ling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle Otherwise the radio waves emitted by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally 4 115 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE The radar sensors of the Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system may be regulated under the radio wave related laws of the country where the vehicle is driven The sensors in this system are approved for use in the U S A including territories Canada and Mexico If a vehicle with a Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system is driven in a country other than the U S A Canada or Mexico the system has to be turned off using the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch 4 116 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is designed to maintain headway control 1 according to the vehicle speed using a radar sensor to detect the distance to a vehicle ahead and by presetting the vehicle speed between 30 km h 19 mph and 145 km h 90 mph the driver is freed from having to constantly use the accelerator or brake pedals Headway Control Control of the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead detected by the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system Additionally if your vehicle starts closing in on the vehicle ahead because for example the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly a warning sound and a warning indication in the d
420. lizing this discarded kinetic energy to generate electricity and use it to power the vehicle s electrical devices and accessories such as the A C and audio fuel consumption can be reduced Mazda s system for generating electricity from this kinetic energy is called the Regenerative Braking System i ELOOP m Kinetic energy uum Electrical Accelerator OFF Battery ngine DC DC converter Engine Components Variable Voltage Vehicle Systems Energy regeneration EQ Charge gt as me SG D gt Power g ISO p 7 E fA maas Electric components alternator Air conditioning L Audio Capacitor Head lights etc Tire Accelerator ON Battery Vehicle Systems nD prng LD Power C Engine mmaa Electric components Air conditioning 7 Variable DC DC converter Engine Components Voltage Audio wera alternator J Capacitor Head lights etc Tire 4 84 Some models When Driving i ELOOP A capacitor is incorporated as the device for storing the generated electricity which can store and use large amounts of electricity instantly Variable Voltage alternator DC DC Converter Capacitor A CAUTION High current electricity flows through the following areas therefore do not touch them gt Variable Voltage alternator gt DC DC converter gt Capacitor NOTE When installing high power consumption devices such high output
421. low Schedule 2 Puerto Rico and Canada residents follow Schedule 2 Engine oil flexible maintenance is available for U S A and Puerto Rico residents whose vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply e Extended periods of idling or low speed operation such as police car taxi or driving school car e Driving in dusty conditions If any do apply follow Schedule 2 with engine oil fixed maintenance The onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on engine operating conditions when selecting flexible maintenance Mazda Genuine 0W 20 Oil and Castrol OW 20 Oil are required to achieve optimum calculation performance NOTE After the prescribed period continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended intervals Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Y Schedule 1 U S A residents Engine oil flexible maintenance interval Use when the maintenance monitor for Oil Change is set to Flexible For details see maintenance monitor page 6 20 Number of months or kilometers miles whichever comes first Months Maintenance Interval 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 x1000 km x1000 miles 16 32 48 30 64 80 96 60 112 ENGINE Drive belts I I Engine oil amp filter Replace when wrench indicator light is ON Max interval 12 months 16
422. lt in injury or vehicle damage or both gt Icy or snow covered roads gt Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed gt The trunk lid is not fully closed gt The vehicle is on a road incline gt When the display is cold images may course across the monitor or the screen and may be dimmer than usual which could cause difficulty in confirming the surrounding conditions of the vehicle Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding conditions by looking directly with your eyes gt Do not apply excessive force to the camera The camera position and angle may deviate gt Do not disassemble modify or remove it as it may no longer be waterproof gt The camera cover is made of plastic Do not apply degreasing agents organic solvents wax or glass coating agents to the camera cover If any are spilled on the cover wipe off with a soft cloth immediately gt Do not rub the cover excessively or polish it using an abrasive compound or a hard brush The cover may be damaged affecting the image Some models 4 153 When Driving Rear View Monitor NOTE e If water snow or mud is stuck on the camera lens wipe it off using a soft cloth If it cannot be wiped off use a mild detergent e Ifthe camera temperature changes rapidly Hot to cold cold to hot the rear view monitor may not operate correctly When replacing the tires consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Replacing the tires co
423. luid NOTE Because heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper blades the wiper motor is protected from motor breakdown overheating and possible fire by a circuit breaker This mechanism will automatically stop operation of the blades but only for about 5 minutes If this happens turn off the wiper switch and park off the right of way and remove the snow and ice After 5 minutes turn on the switch and the blades should operate normally If they do not resume functioning consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible Drive to the side of the road and park off the right of way Wait until the weather clears before trying to drive with the wipers inoperative V Windshield Wipers Turn the wipers on by pressing the lever up or down With intermittent wiper li OFF l t i See Wiper operation MIST Single wipe cycle mist INT Intermittent LO Low speed HI High speed When Driving Switches and Controls Variable speed intermittent wipers Set the lever to the intermittent position and choose the interval timing by rotating the ring li OFF li t li Position Wiper operation MIST Single wipe cycle mist AUTO Auto control LO Low speed HI High speed 4 65 When Driving Switches and Controls Auto wiper control When the wiper lever is in the AUTO position the rain sensor
424. ly NOTE The turn signals do not work when the hazard warning lights are on e Check local regulations about the use of hazard warning lights while the vehicle is being towed to verify that it is not in violation of the law If Trouble Arises Flat Tire Spare Tire and Tool Storage Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram Type A Spare tire hold down bolt Jack lever Tiedown eyelet Short type Tiedown eyelet Long type eZ oa sis we yp oo Jack ANU SERS a WD 1 pea res Flat tire bel Ss uA Spare tire Type B Tiedown eyelet Tiedown eyelet Lug wrench Jack lever Long type Short type Spare tire hold down bolt Jack Spare tire Some models 7 3 If Trouble Arises Flat Tire VY Jack To remove the jack 1 Lift the trunk mat Trunk mat 3 Turn the wing bolt and jack screw counterclockwise Jack screw 7 4 To secure the jack 1 Insert the wing bolt into the jack with the jack screw pointing to the front and turn the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily tighten it 2 Turn the jack screw in the direction shown in the figure Jack screw 3 Turn the wing bolt completely to secure the jack NOTE If the jack is not completely secured it could rattle while driving Make sure the jack screw is sufficiently tightened Maintenance e
425. ly Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4 151 NOTE Tires degrade over time even when they are not being used on the road It is recommended that tires generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire The period in which the tire was manufactured both week and year is indicated by a 4 digit number Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8 25 Vv Temporary Spare Tire Inspect the temporary spare tire at least monthly to make sure it is properly inflated and stored NOTE The temporary spare tire condition gradually deteriorates even if it has not been used The temporary spare tire is easier to handle because of its construction which is lighter and smaller than a conventional tire This tire should be used only for an emergency and only for a short distance Use the temporary spare tire only until the conventional tire is repaired which should be as soon as possible Refer to Tires on page 9 7 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance A CAUTION gt Do not use your temporary spare tire rim with a snow tire or a conventional tire Neither will properly fit and could damage both tire and rim gt The temporary spare tire has a tread life of less than 5 000 km 3 000 miles The tr
426. ly For example if the switch is pressed 4 times the set speed increases by about 4 km h 4 mph When Driving i ACTIVSENSE To increase speed using accelerator pedal Depress the accelerator pedal and press the SET or SET switch at the desired speed If the switch is not operated the system returns to the set speed after you release your foot from the accelerator pedal How to Decrease the Set Speed Press the SET switch continuously and release the switch at the desired speed The set speed can be adjusted incrementally 1 km h 1 mph increments by pressing the switch and releasing it immediately For example if the switch is pressed 4 times the set vehicle speed decreases by about 4 km h 4 mph Cancelling the function Cancelling using OFF switch When the OFF switch is pressed the cruise control function is cancelled Cancelling using ON switch When the ON switch is pressed continuously for about 2 seconds the cruise control function is canceled and the headway control function is made available for operation The cruise control function is canceled automatically in the following cases If the RESUME switch is pressed while the vehicle speed is 25 km h 16 mph or higher the speed returns to the original set speed e The CANCEL switch is pressed e The brake pedal is depressed e The parking brake is applied e The selector lever is shifted to P or N position 4 125 Whe
427. m of the display area 2 To cancel the random playback press the button again after 3 seconds All random 1 Press the random button 2 during playback and then press the button again within 3 seconds to play the tracks in the USB device randomly ALL RDM is displayed is displayed next to RDM at the bottom of the display area 2 Press the button again to cancel the random playback Switching the display The information displayed on the audio display changes as follows each time the text button 3 is pressed during playback Information displayed Button on audio display File number Elapsed time Folder number File number 3 File name Folder name Album name Song name Artist name 5 57 Interior Features Audio System NOTE The information artist name music name is displayed only when the USB device information in the USB device has information which can be displayed on the screen This unit cannot display some characters Characters which cannot be displayed are indicated by an asterisk 7 Display scroll Only 13 characters can be displayed at one time To display the rest of the characters of a long title press and hold the text button 3 The display scrolls the next 13 characters Press and hold the text button 3 again after the last 13 characters have been displayed to return to the beginning of the title NOTE The
428. me enhancement ALC Automatic volume PT a at adjustment p Centerpoint tomatic surroun mn Ott A i d On O level adjustment AudioPilot Automatic volume On Off adjustment Beep On Off 2 Standard audio 3 Bose Sound System 5 37 Interior Features Audio System ALC Automatic volume adjustment The automatic level control ALC is a feature that automatically adjusts audio volume and sound quality according to the vehicle speed The volume increases in accordance with the increase in vehicle speed and decreases as vehicle speed decreases Centerpoint Automatic surround level adjustment Centerpoint lets vehicle owners enjoy a Bose surround sound experience from their existing CDs MP3s and satellite radio Specifically engineered to meet the unique demands of reproducing surround sound in a vehicle Converts stereo signals to multiple channels allowing greater precision when reproducing the sound An enhanced algorithm to simultaneously create a wider more spacious sound field 4 Centerpoint is a registered trademark of Bose Corporation AudioPilot gt Automatic volume adjustment When driving background noise can interfere with enjoying music AudioPilot noise compensation technology continuously adjusts the music to compensate for background noise and vehicle speed It reacts only to sustained noise sources and not intermittent ones such
429. med HomeLink button for five seconds and then release it Perform this operation two times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons begin with Programming step 1 If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming steps 5 7 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 5 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 6 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE Complete the programming within 30 seconds 4 72 7 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process HomeL
430. minates momentarily and then turns off The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high and illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further Handling Procedure Flashing light Drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down Illuminated light This indicates the possibility of overheating Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine Refer to Overheating page 7 18 A CAUTION Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated Otherwise it could result in damage to the engine Lane Departure Warning System LDWS Indication Type A a When the Lane Departure Warning System LDWS is turned on the LDWS indication is displayed When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display VY Lane Departure Warning System LDWS Warning Light Type B This warning light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON The indicator flashes when the system determines that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane Lane Departure Warning System LDWS OFF Indication Indicator Light Q OFF Press the LDWS switch to cancel the LDWS The LDWS OFF indication is displayed If the indication remains displayed even though the LDWS switch has been operated it indicates a problem in the system Have your vehicle inspected
431. mind the driver that the key has been left in the vehicle cabin If this happens the doors and the trunk lock but the functions of the key left in the vehicle cabin may be temporarily suspended Perform the applicable procedure to restore the functions of the key page 3 8 V i ELOOP Warning Beep If the vehicle is driven while i ELOOP charging is displayed a beep sound is heard Make sure the message is no longer displayed before driving V Tire Inflation Pressure Warning Beep The warning beep sound will be heard for about 3 seconds when there is any abnormality in tire inflation pressures page 4 149 7 36 Some models V Lane Departure Warning Sound While the system is operating if the system determines that the vehicle may depart from the lane it sounds a warning sound NOTE The volume of the lane keep assist system LDWS warning sound can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 The type of the lane keep assist system LDWS warning sound can be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Blind Spot Monitoring BSM System Warning Beep Driving forward The warning beep operates when the turn signal lever is operated to the side where the BSM warning light is illuminated NOTE A personalized function is available to change the BSM warning beep sound volume Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Reversing If a moving object such as a veh
432. n The selected gear position is omeral displayed Shift up or down to the indicated gear position is recommended A CAUTION Do not rely solely on the shift up shift down recommendations by indications The actual driving situation might require shift operations different from indication To avoid the risk of accidents the road and traffic conditions have to be judged correctly by the driver before shifting gt and numeral 4 48 NOTE The gear shift indicator turns off when the following operations are performed The vehicle is stopped The vehicle is put in neutral e The vehicle is driven in reverse The clutch is not fully engaged when accelerating from a stop The clutch pedal remains depressed for 2 seconds or longer while driving V Recommendations for Shifting Upshiftin For normal acceleration we recommend these shift points Gear Vehicle speed 1 to2 24 km h 15 mph 2 to3 42 km h 26 mph 3 to4 60 km h 37 mph 4to5 75 km h 46 mph 5 to 6 79 km h 49 mph For cruising Gear Vehicle speed 1 to2 13 km h 8 mph 2 to3 29 km h 18 mph 3 to4 49 km h 30 mph 4to5 63 km h 39 mph 5 to 6 70 km h 43 mph Downshifting When you must slow down in heavy traffic or on a steep upgrade downshift before the engine starts to overwork This reduces the chance of stalling and gives better acceleration when you need more speed On
433. n Switch the ignition off and then restart the engine If the engine does not start after 3 or more tries contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer NOTE e If the security indicator light flashes continuously while you are driving do not shut off the engine Go to an Authorized Mazda Dealer and have it checked If the engine is shut off while the indicator light is flashing you will not be able to restart it e Because the electronic codes are reset when the immobilizer system is repaired the keys are needed Make sure to bring all the keys to an Authorized Mazda Dealer so that they can be programmed Theft Deterrent System If the theft deterrent system detects an inappropriate entry into the vehicle which could result in the vehicle or its contents being stolen the alarm alerts the surrounding area of an abnormality by sounding the horn and flashing the hazard warning lights The system will not function unless it s properly armed So when you leave the vehicle follow the arming procedure correctly Y Operation System triggering conditions The horn sounds intermittently and the hazard warning lights flash for about 30 seconds when the system is triggered by any one of the following e Unlocking a door with the key door lock switch or an inside door lock knob e Forcing open a door the hood or the trunk lid Opening the hood by operating the hood release handle e Switching the ignition ON without us
434. n the track number will flash Press and hold the scan button MEDIA again to cancel scan playback NOTE If the unit is left in scan normal playback will resume where scan was selected Repeat playback 1 Press the repeat button 1 during playback to play the current track repeatedly TRACK RPT is displayed f is displayed next to RPT at the bottom of the display area 2 Press the button again to cancel the repeat playback Random playback Tracks are randomly selected and played Interior Features Audio System Song random 1 Press the random button 2 during playback to play the tracks in the list randomly SONG RDM is displayed is displayed next to RDM at the bottom of the display area 2 To cancel the random playback press the button again after 3 seconds Album random 1 Press the random button 2 during playback and then press the button again within 3 seconds to play the tracks in the iPod randomly ALBUM RDM is displayed is displayed next to RDM at the bottom of the display area 2 Press the button again to cancel the random playback NOTE The track number being played randomly is in the order of the iPod shuffle table Switching the display The information displayed on the audio display changes as follows each time the text button 3 is pressed during playback Information displayed Button on audio display 3 Category name Artist name
435. n Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE e If the vehicle speed decreases by about 15 km h 9 4 mph or more than the set speed the cruise control function may be canceled e When the vehicle speed is less than 21 km h 13 mph the cruise control function is canceled In this case the vehicle speed will not return to the original set speed even if the vehicle is accelerated to 25 km h 16 mph or higher and the RES switch is pressed Reset the cruise control function 4 126 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Smart City Brake Support SCBS The Smart City Brake Support SCBS system is designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision by operating the brake control SCBS brake when the system s laser sensor detects a vehicle ahead and determines that a collision with a vehicle ahead is unavoidable It may also be possible to avoid a collision if the relative speed between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead is less than about 20 km h 12 mph In addition when the driver depresses the brake pedal while the system is in the operation range at about 4 to 30 km h 2 to 18 mph the brakes are applied firmly and quickly to assist Brake Assist SCBS brake assist Laser sensor A WARNING Do not rely on the Smart City Brake Support System SCBS as a substitute for safe driving The Smart City Brake Support SCBS system cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless driving excessive speed tailgating followi
436. n area Type B This indicator has two colors KEY Warning Light Red When illuminated If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system it illuminates continuously A CAUTION If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light amber flashes the engine may not start If the engine cannot be started try starting it using the emergency operation for starting the engine and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible Refer to Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine on page 4 8 When flashing e Under the following conditions the KEY warning light red flashes to notify the driver that the ignition cannot be switched from off The key battery is dead e The key is not within operational range e The key is placed in areas where it is difficult for the system to detect the signal page 3 7 A key from another manufacturer similar to the key is in the operational range e Under the following conditions the KEY warning light red will flash continuously when the ignition has not been switched off to notify the driver that the key has been removed from the vehicle The KEY warning light red will stop flashing when the key is back inside the vehicle The ignition has not been switched off and all the doors and the trunk lid are closed after removing the key from the vehicle NOTE Because the key utilizes low intensity rad
437. n off HD Radio 4 icon is not illuminated e Once an analog broadcast is received when HD is selected from the Favorite channels it is switched to HD Radio automatically If the radio reception conditions are poor or HD is off switching to HD Radio broadcasts is not possible When an HD specialty channel HD2 to HD8 is selected from the Favorite channels Signal Lost is displayed and no audio is output until HD Radio is received If the radio reception conditions are poor Signal Lost continues to be displayed e Ifthe icon is not illuminated information such as song titles of the HD Radio station are received however the audio output is analog iTunes Tagging for Apple devices with USB use only By tagging a song currently being aired the song can be easily purchased from the iTunes Store Up to 100 tags can be stored 1 Select the icon The tag is stored in the audio unit 2 Connect the device via USB The tag is sent to the connected device automatically 5 42 Some models 3 Synchronize the device with iTunes The tagged song can now be purchased from the iTunes Store NOTE Both AM and FM HD Radio can be used e Because iTunes Tagging only supports purchasing from the iTunes Store direct downloading from the equipped vehicle audio is not possible e If the available memory for the connected device is insufficient the tag is not sent e Ifan error occurs while the ta
438. n on the driver s side B pillar or on the edge of the driver s door frame SAMPLE TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT Fj SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed kg or lbs Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais d passer XXX kg ou XXX Ib ree CONDI ous SIZE PNEU DIMENSIONS PNEUS A FROID vated FROM P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 psi Giaa MM VOIR LE MANUEL ABRIERE P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 psi DE L USAGER SPARE oe V Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and psi for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle It is very important that the inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is maintained Refer to Tires on page 9 7 NOTE Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended cold tire inflation pressure measured when the tires are cold after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours As you drive the temperature in the tire warms up increasing the tire pressure 8 31 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A AWARNING
439. n the BT SETUP mode Refer to Bluetooth audio device set up for details 2 Press the audio control dial to determine the mode After ENTER PIN is displayed on the audio display for three seconds PIN 0000 is displayed and the PIN code can be input 3 Input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio device by pressing channel preset buttons 1 to 4 while PIN 0000 is displayed Press channel preset button 1 to input the first digit 2 for the second 3 for the third and 4 for the forth For example if the PIN code were 4213 press channel preset button 1 four times 1 2 3 4 button 2 twice 1 2 button 3 once 1 and button 4 three times 1 2 3 If the PIN 0000 display disappears before finishing the PIN code input repeat the procedure from Step 1 NOTE Some devices accept only a particular pairing code Usually 0000 or 1234 If pairing cannot be completed refer to the owner s manual of your mobile device and try those numbers if necessary 4 Press the audio control dial while the input PIN code is displayed PAIRING flashes on the audio display 5 Operate the Bluetooth audio device and set it to the pairing mode while PAIRING is flashing 6 When the pairing is completed J and PAIR SUCCESS are displayed after about 10 30 seconds after which PAIR SUCCESS continues to be displayed for three seconds and then the unit ret
440. n the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver s door frame or door pillar The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 8 40 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A SAMPLE a N COT DATE GVWRIPNBV O LB T KG FRONT GAWRIPNBE AV c0 LB TKG REAR GAWR PNBE AR cT LB CTT KG WITH AVEC HI TIRES PNEUS WITHIAVEC LL TIRESPNEUS CO RIMSMANTES RIMSIJANTES CO KPAI PSI COLD A FROID CIO KPA L PSI COLD A FROID VN ve O EET BAR CODE Ka IS A WARNING Exceeding Axle Weight Rating Limits Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and could result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle or loss of control Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits 8 41 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A GCW Gross Combination Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage The GCW must never exceed the GCWR A WARNING Exceeding GVWR or GAWR Speci
441. n the electric parking brake is applied and the light turns off when the brake is released If the brake system warning light remains turned on even though the electric parking brake is released the brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer When the light is flashing The light flashes if the electric parking brake has a malfunction If the light remains flashing even if the electric parking brake switch is operated consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible 4 29 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display AWARNING Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time If this light remains illuminated after checking that the parking brake is fully released have the brakes inspected immediately A CAUTION In addition the effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to depress the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle Y ABS Warning Light es If the ABS warning light stays on while you re driving the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction If this occurs your brakes will
442. n the old blade rubber Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance 6 Carefully insert the new blade rubber Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal 6 35 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance AWARNING Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting to ensure safe and correct handling am Always wear eye protection when working near the battery Working without eye protection is dangerous Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes Also hydrogen gas produced during normal battery operation could ignite and cause the battery to explode Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fluid Spilled battery fluid is dangerous Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in eyes or on the skin or clothing If this happens immediately flush your eyes with water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention Always keep batteries out of the reach of children Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous Battery fluid could cause serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin amp
443. n turns off and the system switches back to travel at constant speed Ifyou are driving the vehicle at a speed faster than the set speed headway control on the vehicle ahead is not possible Adjust the system to the desired vehicle speed using the accelerator pedal 4 122 How to Set the Distance Between Vehicles During Headway Control The distance between vehicles is set to a shorter distance each time the A switch is pressed The distance between vehicles is set to a longer distance by pressing the Vv switch The distance between vehicles can be set to 4 levels Long medium short and extremely short distance Distance between vehi cles guideline Indication on display at 80 km h 50 mph vehicle speed S Long about 50 m 164 ft RS 80Kmn S Medium about 40 m 131 ft B RS 8Okmh S Short about 30 m 98 ft RS 80kmn S Extremely short about 25 m 82 ft RS 80Kmh NOTE The distance between vehicles differs depending on the vehicle speed and the slower the vehicle speed the shorter the distance When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF and then the engine is started again the system automatically sets the distance between vehicles to the previous setting Changing the Set Vehicle Speed Changing the set vehicle speed using the SET switch Press the SET switch to accelerate Press the SET switch to decelerate The set vehicle speed changes as
444. n vehicles Roads where frequent and repetitive acceleration and deceleration occur Driving under these conditions using the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is not possible gt When entering and exiting interchanges service areas and parking areas of highways If you exit a highway while headway control is in use the vehicle ahead will no longer be tracked and your vehicle may accelerate to the set speed gt Slippery roads such as ice or snow bound roads The tires could spin causing you to lose vehicle control gt Long descending slopes to maintain distance between vehicles the system automatically and continuously applies the brakes which could result in the loss of brake power For the purposes of safety switch the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system off when it is not being used A CAUTION If the vehicle is towed or you are towing something switch the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system off to prevent an incorrect operation 4 118 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE NOTE The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system operates when all of the following conditions are met e The vehicle speed is about 30 km h 19 mph to 145 km h 90 mph The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is turned on The parking brake is not applied The Smart Brake Support SBS is not malfunctioning The Dynamic Stability Control DSC is operating normally The selector lever is in the drive D position
445. nable to perform pairing Does not connect automatically when starting the engine Automatically connects but then disconnects suddenly The Bluetooth function and the Find Mode Visible setting on the device may turn off automatically after a period of time has elapsed depending on the device Check whether the Bluetooth function and the Find Mode Visible setting on the device are turned on and pairing or reconnect Disconnects intermittently The device is in a location in which radio wave interference can occur easily such as inside a bag in a rear seat in a rear pocket of a pair of pants Move the device to a location in which radio wave interference is less likely to occur Does not connect automatically when starting the engine The pairing information is updated when the device OS is updated Perform pairing again Setting which detects the existence of a device external to the Bluetooth unit 5 124 Interior Features Bluetooth NOTE When the OS of the device is updated the pairing information may be deleted If this happens reprogram the pairing information to the Bluetooth unit Ifyou pair your phone which has already been paired to your vehicle more than once in the past you need to delete Mazda on your mobile device Then execute the Bluetooth search on your Before you pair your device make sure that Bluetooth i vehicle
446. nada TEL 1 800 263 4680 Provide the Department with the following information 1 Your name address and telephone number 2 Year and model of vehicle 3 Vehicle Identification Number VIN Refer to the Vehicle Identification Labels page of section 9 of this manual for the location of the VIN 4 Purchase date 5 Present odometer reading 6 Your dealer s name and location 7 The nature of your problem and or cause of dissatisfaction The Department in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative will review the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction 8 7 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of your Mazda dealer s service facilities personnel and equipment We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence for most effective results V Mediation Arbitration Program Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda s Customer Satisfaction Program If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still not resolved you have another option Mazda Canada Inc participates in an arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP CAMVAP will advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through binding arbitration Your
447. name in the phonebook when the engine is restarted The cell phone does not synchronize with the vehicle regarding the incoming outgoing call record Some types of cell phones do not synchronize automatically Operate the cell phone for synchronization It takes a long time to complete the function for changing the language A maximum of 60 seconds is required 5 126 Sunvisors When you need a sunvisor lower it for use in front or swing it to the side Sunvisor V Side Extension Sunvisors The visor extender extends the sunvisor s range of sun shading To use pull it out A CAUTION When moving the sunvisor retract the visor extender to its original position Otherwise the visor extender could hit the rearview mirror Interior Features Interior Equipment YV Vanity Mirrors To use the vanity mirror lower the sunvisor If your vehicle is equipped with a vanity murror light it will illuminate when you open the cover To prevent the battery from being discharged the vanity mirror will only illuminate in the tilt range shown below Some models 5 127 Interior Features Interior Equipment Interior Lights Overhead Lights Switch Position OFF Light off e Light is on when any door is open e Light is on or off when the illuminated entry system is on ON Light on Overhead Lights DOOR OFF DOOR amp NOTE The r
448. nance and Care Owner Maintenance 4 Remove the windshield washer fluid reservoir and bolts 6 Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling the connector downward come BA P 6 49 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance 7 Turn the socket and bulb assembly to remove it Carefully remove the bulb from its socket in the reflector by gently pulling it straight backward out of the socket 3 rE Q TA 8 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure Daytime running lights Parking lights With LED headlights Signature wing illumination The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a single unit because it is an integrated unit The LED bulb has to be replaced with the unit We recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer when the replacement is necessary Front turn signal lights Front side marker lights Parking lights With halogen headlights 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and the headlight switch is off 2 If you are changing the right bulb start the engine turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and turn off engine If you are changing the left bulb turn the steering wheel to the right 6 50 Some models 3 Pull the center of each plastic retainer and remove the retainers Installation 2 ate 4 Turn the screw counterclockwise and remove it and then partially peel back the mu
449. nd rear window pillars and along the roof edge containing air bag parts or sensors is dangerous These parts contain essential air bag components The air bag could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer remove these parts Properly dispose of the air bag system Improper disposal of an air bag or a vehicle with live air bags in it can be extremely dangerous Unless all safety procedures are followed injury could result Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer safely dispose of the air bag system or scrap an air bag equipped vehicle 2 46 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags NOTE e If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer refer to Customer Assistance U S A page 8 2 When an air bag deploys a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released Neither is likely to cause injury however the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injuries on body parts not covered with clothing through friction e Should you sell your Mazda we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and that familiarization with all instructions about them from the Owner s Manual is important This highly visible label is displayed which warns against the use of rear facing
450. nded engine braking will not occur If deceleration is required lower the vehicle speed setting or depress the brake pedal The brake lights are illuminated while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC automatic braking is operating The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC warning light amber turns on when the system has a malfunction Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 The headway control operation can be canceled and the system can be switched to only cruise control Refer to Cruise Control Function on page 4 124 4 119 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE V Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Display Indication The setting status and operation conditions of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system are indicated in the multi information display or the active driving display with active driving display Vehicle ahead display MRCC Distance between vehicle display MRCC Set vehicle speed V Close Proximity Warning If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the vehicle ahead because the vehicle applies the brakes suddenly while you are traveling in headway control the warning sound activates and the brake warning is indicated in the display Always verify the safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal while keeping a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Additionally always keep a safe distance from the vehicles behind you BRAKE 4 120 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE V Setting the System
451. nded use of brakes Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used Driving on rough or muddy roads Extended periods of idling or low speed operation Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates Driving in extremely hot conditions e Driving in mountainous conditions continually If any do apply follow Schedule 2 NOTE After the prescribed period continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended eeeeeeee intervals 6 13 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Y Schedule 1 Number of months or kilometers whichever comes first Maintenance Interval Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 x1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 SKYACTIV G 2 5 Drive belts I I I Engine oil R R R J RJR RI RIRIRIRIRIR Engine oil filter R R R R IRI R RIRIRI_RIRIR COOLING SYSTEM Cooling system I I I Engine Sson Replace at first g ni Lo H m after that every FUEL SYSTEM Air filter R R R R R R Fuel lines and hoses 1 I Hoses and tubes for emission T r I Fuel filter Replace every 60 000 km IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs Replace every 120 000 km CHASSIS and BODY Brake lines hoses and connections I I I I I I Brake and clutch fluid level I
452. ne Select Selects the time zone Turns the daylight saving time setting on off Daylight Savings Time When ON the time advances 1 hour When OFF it returns to normal time Rain Sensing Wiper Vehicle Door Locks Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Other Devices Bluetooth Refer to Bluetooth Preparation Type B on page 5 86 5 49 Interior Features Audio System Tab Item Function Tool Tips Turns button explanations ON OFF Language Changes the language Temperature Changes the setting between Fahrenheit and Celsius Distance Changes the setting between miles and kilometers System Music Database Update Used to update Gracenote Gracenote is used with USB Audio and provides 1 Supplemental music information Such as song name artist name 2 Voice recognition assistance for Play Artist and Play Album Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda Hands Free Website Refer to Gracenote Database Type B on page 5 66 Restore All Factory Settings Memory and settings are initialized to the factory settings The initialization launches by selecting the Yes button Agreements and Disclaimers About Verify the disclaimer and agree Version Information Can verify the current audio unit OS version and Gracenote Database version Y Applications NOTE Depending on the grade and specificat
453. ne person at a time is dangerous A seat belt used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed Never use one belt for more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly restrained Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous An accident could damage the belt webbing of the seat belt in use A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate protection in a collision Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt systems in use during an accident before they are used again 2 15 Essential Safety Equipment Seat Belt Systems Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has been expended Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately inspect the front seat belt pretensioners and air bags after any collision Like the air bags the front seat belt pretensioners and load limiters will only function once and must be replaced after any collision that caused them to deploy A seat belt with an expended pretensioner or load limiter is still better than wearing no seat belt at all however if the front seat belt pretensioners and load limiters are not replaced the risk of injury in a collision will increase Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the Seat Belt Improper positioning of the shoulder portion of the seat belt is dangerous
454. nearby services and destinations can be searched or real time local information can be obtained For details on Aha refer to http www aharadio com Aha the Aha logo and the Aha trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Harman International Industries Inc used with permission NOTE The service content provided by Aha varies depending on the country in which the user resides In addition the service is not available in some countries e To operate Aha from your Bluetooth device perform the following in advance Install the Aha application to your device Create an Aha account for your device e Log onto Aha using your device Select the preset station on your device 5 117 Interior Features Bluetooth Playback Select the amp icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen When is selected the following icons are displayed at the bottom of the center display The displayed icon differs depending on the selected station In addition icons other than the following icons may be displayed Icon Function Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source Displays the main menu _ Use to switch to other stati a se to switch to other stations Displays the content list Use to switch to other desired content on the station Shout Records voice Records voice and posts it as playable audio to Facebook and other
455. ng Rear View Monitor 5 Once they are parallel straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into the parking space Continue checking the vehicle s surroundings and then stop the vehicle in the best possible position If the parking space has division lines check whether the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them Display condition Vehicle condition A 6 When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position the screen returns to the previous display 4 158 When Driving Rear View Monitor NOTE Because there may be a difference between the displayed image such as indicated below and the actual conditions when parking always verify the safety at the rear of the vehicle and the surrounding area directly with your eyes e In the image of the parking space or garage displayed below even though the back end and distance guide lines appear parallel in the monitor they may not actually be parallel on the ground When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space the division line and the vehicle width guide line may appear parallel on the monitor but they may not actually be parallel on the ground 4 159 When Driving Rear View Monitor Variance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road Such variance in distance perspective could lea
456. ng BSM switch has been switched off e It turns on while driving the vehicle 4 46 Some models NOTE If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can detect the system may pause The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indication indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates However it does not indicate a malfunction V Lights On Indicator Light z002 This indicator light illuminates when the exterior lights and dashboard illumination are on The light continues to flash if the lighting system has a malfunction Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer V LED Headlight Warning Light This warning light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight Have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer Manual Transaxle Operation V Manual Transaxle Shift Pattern R135 2 4 5 Neutral position The shift pattern of the transaxle is conventional as shown Depress the clutch pedal all the way down while shifting then release it slowly Your vehicle is equipped with a device to prevent shifting to R reverse by mistake Push the shift lever downward and shift to When Driving Transaxle A WARNING Do not use sudden engine braking on slippery road surfaces or at high speeds Shifting down while driving on wet snowy or frozen roads o
457. ng System Beep Rumbl Settings LDWS can be changed on page 5 49 x bl oh Mid L Refer to Lane The volume of the Ruml High Mid Low Settings Departure warning sound for the on page Warning Lane Departure 5 49 System Warning System x LDWS LDWS can be me Refer to changed efer to Lane Beep High Low Settings Departure on page Warning 5 49 System 7 x LDWS on The sensitivity of the warning Safety age 4 98 for the Lane Departure Warning Refer to aa System LDWS can be High Low Settings changed on page 5 49 The warning timing in which x the Lane Departure Warning i System LDWS determines i _ Re er to _ that the vehicle may be Before At Before Settings x deviating from its lane can be on page changed 5 49 Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system x Refer to a volume ae ne Blind Spot aah pee Refer to Bind Spor Mentone GSM e seus X Monitoring P ged on page BSM 5 49 System on page 4 104 9 11 Personalization Features TE ER Factory Available Settings change method Setting Settings O Q Distance x Recognition The system can be changed so Support that Distance Recognition Refer to System Support System DRSS does on Onon Settings x DRSS not operate on page 5 49 Safety Refer to Distance x Recognition Support The distance at which the Far Medium Refer to vehicle ahead indicator in the Near x System Near S
458. ng another vehicle too closely and driving on slippery roads such as wet snowy and icy roads reduced tire friction and road contact because of water on the road surface You can still have an accident Some models 4 127 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Do not rely completely on the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system gt The Smart City Brake Support SCBS system is only designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision Over reliance on the system leading to the accelerator pedal or brake pedal being mistakenly operated could result in an accident gt The Smart City Brake Support SCBS is a system which operates in response to a vehicle ahead The system may not be able to detect or react to two wheeled vehicles or pedestrians gt The laser sensor for the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system is installed near the rearview mirror To assure the correct operation of the Smart City Brake Support SCBS heed the following cautions gt Do not apply stickers to the surface of the windshield near the laser sensor including transparent stickers Otherwise the laser sensor may not be able to detect vehicles ahead which could result in an accident gt Do not apply coating agent to the windshield Otherwise the laser sensor may not be able to detect vehicles in front which could result in an accident gt Do not disassemble the laser sensor gt If cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris is visible near the laser se
459. ng carefully Switching to cruise control function When the ON switch is pressed continuously for about 2 seconds while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is turned on the system is switched to the cruise control function The Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC indicator light green in the instrument cluster turns off and a message is displayed in the multi information display at the same time AWARNING Always turn off the cruise control function when it is not in use Leaving the cruise control function turned on when it is not in use is dangerous as it could operate unexpectedly resulting in an accident How to set the speed Adjust the system to the desired vehicle speed using the accelerator pedal Cruise control function begins when the SET or SET switch is pressed NOTE The system may not be able to maintain the set speed constantly depending on driving conditions such as steep up or down slopes The speed will continue increasing while the SET switch is pressed and held The speed will continue decreasing while the SET switch is pressed and held How to increase the set speed The set speed can be increased using the following operations To increase speed using the SET switch Press and hold the SET switch and release the switch at the desired speed The set speed can be adjusted incrementally 1 km h 1 mph increments by pressing the switch and releasing it immediate
460. ng malfunction warning indication indicator light is indicated The power steering malfunction indicator light illuminates if there is a malfunction with the power steering while the engine is running If the indicator light illuminates park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine If the indicator light does not turn off even if the engine is restarted afterwards consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer NOTE If the indicator light illuminates the power steering will not operate normally If this happens the steering wheel can still be operated however the operation may feel heavy compared to normal and the steering wheel could vibrate when turning Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which will make the steering feel heavy but this does not indicate a problem If this occurs park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds VW If the air bag front seat belt pretensioner system warning light illuminates or flashes eo ry A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is switched ON If any of these occur consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as poss
461. ng the vehicle Shifting into N while driving is dangerous Engine braking cannot be applied when decelerating which could lead to an accident or serious injury A CAUTION Do not shift into N when driving the vehicle Doing so can cause transaxle damage NOTE Apply the parking brake or depress the brake pedal before moving the shift lever from N to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly D Drive D is the normal driving position From a stop the transaxle will automatically shift through a 6 gear sequence M Manual M is the manual shift mode position Gears can be shifted up or down by operating the shift lever Refer to Manual Shift Mode on page 4 52 V Active Adaptive Shift AAS Active Adaptive Shift AAS automatically controls the transaxle shift points to best suit the road conditions and driver input This improves driving feel The transaxle may switch to AAS mode when driving up and down slopes cornering driving at high elevations or depressing the accelerator pedal quickly while the shift lever is in the D position Depending on the road and driving conditions vehicle operations gear shifting could be delayed or not occur however this does not indicate a problem because the AAS mode will maintain the optimum gear position When Driving Transaxle Y Shift Lock System The shift lock system prevents shifting out of P unless the brake pedal is depressed To shift from P 1 Dep
462. ng the control panel of the vehicle s audio system In this case only the operations on the mobile device are available the same as when a portable audio device for a non compliant Bluetooth device is connected to the AUX terminal AVRCP Functi A2DP ae Yen Ver 1 3 Ver 1 4 Playback X X X X Pause X X X X File Track __ x m x up down Reverse X X Fast forward e X X Text display xX X Repeat __ _ Depends on Depends on device device Shuffle __ _ Depends on Depends on device device Depends on Depends on san a oe device device Folder _ Depends on up down device X Available Not available Interior Features Bluetooth NOTE The battery consumption of Bluetooth audio devices increases while Bluetooth is connected e Ifa general mobile phone device is USB connected during music playback over the Bluetooth connection the Bluetooth connection is disconnected For this reason you cannot have music playback over a Bluetooth connection and music playback using a USB connection at the same time e The system may not operate normally depending on the Bluetooth audio device 5 111 Interior Features Bluetooth V How to Use the Bluetooth Audio System Switching to Bluetooth audio mode To listen to music or voice audio recorded to a Bluetooth audio device switch to the Bluetooth audio mode to
463. ng zone is 50 m 164 ft In low temperatures a vehicle s finish hardens This increases the chance of paint chipping Chipped paint can lead to rust forming on your Mazda Before this happens repair the damage by using Mazda touch up paint according to the instructions in this section Failure to repair the affected area could lead to serious rusting and expensive repairs Follow all label and container directions when using a chemical cleaner or polish Read all warnings and cautions Maintenance and Care Appearance Care V Maintaining the Finish Washing CAUTION gt When the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON the wipers may move automatically in the following cases gt Ifthe windshield above the rain sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth gt Ifthe windshield is struck with a hand or other object from either outside or inside the vehicle Keep hands and scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when the wipers activate automatically If you are going to clean the windshield be sure the wipers are turned off completely this is particularly important when clearing ice and snow when it is most likely that the engine is left running gt Do not spray water in the engine compartment Otherwise it could result in engine starting pro
464. ngs can be removed with a soft sponge and water If you are traveling and these are not available a moistened tissue may also take care of the problem The cleaned area should be waxed according to the instructions in this section Insects and tree sap are best removed with a soft sponge and water or a commercially available chemical cleaner Another method is to cover the affected area with dampened newspaper for one to two hours After removing the newspaper rinse off the loosened debris with water Water Marks Occurrence Rain fog dew and even tap water can contain harmful minerals such as salt and lime If moisture containing these minerals settles on the vehicle and evaporates the minerals will concentrate and harden to form white rings The rings can damage your vehicle s finish Prevention It is necessary to wash and wax your vehicle to preserve its finish according to the instructions in this section These steps should be taken immediately after you find water marks on your vehicle s finish Paint Chipping Occurrence Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown in the air by another vehicle s tires hits your vehicle How to avoid paint chipping Keeping a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of having your paint chipped by flying gravel NOTE e The paint chipping zone varies with the speed of the vehicle For example when traveling at 90 km h 56 mph the paint chippi
465. nical information about your Mazda Index p Pictorial Index Interior exterior views and part identification of your Mazda Interior Overview csssccssscccssscccsssccssscsccsssscccssccssssccssssssscnsanes 1 2 Interior Equipment View A cccccceesceeseesseeseeseeseeeteeseeeeesenes 1 2 Interior Equipment View B ccceescesseesseeeeeteeseeeseeeeeeeesenes 1 4 Interior Equipment View C cccceceesceesceseeeseeseeseeeseeseeeeeeenes 1 5 Exterior Overview secscscsececescccseccesseescesscessesescbesececedoedscetcssesesceesescies 1 6 1 1 Pictorial Index Interior Overview Interior Equipment View A O OW OOOO CO Door lock knobissi2 isis ei Be AEE RU RL RR ean page 3 18 Lighting Control c cccccccccsssssescsessesseseseseesesecseecseeecsesecseeecseeecseeseseeecseeesaeeeesees page 4 58 O Turn and lane change signal sssrinin kinan nnrir ar TERRA page 4 63 Wiper and washer lever c cccccccccccsssscsesscsessesessesessssesecseseeseeecseecseseeseeesseeeeaeens page 4 64 Tire pressure monitoring system set switch 0 cceccceseeseeseeseesceseteeseeseeseeseees page 4 151 DSC ORF swith iinne Pst a ie cies ciel inh ads page 4 82 LD WS SWEN saidin aesa e er aE tides Mien dete oa aes page 4 101 Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch cccccccceseesesseseeseeseeceeseeseeeeecseeseeseees page 4 108 Outside mirror switch oo cecccccesseesceceesesceseeseeseeseeseeseeeescesecsecseeseese
466. ning light may illuminate If this occurs it is the result of the weak battery and does not indicate an ABS malfunction Recharge the battery The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds V If the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously Q If the electronic brake force distribution control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light simultaneously The problem is likely to be the electronic brake force distribution system A WARNING Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated Have the vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous When both lights are illuminated the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances V If the electric parking brake warning light illuminates The warning light illuminates when the system has a malfunction Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer V If the charging system warning indication warning light is indicated E If the warning light indication illuminates while driving
467. nning NOTE The headlights other exterior lights and dashboard illumination may not turn off immediately even if the surrounding area becomes well lit because the light sensor determines that it is nighttime if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several minutes such as inside long tunnels traffic jams inside tunnels or in indoor parking lots In this case the lights turn off if the light switch is turned to the OFF position When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched to ACC or the ignition is switched off the headlights other exterior lights and dashboard illumination will turn off The dashboard illumination can be adjusted by rotating the knob in the instrument cluster Also the day night mode can be changed by rotating the knob until a beep sound is heard To adjust the brightness of the dashboard illumination Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4 14 The sensitivity of the AUTO lights may be changed Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 4 60 V Headlight High Low Beam Press the lever forward to turn on the high beams Pull the lever back to its original position for the low beams The headlight high beam indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates while the high beams are turned on V Flashing the Headlights Can be used when the ignition is switched ON To flash the headlights pull the lever fully towards you the headlight switch does not
468. nsor 5 12 Interior temperature sensor Y AM FM Radio Antenna The antenna is embedded into the window glass A CAUTION When washing the inside of the window which has an antenna use a soft cloth dampened in lukewarm water gently wiping the antenna lines Use of glass cleaning products could damage the antenna V Satellite Radio Antenna Satellite radio antenna 7 Interior Features Audio System Operating Tips for Audio System A WARNING Always adjust the audio while the vehicle is stopped Do not adjust the audio control switches while driving the vehicle Adjusting the audio while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the vehicle operation which could lead to a serious accident Even if the audio control switches are equipped on the steering wheel learn to use the switches without looking down at them so that you can keep your maximum attention on the road while driving the vehicle CAUTION For the purposes of safe driving adjust the audio volume to a level that allows you to hear sounds outside of the vehicle including car horns and particularly emergency vehicle sirens NOTE e To prevent the battery from being discharged do not leave the audio system on for a long period of time when the engine is not running e Ifa cellular phone or CB radio is used in or near the vehicle it could cause noise to
469. nsor stop using the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system immediately and have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer If the vehicle continues to be driven with cracks or scratch marks left on the windshield near the laser sensor the system may operate unnecessarily and cause an unexpected accident Refer to Stopping the Smart City Brake Support SCBS System Operation on page 4 131 gt When replacing the windshield wipers or windshield consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Do not modify the suspension If the vehicle height or inclination is changed the system will not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead This will result in the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system not operating normally or mistakenly operating which could cause a serious accident Turn off the Smart City Brake Support SCBS when the vehicle is running on a chassis roller or being towed Turn off the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system to prevent mistaken operation when the vehicle is running on a chassis roller or being towed See the next page on how to turn off the Smart City Brake Support SCBS Refer to Stopping the Smart City Brake Support SCBS System Operation on page 4 131 4 128 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE A CAUTION gt When driving off road in areas where there is grass or forage it is recommended that the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system be turned off gt Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified
470. nstallation Y ate 5 Pull the center of each plastic retainer and remove the retainers and the trunk side trim Al A 2 6 52 6 Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it 7 Disconnect the bulb from the socket Rear turn signal lights 8 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure Taillights Trunk lid side With LED headlights The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a single unit because it is an integrated unit The LED bulb has to be replaced with the unit We recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer when the replacement is necessary Taillights Trunk lid side With halogen headlights Reverse lights 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and the headlight switch is off 2 Pull the center of each plastic retainer and remove the retainers and the trunk lid trim 3 Reverse lights Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling the connector 4 Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it 5 Disconnect the bulb from the socket Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Taillights Trunk lid side EZ ye a Reverse lights 6 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure License plate lights 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and the headlight switch is off 2 Wrap a flathea
471. nsult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details Additionally some of the personalization features can be changed by the customer depending on the feature Personalization features which can be changed differ depending on the market and specification Settings can be changed by operating the center display screen Settings can be changed by operating the vehicle switches Settings can be changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer 9 9 Personalization Features Fan ee Factory Available Settings change method Setting Settings O 6 Smart City Brake Support SCBS frp x Refer to e system can be changed so Refer to Smart City that Smart City Brake Support On On Off Settin gs Brake SCBS does not operate on page Support 5 49 SCBS on page 4 127 x The system can be changed so Refer to that Smart Brake Support SBS On On Off Settings x Safety does not operate on page Smart Brake 5 49 Support x SBS Refer to The distance at which the Refer to Smart Brake collision warning activates can Near Near Far Settings x Support be changed on page SBS on 5 49 page 4 132 x The volume of the collision Refer to warning can be changed High High Low Of Settings oe x on page 5 49 9 10 Personalization Features Settings change method Item Feature Available Settings oO x The warning sound for the Lane Refer to Departure Warni
472. nt in the auto dimming mirror Pressing the HomeLink button on the auto dimming mirror activates garage doors gates and other devices surrounding your home Indicator light HomeLink button AWARNING Do not use the HomeLink system with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature Using the HomeLink system with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards is dangerous This includes garage doors manufactured before April 1 1982 Using these garage door openers can increase the risk of serious injury or death For further information contact HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or www homelink com or your Authorized Mazda Dealer Always check the areas surrounding garage doors and gates for people or obstructions before programming or during operation of the HomeLink system Programming or operating the HomeLink system without verifying the safety of areas surrounding garage doors and gates is dangerous and could result in an unexpected accident and serious injury if someone were to be hit NOTE The programming will not be erased even if the battery is disconnected V Pre programming the HomeLink System NOTE It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal When Driving Switc
473. nt seat page 2 5 2 Make sure the seatback is securely latched by pushing it back until it is fully locked 3 Expand the area between the seat bottom and the seatback slightly to verify the locations of the LATCH lower anchors NOTE The markings above the LATCH lower anchors indicate the locations of the LATCH lower anchors for the attachment of a child restraint system 4 Raise the head restraint to the top locked position Refer to Head Restraints on page 2 12 5 Secure the child restraint system using BOTH LATCH lower anchors following the child restraint system manufacturer s instruction Pull on the child restraint to be sure both anchors are engaged 2 38 6 If your child restraint system came equipped with a tether that means it is very important to properly secure the tether for child safety Please carefully follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions when installing tethers AWARNING Use the tether and tether anchor only for a child restraint system Using the tether or tether anchor to secure anything but a child restraint system is dangerous This could weaken or damage the tether or tether anchor and result in injury Always route the tether strap between the head restraint and the seatback Routing the tether strap on top of the head restraint is dangerous Ina collision the tether strap could slide off the head restraint and loosen the child restraint system The c
474. nti corrosive material Thoroughly flush the underbody and wheel housings with lukewarm or cold water at the end of each winter Try also to do this every month Pay special attention to these areas because they easily hide mud and dirt It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it The lower edges of doors rocker panels and frame members have drain holes that should not be clogged Water trapped there will cause rusting 6 66 AWARNING Dry off brakes that have become wet by driving slowly releasing the accelerator pedal and lightly applying the brakes several times until the brake performance returns to normal Driving with wet brakes is dangerous Increased stopping distance or the vehicle pulling to one side when braking could result in a serious accident Light braking will indicate whether the brakes have been affected VY Aluminum Wheel Maintenance A protective coating is provided over the aluminum wheels Special care is needed to protect this coating A CAUTION Do not use any detergent other than mild detergent Before using any detergent verify the ingredients Otherwise the product could discolor or stain the aluminum wheels NOTE Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive cleaner polishing compound or solvent on aluminum wheels They may damage the coating e Always use a sponge or soft cloth to clean the wheels Rinse the wheels thoroughly with lukewa
475. nuts on chassis and body Exhaust system and heat shields All locks and hinges Washer fluid level o l o l 6 16 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Number of months or kilometers whichever comes first Maintenance Interval Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 x1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Cabin air filter R R R Chart symbols I Inspect Inspect and clean repair adjust fill up or replace if necessary R Replace L Lubricate C Clean T Tighten Remarks Use of FL 22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant Using engine coolant other than FL 22 may cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system 2 According to state provincial and federal regulations failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties However Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long term reliability 3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS initialization must be performed so that the system operates normally if equipped 6 17 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Cont Number of months or kilometers whichever comes first Maintenance Interval Mont
476. o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2 este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia incluyendo la que pueda causar su operaci n no deseada 8 44 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity Y Blind Spot Monitoring BSM System U S A FCC ID OAYSRR2A This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada Applicable law Canada 310 This device complies with the radio standards specification RSS 310 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Frequency bands 24 05 24 25GHz Output power less than 20 milliwatts Droit applicable Canada 310 Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d Industrie RSS 310 applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes 1 l appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2
477. o lose effectiveness It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage A CAUTION gt USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead to deterioration of the emission control system and or failures gt Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10 ethanol by volume Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this recommendation or if the gasoline contains any methanol Stop using gasohol of any kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly gt Never add fuel system additives Otherwise the emission control system could be damaged Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally referred to as oxygenated fuels The common gasoline blend that can be used with your vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10 Gasoline containing alcohol such as ethanol or methanol may be marketed under the name Gasohol Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not be covered by the Mazda warranty e Gasohol containing more than 10 ethanol e Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol e Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol 3 24 Before Driving Fuel and Emission V Emission Control System Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system the catalytic converter is part of this system that enables y
478. o skid This could lead to loss of vehicle control and an accident Keep your hands on the steering wheel rim when using fingers on the steering shift switches Putting your hands inside the rim of the steering wheel when using the steering shift switches is dangerous If the driver s air bag were to deploy in a collision your hands could be impacted causing injury NOTE e When driving at high speeds the gear may not shift down During deceleration the gear may automatically shift down depending on vehicle speed When depressing the accelerator fully the transaxle will shift to a lower gear depending on vehicle speed Second gear fixed mode When the selector lever is moved back while the vehicle speed is about 10 km h 6 mph or less the transaxle is set in the second gear fixed mode The gear is fixed in second while in this mode for easier acceleration from a stop and driving on slippery roads such as snow covered roads If the selector lever is moved back or forward while in the second gear fixed mode the mode will be canceled When Driving Transaxle Shift gear shifting speed limit For each gear position while in the manual mode the speed limit is set as follows When the selector lever is operated within the range of the speed limit the gear is shifted 0 kmih 0 mph 100 kmih 60 mph lt Shift up The gear does not shift up while the vehicle speed is lower th
479. objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the windshield glass side door glass front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge and assist grips is dangerous In an accident the object could interfere with the curtain air bag which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is dangerous Furthermore the bag could be cut open releasing the gas Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips When hanging clothes hang them on the coat hook directly Always keep the curtain air bag modules free to deploy in the event of a side collision or roll over accident Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags have inflated Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags have inflated is dangerous Immediately after inflation they are very hot You could get burned Never install any front end equipment to your vehicle Installation of front end equipment such as frontal protection bar kangaroo bar bull bar push bar or other similar devices snowplow or winches is dangerous The air bag crash sensor system could be affected This could cause air bags to inflate unexpectedly or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an
480. occur from the audio system however this does not indicate that the system has been damaged Some models 5 13 Interior Features Audio System Do not spill any liquid on the audio system Do not insert any objects other than CDs into the slot Radio Reception AM characteristics AM signals bend around such things as buildings or mountains and bounce off the ionosphere Therefore they can reach longer distances than FM signals Because of this two stations may sometimes be picked up on the same frequency at the same time Ionosphere Station 1 Station 2 5 14 FM characteristics An FM broadcast range is usually about 40 50 km 25 30 miles from the source Because of extra coding needed to break the sound into two channels stereo FM has even less range than monaural non stereo FM amp FM Station 40 SOkm 25 30 miles Signals from an FM transmitter are similar to beams of light because they do not bend around corners but they do reflect Unlike AM signals FM signals cannot travel beyond the horizon Therefore FM stations cannot be received at the great distances possible with AM reception Tonosphere FM wave AM wave FM wave Se a a 100 200 km 60 120 miles Atmospheric conditions can also affect FM reception High humidity will cause poor reception However cloudy days may provide better reception than clear days Multipath noise Since FM s
481. ock switch would allow children to operate power windows unintentionally which could result in serious injury if a child s hands head or neck becomes caught by the window ACAUTION To prevent burning out the fuse and damaging the power window system do not open or close more than three windows at once NOTE A power window may no longer open close if you continue to press the switch after fully opening closing the power window If the power window does not open close wait a moment and then operate the switch again Before Driving Windows Y Operating the Power Windows NOTE Each passenger window can be operated with each door switch when the power window lock switch on the driver s door is in the unlocked position page 3 35 Each passenger window can also be operated using the master control switches on the driver s door NU passenger s window f Right rear window 7 Master control switches Normal opening closin To open the window to the desired position lightly hold down the switch To close the window to the desired position lightly pull up the switch Master control switches 4 4 ys Open Driver s window 3 33 Before Driving Windows Close R lt Auto opening closing To fully open the window automatically press the switch completely down To fully close the window automatically pull the switch completely up To stop the window partw
482. oderate force the curtain air bag inflates quickly and helps to reduce injury mainly to the rear outboard passenger s head caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window For more details about air bag deployment refer to SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria page 2 54 In a side impact Greater than moderate impact to one side of the vehicle will cause the curtain air bag on that side only to inflate Only one side curtain air bag will deploy on the side of the vehicle that receives the force of an impact 2 52 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System In a roll over In response to a vehicle roll over both curtain air bags inflate Both curtain air bags will deploy after the roll over accident is detected V Warning Light Beep A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 Refer to Air Bag Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Beep on page 7 34 2 53 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of collision The illustrations are the representative cases of collisions Types of collision A severe frontal near frontal A severe side A roll over near os aa ia 2 A rear collision colli
483. off after a few seconds Then the indicator light turns on or is off under the following conditions Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on off condition chart Condition detected by the front Front passenger air bag passenger occupant classification deactivation indicator Front passenger seat Front passenger front belt pretensioner and side air bags system light system Empty Not occupied On Deactivated Deactivated A child less thani 1 year old is On Deactivated Deactivated seated in a child restraint system Child On or off Deactivated or ready Deactivated or ready Adult Off Ready Ready The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat in a child restraint system or a junior seat depending on the child s physical size and seated posture 2 Ifa smaller adult sits on the front passenger seat the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending on the person s physique The curtain air bag is ready for inflating regardless of what the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on off condition chart indicates If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON and does not turn on as indicated in the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on off condition chart do not allow an occupant to sit in the front passenger seat and consult an Authorized Mazda
484. on FM AM to turn the radio on Band selection Successively pressing the band selector button FM AM switches the bands as follows FM1 gt FM2 AM The selected mode will be indicated NOTE If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak reception automatically changes from STEREO to MONO for reduced noise Tuning The radio has the following tuning methods Manual Seek Scan Preset channel and Auto memory tuning The easiest way to tune stations is to set them on preset channels Manual tuning Select the station by pressing the tuning button 44 gt gt I lightly 5 26 Seek tuning Automatic search for radio stations starts when the tuning button M4 gt gt I is pressed until a beep sound is heard The search stops when a station is found NOTE If you continue to press and hold the button the frequency will continue changing without stopping Scan tuning Press and hold the scan button MEDIA to automatically sample strong stations Scanning stops at each station for about 5 seconds To hold a station press and hold the scan button MEDIA again during this interval Preset channel tuning The 6 preset channels can be used to store 6 AM and 12 FM stations 1 To set a channel first select AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station 2 Press a channel preset button for about 2 seconds until a beep is heard The preset channel number or station frequency will be displayed The
485. on the steering shift switches Putting your hands inside the rim of the steering wheel when using the steering shift switches is dangerous If the driver s air bag were to deploy in a collision your hands could be impacted causing injury NOTE When driving slowly the gears may not shift up e In manual shift mode do not run the engine with the tachometer needle in the RED ZONE When the engine rpm is high a gear may shift up automatically to protect the engine When depressing the accelerator fully the transaxle will shift to a lower gear depending on vehicle speed The steering shift switch can be used temporarily even if the selector lever is in the D position while driving In addition it returns to automatic shift mode when the UP switch OFF is pulled rearward for a sufficient amount of time Some models 4 53 When Driving Transaxle Manually Shifting down M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 To shift down to a lower gear move the selector lever forward once To shift down to a lower gear with the steering shift switches pull the DOWN switch toward you once with your fingers 4 54 AWARNING Do not use engine braking on slippery road surfaces or at high speeds Shifting down while driving on wet snowy or frozen roads or while driving at high speeds causes sudden engine braking which is dangerous The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires t
486. onally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera Do not install any optional parts that can interfere with the camera view such as illuminating parts or parts made of reflective material It may be difficult to see the display under the following conditions however it does not indicate a malfunction e In darkened areas When the temperature around the lens is high low When the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity When foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera When the camera lens reflects sunlight or headlight beams Image display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low 4 155 When Driving Rear View Monitor V Viewing the Display Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle yellow are displayed on the screen as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of the parking space you are about to back into Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage a a a Vehicle width guide lines yellow Guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle b Distance guide lines These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the vehicle s rear from the end of the bumper The red and yellow lines indicate the points about 50 cm 19 in for the red line and 100 cm 39 3 in for the yellow lines from the rear b
487. onents or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician go to STEP 2 Y STEP 2 Contact Mazda North American Operations If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership management or it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician you can reach Mazda North American Operations by one of the following ways Log on at www mazdaUSA com Answers to many questions including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in the U S can be found here E mail click on Contact Us located on the Inside Mazda tab or at the bottom of the page at www mazdaUSA com By phone at 1 800 222 5500 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance By letter at Attn Customer Assistance Mazda North American Operations 7755 Irvine Center Drive Irvine CA 92618 2922 P O Box 19734 Irvine CA 92623 9734 In order to serve you efficiently and effectively please help us by providing the following information 1 Your name address and telephone number 2 Year and model of vehicle 3 Vehicle Identification Number 17 digits noted on your registration or title or located on the upper driver s s
488. ont wheels NOTE Use snow chains only on the front wheels e 3 44 AWARNING Make sure the floor mats are hooked on the retention pins to prevent them from bunching up under the foot pedals Using a floor mat that is not secured is dangerous as it will interfere with the accelerator and brake pedal operation which could result in an accident Do not install two floor mats one on top of the other on the driver s side Installing two floor mats one on top of the other on the driver s side is dangerous as the retention pins can only keep one floor mat from sliding forward If using a heavy duty floor mat for winter use always remove the original floor mat Loose floor mat s will interfere with the foot pedal and could result in an accident When setting a floor mat position the floor mat so that its grommets are inserted over the pointed end of the retention posts Rocking the Vehicle A WARNING Do not spin the wheels at more than 56 km h 35 mph and do not allow anyone to stand behind a wheel when pushing the vehicle When the vehicle is stuck spinning the wheels at high speed is dangerous The spinning tire could overheat and explode This could cause Serious injuries CAUTION Too much rocking may cause engine overheating transaxle failure and tire damage If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow sand or mud depress the accelerator slightly and slowly move the shift lever
489. ook to the Bluetooth unit the phonebook will be overwritten A maximum of 1000 contacts can be registered to the phonebook e Phonebook incoming outgoing call record and favorite memories are exclusive to each mobile phone to protect privacy Interior Features Bluetooth Favorites Contacts A maximum of 50 contacts can be registered It will take less time to make a call after registering the telephone number In addition you do not have to look for the person you want to call in the phonebook Registering to your favorites 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select Favorites to display the favorites list 3 Select Add Edit Communication Favorites 4 Select Add New Contact or Add New Contact Details 5 Select from the displayed list NOTE When Add New Contact is selected information such as the selected persons name is also registered In addition when Add New Contact Details is selected only the telephone number of the selected person is registered Making a call from your favorites 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen 2 Select to display the favorites list 3 Only one phone number is registered to contact Select the contact information you would like to call Go to Step 5 Multiple phone numbers are registered to contact Sel
490. ooth audio device LINK Link change CHANGE mode Deleting link to PAIR Pairing 5 DELETE deletion mode Bluetooth audio device DEVICE Device l Displaying vehicle s INFO information Bluetooth unit display mode information 3 Press the audio control dial to determine the mode Bluetooth audio device pairing Any Bluetooth audio device must be paired to the vehicle s Bluetooth unit before it can be listened to over the vehicle s speakers A maximum of seven devices including Bluetooth audio devices and Hands Free mobile phones can be paired to one vehicle 5 76 NOTE Ifa Bluetooth device has already been paired to the vehicle as a Hands Free mobile phone it does not need to be paired again when using the device as a Bluetooth audio device Conversely it does not need to be paired again as a Hands Free mobile phone if it has already been paired as a Bluetooth audio device e Device registration can also be done using voice recognition Concerning the operation of a Bluetooth audio device itself refer to its instruction manual i Some Bluetooth audio devices have PIN codes four digits Refer to the audio device s instruction manual because the pairing procedure differs depending on whether it has a PIN code or not Pairing a Bluetooth audio device which has a four digit PIN code 1 Using the audio control dial select the pairing mode PAIR DEVICE i
491. operate the audio device using the audio system control panel Any Bluetooth audio device must be paired to the vehicle s Bluetooth unit before it can be used Refer to Bluetooth Preparation Type B on page 5 86 1 Turn on the Bluetooth audio device s power 2 Switch the ignition to ACC or ON 3 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen 4 When Bluetooth is selected switches to the Bluetooth audio mode to begin playback NOTE If Bluetooth audio is used after using Pandora Aha or Stitcher radio the application on the mobile device has to be closed first If the Bluetooth audio device does not begin playback select the gt Il icon e If the mode is switched from Bluetooth audio mode to another mode radio mode audio playback from the Bluetooth audio device stops 5 112 Interior Features Bluetooth Playback To listen to a Bluetooth audio device over the vehicle s speaker system switch the mode to Bluetooth audio mode Refer to Switching to Bluetooth audio mode After switching to the Bluetooth audio mode the following icons are displayed in the lower part of the display Icons which can be used differ depending on the version of the Bluetooth audio device which you are currently using Icon Function Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source AVRCP Ver 1 4 only lt Displ
492. operly inflated Do not carry unnecessary weight Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving Keep the wheels in correct alignment Keep windows closed at high speeds Slow down when driving in crosswinds and headwinds A WARNING Never stop the engine when going down a hill Stopping the engine when going down a hill is dangerous This causes the loss of power steering and power brake control and may cause damage to the drivetrain Any loss of steering or braking control could cause an accident ee e e e e o o e 3 43 Before Driving Driving Tips Hazardous Driving A WARNING Be extremely careful if it is necessary to downshift on slippery surfaces Downshifting into lower gear while driving on slippery surfaces is dangerous The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid This could lead to loss of vehicle control and an accident When driving on ice or in water snow mud sand or similar hazards e Be cautious and allow extra distance for braking Avoid sudden braking and sudden maneuvering e Do not pump the brakes Continue to press down on the brake pedal Refer to Antilock Brake System ABS on page 4 80 If you get stuck select a lower gear and accelerate slowly Do not spin the front wheels For more traction in starting on slippery surfaces such as ice or packed snow use sand rock salt chains carpeting or other nonslip material under the fr
493. or because of shade lingering snow or grooves filled with water The surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a tunnel The illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is deviated The windshield is dirty or foggy e Back light is reflecting from the road surface The road surface is wet and shiny after rain or there are puddles on the road The shade of a guardrail parallel to a white or yellow line is on the road The width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide The road is excessively uneven The vehicle is shaken after hitting a road bump There are two or more adjacent white or yellow lines There are various road markings or lane markings of various shapes near an intersection 4 100 V When the System Operates 1 The system goes on operation standby when the LDWS switch is pressed and the LDWS OFF indication indicator light turns off On the type A instrument cluster the lane indication border line is indicated in the multi information display Indication on display N 2 Drive the vehicle in the center of the driving lane while the LDWS OFF indicator light is turned off The system becomes operational when all of the following conditions are met e The vehicle is driven in the center of the driving lane with the white or yellow lines on the left and right sides or on either side When Driving i A
494. or a maximum of 20 seconds V Reprogramming the HomeLink system To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button DO NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming step 1 V Erasing Programmed HomeLink Buttons To erase the existing programming from all three operating channels press and hold the two outside buttons on the auto dimming mirror until the HomeLink indicator light begins to flash after approximately 10 seconds Verify that the programming has been erased when you resell the vehicle When Driving Switches and Controls 4 73 When Driving Brake Brake System VW Foot Brake Your Mazda has power assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal use Should power assist fail you can stop by applying greater force than normal to the brake pedal But the distance required to stop will be greater than usual 4 74 AWARNING Do not coast with the engine stalled or turned off find a safe place to stop Coasting with the engine stalled or turned off is dangerous Braking will require more effort and the brake s power assist could be depleted if you pump the brake This will cause longer stopping distances or even an accident Shift to a lower gear when going down s
495. or manual M position manual mode In the following cases the warnings may not activate even if your vehicle starts closing in on the vehicle ahead You are driving at the same speed as the vehicle ahead e Directly after the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system has been set When the accelerator pedal is depressed or directly after the accelerator pedal is released Another vehicle cuts into the driving lane The following are not detected as physical objects Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction e Pedestrians e Stationary objects stopped vehicles obstructions If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely low speed the system may not detect it correctly During headway control travel do not set the system on two wheeled vehicles such as motorcycles and bicycles Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system under conditions in which the close proximity warnings are frequently activated During headway control travel the system accelerates and decelerates your vehicle in conjunction with the speed of the vehicle ahead However if it is necessary to accelerate for a lane change or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly causing you to close in on the vehicle rapidly accelerate using the accelerator pedal or decelerate using the brake pedal depending on the conditions While the Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC system is in use it does not cancel even if the selector lever is operated and any inte
496. ou are attaching a LATCH equipped child restraint system to the rear LATCH lower anchors Refer to Using LATCH Lower Anchor page 2 37 NOTE Follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions carefully If you are not sure whether you have a LATCH system or tether check in the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions and follow them accordingly Depending on the type of child restraint system it may use LATCH system instead of seat belts or if the belt goes across the child s chest may recommend against using automatic locking mode 1 Make sure the seatback is securely latched by pushing it back until it is fully locked 2 Raise the head restraint to the top locked position Refer to Head Restraints on page 2 12 3 Secure the child restraint system with the lap portion of the lap shoulder belt See the manufacturer s instructions on the child restraint system for belt routing instructions Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint 4 To get the retractor into the automatic locking mode pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt until the entire length of the belt is out of the retractor 5 Push the child restraint system firmly into the vehicle seat Be sure the belt retracts as snugly as possible A clicking noise from the retractor will be heard during retraction if the system is in the automatic locking mode If the belt does not lock the seat down tight repeat this s
497. our vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions requirements A WARNING Never park over or near anything flammable Parking over or near anything flammable such as dry grass is dangerous Even with the engine turned off the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and could ignite anything flammable A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death A CAUTION Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst inside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot Either condition will damage the converter and cause poor performance gt USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL gt Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction gt Do not coast with the ignition switched off gt Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switched off gt Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes gt Do not tamper with the emission control system All inspections and adjustments must be made by a qualified technician gt Do not push start or pull start your vehicle NOTE e Under U S federal law any modification to the original equipment emission control system before the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties In some states such modification made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties e While the engine is off the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear of the right side of the vehicle howeve
498. ourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings from the vehicle s Safety Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label A WARNING Overloaded Vehicle Overloading a vehicle is dangerous The results of overloading can have serious consequences in terms of passenger safety Too much weight on a vehicle s suspension system can cause spring or shock absorber failure brake failure handling or steering problems irregular tire wear tire failure or other damage Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control It also increases the distance required for stopping In cases of serious overloading brakes can fail completely particularly on steep grades The load a tire will carry safely is a combination of the size of the tire its load range and corresponding inflation pressure Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle s weight ratings from the vehicle s Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels 8 37 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment PAYLOAD Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is desi
499. ow to Activate Satellite Radio You must call SiriusXM to activate your service Activation is free and takes only a few minutes SiriusXM service uses an ID code to identify your radio This code is needed to activate SiriusXM service and report any problems Please have the following information ready e Radio ID 8 digit electronic serial no See below for how to find your ESN e Valid credit card information may not be required at initial sign up Be sure you are parked outside with a clear view of open sky you will be instructed to turn on your radio in SirtusXM mode and tuned to channel 184 Sirius 1 XM and SiriusXM Activation typically takes only 2 5 minutes Interior Features Audio System Displaying the Radio ID ESN When channel 0 is selected the radio ID is displayed Use the PREVIOUS or NEXT channel buttons to select channel 0 5 43 Interior Features Audio System SiriusXM operation Select the icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen When xM is selected the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display Icon Function Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source Displays the channel list of the current category Displays the favorites list Long press to store the channel currently being aired Refer to Operating the Radio on page 5 39 ED Indicates that th
500. p 14 If No the procedure returns to Step 9 14 Prompt Your new pairing code is YYYY Use this pairing code when pairing devices to the Hands Free system Do you want to pair a device now 15 Say Beep Yes or No 16 If Yes the system switches to the device registration mode If No the system returns to standby status Device pairing To use Bluetooth Hands Free the device equipped with Bluetooth has to be paired to the Bluetooth unit using the following procedure A maximum of seven devices including Hands Free mobile phones and Bluetooth audio devices can be paired to one vehicle NOTE If a Bluetooth device has already been paired to the vehicle as a Bluetooth audio device it does not need to be paired again when using the device as a Hands Free mobile phone Conversely it does not need to be paired again as a Bluetooth audio device if it has already been paired as a Hands Free mobile phone 5 71 Interior Features Bluetooth 1 Activate the Bluetooth application of the device NOTE For the operation of the device refer to its instruction manual 2 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 3 Say Beep Setup 4 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 5 Say Beep Pairing options 6 Prompt Select one of th
501. pe dirt off using a soft cloth with a leather cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in mild soap Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap using a cloth soaked in clean water and wrung out well Remove moisture with a dry soft cloth and allow the leather to further dry in a well ventilated shaded area If the leather gets wet such as from rain also remove moisture and dry it as soon as possible 6 68 Some models NOTE Because genuine leather is a natural material its surface is not uniform and it may have natural scars scratches and wrinkles e To maintain the quality for as long as possible periodical maintenance about twice a year is recommended e Sand and dust on the seat surface may damage the overcoat of the genuine leather surfaces and accelerate wear e Greasy soiling on genuine leather may cause molding and stains Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth may cause damage Do not wipe the leather using alcohol chlorine bleach or organic solvents such as thinner benzene or gasoline Otherwise it may cause discoloration or stains e If the seats get wet promptly remove moisture with a dry cloth Remaining moisture on the surface may cause deterioration such as hardening and shrinkage Exposure to direct sunlight for long periods may cause deterioration and shrinkage When parking the car under direct sunlight for long periods shade the interior using sunshades Do not leave vinyl product
502. ped vehicle NOTE The pretensioner system will activate in a moderate or greater frontal or near frontal or a severe side collision It will not activate in most rollovers rear impacts With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System The pretensioner system will activate in a severe roll over accident In addition the pretensioner system for the front passenger is designed to only deploy when the front passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger s seat e Some smoke non toxic gas will be released when the air bags and pretensioners deploy This does not indicate a fire This gas normally has no effect on occupants however those with sensitive skin may experience light skin irritation If residue from the deployment of the air bags or the front pretensioner system gets on the skin or in the eyes wash it off as soon as possible Essential Safety Equipment Seat Belt Systems Seat Belt Extender If your seat belt is not long enough even when fully extended a seat belt extender may be available to you at no charge from your Authorized Mazda Dealer This extender will be only for you and for the particular vehicle and seat Even if it plugs into other seat belts it may not hold in the critical moment of a crash When ordering an extender only order one that provides the necessary additional length to fasten the seat belt properly Please contact your Authoriz
503. peed 4 Turn on the air conditioner by pressing the A C switch 5 After cooling begins adjust the fan control dial and temperature control dial as needed to maintain maximum comfort A CAUTION If the air conditioner is used while driving up long hills or in heavy traffic monitor the engine coolant temperature warning light to see if it is illuminated or flashing page 4 22 The air conditioner may cause engine overheating If the warning light is illuminated or flashing turn the air conditioning off page 7 18 NOTE When maximum cooling is desired set the temperature control dial to the extreme cold position and set the air intake selector to the recirculated air position then turn the fan control dial fully clockwise Ifwarmer air is desired at floor level set the mode selector dial at the 4 position and adjust the temperature control dial to maintain maximum comfort The air to the floor is warmer than air to the face except when the temperature control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold position V Ventilation 1 Set the mode selector dial to the 7 position 2 Set the air intake selector to the outside air position indicator light turned off 3 Set the temperature control dial to the desired position 4 Set the fan control dial to the desired speed Interior Features Climate Control System VY Windshield Defrosting and Defogging 1 Set the mode selector dial to the GY
504. pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Prompt Hands Free system is locked State the passcode to continue 3 Say Beep X XXX Say the set passcode PCode 4 If the correct passcode is input voice guidance XXXXXxX Ex Mary s device Device tag is connected is announced If the passcode is incorrect voice guidance XXXX 4 digit passcode Pcode incorrect passcode please try again is announced Interior Features Bluetooth Canceling the passcode NOTE Do this function only when parked It is too distracting to attempt while driving and you may make too many errors to be effective 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Passcode 5 Prompt Passcode is enabled Would you like to disable it 6 Say Beep Yes 7 Prompt Passcode is disabled Confirmation Prompts The confirmation prompt confirms the command content to the user before advancing to the operation requested by the user When this function is turned on the system reads out the voice input command previously received and confirms whether the command is correct before advancing to the command execution When the confirmation prompt function is turned on
505. play pause button 4 5 60 Press the button again to resume playback Fast forward Reverse Press and hold the fast forward button gt gt I to advance through a track at high speed Press and hold the reverse button M4 to reverse through a track at high speed Track search Press the track up button gt gt I once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track Press the track down button M4 within a few seconds depends on iPod software version after playback begins to track down to the beginning of the previous track Press the track down button M4 after a few seconds depends on iPod software version have elapsed to start playback from the beginning of the current track Category search Press the category down button 5 to select the previous category and press the category up button 6 to select the next category NOTE The types of categories include Playlist Artist Album Song Podcast Genre Composer and Audio book List search Press the list down button V to select the previous list and press the list up button A to select the next list NOTE When the selected category is Song or Audio book there is no list Music Scan This function scans the titles in a list currently being played and plays 10 seconds of each song to aid you in finding a song you want to listen to Press and hold the scan button MEDIA during playback to start the scan play operatio
506. port Canada Defect Investigations and Recalls may telephone the toll free hotline 1 800 333 0510 or contact Transport Canada by mail at Transport Canada ASFAD Place de Ville Tower C 330 Sparks Street Ottawa ON K1A ONS For additional road safety information please visit the Road Safety website at http www tc gc ca roadsafety menu htm 8 15 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Warranty Warranties for Your Mazda New Vehicle Limited Warranty Powertrain Limited Warranty Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty Anti perforation Limited Warranty Federal Emission Control Warranty California Emission Control Warranty e Emission Defect Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e Emission Control Warranty e Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty e Tire Warranty NOTE Warranty information varies depending on the country Refer to the Warranty Booklet for detailed warranty information e o o o 8 16 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Warranty Outside the United States Canada Government regulations in the United States Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety standards Therefore vehicles built for use in the United States Canada may differ from those sold in other countries The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries We strongly recommend that yo
507. power door locks with any door open The vehicle lock out prevention feature does not operate while the ignition is switched off When any door is opened from the outside while the key is inside the vehicle the closed doors are locked All the doors are automatically unlocked by closing the open door With the advanced keyless function The beep sound is heard for about 10 seconds to notify the driver that the key has been left in the vehicle Without the advanced keyless function The horn sound is heard twice to notify the driver that the key has been left in the vehicle Door unlock control system with collision detection This system automatically unlocks the doors in the event the vehicle is involved in an accident to allow passengers to get out of the vehicle immediately and prevent being trapped inside While the ignition is switched ON and in the event the vehicle receives an impact strong enough to inflate the air bags all the doors are automatically unlocked after about 6 seconds have elapsed from the time of the accident The doors may not unlock depending on how an impact is applied the force of the impact and other conditions of the accident If door related systems or the battery is malfunctioning the doors will not unlock 3 12 Y Locking Unlocking with Key All doors lock automatically when the driver s door is locked with the key All doors unlock when the driver s door is unlocked and the key is
508. pported USB devices formatted to other formats such as NTFS are not supported Playback 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen 5 63 Interior Features Audio System 2 Select USB 1 or USB2 to switch the USB mode The following icons are displayed in the lower part of the center display Icon Function J Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source Category list is displayed mE Current track list is displayed Select a desired track to play it Plays the current track repeatedly Select it again to play the tracks in the current track list repeatedly When selected again the function is canceled Tracks in the current track list are played randomly Select it again to cancel Starts playing a track similar to the current track using Gracenote s More Like This Select the desired song from the category list to cancel More Like This If selected within a few seconds from the beginning of a song which has started to play the previous song is selected If more than a few seconds have elapsed the song currently being played is replayed from the beginning Long press to fast reverse It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob Track is played When selected again playback is temporarily stopped Advances to the beginning of the next song Long press
509. r The accessory socket can be used regardless of whether the ignition is on or off 5 130 A CAUTION gt To prevent accessory socket damage or electrical failure pay attention to the following gt Do not use accessories that require more than 120 W DC 12 V 10 A gt Do not use accessories that are not genuine Mazda accessories or the equivalent gt Close the cover when the accessory socket is not in use to prevent foreign objects and liquids from getting into the accessory socket gt Correctly insert the plug into the accessory socket gt Do not insert the cigarette lighter into the accessory socket gt Noise may occur on the audio playback depending on the device connected to the accessory socket gt Depending on the device connected to the accessory socket the vehicle s electrical system may be affected which could cause the warning light to illuminate Disconnect the connected device and make sure that the problem is resolved If the problem is resolved disconnect the device from the socket and switch the ignition off If the problem is not resolved consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer NOTE To prevent discharging of the battery do not use the socket for long periods with the engine off or idling Connecting the accessory socket 1 Open the lid 2 Pass the connection plug cord through the cutout of the console and insert the plug into the accessory socket Interio
510. r e Information related to controls of other on vehicle computers NOTE The record data may vary depending on the vehicle grade and optional equipment Voice and images are not recorded Data handling Mazda and its subcontracting parties may obtain and use the recorded data for vehicle malfunction diagnosis research and development and quality improvement Mazda will not disclose or provide any of the obtained data to a third party unless e An agreement from the vehicle owner agreements from lessor and lessee for leased vehicle is obtained e Officially requested by the police or other law enforcement authorities e For statistical processing by a research institution after processing the data so that identification of the owner or the vehicle is impossible 8 22 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Uniform Tire Quality Grading System UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading System UTQGS This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U S National Highway Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear traction and temperature performance V Tread Wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon
511. r Features Interior Equipment Cup Holder A WARNING Never use a cup holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle is moving Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle is moving is dangerous If the contents spill you could be scalded Do not put anything other than cups or drink cans in cup holders Putting objects other than cups or drink cans in a cup holder is dangerous During sudden braking or maneuvering occupants could be hit and injured or objects could be thrown around the vehicle causing interference with the driver and the possibility of an accident Only use a cup holder for cups or drink cans Y Front To use the cup holder slide the cover and open it 5 131 Interior Features Interior Equipment V Rear The rear cup holder is on the rear center armrest 5 132 Bottle Holder Bottle holders are on the inside of the doors p Bottle holder CAUTION Do not use the bottle holders for containers without caps The contents may spill when the door is opened or closed Storage Compartments A WARNING Keep storage boxes closed when driving Driving with the storage boxes open is dangerous To reduce the possibility of injury in an accident or a sudden stop keep the storage boxes closed when driving Do not put articles in storage spaces with no lid Putting articles in storage spaces with no lid is dangerous as they could be thrown around the
512. r Information and Reporting Safety Defects Declaration of Conformity AWARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter End users and installers must be provided with installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance Mazda Bluetooth Hands Free Customer Service e U S A Phone 800 430 0153 Toll free Web www MazdaUSA com bluetooth e Canada Phone 800 430 0153 Toll free Web www mazdahandsfree ca Mexico Para cumplimiento de la Cofetel La operaci n de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones 1 es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2 este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia incluyendo la que pueda causar su operaci n no deseada Brief description Bluetooth module for Hands free telephone and streaming audio Name and address of the importer Refer to MEXICO page 8 13 in Importer Distributor section Brand name of the product Johnson Controls Inc Model name of the product MAZ Names and addresses of where the warranty can
513. r belt so that it fits snugly against your body Seat belt buckle 2 18 YV Unfastening the Seat Belt Depress the button on the seat belt buckle If the belt does not fully retract pull it out and check for kinks or twists Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts A YA yy Button NOTE If a belt does not fully retract inspect it for kinks and twists If it is still not retracting properly have it inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer V Front Shoulder Belt Adjuster To raise To lower ee q Make sure the adjuster is locked Seat Belt Warning Systems If it detects that the driver s seat belt is unfastened the warning light or beep alerts the driver Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 Essential Safety Equipment Seat Belt Systems Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems For optimum protection the driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with pretensioner and load limiting systems For both these systems to work properly you must wear the seat belt properly Pretensioners In moderate or severe frontal or near frontal accidents the front air bag and pretensioner systems deploy simultaneously For deployment details refer to the SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria page 2 54 The front seat belt retractors remove slack quickly as the air bags are expanding Any time the air bags and seat belt pretensioners hav
514. r light does not illuminate remove the child restraint system switch the ignition to OFF and then re install the child restraint system page 2 57 SS OX IGN ees AIRBAG OFF AV 2 2 35 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint AWARNING Do not seat a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System While it is always better to install any child restraint system on the rear seat it is imperative that a child restraint system ONLY be used on the front passenger seat if the deactivation indicator light illuminates when the child is seated in the child restraint system page 2 57 Seating a child in a child restraint system installed on the front passenger seat with the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light not illuminated is dangerous If this indicator light does not illuminate this means that the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner are ready for deployment If an accident were to deploy an air bag a child in a child restraint system sitting in the front passenger seat could be seriously injured or killed If the indicator light does not illuminate after seating a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat seat a child in a child restraint system on the rear seat and consult an
515. r on page 4 68 x Distance The distance unit can be roria eee Refer to _ x unit changed Settings on page 5 49 x English The display language can be F Refer to System Language changed English res Settings x Spanis on page 5 49 x Temperature The temperature unit can be A pE Refer to unit changed Pore F C Settings x on page 5 49 9 16 Personalization Features ae ane Available Settings change method Settings oO Q x ae Setti heck Isot Refer to cono Ending etting can e changed so that Fuel my displa the ending display of the Fuel Economy Moni play Economy Monitor is displayed Monitor tor Refer So Epe 4 87 to Fuel Econo XxX my Fuel Refer to Moni Setting can be changed so that Fuel toron SConomy the fuel economy reset is linked E palit with the trip meter reset pained page procedure p j Monitor 4 87 on page 4 87 Active driving displ Refer x to Setting can be changed so that Refer to the Turn by Turn TBT of the Active a ive Tum by Active driving display is not Drivi Driving Turn TBT disolaved 7Tiving Display played Display on on page 4 20 page 4 20 1 Though these systems can be turned Off doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and Mazda recommends that these systems remain On 2 For vehicles with an audio system other than the on screen function type the warning sound cannot be changed The warning sound i
516. r this does not indicate an abnormality Your vehicle has a self checking device and it operates while the engine is off 3 25 Before Driving Fuel and Emission Vv Engine Exhaust Carbon monoxide A WARNING Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle Engine exhaust gas is dangerous This gas contains carbon monoxide CO which is colorless odorless and poisonous When inhaled it can cause loss of consciousness and death If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle keep all windows fully open and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area Running the engine inside an enclosed area such as a garage is dangerous Exhaust gas which contains poisonous carbon monoxide could easily enter the cabin Loss of consciousness or even death could occur Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when idling the engine Exhaust gas is dangerous When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed and the engine running for a long time even in an open area exhaust gas which contains poisonous carbon monoxide could enter the cabin Loss of consciousness or even death could occur Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle particularly the tail pipe before starting the engine Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous The exhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow allowing exhaust gas
517. r while driving at high speeds causes sudden engine braking which is dangerous The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid This could lead to loss of vehicle control and an accident Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or R position and set the parking brake when leaving the vehicle unattended Otherwise the vehicle could move and cause an accident CAUTION gt Keep your foot off the clutch pedal except when shifting gears Also do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an upgrade Riding the clutch will cause needless clutch wear and damage gt Do not apply any excessive lateral force to the gear lever when changing from 5th to 4th gear This could lead to the accidental selection of 2nd gear which can result in damage to the transaxle gt Make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before shifting to R Shifting to R while the vehicle is still moving may damage the transaxle NOTE If shifting to R is difficult shift back into neutral release the clutch pedal and try again 4 47 When Driving Transaxle YW Gear Shift Indicator The gear shift indicator supports you to obtain optimum fuel economy and smooth driving It displays the selected gear position in the instrument cluster as well as notifies the driver to change to the most suitable gear position corresponding to the actual driving condition Selected gear position Suitable gear position Indication Actio
518. rd certification and in case of a recall V Information on Passenger Vehicle Tires Please refer to the sample below 1 TIN U S DOT tire identification number 2 Passenger car tire 3 Nominal width of tire in millimeters 4 Ratio of height to width aspect ratio 5 Radial 6 Run flat tire 7 Rim diameter code 8 Load index amp speed symbol 9 Severe snow conditions 10 Tire ply composition and materials used 8 25 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A 11 Max load rating 12 Tread wear traction and temperature grades 13 Max permissible inflation pressure 14 SAFETY WARNING P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating Here is an explanation of the various components of that tire size and load index rating Note that the tire size and load index rating may be different from the example P Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks as designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA NOTE If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 215 215 is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters This three digit number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 65 65
519. re monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheel
520. reset If the registered code has been forgotten reset the code to the default 0000 code 1 2 Select Reset PIN Code Select LOK Select the A icon If the selected channel is locked input the PIN code to cancel the parental lock temporarily Input the default code 0000 using the number buttons Input the new PIN code using the number buttons Select Interior Features Audio System 5 45 Interior Features Audio System V Operating the Compact Disc CD Player CD eject button QS J Type Playable data e Music data CD DA Music MP3 WMA e MP3 WMA AAC file AAC CD player NOTE Ifa disc has both music data CD DA and MP3 WMA AAC files playback of the two or three file types differs depending on how the disc was recorded Inserting the CD Insert the CD into the slot label side up The auto loading mechanism will set the CD and begin play NOTE There will be a short lapse before play begins while the player reads the digital signals on the CD 5 46 Ejecting the CD Press the CD eject button 4 to eject the CD Interior Features Audio System Playback Select the icon on the home screen with a CD inserted and display the Entertainment screen When center display is selected the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the
521. ress and hold the brake pedal 2 Start the engine 3 Press and hold the lock release button 4 Move the selector lever NOTE When the ignition is switched to ACC or the ignition is switched off the selector lever cannot be shifted from P The ignition cannot be switched to OFF if the selector lever is not in P W Shift Lock Override If the selector lever will not move from P using the proper shift procedure continue to hold down the pedal 1 Remove the shift lock override cover using a cloth wrapped flat head screwdriver 2 Insert a screwdriver and push it down 3 Press and hold the lock release button 4 51 When Driving Transaxle 4 Move the selector lever 5 Take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the system checked Y Manual Shift Mode This mode gives you the feel of driving a manual transaxle vehicle by operating the selector lever and allows you to control engine rpm and torque to the drive wheels much like a manual transaxle when more control is desired To change to manual shift mode shift the lever from D to M NOTE Changing to manual shift mode while driving will not damage the transaxle To return to automatic shift mode shift the lever from M to D NOTE e Ifyou change to manual shift mode when the vehicle is stopped the gear will shift to M1 Ifyou change to manual shift mode without depressing the accelerator pedal when driving in D range
522. ri ea 3 5 Trip Computer s ssssseeseseeseseesreses eree 4 16 Trouble Battery runs out ee eeeeeeeeeee 7 14 Emergency Starting 0 0 0 7 17 Emergency Towing 008 7 20 Flat Tirei geseis cutee unde 7 3 Overheating ceceeeeceeseneees 7 18 Parking in an Emergency 7 2 Warning indicator lights and warning Sounds 4 ci chan tave eh elie 7 23 When trunk lid cannot be Opened niinen laine 7 38 Trunk Lid eiieeii igen dest 3 19 Inside trunk release lever 3 22 When trunk lid cannot be Opened eisai ees 7 38 Turn and Lane Change Signals 4 63 Vv Vanity Mirrors ceceeseeseereeseeeees 5 127 Vehicle Information Labels 9 2 W Warning Lights ABS ee sa Gein de 4 30 Air bag front seat belt pretensioner SYSE Tean soea a EOE 4 35 Automatic transaxle 0 4 34 Brake system cccseeeseeseeees 4 29 Charging system ceeee 4 31 Check engine ceceeeereeteees 4 32 Check fuel capo eeeeeeerees 4 35 DOOr ajar oo eeecesseeseeeeeeeeteeeneees 4 37 Electric parking brake 4 31 Engine Oi eceseeseeseeeeereeeees 4 31 HBG fini aia nd iad a 4 4 High engine coolant temperature essasi a 4 32 KEY nenten tle ee 4 39 EDWS aaia enreta 4 33 LED headlight 0 0 0 0 4 46 Tow fel fei meneen 4 35 Low washer fluid level 4 37 Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRC eigenen ctaiendss 4 45 Seat belt iero aeeie a iaria 4
523. riving Instrument Cluster and Display Y Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light This warning light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON The warning light illuminates and a beep is heard when tire pressure is too low in one or more tires and flashes when there is a system malfunction 4 38 AWARNING If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes or the tire pressure warning beep sound is heard decrease vehicle speed immediately and avoid sudden maneuvering and braking If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes or the tire pressure warning beep sound is heard it is dangerous to drive the vehicle at high speeds or perform sudden maneuvering or braking Vehicle drivability could worsen and result in an accident To determine if you have a slow leak ora flat pull over to a safe position where you can check the visual condition of the tire and determine if you have enough air to proceed to a place where air may be added and the system monitored again by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire repair station Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light Ignoring the TPMS warning light is dangerous even if you know why it is illuminated Have the problem taken care of as soon as possible before it develops into a more serious situation that could lead to tire failure and a dangerous accident Warning light illuminates Warning b
524. rm or cold water Also be sure to clean the wheels after driving on dusty or salted roads to help prevent corrosion e Avoid washing your vehicle in an automatic car wash that uses high speed or hard brushes Plastic Part Maintenance e e e When cleaning the plastic lenses of the lights do not use gasoline kerosene rectified spirit paint thinner highly acidic detergents or strongly alkaline detergents Otherwise these chemical agents can discolor or damage the surfaces resulting in a significant loss in functionality If plastic parts become inadvertently exposed to any of these chemical agents flush with water immediately If plastic parts such as the bumpers become inadvertently exposed to chemical agents or fluids such as gasoline oil engine coolant or battery fluid it could cause discoloration staining or paint peeling Wipe off any such chemical agents or fluids using a soft cloth immediately High water temperature and high water pressure car washers are available depending on the type of high pressure car washer device If the car washer nozzle is put too close to the vehicle or aimed at one area for an extended period of time it could deform plastic parts or damage the paint Do not use wax containing compounds polish Otherwise it could result in paint damage In addition do not use an electrical or air tool to apply wax Otherwise the frictional heat generated could result in deformat
525. rning light in the instrument cluster the warning is also indicated in the display on the type A instrument cluster and operating a beep sound The system monitors the tire pressures indirectly using the data sent from the ABS wheel speed sensors To allow the system to operate correctly the system needs to be initialized with the specified tire pressure value on the tire pressure label Follow the procedure and perform the initialization 1 Refer to Type A on page 4 22 e For vehicles with the type A instrument cluster check the vehicle condition or have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication 1 Refer to Type A on page 4 22 e A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure Warning Beep on page 7 36 ABS wheel speed sensor 4 149 When Driving Tire Pressure Monitoring System A CAUTION Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressu
526. ront and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both sides curtain air bags Vehicles with the Front Passenger Occupant Classification System have a sensor which detects an impending roll over accident The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection in certain situations so seat belts are always important in the following ways Without seat belt usage the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident Seat belt usage is necessary to e Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag e Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag inflation such as rear impact Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal near frontal or side collisions or roll over accidents that are not severe enough to activate the air bags Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body e Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle e e e 2 41 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags If your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system refer to the Front Passenger Occupant Classification System page 2 57 for details If your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system the front pass
527. ront passenger air bag deactivation indicator light still does not turn on install the child restraint system on the rear seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on when an occupant is seated directly in the front passenger seat have the passenger re adjust their posture by sitting with their feet on the floor and then re fastening the seat belt If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light remains turned on move the passenger to the rear seat If sitting in the rear seat is not possible slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible 2 61 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Constant Monitoring The following components of the air bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system Crash sensors and diagnostic module SAS unit Front air bag sensors Air bag modules Side crash sensors Air bag Front seat belt pretensioner system warning light Front seat belt pretensioners e Related wiring With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System e Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light e Front passenger occupant classification sensor e Front passenger occupant classification control module eoeeeee The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system s readiness This begins when the ignition is switched ON and continues while the vehicle is
528. ront seat cushion or leave heavy luggage on them gt Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats gt To allow the sensors to function properly always perform the following gt Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn properly gt If you place your child on the front passenger seat secure the child restraint system properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible page 2 31 2 60 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags NOTE The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on repeatedly if luggage or other items are put on the front passenger seat or if the temperature of the vehicle s interior changes suddenly The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on for 10 seconds if the electrostatic capacity on the front passenger seat changes The air bag front seat belt pretensioner system warning light might turn on if the front passenger seat receives a severe impact If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on after installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat first re install your child restraint system according to the procedure in this owner s manual Then if the f
529. ror indication continues to display consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Verify that the content recorded in the iPod has playable files and iPod re connect correctly malfunction If the error indication continues to display consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer CHECK iPod Interior Features Audio System V How to use AUX mode Type B 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen 2 Select AUX to switch to the AUX mode The following icons are displayed in the lower part of the center display Icon Function Displays the Entertainment menu Use to switch to a different audio source Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 NOTE e Ifa device is not connected to the auxiliary jack the mode does not switch to the AUX mode e Adjust the audio volume using the portable audio device commander switch or audio control switch Audio adjustments can also be made using the portable audio device s volume setting e Ifthe connection plug is pulled out from the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode noise may occur V How to use USB mode Type B Type Playable data USB mode MP3 WMA AAC OGG file This unit does not support a USB 3 0 device In addition other devices may not be supported depending on the model or OS version USB devices formatted to FAT32 are su
530. rossing a narrow bridge When passing under a low gate or through a tunnel or narrow gate When entering an underground parking area Metal objects bumps or protruding objects on the road If you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead When driving in areas where there is high grass or forage Two wheeled vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles Pedestrians or non metallic objects such as standing trees When the system operates the user is notified by the flashing Smart Brake Support SBS warning indication and the multi information display or the active driving display with active driving display 4 133 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE V Collision Warning If there is the possibility of a collision with a vehicle ahead the beep sounds continuously and a warning is indicated in the multi information display or the active driving display with active driving display BRAKE Y Stopping The Smart Brake Support SBS System Operation The Smart Brake Support SBS system can be temporarily deactivated Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 When the Smart Brake Support SBS system is turned off the Smart Brake Support SBS OFF indicator light turns on SH in 4 134 When the engine is restarted the system becomes operational NOTE If the Smart Brake Support SBS system operation is turned off the Smart City Brake Support SCBS system operation is turned off simultaneously When
531. rt press Say Beep Call Prompt Name please Say Beep XXXXX Ex John s phone Say a voice tag registered in the phonebook 5 Prompt Calling XXXXX Ex John s phone XXXX Ex at home Is this correct Voice tag and phone number location registered in phonebook 6 Say Beep Yes KR WwW WN 7 Prompt Dialing Redialing function 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Redial 3 Prompt Dialing Ending the current call Press the hang up button during the call Y DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Signal Transmission This function is used when transmitting DTMF via the user s voice The receiver of a DTMF transmission is generally a home telephone answering machine or a company s automated guidance call center When you send tone signals back according to the voice guidance recording 1 Press the talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep XX XX send Say DTMF code 5 97 Interior Features Bluetooth 3 Prompt Sending XXXX DTMF code 5 98 Bluetooth Hands Free Type B V Making a Call Phonebook Usage Telephone calls can be made by saying the contact name in the downloaded phonebook or the name of a person whose phone number has been registered in the Bluetooth Hands Free Refer to Import contact Download Phonebook 1 Press the talk button
532. rture Warning System LDWS Indication 4 33 1 i Lane Departure Warning System LDWS OFF Indication 4 33 OFF AT Automatic Transaxle Warning Indication 4 34 Gyl Power Steering Malfunction Indication 4 34 Oe er rw Air Bag Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light 4 35 N Low Fuel Warning Light 4 35 R Check Fuel Cap Warning Indication 4 35 4 36 4 24 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Warning Indicator Lights Door Ajar Warning Indication Trunk lid Ajar Warning Indication Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indication Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light KEY Indication High Beam Control System HBC Warning Light Amber Indicator Light Green Wrench Indication TCS DSC Indicator Light DSC OFF Indicator Light Smart Brake Support Smart City Brake Support SBS SCBS OFF Indicator Light Smart City Brake Support SCBS Warning Indication i ELOOP Indication PRNDM Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light Blue Shift Position Indication 4 43 4 25 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Signal Warning Indicator Lights Page z Headlight High Beam Indicator Light 4 44 q E Turn Signal Hazard Warning Indicator Lights 4 44 en Security Indicator Light 4 44 wel Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC Warning Light Amber Indicator 4 45 Cv Light Green amp Cruise Main Indicator L
533. s e The automatic car wash brushes could reduce the paint lustre or hasten paint deterioration When using a high water pressure car wash High water temperature and high water pressure car washers are available depending on the type of car wash machine If the car washer nozzle is put too close to the vehicle the force of the spray could damage or deform the molding affect the sealability of parts and allow water to penetrate the interior Keep a sufficient space 30 cm 12 in or more between the nozzle and the vehicle In addition do not spend too much time spraying the same area of the vehicle and be very careful when spraying between gaps in doors and around windows Waxing Your vehicle needs to be waxed when water no longer beads on the finish Maintenance and Care Appearance Care Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing it In addition to the vehicle body wax the metal trim to maintain its luster 1 Use wax which contains no abrasives Waxes containing abrasive will remove paint and could damage bright metal parts 2 Use a good grade of natural wax for metallic mica and solid colors 3 When waxing coat evenly with the sponge supplied or a soft cloth 4 Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth NOTE A spot remover to remove oil tar and similar materials will usually also take off the wax Rewax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not need it V Repairing Damage to the Finis
534. s this correct 8 Say Beep Yes or No 5 73 Interior Features Bluetooth 9 If Yes go to Step 10 If No the procedure returns to Step 5 10 Prompt XXXXX Ex Device B selected Music player 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Select music player 5 Prompt Please say the name of the device you would like to select Available devices are XXXXX Ex device A XXXXX Ex device B XXXXX Ex device C Which device please 6 Say Beep XX XXX Ex Device By 7 Prompt XXXXX Ex Device B Is this correct 8 Say Beep Yes or No 9 If Yes go to Step 10 If No the procedure returns to Step 5 10 Prompt XXXXX Ex Device B selected NOTE When the selected device connection is completed the A or symbol is displayed Some Bluetooth audio devices need a certain amount of time before the B or symbol is displayed e Device Music player selection can also be done by operating the panel button 5 74 Deleting a device Registered devices Mobile phone can be deleted individually or collectively NOTE Do this function only when parked It
535. s depress the accelerator fully The transaxle will shift to a lower gear depending on vehicle speed NOTE The accelerator pedal feels heavy as it is being depressed but then lightens as it is fully depressed This change in pedal force aids the engine control system in determining how much the accelerator pedal has been depressed for performing kickdown and functions to control whether or not kickdown should be performed Climbing steep grades from a stop To climb a steep grade from a stopped position 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Shift to D or M1 depending on the load weight and grade steepness 3 Release the brake pedal while gradually accelerating Descending steep grades When descending a steep grade shift to lower gears depending on load weight and grade steepness Descend slowly using the brakes only occasionally to prevent them from overheating When Driving Transaxle 4 57 When Driving Switches and Controls Lighting Control V Headlights e Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights other exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off e For vehicles with the type A instrument cluster check the vehicle condition or have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication e A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 NOTE If the light switch is left on the lights
536. s 4 109 Door Locks aree trK 3 11 Drive Selection mnnowiossiiis 4 90 Driving In Flooded Area 3 47 Driving on Uneven Road 404 3 48 Driving Tips cepsssisieiun upsin 3 43 Automatic transaxle 4 56 Breakin inorren ceiene 3 43 Driving in flooded area 3 47 Driving on uneven road 3 48 Floor mat eee eeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeees 3 44 Hazardous driving 3 44 Overloading ceeeeceeeeseeeees 3 47 Rocking the vehicle 0 3 45 Saving fuel and protection of the environment sssr 3 43 Winter driving sseeseseeseseseeee 3 45 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 4 82 E Emergency Starting Push Starting cceeeeeeeseeees 7 17 Starting a Flooded Engine 7 17 Emergency Towing Tiedown Hooks sses 7 21 Towing Description ce 7 20 Emission Control System 3 25 10 3 Index E Engine Coolant eener na oer 6 29 Engine Compartment OVEIVIEW ceran atnan 6 26 Exhaust gas sesoses 3 26 Hood release cccccesceeseeeeees 6 24 Oilin a a aks 6 27 Start geass resaestacdeteestiestaacite pets 4 3 Essential information c cccceeees 6 2 Event Data Recorder cccccceee 8 21 Exhaust Gas sunina iiaii e 3 26 BXterlOr Caress oia aiti 6 62 Aluminum Wheel Maintenance cccccesceseeeeees 6 66 Bright Metal Maintenance 6 65 Maintaining the Finish 6 63 Plastic Part Maintenance
537. s 6 32 Bottle Holder ceeeseeeeeseeteeees 5 132 B Brakes Brakes assist c ccesesceeseeseeeees 4 78 Foot br ken 4 74 Pad wear indicator eee 4 77 Parking brake eeeeeeeeeees 4 75 Break iienaa aaa 3 43 C Capacities icsiccvesieccaniaevacscva 9 5 Carbon Monoxide c csceseseeeees 3 26 Cell Phonesin nies 8 20 Center Console cccsceseeseeseees 5 134 Child Restraint Child restraint system Installation ceeeeeseeeeteeteeee 2 28 Installing child restraint SYSTEMS sssevstedesn erou KE TEA 2 29 LATCH child restraint Sy StEMS uain ae e aE eaea 2 37 Child Safety Locks for Rear Doors 3 19 Climate Control System ee 5 2 Fully Automatic Type 8 5 9 Gas specifications cceeeeee 9 6 Manual Type ececeeseereereeees 5 5 Operating Tips eceeceeseereeees 5 2 Vent Operation eseeceseeeeees 5 3 Clock yee EEE eet 5 24 Coming Home Light System 4 61 Courtesy Lights cceceeeseeees 5 128 Cruise Control cececeseeeeseeeeee 4 145 Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed 4 15 Cup Holdet asinis 5 131 Customer Assistance eceeceereee 8 2 D Dashboard Illumination 4 14 Index D Daytime Running Lights 4 62 Defogger a 2 ecias iin dead nade 4 68 MIOT nenea fanran chee 4 69 Dimensions sssr 9 5 Direct Mode s es 4 56 Distance Recognition Support System DRS SY aiea
538. s are locked visually or audibly by use of the double click Make sure all doors are locked after pressing the button With theft deterrent system When the doors are locked by pressing the lock button on the key while the theft deterrent system is armed the hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that the system is armed Unlock button To unlock the driver s door press the unlock button and the hazard warning lights will flash twice With the advanced keyless function A beep sound will be heard twice To unlock all doors press the unlock button again within 3 seconds and two more beep sounds will be heard 3 6 NOTE The system can be set to unlock all doors by performing a single operation Refer to Personalization Features on page 9 9 Use the following procedure to change the setting 1 Switch the ignition off and close all of the doors and the trunk lid 2 Open the driver s door 3 Within 30 seconds of opening the driver s door press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key for 5 seconds or longer The sound of the doors locking unlocking can be heard After this the system switches the setting each time the UNLOCK button is pressed the sound of the doors locking unlocking can be heard 4 The setting change is completed by doing any one of the following e Switch the ignition to ACC or ON Close the driver s door Open the trunk lid The key is not operated for 1
539. s in the cabin are normal inspect the fuse block under the hood If a fuse is blown it must be replaced Follow these steps 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off and other switches are off 2 Remove the fuse block cover Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance 3 If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is blown replace it with a new one of the same amperage rating A WARNING Do not replace the main fuse by yourself Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform the replacement Replacing the fuse by yourself is dangerous because the MAIN fuse is a high current fuse Incorrect replacement could cause an electrical shock or a short circuit resulting in a fire 4 Reinstall the cover and make sure that it is securely installed 6 57 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance V Fuse Panel Description Fuse block Engine compartment 6 58 DESCRIPTION Rene PROTECTED COMPONENT 1 ADD FAN GE 30A Cooling fan 2 IG2 30A For protection of various circuits 3 INJECTOR 30A Engine control system 4 FAN DE 40 A 5 P WINDOW1 30A 6 7 ADD FAN DE 40 A 8 EVVT 20 A Engine control system 9 DEFOG 40A Rear window defogger 10 DCDC DE 40 A 11 FAN GE 30A Cooling fan 12 EPB L 20 A Electric parking brake LH 13 AU
540. s not taken Here are some examples of possible damage with tips on how to prevent them Etching Caused by Acid Rain or Industrial Fallout Occurrence Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions drift into the air and mix with rain or dew to form acids These acids can settle on a vehicle s finish As the water evaporates the acid becomes concentrated and can damage the finish And the longer the acid remains on the surface the greater the chance is for damage Prevention It is necessary to wash and wax your vehicle to preserve its finish according to the instructions in this section These steps should be taken immediately after you suspect that acid rain has settled on your vehicle s finish Damage Caused by Bird Dropping Insects or Tree Sap Occurrence Bird droppings contain acids If these are not removed they can eat away the clear and color base coat of the vehicle s paintwork 6 62 When insects stick to the paint surface and decompose corrosive compounds form These can erode the clear and color base coat of the vehicle s paintwork if they are not removed Tree sap will harden and adhere permanently to the paint finish If you scratch the sap off while it is hard some vehicle paint could come off with it Prevention It is necessary to have your Mazda washed and waxed to preserve its finish according to the instructions in this section This should be done as soon as possible Bird droppi
541. s of water in the valve stem to see if it bubbles indicating a bad valve Leaks need to be addressed by more than simply reinflating the tire as leaks are dangerous take it to an Authorized Mazda Dealer If the warning light illuminates again even after the tire pressures are adjusted and the TPMS initialization is performed there may be a tire puncture Replace the punctured tire with the temporary spare tire page 7 6 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Warning light flashes If the tire pressure monitoring system has a malfunction the tire pressure warning light flashes for about 1 minute when the ignition is switched ON and then continues illuminating Have your vehicle checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible V KEY Warning Indication Warning Light Red KEY Indicator Light Green Type A Keyless System malfunction is displayed This message is displayed if the advanced keyless entry amp push button start system has a problem Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer A CAUTION If the above message is indicated or the push button start indicator light amber flashes the engine may not start If the engine cannot be started try starting it using the emergency operation for starting the engine and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible Refer to Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine on page 4 8 4 39 When Driving Ins
542. s off after a specified period of time A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is switched ON If any of these occur consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible The system may not operate in an accident When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display AWARNING Never tamper with the air bag pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs Self servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous An air bag pretensioner could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death V Low Fuel Warning Light This warning light signals that the fuel tank will soon be empty Refuel as soon as possible V Check Fuel Cap Warning Indication Warning Light s amp s Type B This warning light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON 4 35 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Type A Type B If the check fuel cap warning light illuminates indication while driving the fuel filler cap may not be installed properly Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel filler cap Refer to Fuel Filler Cap on page 3 27 V Seat Belt Warning Light Driver s seat Front passenger s seat 4 36 Except Mexico The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver or front passenger s seat is occupied and
543. s on the seats for long periods as they may affect the leather quality and coloring If the cabin temperature becomes hot the vinyl may deteriorate and adhere to the genuine leather Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner Clean it with a mild soap solution good for upholstery and carpets Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner To keep the fabric looking clean and fresh take care of it Otherwise its color will be affected it can be stained easily and its fire resistance may be reduced CAUTION Use only recommended cleaners and procedures Others may affect appearance and fire resistance Panel When the interior panels need to be cleaned use soft material such as a soft cloth soaked in clean water and wrung out well and lightly wipe off dirt from the surface If a panel requires further cleaning use the following procedure 1 Wipe dirt off using a soft cloth soaked in mild detergent about 5 solution 2 Wipe off any remaining detergent using a cloth soaked in clean water and wrung out well NOTE Do not wipe leather parts using alcohol chlorine bleach or organic solvents such as thinner benzene or gasoline Otherwise it may cause discoloration or stains e Scratches or nicks on the panels and metallic trim resulting from the use of a hard brush or cloth may not be repairable Be particularly careful when cleaning high lustre p
544. s on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly To avoid false readings the system samples for a little while before indicating a problem As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or blow out 4 150 When Driving Tire Pressure Monitoring System NOTE Because this system detects slight changes in tire conditions the timing of the warning may be faster or slower in the following cases e The size manufacturer or the type of tires is different from the specification The size manufacturer or the type of a tire is different from the others or the level of tire wear is excessively different between them Arun flat tire studless tire snow tire or tire chains are used e An emergency tire is used The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may flash and then continue illuminating e A tire is repaired using the emergency flat tire repair kit The tire pressure is excessively higher than the specified pressure or the tire pressure is suddenly lowered for some reason such as a tire burst during driving The vehicle speed is lower than about 15 km h 9 3 mph including when the vehicle is stopped or the drive period is shorter than 5 minutes e The vehic
545. s only a beep 3 Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring BSM operation can be changed The volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA operation cannot be changed 4 If the auto wiper control is set to Off the wiper lever AUTO position is set to intermittent operation 5 When set to Off the lights on reminder is operable 6 The setting of the lights on reminder can be changed with the time setting of auto headlight off function set to Off Refer to Lights On Reminder on page 7 33 7 Available only in display from the center display 9 17 9 18 Index A Accessory Socket s s 5 130 Active driving display cceee 4 20 Adaptive Front Lighting System AFS jomni e e eiei 4 94 Add On Non Genuine Parts and ACCESSOTIES ipini riie 8 19 Advanced Key Operational range eee 3 10 Advanced Keyless Entry System 3 9 Air Bag Systems ccesesseeseereeees 2 41 Antilock Brake System ABS 4 80 Audio Control Switch Adjusting the Volume 5 51 Seek Switch occ eeeeeeeeees 5 51 Audio System ANENA maiera 5 13 Audio Control Switch 5 51 Audio Set Type A cece 5 21 Audio Set Type B 00 eee 5 32 AUX USB iPod mode 5 52 Operating Tips for Audio Syste M ra iienaa E eae 5 13 Satellite Radio cece eee 5 42 Automatic Transaxle Driving tips eiennenn 4 56 Shift lock override 000
546. s such as leaves snow and ice from the hood and the air inlet in the cowl grille to improve the system efficiency Use the climate control system to defog the windows and dehumidify the air The recirculate mode should be used when driving through tunnels or while in a traffic jam or when you would like to shut off outside air for quick cooling of the interior Use the outside air position for ventilation or windshield defrosting If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather open the windows to let warm air escape then run the climate control system Run the air conditioner about 10 minutes at least once a month to keep internal parts lubricated 5 2 e Have the air conditioner checked before the weather gets hot Lack of refrigerant may make the air conditioner less efficient The refrigerant specifications are indicated on a label attached to the inside of the engine compartment Check the label before refilling the refrigerant If the wrong type of refrigerant is used it could result in a serious malfunction of the air conditioner For details consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Interior Features Climate Control System Vent Operation Center Vents V Adjusting the Vents Directing airflow To adjust the direction of airflow move the adjustment knob NOTE When using the air conditioner under humid ambient temperature conditions the system may blow fog from the v
547. sage is displayed when the driver s door is opened without switching the ignition off Key not detected is displayed This message is displayed when any of the following operations is performed with the key out of the operational range or placed in areas inside the cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected e The push button start is pressed with the ignition switched off e The ignition is switched on e All doors are closed without switching the ignition off Type B If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system it illuminates continuously 7 30 Some models A CAUTION If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light amber flashes the engine may not start If the engine cannot be started try starting it using the emergency operation for starting the engine and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible Refer to Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine on page 4 8 V If the high beam control system HBC warning light amber illuminates This light turns on if there is a malfunction in the high beam control system HBC Have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer YW If the wrench indication indicator light is indicated 9g Type A Perform maintenance in accordance with the message If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds Type B The wrench in
548. se surfaces snow or gravel for example which usually have a hard foundation A vehicle with a normal braking system may require less distance to stop under these conditions because the tires will build up a wedge of surface layer when the wheels skid The sound of the ABS operating may be heard when starting the engine or immediately after starting the vehicle however it does not indicate a malfunction Traction Control System TCS The Traction Control System TCS enhances traction and safety by controlling engine torque and braking When the TCS detects driving wheel slippage it lowers engine torque and operates the brakes to prevent loss of traction This means that on a slick surface the engine adjusts automatically to provide optimum power to the drive wheels limiting wheel spin and loss of traction A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 When Driving ABS TCS DSC A WARNING Do not rely on the Traction Control System TCS as a substitute for safe driving The Traction Control System TCS cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless driving excessive speed tailgating following another vehicle too closely and hydroplaning reduced tire friction and road contact because of water on the road surface You can still have an accident Use snow tires or tire chains and drive at reduced speeds when roads are
549. se Control MRCC is displayed Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control MRCC on page 4 117 E CES ES L AS PR 55 mph Distance Recognition Support System DRSS display Type A instrument cluster x Information regarding the Distance Recognition Support System DRSS is displayed When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Refer to Distance Recognition Support System DRSS on page 4 109 iD Q Q gt _a Warning Display Indication Type A instrument cluster A message is displayed to notify the user of the system operation status and malfunctions or abnormalities Check the indicated message Some models 4 19 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Active Driving Display Mirror Combiner Optical receiver A WARNING Adjust the brightness or the display position while paying attention to safe driving Ifyou do not pay attention to your driving while trying to make the adjustments it could lead to an unexpected accident CAUTION gt Do not try to adjust the angle or open close the active driving display manually Fingerprints on the display will make it difficult to view and using excessive force when operating it could cause damage gt Do not place objects in the vicinity of the active driving display The active driving display may not operate or any interference with its operation could cause damage gt Do not place beverages near th
550. se injury gt Power Seat The seat bottom power adjustment is operated by motors Avoid extended operation because excessive use can damage the motors gt To prevent the battery from running down avoid using the power adjustment when the engine is stopped The adjuster uses a large amount of electrical power gt Do not use the switch to make more than one adjustment at a time TE When returning a rear seat to its original position also replace the seat belt to its normal position Verify that the seat belt pulls out and retracts 2 4 Essential Safety Equipment Seats Front Seat V Seat Operation Power operation Seat Slide Manual Seat To move a seat forward or backward raise the lever and slide the seat to the desired position and release the lever Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seat is locked in place by attempting to push it forward and backward Power Seat To slide the seat move the slide lifter switch on the outside of the seat to the front or back and hold it Release the switch at the desired position Height Adjustment Manual Seat To adjust the seat height move the lever up or down Power Seat To adjust the seat height move the switch up or down Front Height Adjustment of Seat Bottom Driver s Power Seat To adjust the front height of the seat bottom raise or lower the front of the slide lifter switch Some models 2 5 Ess
551. self as well those set by default are displayed Delete from your favorites If the current program has already been registered to your favorites the program can be deleted from your favorites 1 Select the X icon 2 The program is automatically deleted from the favorites station 5 123 Interior Features Bluetooth Troubleshooting Mazda Bluetooth Hands Free Customer Service If you have any problems with Bluetooth contact our toll free customer service center e U S A Phone 800 430 0153 Toll free Web www MazdaUSA com bluetooth e Canada Phone 800 430 0153 Toll free Web www mazdahandsfree ca e Mexico Center of Attention to Client CAC Phone 01 800 01 MAZDA Toll free Web www mazdamexico com mx Bluetooth Device pairing connection problems Symptom Cause Solution method Unable to perform pairing First make sure the device is compatible with the Bluetooth unit and then check whether the Bluetooth function and the Find Mode Visible setting on the device are turned on If pairing is still not possible after this contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer or Mazda Bluetooth Hands Free Customer Service Pairing cannot be performed again The pairing information paired to the Bluetooth unit or device is not recognized correctly Perform pairing using the following procedure e Clear Mazda stored in the device e Perform pairing again U
552. senses the amount of rainfall on the windshield and turns the wipers on or off automatically off intermittent low speed high speed The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted by turning the switch on the wiper lever From the center position normal rotate the switch downward for higher sensitivity faster response or rotate it upward for less sensitivity slower response Less sensitivity Switch Center position i Higher sensitivity gt 4 66 A CAUTION gt Do not shade the rain sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield Otherwise the rain sensor will not operate correctly gt When the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON the wipers may move automatically in the following cases gt If the windshield above the rain sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth gt If the windshield is struck with a hand or other object from either outside or inside the vehicle Keep hands and scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when the wipers activate automatically If you are going to clean the windshield be sure the wipers are turned off completely this is particularly important when clearing ice and snow when it is most likely that the engine is left running When Driving Switches and
553. set at any time when the ignition is switched to ACC or ON 1 To adjust the time press the clock button FM AM for about 2 seconds until a beep is heard 2 The clock s current time will flash Time adjustment e To adjust the time press the hour minute set button M4 gt gt I while the clock s current time is flashing e The hours advance while the hour set button M4 is pressed The minutes advance while the minute set button gt gt I is pressed 3 Press the clock button FM AM again to start the clock Time resetting 1 Press the clock button FM AM for about 2 seconds until a beep is heard 2 Press the 00 button 1 5 24 PUSH POWER Menu button 3 When the button is pressed the time will be reset as follows Example 12 01 12 29 12 00 12 30 12 59 1 00 NOTE e When the 00 button 1 is pressed the seconds will start at 00 e Switching between 12 and 24 hour clock time Press the menu button MENU several times until 12 and 24 hour clock time are displayed Turn the audio control dial in either direction select the desired clock setting while the preferred clock time is flashing MEMO Interior Features Audio System Vv Operating the Radio Audio display 700 ETETA A VEIN Channel preset buttons A ENG N TT _ Tuning button Scan button Auto memory button Band selector button Radio ON Press a band selector butt
554. sic related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 to present Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 to present Gracenote One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service See the Gracenote website for a non exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents Gracenote CDDB MusicID MediaVOCS the Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and or other countries pacenote gracenote 5 66 Interior Features Audio System Gracenote End User License Agreement This application or device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this application to perform disc and or file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers or embedded databases collectively Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this application or device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO
555. side and curtain air bags It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window the area of the front passenger seat the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy even if a child restraint system is used The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could cause serious injury or death to an out of position child Furthermore leaning over or against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of supplemental protection With the front air bag and the additional side air bag that comes out of the front seat the rear seat is always a better location for children Take special care not to allow a child to lean over or against the side window even if the child is seated in a child restraint system Front Passenger s Seat Child Restraint System Installation ith automatic locking mode seat belt 1 Make sure the ignition is switched off 2 34 2 Slide the seat as far back as possible 3 Vehicles with height adjustment on front passenger s seat Adjust the seat bottom to the highest position 4 Place the child restraint system on the seat without putting your weight on the seat and fasten the seat belt See the manufacturer s instructions on the child restraint system for belt routing instructions 5 To get the retractor into the automatic locking mode pull the shoulder b
556. side of the rear seat 9 Thread the belt through the rear seat as shown in the figure 7 12 11 Thread the belt through the buckle then pull the belt end to secure the flat tire 12 Return the seat back on the right side of the rear seat to its original position 13 Remove the tire blocks and store the tools and jack 14 Check the inflation pressure Refer to Tires on page 9 7 15 Have the flat tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible NOTE Do not press the tire pressure monitoring system set switch after installing the spare tire The switch is only to be pressed after installing the repaired flat tire or installing a replacement tire page 4 22 AWARNING Do not drive with any tires that have incorrect air pressure Driving on tires with incorrect air pressure is dangerous Tires with incorrect pressure could affect handling and result in an accident When you check the regular tires air pressure check the spare tire too NOTE To prevent the jack and tool from rattling store them properly If Trouble Arises Flat Tire 7 13 If Trouble Arises Battery Runs Out Jump Starting Jump starting is dangerous if done incorrectly So follow the procedure carefully If you feel unsure about jump starting we strongly recommend that you have a competent service technician do the work A WARNING Follow These Precautions Carefully To ensure safe and correct handling of the ba
557. sion collision roll over SRS equipment Front seat belt X both sides X impact side only X both sides pretensioner Driver air x No air bag and front bag seat belt Front r pretensioner will be passenger air x activated in a rear bag collision Side air bag x impact side only a a X impact side only X both sides X The SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System The front passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to deploy when the front passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger s seat 2 With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System In a roll over accident the seat belt pretensioners and the curtain air bags deploy NOTE In a frontal offset collision the equipped air bags and pretensioners may all deploy depending on the direction angle and rate of impact 2 54 Essential Safety Equipment SRS Air Bags Limitations to SRS Air Bag In severe collisions such as those described previously in SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy However in some accidents the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity Limitations to front near front collision detection The following illustrations are examples of front near front collisions that may not be dete
558. sively change without notice Audio Set Type B has three different human interfaces e Commander switch e Touch panel e Voice recognition with steering switch and microphone Commander switch operation NOTE For safety reasons some operations are disabled while the vehicle is being driven Volume dial operation Volume dial PUSH VoL Press the volume dial to switch the audio MUTE on and off Turn the volume dial to adjust the volume The volume increases by turning the dial clockwise and decreases by turning it counterclockwise 5 32 Interior Features Audio System Switches around commander knob The following operations can be done by pressing the switches around the commander knob Displays the home screen Displays the Entertainment screen NAV Displays the Navigation screen Only navigation equipped vehicles For operation of the Navigation screen refer to the navigation system manual If the SD card for the navigation system is not inserted the compass indicating the direction in which the vehicle is moving is displayed Displays the Favorites screen Long press to store particular items in Favorites Radio phonebook and destination of the navigation system can be programmed Returns to previous screen Commander knob operation Selection of icons on screen 1 Tilt or turn the commander knob and move the cursor to the desired icon 2 Press the commander knob and select the icon
559. social stations Like Evaluates the current content as Like Dislike Evaluates the current content as Dislike Reverses for 15 seconds Map vehicles with navigation system Displays the destination searched by the location based services on the navigation system AC Big ae Call A call can be made to the telephone number of a shop searched using the Location Based Services Available when a device is connected as a Hands Free Returns to the previous content Pauses playback of the content When selected again playback resumes Goes to the next content 5 118 Interior Features Bluetooth Icon Function Fast forwards for 30 seconds Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 2 Some stations may use alternate variations of Like and Dislike based on station type or provider Main menu Select the Presets x Comedy icon 2 m 10 20 Todays Picks KROQ Hourly News Twitter Switch the tab and select the station category Tab Function Presets Displays the preset station list set on the device Select the preset station name to play the station content Select the desired station Nearb Guidance is provided to the searched destination near the vehicle s position y You can designate desired categori
560. sole eceeeee 5 133 Overhead Lights cc cece 5 128 Overheating onin aian n 7 18 Overloading sesssseseeseseeseserseesesreseeee 3 47 O Owner Maintenance Closing the Hood e eee 6 25 Engine Compartment OVERVIEW onsen eee Soh 6 26 Key Battery Replacement 6 38 Opening the Hood e 6 24 Owner Maintenance Precautions ccceeeeseeeeeereeeees 6 22 P Parking Brake ssseesssesesseseesesessesee 4 75 Personalization Features 06 9 9 Power Steering oone 4 91 Power Windows ccceseesseeseeteeees 3 33 R Radar Sensor Front ccccsceeees 4 138 Radar Sensors Rear cecee 4 143 Rear Coat Hooks eceeceseeseeees 5 134 Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA 4 112 Rear Door Child Safety Locks 3 19 Rear Seatocre nenn nie 2 10 Rear View Monitor ceceeees 4 153 Rear window Rear Window Defogger 4 68 Rearview Mirror cecceceeseereeees 3 31 Recommended Oil 0 0 eects 6 27 Recording of Vehicle Data 8 22 Recreational Towing cceeee 3 49 Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign COUNTY etea E EEN 8 18 Index R Replacement FUSE irine reiese botnets etietzess 6 56 Key battery sssesesseseeseeeseeseee 6 38 Light Bulbs nsise 6 46 TCS en sti tet esas 6 42 Wheelerin nias 6 43 Wiper of seek e oiis 6 33 Rocking the Vehicle ceeeeee 3 45 S Safety Defe
561. sseseseeeeseeseecseseescseeeeseeeesees page 4 16 4 10 V Speedometer The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle V Odometer Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector The display mode can be changed between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the selector while one of them is displayed The selected mode will be displayed Type A Trip meter A Odometer Press the selector l Trip meter B Odometer Press the selector When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display Type B Tri ter A TRIP rip meter pi Odometer Press the selector l Tri ter B TRIP rip meter B Odometer Press the selector NOTE When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF the odometer or trip meters cannot be displayed however pressing the selector can inadvertently switch the trip meters or reset them during an approximate ten minute period in the following cases e After the ignition is switched to OFF from ON e After the driver s door is opened Odometer The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven Trip meter The trip meter can record the total distance of two trips One is recorded in trip meter A and the other is recorded in trip meter B 4 11 When Driving Instrument Cluster and Display For instance trip meter A can record the distance from the point of origin and trip meter B can record the distance from where the fuel tank is filled When trip meter A is
562. station is now held in the memory 3 Repeat this operation for the other stations and bands you want to store To tune one in the memory select AM FM1 or FM2 and then press its channel preset button The station frequency or the channel number will be displayed Auto memory tuning This is especially useful when driving in an area where the local stations are not known Press and hold the auto memory button AUTO M for about 2 seconds until a beep is heard the system will automatically scan and temporarily store up to 6 stations with the strongest frequencies in each selected band in that area After scanning is completed the station with the strongest frequency will be tuned and its frequency displayed Press and release the auto memory button AUTO M to recall stations from the auto stored stations One stored station will be selected each time and its frequency and channel number will be displayed NOTE If no stations can be tuned after scanning operations A will be displayed Interior Features Audio System 5 27 Interior Features Audio System V Operating the Compact Disc CD Player Repeat button Text button Random button Audio display Play Pause button Track down Reverse button Track up Fast forward button CD eject button Media Scan button CD slot Folder up button Folder down button S O Type Playable
563. ster The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system will not operate under the following circumstances The vehicle speed falls below about 10 km h 6 3 mph even though the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indicator light is turned off The shift lever manual transaxle selector lever automatic transaxle is shifted to reverse R and the vehicle is reversing e In the following cases the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indicator light turns on and operation of the system is stopped If the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indicator light remains illuminated have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible e Some problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights is detected A large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor rear on the vehicle has occurred There is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor rear Remove any snow ice or mud on the rear bumper Driving on snow covered roads for long periods The temperature near the radar sensors rear becomes extremely hot due to driving for long periods on slopes during the summer The battery voltage has decreased The radar sensors may not detect all types of vehicles around your vehicle especially the following types of vehicles Motorcycles e Vehicles with body shapes that radar may not reflect such as a flatbed trailer with no cargo Vehicles with
564. stereo mini plug for connecting the portable audio unit to the auxiliary jack Before using the auxiliary Jack read the manufacturer s instructions for connecting a portable audio unit to the auxiliary jack To prevent discharging of the battery do not use the auxiliary input for long periods with the engine off or idling When connecting a device to the auxiliary jack or USB port noise may occur depending on the connected device If the device is connected to the vehicle s accessory socket the noise can be reduced by unplugging it from the accessory socket 5 53 Interior Features Audio System How to connect USB port Auxiliary jack Type A Auxiliary jack USB port Auxiliary jack i Connecting a device 1 Open the console lid 2 If there is a cover on the AUX jack or USB port remove the cover 3 Connect the connector on the device to the USB port Connecting with a connector cable 1 Open the console lid 2 If there is a cover on the AUX jack or USB port remove the cover 5 54 3 Connect the device plug connector cable to the auxiliary jack USB port Pass the device plug connector cable through the notch in the console and connect A WARNING Do not allow the connection plug cord to get tangled with the shift lever Allowing the plug cord to become tangled with the shift lever is dangerous as it could interfere with driving resulting in an accident ACAUT
565. storms When driving near facilities or objects emitting strong radio waves Under the following conditions the radar sensor front may not be able to detect vehicles ahead or obstructions The beginning and end of a curve Roads with continuous curves Narrow lane roads due to road construction or lane closures The vehicle ahead enters the radar sensor s blind spot The vehicle ahead is running abnormally due to accident or vehicle damage Roads with repeated up and down slopes Driving on poor roads or unpaved roads The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short A vehicle suddenly comes close such as by cutting into the lane To prevent incorrect operation of the system use tires of the same specified size manufacturer brand and tread pattern on all four wheels In addition do not use tires with significantly different wear patterns or tire pressures on the same vehicle Including the temporary spare tire e If the battery power is weak the system may not operate correctly When driving on roads with little traffic and few vehicles ahead or obstructions for the radar sensor front to detect Radar blocked may be temporarily displayed however this does not indicate a problem 4 140 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Laser Sensor Front Your vehicle is equipped with a laser sensor front The laser sensor front is positioned near the rearview mirror and used by the followin
566. straint Child Restraint Precautions Mazda strongly urges the use of child restraint systems for children small enough to use them You are required by law to use a child restraint system for children in the U S and Canada Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children riding in your vehicle Whatever child restraint system you consider please pick the appropriate one for the age and size of the child obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual child restraint system A child who has outgrown child restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts both lap and shoulder If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face move the child closer to the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats and towards the buckle on the right if the child is seated on the center seat Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age and more so with a supplemental restraint system air bags A rear facing child restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air bag system activated The front passenger s seat is also the least preferred seat for other child restraint systems With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag the front passenger occupant classification sensor work as a part of the supplement
567. switch M4 gt gt I pi yi USB Audio Bluetooth Audio CD Press the seek switch gt gt I to skip forward to the beginning of the next track Press the seek switch M4 within a few seconds after playback begins to track down to the beginning of the previous track Press the seek switch M4 after a few seconds have elapsed to start playback from the beginning of the current track Press and hold the seek switch M4 gt gt I to continuously switch the tracks up or down 5 51 Interior Features Audio System Pandora Aha Stitcher Radio Type B Press the seek switch gt gt to skip forward to the beginning of the next track Press and hold the seek switch gt gt I to evaluate the playback of the current song as Like Press and hold the seek switch M4 to evaluate the playback of the current song as Dislike 5 52 AUX USB iPod mode Audio can be heard from the vehicle s speakers by connecting a commercially available portable audio unit to the auxiliary jack A commercially available non impedance 3 5 stereo mini plug cable is required Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details In addition audio can be played from the vehicle audio device by connecting a USB device or an iPod to the USB port NOTE Type B The SD card slot is for the navigation system For vehicles with the navigation system the SD card Mazda genuine with stored map data
568. system may not function correctly when using tire chains Install the chains on the front tires only Do not use chains on the rear tires Please consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Installing the chains 1 Secure the chains on the front tires as tightly as possible Always follow the chain manufacturer s instructions 2 Retighten the chains after driving 1 2 1 km 14 1 2 mile Driving In Flooded Area A WARNING Dry off brakes that have become wet by driving slowly releasing the accelerator pedal and lightly applying the brakes several times until the brake performance returns to normal Driving with wet brakes is dangerous Increased stopping distance or the vehicle pulling to one side when braking could result in a serious accident Light braking will indicate whether the brakes have been affected A CAUTION Do not drive the vehicle on flooded roads as it could cause short circuiting of electrical electronic parts or engine damage or stalling from water absorption If the vehicle has been immersed in water consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Before Driving Driving Tips Overloading A WARNING Be careful not to overload your vehicle The gross axle weight rating GAWR and the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR of your vehicle are on the Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the driver s door frame Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage You can estimate the we
569. t the Bluetooth setting on the device is normal and attempt to reconnect the Bluetooth device from the vehicle side Pairing Procedure 1 Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen Select the Devices tab Select Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth setting on nA A W N Select Add New Device to display the message and switch to the device operation 6 Using your device perform a search for the Bluetooth device Peripheral device 7 Select Mazda from the device list searched by the device 5 86 8 Device with Bluetooth version 2 0 Input the displayed 4 digit pairing code into the device Device with Bluetooth version 2 1 or higher Make sure the displayed 6 digit code on the audio is also displayed on the device and touch the Yes Connection permission and phonebook access permission for your mobile device may be required depending on the mobile device 9 If pairing is successful the functions of the device connected to Bluetooth are displayed 10 Devices compatible with Mazda E mail SMS function SMS Short Message Service messages and E mail for the device are downloaded automatically A download permission operation for your device may be required depending on the device NOTE When Call history and messages are downloaded automatically each automatic download setting must be on Refer to
570. tallation position or remove the Forward Sensing Camera FSC gt Be careful not to scratch the Forward Sensing Camera FSC lens or allow it to get dirty gt Do not remove the Forward Sensing Camera FSC cover gt Do not place objects on the dashboard which reflect light gt Always keep the windshield glass around the camera clean by removing dirt or fogging Use the windshield defroster to remove fogging on the windshield gt Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning the interior side of the windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera FSC gt Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before performing repairs around the Forward Sensing Camera FSC gt The Forward Sensing Camera FSC is installed to the windshield Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for windshield repair and replacement gt When performing repairs around the rearview mirror consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer gt Do not hit or apply strong force to the Forward Sensing Camera FSC or the area around it If strong force is applied stop using the Lane Departure Warning System LDWS the High Beam Control System HBC and Smart Brake Support SBS and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer gt The direction in which the Forward Sensing Camera FSC is pointed has been finely adjusted Do not change the installation position of the Forward Sensing Camera FSC or remove it Otherwise it could result in damage or malfunction 4 136 When Driving i ACTIV
571. tart crank it without depressing the accelerator If the engine still does not start using the above procedure have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer If Trouble Arises Emergency Starting Push Starting Do not push start your Mazda A WARNING Never tow a vehicle to start it Towing a vehicle to start it is dangerous The vehicle being towed could surge forward when its engine starts causing the two vehicles to collide The occupants could be injured A CAUTION Do not push start a vehicle that has a manual transaxle It can damage the emission control system NOTE You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic transaxle by pushing it 7 17 If Trouble Arises Overheating If the High engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates the vehicle loses power or you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise the engine is probably too hot A WARNING er 3 Switch the ignition to off and make sure the fan is not running before attempting to work near the cooling fan Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous The fan could continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine compartment temperature is high You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured w4 iu Y Do not remove either cooling system cap when the engine and radiator are hot When the engine and radiator are hot scalding coolant and steam may shoot out under pressur
572. tart function the push button start indicator light amber flashes In this case the engine may start however have the vehicle checked at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible e Ifthe push button start indicator light green does not illuminate perform the operation from the beginning again If it does not illuminate have the vehicle checked at an Authorized Mazda Dealer To switch the ignition position without starting the engine perform the following operations after the push button start indicator light green turns on 1 Release the brake pedal automatic transaxle or the clutch pedal manual transaxle 2 Press the push button start to switch the ignition position The ignition switches in the order of ACC ON and off each time the push button start is pressed To switch the ignition position again perform the operation from the beginning 4 7 When Driving Start Stop Engine Y Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine If the KEY warning light red illuminates or the push button start indicator light amber flashes this could indicate that the engine may not start using the usual starting method for vehicles with a type A meter messages are displayed in the instrument cluster Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible If this occurs the engine can be force started Press and hold the push button start until the engine starts Other procedures ne
573. tching the display The information displayed on the audio display changes as follows each time the text button 3 is pressed during playback Music CD Information displayed Button on audio display Track number Elapsed time 3 Track number Track name Album name Artist name MP3 WMA AAC CD Information displayed Button on audio display File number Elapsed time Folder number File number 3 File name Folder name Album name Song name Artist name NOTE The information viewable in the display is only CD information such as artist name song title which has been recorded to the CD e This unit cannot display some characters Characters which cannot be displayed are indicated by an asterisk Display scroll Only 13 characters can be displayed at one time To display the rest of the characters of a long title press and hold the text button 3 The display scrolls the next 13 characters Press and hold the text button 3 again after the last 13 characters have been displayed to return to the beginning of the title NOTE The number of characters which can be displayed is restricted Message display If CHECK CD is displayed it means that there is some CD malfunction Check the CD for damage dirt or smudges and then properly reinsert it If the message appears again insert another known good CD If t
574. ted the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light flashes Reverse driving Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system operation The Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system detects vehicles approaching from the left and right of your vehicle and flashes the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights 4 107 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Function for cancelling illumination dimmer When the headlight switch is in the 00 or ZO position the brightness of the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights is dimmed If the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights are difficult to see due to glare from surrounding brightness when traveling on snow covered roads or under foggy conditions press the dimmer cancellation button to cancel the dimmer and increase the brightness of Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights when they turn on Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4 14 Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning beep The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning beep is activated simultaneously with the flashing of a Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning light Y Blind Spot Monitoring BSM Switch When the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch is pressed the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA systems are turned off and the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM OFF indication indicator light in the instrument cluster turns on If the switch is pressed again the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert RC
575. teep hills Driving with your foot continuously on the brake pedal or steadily applying the brakes for long distances is dangerous This causes overheated brakes resulting in longer stopping distances or even total brake failure This could cause loss of vehicle control and a serious accident Avoid continuous application of the brakes Dry off brakes that have become wet by driving slowly releasing the accelerator pedal and lightly applying the brakes several times until the brake performance returns to normal Driving with wet brakes is dangerous Increased stopping distance or the vehicle pulling to one side when braking could result in a serious accident Light braking will indicate whether the brakes have been affected A CAUTION gt Do not drive with your foot held on the clutch pedal or brake pedal or hold the clutch pedal depressed halfway unnecessarily Doing so could result in the following gt The clutch and brake parts will wear out more quickly gt The brakes can overheat and adversely affect brake performance gt Always depress the brake pedal with the right foot Applying the brakes with the unaccustomed left foot could slow your reaction time to an emergency situation resulting in insufficient braking operation DA gt Wear shoes appropriate for driving in order to avoid your shoe contacting the brake pedal when depressing the accelerator pedal x When Driving Brake V Electric
576. tention Operating the theft deterrent system is also possible on theft deterrent system equipped vehicles Press the buttons slowly and carefully System malfunctions or warnings are indicated by the following warning lights or beeps For vehicles with the type A instrument cluster check the displayed message for more information and if necessary have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication e KEY Warning Light Red Refer to Warning Indicator Lights on page 4 22 e Ignition Not Switched Off STOP Warning Beep Refer to Ignition Not Switched Off STOP Warning Beep on page 7 35 e Key Removed from Vehicle Warning Beep Refer to Key Removed from Vehicle Warning Beep on page 7 35 If you have a problem with the key consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer If your key is lost or stolen consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible for a replacement and to make the lost or stolen key inoperative A CAUTION Radio equipment like this is governed by laws Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment NOTE The keyless entry system operation may vary due to local conditions The keyless entry system is fully operational door lock unlock when the push button start is switched off The system does not operate if the push button start is switched to any position other th
577. tep 2 31 Essential Safety Equipment Child Restraint NOTE Inspect this function before each use of the child restraint system You should not be able to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor while the system is in the automatic locking mode When you remove the child restraint system be sure the belt fully retracts to return the system to emergency locking mode before occupants use the seat belts 6 If your child restraint system requires the use of a tether strap refer to the manufacturer s instructions to hook and tighten the tether strap A WARNING Use the tether and tether anchor only for a child restraint system Using the tether or tether anchor to secure anything but a child restraint system is dangerous This could weaken or damage the tether or tether anchor and result in injury 2 32 Always route the tether strap between the head restraint and the seatback Routing the tether strap on top of the head restraint is dangerous In a collision the tether strap could slide off the head restraint and loosen the child restraint system The child restraint system could move which may result in death or injury to the child Tether strap Tether strap ae Anchor bracket as D Always attach the tether strap to the correct tether anchor position Attaching the tether strap to the incorrect tether anchor position is dangerous In a collision the tether strap could come off and loosen
578. terior Features Bluetooth NOTE The display changes as follows depending on whether the audio control dial is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise Clockwise SURE YES displayed Counterclockwise SURE NO displayed 7 Press the audio control dial to delete the selected device NOTE Select GO BACK and press the audio control dial to return to the PAIR DELETE display 8 PAIR DELETED is displayed for three seconds after the deletion is completed and then it returns to the normal display NOTE If an error occurs while trying to delete the paired device Err flashes in the display for three seconds and the display returns to LINK DELETE Bluetooth audio device information display 1 Using the audio control dial select the pair device information display mode DEVICE INFO in the BT SETUP mode Refer to Bluetooth audio device set up for details 2 Press the audio control dial to determine the mode 3 The name of the Bluetooth unit device is displayed 5 80 4 Rotate the audio control dial to select the information for the Bluetooth unit which you would like to view Device name BT address CO BACK NOTE When GO BACK is selected and the audio control dial is pressed the display returns to DEVICE INFO V Available Language Type A The available languages are English Spanish
579. ters whichever comes first Maintenance Interval Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 x1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Cabin air filter R R R Chart symbols I Inspect Inspect and clean repair adjust fill up or replace if necessary R Replace L Lubricate C Clean T Tighten Remarks Use of FL 22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant Using engine coolant other than FL 22 may cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system 2 According to state provincial and federal regulations failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties However Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long term reliability 3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS initialization must be performed so that the system operates normally if equipped 6 19 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Maintenance Monitor V Maintenance Monitor Type A Oil Change with a flexible setting is available Consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer when you want to change the setting Once the system turns on the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when remaining oil life becomes less than 500 km 300 mile or remaining days are less than 15
580. test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Snow Tires In some heavy snow areas local governments may require true snow tires those with very deeply cut tread These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels Make sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other tires on your vehicle SAFETY WARNING The following safety warning appears on the tire s sidewall SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM e EXPLOSION OF TIRE RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING MATCH TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER NEVER EXCEED 40 psi 275 kPa TO SEAT BEADS ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT TIRES TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER INFLATION OVERLOADING DAMAGE FOLLOW OWNER S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE FREQUENTLY CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE 8 28 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A V Information on Temporary Tires Please refer to the sample below 1 Temporary tires Nominal width of tire in millimeters Ratio of height to width aspect ratio Diagonal Rim diameter code Nn nA A W N Load index amp speed symbol T115 70
581. th FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated duly 26 2004 Laser sensor radiation data Maximum average power 45 mW Pulse duration 33 ns Wavelength 905 nm Divergence angle horizontalxvertical 28 degreesx12 degrees NOTE e In the following cases the laser sensor front cannot detect vehicles ahead correctly and each system may be unable to operate normally The windshield is dirty Elongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the laser sensor front e Exhaust gas from the vehicle in front sand snow and water vapor rising from manholes and grating and water splashed into the air e If there are recognizable cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris on the windshield always have the windshield replaced Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for replacement 4 142 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE Radar Sensors Rear Your vehicle is equipped with radar sensors rear The following systems also use the radar sensors rear e Blind Spot Monitoring system BSM e Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA The radar sensors rear function by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor Radar Sensors Rear The radar sensors rear are installed inside the rear bumper one each on the left and right sides Always keep the surface of the re
582. that the KEY indicator light green if equipped in the instrument cluster and the push button start indicator light green illuminate Push button start NOTE Ifthe push button start indicator light green flashes make sure that the key is being carried for vehicles with a type A meter page 4 22 messages are displayed in the instrument cluster If the push button start indicator light green flashes with the key being carried touch the key to the push button start and start the engine for vehicles with a type A meter page 4 22 messages are displayed in the instrument cluster Refer to Engine Start Function When Key Battery is Dead on page 4 6 A CAUTION If the KEY warning light red illuminates or the push button start indicator light amber flashes this could indicate a problem with the engine starting system and the inability to start the engine or switch the ignition to ACC or ON for vehicles with a type A meter page 4 22 messages are displayed in the instrument cluster Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible When Driving Start Stop Engine NOTE e Under the following conditions the KEY warning light red flashes after the push button start is pressed to inform the driver that the push button start will not switch to ACC even if it is pressed from off for vehicles with a type A meter page 4 22 messages are displayed in the instrument
583. the cabin it could be damaged or the battery may deteriorate due to the excessive temperature or humidity inside the cabin if it is left in the vehicle gt If data in the iPod is lost while it is connected to the unit Mazda cannot guarantee recovery of any lost data gt If the iPod battery is deteriorated the iPod may not recharge and playback may not be possible when it is connected to the unit gt For details on using the iPod refer to the iPod instruction manual gt When connecting the iPod to a USB port all commands are made from the audio unit iPod control is not possible NOTE The audio unit cannot display images or videos stored in an iPod Interior Features Audio System Audio Set Type A se ZS Eb 200 H M CLOCK SCAN PUSH POWER Q Power Volume Sound Controls ccccccccscssesseseeseeseeseeseeeeeceseesecseeseeseeseeeeeseneeees page 5 22 OKE E EAE ETET E page 5 24 Operating the Radio ccceccscesssseessescsseseeseeeeseeseeseeeseecseesecsecsecsecsesseesseeeeeseeees page 5 26 Operating the Compact Disc CD Player cccccccccccesseeseseeseeseeseeseeseneeeeseees page 5 28 How to use Auxiliary jack USB port ccccccccccesseseessesceseneeseesseseeseeseeseeeeeeeneens page 5 31 6 Error Indications 2 05 2 c004 aa nettle etiatinsd A wudindni anche a a a oaaae page 5 31 5 21 Interior Features Audio System Y Power Volume Sound Controls Audio displa
584. the child restraint system If the child restraint system moves it could result in death or injury to the child V If You Must Use the Front Seat for Children If you cannot put all children in the rear seat at least put the smallest children in the rear and be sure the largest child up front uses the shoulder belt over the shoulder NEVER put a rear facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat whether your vehicle is equipped with a occupant classification sensor or not This seat is also not set up for tethered child restraint systems put them in one of the rear seat positions set up with tether anchors Likewise the LATCH child restraint system cannot be secured in the front passenger s seat and should be used in the rear seat Do not allow anyone to sleep against the side window since your vehicle has side and curtain air bags it could cause serious injuries to an out of position occupant As children more often sleep in cars it is better to put them in the rear seat If installing the child restraint system on the front seat is unavoidable follow these instructions when using a front facing child restraint system in the front passenger s seat NOTE To check if your front seats have side air bags Mazda vehicles equipped with side air bag will have a SRS AIRBAG tag on the outboard shoulder of the front seats To check if your vehicle has curtain air bags Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain a
585. the moonroofto reduce loud noises from outside the vehicle or turn down the airflow of the air conditioning system while Bluetooth Hands Free is being used e Make sure the vents are not directing air up towards the microphone NOTE If the voice recognition performance is not satisfactory Refer to Voice Recognition Learning Function Speaker Enrollment Type A on page 5 84 Refer to Troubleshooting on page 5 124 V Security Setting Type A If a passcode is set the system cannot be activated unless the passcode is input NOTE Do this function only when parked It is too distracting to attempt while driving and you may make too many errors to be effective Passcode setting 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Setup 3 Prompt Select one of the following Pairing options confirmation prompts language passcode select phone or select music player 4 Say Beep Passcode 5 Prompt Passcode is disabled Would you like to enable it 6 Say Beep Yes 7 Prompt Please say a 4 digit passcode Remember this passcode It will be required to use this system 8 Say Beep XXXX Say a desired 4 digit passcode PCode 9 Prompt Passcode XX XX Passcode PCode Is this correct 10 Say Beep Yes 11 Prompt Passcode is enabled Using Bluetooth Hands Free with a passcode 1 Press the
586. the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance A WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking straight ahead traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering turning hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics V Temperature A B C The temperature grades A the highest B and C represent the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 8 23 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Uniform Tire
587. the rear bumper near a radar sensor rear Driving on snow covered roads for long periods The temperature near the radar sensors becomes extremely hot due to driving for long periods on Slopes during the summer The battery voltage has decreased 4 114 When Driving i ACTIVSENSE e Under the following conditions the radar sensors rear cannot detect target objects or it may be difficult to detect them The vehicle speed when reversing is about 10 km h 6 mph or faster The radar sensor rear detection area is obstructed by a nearby wall or parked vehicle Reverse the vehicle to a position where the radar sensor detection area is no longer obstructed gB Up Saat CID N an A c 5 lt oO a E Q a oO A vehicle is approaching directly from the rear of your vehicle Your vehicle operable e In the following cases it may be Your vehicle Directly after pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM switch and the system becomes difficult to view the illumination flashing of the Blind Spot Monitoring BSM warning lights equipped on the door mirrors Snow or ice adheres to the door mirrors The front door glass is fogged or covered in snow frost or dirt Turn off the Rear Cross Traffic Alert RCTA system while pul
588. the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation Air Conditioning and the Environment Your Mazda s genuine air conditioner is filled with a refrigerant that has been found not to damage the earth s ozone layer If the air conditioner does not operate properly consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer Perchlorate Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules seat belt pretensioners lithium batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Please be aware that this manual applies to all models equipment and options As a result you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle 2014 Mazda Motor Corporation Nov 2014 Print1 How to Use This Manual We want to help you get the most driving pleasure from your vehicle Your owner s manual when read from cover to cover can do that in many ways Illustrations complement the words of the manual to best explain how to enjoy your Mazda By reading your manual you can find out about the features important safety information and driving under various road conditions The symbol below in this manual means Do not do this or Do not let this happen Index A good place to start is the Index an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual You l
589. the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition switched ON If the driver or front passenger s seat belt is unfastened only when the front passenger s seat is occupied and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 20 km h 12 mph the warning light flashes After a short time the warning light stops flashing but remains illuminated NOTE The warning light flashes for about 6 seconds if the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON To allow the front passenger occupant classification sensor to function properly do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the front passenger s seat The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference e Ifa small child is seated on the front passenger s seat the warning light may not operate Mexico The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver or front passenger s seat is occupied and the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition switched ON If the driver or front passenger s seat belt is unfastened only when the front passenger s seat is occupied and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 20 km h 12 mph the warning light flashes After a short time the warning light stops flashing but remains illuminated If a seat belt remains unfastened the warning light flashes again for a given period of time NOTE e Placing heavy items on the front passenger s s
590. this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via the Internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com e This audio system handles MP3 files that have been recorded on CD R CD RW CD ROMs e When naming an MP3 file be sure to add an MP3 file extension mp3 after the file name e The number of characters which can be displayed is restricted 5 18 Specialized glossa MP3 Abbreviation for MPEG Audio Layer 3 A technical standard for audio compression as decided by the ISO MPEG working group Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be compressed to approximately a tenth of the source data size International Organization for Standardization Y Operating Tips for WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and is the audio compression format used by Microsoft Audio data can be created and stored at a higher compression ratio than MP3 This unit plays files with the extension wma as WMA files Microsoft and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation U S
591. tinue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine compartment temperature is high You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured xg mi Y Do not remove either cooling system cap when the engine and radiator are hot When the engine and radiator are hot scalding coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause serious injury NOTE Changing the coolant should be done by an Authorized Mazda Dealer Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance Inspect the antifreeze protection and coolant level in the coolant reservoir at least once a year at the beginning of the winter season and before traveling where temperatures may drop below freezing Inspect the condition and connections of all cooling system and heater hoses Replace any that are swollen or deteriorated The coolant should be at full in the radiator and between the F and L marks on the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool If it is at or near L add enough coolant to the coolant reservoir to provide freezing and corrosion protection and to bring the level to F Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tank cap after adding coolant A CAUTION gt Radiator coolant will damage paint Rinse it off quickly if spilled 6 29 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance gt Use only soft demineralized If the coolant reservoir is empty or new water in the coolant mixture coolant is required frequently consult an
592. tions Programming 1 Switch the ignition OFF 2 Adjust the seat to the desired position using the slide lifter and reclining switches Refer to Seat Operation on page 2 5 3 Press and hold the memory SET button until a beep sound is heard 4 Perform one of the following settings within 5 seconds of completing step 3 above e To program memory button or 2 press and hold the button until a beep sound is heard e To program a key press and hold the key switch until a beep sound is heard Adjusting a programmed position Programming to a button on the seat side 1 While the vehicle is stopped press the programming button for the seat position you want to call up button 1 or 2 2 A beep sound is heard when the seat position adjustment is completed Essential Safety Equipment Seats NOTE e Ifseat movement is not required only the beep sounds When the ignition is switched ON the seat position memory function does not operate unless the selector lever is in the P position Automatic transaxle or the parking brake is applied Manual transaxle When the ignition is switched OFF the seat position memory function is operable while the selector lever is in a position other than P position Automatic transaxle or the parking brake is not applied Manual transaxle however if the ignition is switched ON while the seat position memory function is operating the operation is stopped
593. tions broadcasting Rock are at the following frequencies 98 3 98 7 104 3 107 1 Radio stations with good reception The frequency changes as follows each time Genre Seek is pressed 89 3 98 3 104 3 98 3 NOTE Only one Genre can be selected TIt may not be possible to receive any station even if the Genre Seek function is used Ifa program in the selected genre is not broadcast to a region reception is not possible even if the Genre Seek function is used The Genre Seek function searches for genre code program type which FM analog broadcasts transmit HD Radio specialty programs HD2 HD8 cannot be searched because they are not FM analog broadcasts Ifradio stations which are selected by scanning using the Genre Seek function are HD Radio broadcasting stations they are changed from analog broadcasts to HD Radio broadcasts after a few seconds if the reception conditions are good The genre is displayed after the switch however the genre for FM analog broadcasts may differ Interior Features Audio System HD Radio What is HD Radio Technology and how does it work HD Radio Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts where available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as d
594. tire pressure initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is necessary to make the system operate normally Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4 151 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance NOTE Always check tire pressure when tires are cold Warm tires normally exceed recommended pressures Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure e Underinflation can cause reduced fuel economy uneven and accelerated tire wear and poor sealing of the tire bead which will deform the wheel and cause separation of tire from rim Overinflation can produce a harsh ride uneven and accelerated tire wear and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards Keep your tire pressure at the correct levels If one frequently needs inflating have it inspected Tire Rotation A WARNING Rotate tires periodically Irregular tire wear is dangerous To equalize tread wear for maintaining good performance in handling and braking rotate the tires according to the scheduled maintenance charts Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 6 41 Maintenance and Care Owner Maintenance During rotation inspect them for correct balance Z C 5 OF Do not include TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire in rotation Also inspect them for uneven wear and damage Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a combination of the following e Incorrect tire pressure e
595. to fast forward Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level Refer to Volume Display Sound Controls on page 5 36 NOTE To move to the desired location on the track move the slider indicating the playback time The appearance of the repeat and shuffle icons changes depending on the type of operation in which the function is used 5 64 Category list Interior Features Audio System Select the icon and display the following category list Select a desired category and item Category Function Playlist Displays playlists on the device Arist Displays the artist name list gt All the tracks or tracks for each album of the selected artist can be played Album Displays the album name list Song All the tracks in the device are displayed Genre Displays the genre list All the tracks or tracks per album or artist in the selected genre can be played Displays the audiobook list Audiobook Chapters can be selected and played Displays the podcast list Podcast Episode can be selected and played Special service for some Apple devices Folder Displays the folder file list Example of use to play all tracks in 3 Select LAII Songs USB device All the tracks in the USB device are displayed Method 1 pay 1 Select to display the category list 2 Select Song 4 Select a desired track The selected track is played All the
596. to four digits For example the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002 The other numbers are marketing codes used at the manufacturer s discretion This information is used to contact consumers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire In general the greater the number of plies the more weight a tire can support Tire manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials which include steel nylon polyester and other Maximum Load Rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions 8 27 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Tire Information U S A Tread Wear Traction and Temperature Grades Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government
597. tomatic transaxle The selector lever is in the P or N position Manual transaxle The shift lever is in the neutral position The parking brake is applied e Release the SET or SET switch at the desired speed otherwise the speed will continue increasing while the SET switch is pressed and held and continue decreasing while the SET switch is pressed and held except when the accelerator pedal is depressed e Ona steep grade the vehicle may momentarily slow down while ascending or speed up while descending e Cruise control will cancel if the vehicle speed decreases below 21 km h 13 mph when cruise is activated such as when climbing a steep grade e Cruise control may cancel at about 15 km h 9 mph below the preset speed such as may happen when climbing a long steep grade For the Type A instrument cluster the vehicle speed preset using the cruise control is displayed in the instrument cluster E mph YW To Increase Cruising Speed Follow either of these procedures To increase speed using cruise control switch Press the SET switch and hold it Your vehicle will accelerate Release the switch at the speed you want Press the SET and release it immediately to adjust the preset speed Multiple operations will increase the preset speed according to the number of times it is operated Increasing speed with a single SET operation Meter display for vehicle speed indicated in km h 1 km h 0
598. tooth Vv Audio Operation Using Voice Recognition Type B Main audio operation The below commands are examples of the available commands When the talk button is pressed and the following command is spoken out the audio can be operated The commands in the can be omitted The specified name and number are put into the Voice command Function Corresponding audio source Go to Play AM Radio Switches the audio source to AM radio All Go to Play FM Radio Switches the audio source to FM radio All Go to Play Bluetooth Audio Switches the audio source to Bluetooth audio All Go to Play Pandora Switches the audio source to Pandora All Go to Play Aha Radio Switches the audio source to Aha All Go to Play Stitcher Switches the audio source to Stitcher Radio All Go to Play USB 1 Switches the audio source to USB 1 All Go to Play USB 2 Switches the audio source to USB 2 All Play Playlist Playlist name Plays the selected playlist USB Play Artist Artist name Plays the selected artist USB Play Album Album name Plays the selected album USB Play Genre Genre name Plays the selected genre USB Play Folder Folder name Plays the selected folder USB NOTE e Some commands cannot be used depending on devices and use conditions e Ifthe Bluetooth device USB or AUX is not connected the related commands cannot be used 5 90
599. tracks in the USB device can be played All the tracks in the USB device are by continuing playback displayed 1 Can be operated using an Android 3 Select a desired track device or USB flash memory The selected track is played All the NOTE tracks in the USB device can be played by continuing playback NOTE Only the tracks in the desired category selected in Step 2 are played Method 2 1 Select to display the category list 2 Select Folder All the folders in the USB device are displayed Only the tracks in the desired folder selected in Step 3 are played 5 65 Interior Features Audio System VY Gracenote Database Type B When a USB device is connected to this unit and the audio is played the album name artist name genre and title information are automatically displayed if there is a match in the vehicle s database compilation to the music being played The information stored in this device uses database information in the Gracenote music recognition service A CAUTION For information related to the most recent Gracenote database which can be used and how to install it go to the Mazda Hands Free Website http www mazdahandsfree com Introduction Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com CD and mu
600. trod ileti on eea ai aeii r tei E E AE teen 6 2 Scheduled Maintenance ssssssscssssssssccccssssssccsesssssscceessssssoees 6 4 Scheduled Maintenance U S A Canada and Puerto Rico 6 4 Scheduled Maintenance Mexico ccccscccssscesecesscesseeeseessees 6 13 Maintenance Monitor ccccccccccsscessccssecesscesecseseeeseeeseeeeseenees 6 20 Engine Compartment Overview Engine Oil yer ended atte eeneeaneh N see AT Es AEE Engine Coolant isin ais cctes ene aii aia aeiia a Brake lutch Fluids eegee e idi eias Soaseast sede p EEEE Washer Fluid nnani aiia Body Lubrication insisi ienie rit is Wiper Blades eano E A E NER Battery eaaa e aaea a a E R a a EEE Key Battery Replacement s sseseeesesereeseesrersreesrrsisrsrsreeseses a EE EE E N its Light Bulbs a ea aa E e tee BUSES ste e matin eter ete i E cae Appearance Care ccccsccssscercssscssessscsssssscssssssesssssesssssesees 6 62 Exterior Care sre a a ee E es 6 62 Interior Care nenene ra a e e a a 6 67 6 1 Maintenance and Care Essential Information Introduction Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance If you are unsure about any procedure it describes we strongly urge you to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer Factory trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best
601. trument Cluster and Display Ignition is on is displayed This message is displayed when the driver s door is opened without switching the ignition off Key not detected is displayed This message is displayed when any of the following operations is performed with the key out of the operational range or placed in areas inside the cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected e The push button start is pressed with the ignition switched off The ignition is switched on e The driver s door is opened or all doors are closed without switching the ignition off Key battery is weak Hold key close to start button is displayed This message is displayed when any of the following operations is performed with the key out of the operational range or placed in areas inside the cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected e The push button start is pressed with the ignition switched off Brake pedal Automatic transaxle vehicle Clutch pedal Manual transaxle vehicle is depressed with the ignition switched off Key battery is low Replace soon is displayed This message is displayed when the remaining battery power of the key is low and the ignition is switched from on to off 4 40 NOTE Because the key utilizes low intensity radio waves the Key Removed From Vehicle Warning may activate if the key is carried together with a metal object or it is placed in a poor signal receptio
602. ttery read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting it Do not allow the positive terminal to contact any other metal object that could cause sparks Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous Hydrogen gas produced during normal battery operation could ignite and cause the battery to explode An exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries When working near a battery do not allow metal tools to contact the positive or negative terminal of the battery Keep all flames including cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous Hydrogen gas produced during normal battery operation could ignite and cause the battery to explode An exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries Do not jump start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level Jump starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous It may rupture or explode causing serious injury Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery is dangerous A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts cooling fans belts is dangerous The cable could get
603. u NOT take your Mazda outside the United States Canada United States However in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards CMVSS Canada However in the event that you are moving to the United States permanently Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS NOTE The above is applicable for a permanent import export situation and not related to travelers on vacation You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United States Canada e Recommended fuel may be unavailable Any kind of leaded fuel or low octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine e Proper repair facilities tools testing equipment and replacement parts may not be available Please refer to your Manufacturer s Warranty Booklet for more information 8 17 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Warranty Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country Except United States and Canada Registering your vehicle in a foreign country may be problematic depending on whether it meets the specific emission and safety
604. u will have to provide your name and address the brand name and vehicle identification number VIN of your vehicle and a statement of the nature of your problem or complaint You will also be asked to provide the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle the vehicle s current mileage the approximate date and mileage at the time any problem s were first brought to the attention of Mazda or one of our dealers and a statement of the relief you are seeking 5 BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation If mediation is not successful or if you do not wish to participate in mediation claims within the program s jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informal hearing The arbitrator s decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from the time your complaint is filed there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not first contact Mazda about your problem or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests an inspection report by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report by BBB AUTO LINE 8 4 6 o0 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C
605. uld result in deviation of the guide lines which appear on the display e If the vehicle s front side or rear has been involved in a collision the alignment of the rear view parking camera location installation angle may have deviated Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected e If No Video Signal Available is indicated in the display there could be a problem with the camera Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer Rear View Parking Camera Location Rear View Parking Camera Z ae ae AG e Y Switching to the Rear View Monitor Display Shift the shift lever to R with the ignition switched ON to switch the display to the rear view monitor display NOTE When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position the screen returns to the previous display 4 154 When Driving Rear View Monitor Y Displayable Range on the Screen The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions Screen display La Garnish Actual view NOTE The displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions e The displayable range is limited Objects under the bumper or around the bumper ends cannot be displayed The distance appearing in the displayed image is different from the actual distance because the rear view parking camera is equipped with a specific lens e Some opti
606. ully add coolant as required page 6 29 A CAUTION If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats have the cooling system inspected The engine could be seriously damaged unless repairs are made Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer If Trouble Arises Overheating 7 19 If Trouble Arises Emergency Towing Towing Description We recommend that towing be done only by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a commercial tow truck service Proper lifting and towing are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Government and local laws must be followed A towed vehicle usually should have its drive wheels front wheels off the ground If excessive damage or other conditions prevent this use wheel dollies When towing with the rear wheels on the ground release the parking brake 7 20 A CAUTION gt Do not tow the vehicle pointed backward with driving wheels on the ground This may cause internal damage to the transaxle gt Do not tow with sling type equipment This could damage your vehicle Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment Tiedown Hooks A CAUTION Do not use the front and rear tiedown eyelets for towing the vehicle They have been designed only for securing the vehicle to a transport vessel during shipping Using the eyelets for any other purpose could result in the vehicle being damaged VY Tiedown Hooks
607. umper at the center point of each of the lines A CAUTION The guide lines on the screen are fixed lines They are not synced to the driver s turning of the steering wheel Always be careful and check the area to the vehicle s rear and the surrounding area directly with your eyes while backing up V Rear View Monitor Operation The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending on the traffic road and vehicle conditions The amount of steering and the timing also varies depending on conditions so confirm the surrounding conditions directly with your eyes and steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor NOTE Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images mirror images 1 Shift the shift lever to R to switch the display to the rear view monitor display 4 156 When Driving Rear View Monitor 2 Confirming the surrounding conditions reverse the vehicle Display condition Vehicle condition E ae 3 After your vehicle begins entering the parking space continue backing up slowly so that the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the left and right are roughly equal 4 Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to the left and right sides of the parking space 4 157 When Drivi
608. unction e Press a request switch on the doors e Press the electric trunk lid opener while the key is being carried The hazard warning lights will flash twice YW Theft Deterrent Labels A label indicating that your vehicle is equipped with a Theft Deterrent System is in the glove compartment Mazda recommends that you affix it to the lower rear corner of a front door window Break In Period No special break in is necessary but a few precautions in the first 1 000 km 600 miles may add to the performance economy and life of your Mazda e Do not race the engine Do not maintain one constant speed either slow or fast for a long period of time e Do not drive constantly at full throttle or high engine rpm for extended periods of time Avoid unnecessary hard stops Avoid full throttle starts e e Before Driving Driving Tips Saving Fuel and Protection of the Environment How you operate your Mazda determines how far it will travel on a tank of fuel Use these suggestions to help save fuel and reduce CO2 e Avoid long warm ups Once the engine runs smoothly begin driving Avoid fast starts Drive at lower speeds Anticipate when to apply the brakes avoid sudden braking Follow the maintenance schedule page 6 4 and have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform inspections and servicing e Use the air conditioner only when necessary Slow down on rough roads Keep the tires pr
609. und will be heard for about 6 seconds If the driver or the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 20 km h 12 mph a beep sound will be heard again for a specified period of time Until a seat belt is fastened or a given period of time has elapsed the beep sound will not stop even if the vehicle speed falls below 20 km h 12 mph NOTE To allow the front passenger occupant classification sensor to function properly do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the front passenger s seat The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference Ifa small child is seated on the front passenger s seat the warning beep may not operate Mexico If the vehicle speed exceeds about 20 km h 12 mph with the driver or front passenger s seat belt unfastened a warning beep sounds continuously If the seat belt remains unfastened the beep sound stops once and then continues for about 90 seconds The beep stops after the driver or front passenger s seat belt is fastened Until a seat belt is fastened or a given period of time has elapsed the beep sound will not stop even if the vehicle speed falls below 20 km h 12 mph If Trouble Arises Warning Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds NOTE Placing heavy items on the front passenger s seat may cause the front passenger s seat belt warning function to operate dep
610. urns to the normal display Interior Features Bluetooth NOTE Some Bluetooth audio devices need a certain amount of time before the symbol is displayed If the pairing failed Err flashes for three seconds Pairing cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving If you attempt to perform pairing while the vehicle is moving PAIR DISABLE is displayed If seven Bluetooth audio devices have already been paired to the vehicle pairing cannot be performed and MEMORY FULL is displayed Delete one paired device to pair another one Pairing a Bluetooth audio device which does not have a four digit PIN code 1 Using the audio control dial select the pairing mode PAIR DEVICE in the BT SETUP mode Refer to Bluetooth audio set up for details 2 Press the audio control dial to determine the mode After ENTER PIN is displayed on the audio display for three seconds PIN 0000 is displayed and the PIN code can be input 3 Press the audio control dial while PIN 0000 is displayed PAIRING flashes on the audio display 4 Operate the Bluetooth audio device and set it to the pairing mode while PAIRING is flashing 5 As the Bluetooth audio device requires a PIN code input 0000 5 77 Interior Features Bluetooth 6 When the pairing is completed J and PAIR SUCCESS are displayed after about 10 30 seconds after which
611. ver is returned and the system detects the white or yellow lines e If the steering wheel accelerator pedal or brake pedal is operated abruptly and the vehicle moves close to a white or yellow line the system determines that the driver is making a lane change and the LDWS warning is automatically canceled The LDWS may not operate during the period immediately after the vehicle has deviated from its lane and the LDWS has operated or the vehicle deviates from its lane repeatedly within a short period of time The LDWS does not operate if it does not detect the white or yellow lines of the traffic lane e Under the following conditions the LDWS may not be able to detect white or yellow lines correctly and the LDWS may not operate correctly Ifan object placed on the dashboard is reflected in the windshield and picked up by the camera e Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the vehicle is inclined The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure When the vehicle is driven on the entry and exit to or from the rest area or tollgate of a highway The white or yellow lines are less visible because of dirt or paint flaking The vehicle ahead is running near a white or yellow line and the line is less visible e A white or yellow line is less visible because of bad weather rain fog or snow A misleading line is picked up on the road such as a temporary line for construction
612. ving Information concerning safe driving and stopping Start Stop Engine Ignition Switch Starting the Engine ee eeeeeeeeee 4 3 Turning the Engine Off 4 8 Instrument Cluster and Display 4 10 Meters and Gauges Active Driving Display ean Warning Indicator Lights 4 22 Transaxle scsccsccscssssrssrsscsssssessessessess Manual Transaxle Operation Automatic Transaxle Controls 4 49 Switches and Controls sscscscssees 4 58 Lighting Control eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 58 Fog Lights stssssetssdascapfeetsetescistivvess 4 63 Turn and Lane Change Signals 4 63 Windshield Wipers and Washer 4 64 Rear Window Defogger 00 4 68 OLD S EEA TA 4 69 Hazard Warning Flasher 4 70 HomeLink Wireless Control Syse anioon iia 4 70 Brake ccsssssssssssssssscssessessesscssessessessess 4 74 Brake System ccceceseseseseeneereeees 4 74 Hill Launch Assist HLA 0 4 78 ABS TCS DSC iniciis 4 80 Antilock Brake System ABS 4 80 Traction Control System TCS 4 81 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 4 82 Fuel Economy Monitor scseseeee Fuel Economy Monitor Drive Selection ssssccssssssscssssseeseeee Drive Selection Power Steering scccssccssssssssessesvess Power Steering eecesseeeeeeeeeeees i ACTIVSENSE i ACTIVSENSE
613. voice recognition mode To prevent a deterioration in the voice recognition rate and voice quality the following points should be observed e The voice recognition cannot be performed while voice guidance or the beep sound is operating Wait until the voice guidance or the beep sound is finished before saying your commands Phone related commands are available only when your phone is connected via Bluetooth Make sure your phone is connected via Bluetooth before you operate phone related voice commands Music play commands such as Play Artist and Play Album can be used only in USB audio mode Do not speak too slowly or loudly no loud voice e Speak clearly without pausing between words or numbers e Dialects or different wording other than Hands Free prompts cannot be recognized by voice recognition Speak in the wording specified by the voice commands e It is not necessary to face the microphone or approach it Speak the voice commands while maintaining a safe driving position e Close the windows and or the moonroof to reduce loud noises from outside the vehicle or turn down the airflow of the air conditioning system while Bluetooth Hands Free is being used e Make sure the vents are not directing air up towards the microphone NOTE If the voice recognition performance is not satisfactory Refer to Troubleshooting on page 5 124 Interior Features Bluetooth 5 89 Interior Features Blue
614. wing 1 Press the pick up button or talk button with a short press 2 Say Beep Tutorial 3 Follow the prompts to receive the appropriate voice guidance instructions Commands useable anytime during Voice recognition Help or Go Back are commands which can be used at anytime during voice recognition Help function use The help function informs the user of all the available voice commands under the current conditions 1 Say Beep Help 2 Follow the prompts to receive the appropriate voice guidance instructions Returning to previous operation This command is for returning to the previous operation while in the voice recognition mode Say Beep Go Back To prevent a deterioration in the voice recognition rate and voice quality the following points should be observed e The voice recognition cannot be performed while voice guidance or the beep sound is operating Wait until the voice guidance or the beep sound is finished before saying your commands 5 82 e Dialects or different wording other than Hands Free prompts cannot be recognized by voice recognition Speak in the wording specified by the voice commands e It is not necessary to face the microphone or approach it Speak the voice commands while maintaining a safe driving position e Do not speak too slow or too loud e Speak clearly without pausing between words or numbers e Close the windows and or
615. witch while the vehicle is being driven with the selector lever in the D range While in direct mode the D and M indicator lights illuminate and the gear position in use is illuminated Direct mode is canceled released under the following conditions e The UP switch OFF is pulled rearward for a certain amount of time or longer e The vehicle is driven for a certain amount of time or longer time differs depending on the driving conditions while operating 4 56 e The vehicle is stopped or moving at a slow speed zU Gear position indicator A hs Direct mode indicator NOTE Shifting up and down while in direct mode may not be possible depending on the vehicle speed In addition because direct mode is canceled released depending on the rate of acceleration or if the accelerator is fully depressed use of the manual shift mode is recommended if you need to drive the vehicle in a particular gear for long periods Driving Tips A WARNING Do not allow the vehicle to move in reverse on an up slope while the selector lever is in a forward gear position or move forward on a down slope while the selector lever is in the reverse position Otherwise the engine will stop causing the loss of the power brake and power steering functions and make it difficult to control the vehicle which could result in an accident Passing For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing steep grade
616. y Menu button Power Volume Audio control dial Power ON OFF Switch the ignition to ACC or ON Press the power volume dial to turn the audio system on Press the power volume dial again to turn the audio system off Volume adjustment To adjust the volume turn the power volume dial Turn the power volume dial clockwise to increase volume counterclockwise to decrease it Audio sound adjustment 1 Press the menu button MENU to select the function The selected function will be indicated 5 22 2 Turn the audio control dial to adjust the selected functions as follows Setting value Indication Turn Turn Counterclock a Clockwise wise ALC Automate Level decrease Level increase volume adjustment BASS Low pitch sound Decrease bass Increase bass TREB Treble sound Decrease treble Increase treble Bran Shift the sound Shift the sound to the front to the rear volume balance Le PE EN Shift the sound Shift the sound 8 to the left to the right balance BEEP Audio operation Off On sound BT SETUP Select mode eo 12Hr 24Hr 12 Hr 24 Hr time Flashing Flashing adjustment 8 8 NOTE If not operated for several seconds the display returns to the previous display To reset bass treble fade and balance press the menu button MENU for 2 seconds The unit will beep and CLEAR will be displ
617. y gt Do not use your temporary spare tire on any other vehicle it has been designed only for your Mazda gt Use only one temporary spare tire on your vehicle at the same time To remove the spare tire 1 Lift the trunk mat Trunk mat 7 5 If Trouble Arises Flat Tire 2 Turn the spare tire hold down bolt counterclockwise Spare tire hold down bolt To secure the spare tire Store the spare tire in the reverse order of removal After storing verify that the spare tire is stored securely Changing a Flat Tire NOTE If the following occurs while driving it could indicate a flat tire e Steering becomes difficult e The vehicle begins to vibrate excessively The vehicle pulls in one direction If you have a flat tire drive slowly to a level spot that is well off the road and out of the way of traffic to change the tire Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a busy road is dangerous A WARNING Be sure to follow the directions for changing a tire Changing a tire is dangerous if not done properly The vehicle can slip off the jack and seriously injure someone No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack Never allow anyone inside a vehicle supported by a jack Allowing someone to remain in a vehicle supported by a jack is dangerous The occupant could cause the vehicle to fall resulting in serious injury NOTE Make sure th
618. y Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes 1 l appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2 l utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible d en compromettre le fonctionnement 8 53 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects Service Publications Service Publications Factory authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer refer to the chart below If they do not have what you need in stock they can order it for you PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION 9999 95 063B 16 2016 WORKSHOP MANUAL English 9999 MX 063B 16 2016 WORKSHOP MANUAL Spanish 9999 95 039G 16 2016 WIRING DIAGRAM English 9999 MX 039G 16 2016 WIRING DIAGRAM Spanish 9999 95 078C 16 2016 OWNER S MANUAL English 9999 EC 078C 16 2016 OWNER S MANUAL French 9999 PR 078C 16 2016 OWNER S MANUAL Spanish
619. ystem 2 According to state provincial and federal regulations failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties However Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or mileage kilometer period to ensure long term reliability 3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS initialization must be performed so that the system operates normally if equipped 6 8 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Y Schedule 2 U S A severe driving conditions and Puerto Rico residents Number of months or kilometers miles whichever comes first Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 x1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 x1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Maintenance Interval SKYACTIV G 2 5 Drive belts I Replace when wrench indicator light is ON Max interval 12 months 16 000 km 10 000 miles R R R RI RIR Engine oil amp filter COOLING SYSTEM Replace at first 192 000 km 120 000 miles or 10 years after 2 Engine coolant that every 96 000 km 60 000 miles or 5 years Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I FUEL SYSTEM U S A severe driving R Air filter conditions Puerto Rico R R Fu

Mazda MAZDA6 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents